JP2024095753A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
[Solution] After the identification pattern is dynamically displayed, when an identification pattern for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed, a benefit of the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means is granted by the benefit granting means. A dynamic display period including at least the period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and during the determined dynamic display period, a first identification pattern is displayed as an identification pattern for indicating a first result during a first period, and during a second period, at least a second identification pattern for indicating a second result different from the first result and different from the first identification pattern is displayed. This makes it possible to notify a player of multiple results during the dynamic display period, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
[Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a variable presentation in which multiple identification information is displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result has been won, depending on the content of the variable presentation that is executed.

Patent No. 2514417

However, there is a need to further increase interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 has discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, display means for displaying a discrimination pattern showing a discrimination result of the discrimination means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the discrimination pattern, benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern showing a specific discrimination result is displayed after the discrimination pattern has been dynamically displayed, and benefit type determination means for determining a benefit type to be granted by the benefit granting means, wherein dynamic display period determination means is capable of determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a first discrimination pattern is displayed as the discrimination pattern showing a first result in a first period, and a second discrimination pattern different from the first result is displayed in a second period.
and a setting means for indicating the result of the above-mentioned, which can be set so that at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed.

The gaming machine of claim 2 is the gaming machine of claim 1, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification pattern in a stopped state at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.

The gaming machine of claim 3 is the gaming machine of claim 2, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

The gaming machine of claim 4 is the gaming machine of claim 3, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result.

In a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the fourth aspect of the present invention, the bonus type determination means is
The bonus type is determined from among a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information for indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination pattern on the display means, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern showing a specific discrimination result is displayed after the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be granted by the bonus granting means, and has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a setting means for setting the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means so that a first discrimination pattern is displayed as the discrimination pattern showing a first result in a first period, and a second discrimination pattern different from the first discrimination pattern is displayed in a second period to show a second result different from the first result.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved: the dynamic display means is capable of statically displaying the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is at least a period after the first period has elapsed.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effect is achieved: That is, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern for indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the following effect is achieved: the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the second result, the second identification symbol for indicating the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of claim 5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of claim 4. That is, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification symbol is displayed in a display manner including at least information indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of a variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. 1 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member and the lower member. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. 13A and 13B are side views of the slide displacement member and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. A front oblique view of the first decorative rotating member and the second decorative rotating member. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 1 is a schematic front view showing the guide slot, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 13 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 1A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 4A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15 . 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the probability change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of a sorting device according to a fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device according to the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a sorting device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device provided in the front-view area of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in a first control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a reach is achieved during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the execution of a normal pattern fluctuation during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted during a special variation performance executed while the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device has been acquired in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example has not been acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state indication effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and a normal state is set, during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period); (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period) in the first control example, the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device, the normal state is set internally, and a (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a first special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a second special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a big win game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the content of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 1 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of a normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for special bonuses and time reductions set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special bonus performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the continuous warning execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the probability change state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are figures showing an example of a display presentation executed when the display of the main pattern image layer is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer is set to on in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the sub-pattern pre-stored in the character memory area in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main variable pattern in the second control example. A timing chart showing a schematic flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern, sub-pattern) in the second control example. (a) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the change pattern used in the performance example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the normal performance in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the reach line preview performance in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the preview performance in which the direction of change of the sub-pattern in the second control example is different from normal. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in a modified example of the second control example and the display screen, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure near a specific winning port of the variable winning device of the gaming board of a pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the specific winning port in the third control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that enters a specific winning port in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V round process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the update process during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A figure showing an example of a display presentation in the second control example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG.
1, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine").
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 1, the top side will be referred to as the top (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the bottom (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Fig. 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell of which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side on which the opening and closing is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the display (see page 13) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
(See reference) At the upper left, there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29 to 33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of 0, there is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails for guiding balls (illustrated below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, a general winning hole 63, a first
It is constructed by assembling together the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see from the front side thereof various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be made of a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to conceal various structures disposed on the outside of the center frame 86 from the front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through a window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The structure of the game board 13 will be described below with reference mainly to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning slots and the like are located,
The area into which the launched ball flows.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the top of the outer rail 62 (upper left of FIG. 2 ) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 2 ) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 2), first symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display are disposed. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information whether a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 65.
The system is configured to be used in a different way depending on whether a prize is won at the prize slot 140.
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball enters the second winning port 140, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R variable jackpot, a 4R variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopped symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won.

Here, a "15R variable probability jackpot" refers to a variable probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R variable probability jackpot" refers to a variable probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 variations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a gaming state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below increases, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning slot 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when there is no probability fluctuation, and the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is,
This refers to a state in which the probability of winning is lower than during the probability change.
During time reduction) is when the jackpot probability is in the normal state and the jackpot probability remains the same as the second
This refers to a game state in which only the probability of winning the symbol is increased, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal game state in which the game is not in a special mode or a time-saving mode (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of the second symbol is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuation times. Note that if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuation times.
The time-saving state will be activated during the number of fluctuations.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 14
The time for which the electric role 140a (electric role) associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric role 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than when the electric role 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric role 140a opens per win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning port 140
At least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 140a is opened per one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or the time reduction, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 140a is opened per one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be higher than during the normal period.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) made up of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is disposed through an opening 51 of a rear case 510 described later.
1a, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window of the base plate 60. That is, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third pattern display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle and bottom. Each pattern row is made up of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment displays the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) in the first order.
The first pattern display device 37A, 37B is used for the first pattern display device 37A, 37B.
The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 140a attached to the second winning hole 140.
is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the electric device 140a of the second winning port 140. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 140.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 140a for one win during the probability variation or time reduction, the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time reduction than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 140a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first winning hole 140.
Shown by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a is in an open state (expanded state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 140a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 14
Since the electric device 140a associated with number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is easy to win at the second winning port 140, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 140, resulting in a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 140 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the variable winning device 65.
If the jackpot lottery held due to winning in the 4th or second winning slot 140 results in a jackpot,
After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are set into the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on the game board 13 (not shown).

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first pattern display device 37A, 37B, second pattern display device, second pattern reservation lamp, opening and closing plate 65b of specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 11)
Solenoids 209, including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the bottom edge as an axis, and a solenoid for driving electric parts, are connected to the bottom edge of the door, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., with these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. Fig. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and Figs. 6(a) and 6(b) are a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300.
6A is a front perspective view of the ball machine. Fig. 6A shows a closed state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the flow of balls to the specific winning opening 65a, and Fig. 6B shows an open state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the flow of balls to the specific winning opening 65a. In the explanation of Figs. 5 and 6, Fig. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 is in the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B).
The opening and closing plate 65b is adapted to receive the balls that land on the ball slot 65a and guide them to the specific winning hole 65a.
In the open state, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

Since the electric device 140a is disposed above the center of the left and right of the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that deviate from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, the balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center of the left and right, but mainly land on the electric device 140a.
In other words, the position of the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to a position closer to the outside of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the position of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. That is, depending on the way the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, the ball may end up being positioned closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16
(See FIG. 1)) toward the rear side from the lower end of the front end portion of the opening/closing plate 65b, the degree to which the momentum of the ball that bounces near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b is reduced by colliding with the front design member 141. This increases the possibility that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either in the front or the rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located in the lower front side, so that a larger space can be secured on the opening and closing plate 65b side.
The front design member 141 is shaped so that its left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between it and the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided almost without fail to the specific winning hole 65a. On the front side of the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position capable of guiding the balls to the ball passing hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that the balls rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and its front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that shifts rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts against the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the inclination of the inclined surface.
Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned on the left or right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is hindered can be reduced.

In other words, the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, the flow of balls becoming poor and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b being delayed, or a ball being swept backwards by the closing action of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hitting the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) to open the opening/closing plate 65b and causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally, can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up.
Since the balls are guided (swallowed) to the opening/closing plate 65a, the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without exception, regardless of the left or right position of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b is on the outer left or right side, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not stagnated, and the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be kept prompt.

In addition, instead of devising a shape for the receiving member 163, the opening and closing plate 6 on which the ball rests in the open state is
The rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed in a flat shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in an open state, a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows left and right due to the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, which makes it easier to avoid the ball colliding with the opening/closing plate 65b.

That is, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will move backward in parallel once, so that it is possible to prevent the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to a case in which the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped to have a lateral inclination like the lower surface 163a, and a lateral flow is formed in the rolling balls, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movement of the balls will become irregular on the opening/closing plate 65b, and it is possible to prevent unintended malfunctions in advance.

The receiving member 163 has contact surfaces 163 that come into contact with the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b.
The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right sides, and are formed to be able to make surface contact rather than point contact due to a shape design that matches the shape of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized, and stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, thereby improving durability.

Further, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the abutment surface 163a3, and is formed in a plane shape that is substantially parallel to the opening and closing plate 65b arranged opposite to the abutment surface 163a3 with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening and closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the balls downward is disposed on the front side of the contact surface 163a3, and the balls are basically configured not to collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the pivot tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the opening/closing plate 65b is moved from the front-rear width portion at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b to the auxiliary contact surface 163a3.
a4, the stability of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b can be maintained. This can improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In addition, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is moved from the state where the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal to the state where the opening and closing plate 6
In this case, since the abutment surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening/closing plate 65b even when the shape of the abutment surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that the load is likely to accumulate. However, since the area for dispersing the load can be increased, the abutment surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening/closing plate 65b.
This can reduce the magnitude of the local load that is applied to 63a3.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

That is, in the middle of being accepted (for example, the rotation tip of the opening and closing plate 65b and the specific winning opening 65
When the ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 in the state where it is sandwiched between the opening frame of the front design member 141 and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by the curved shape to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path component 336.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b. Therefore, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b is determined by the electric role 140.
It is limited to the left and right outer sides of a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the specific winning hole 65
The arrangement of the balls that flow down without being guided by the electric role object 140a can be limited to the left and right outer positions of the electric role object 140a. This makes it possible to ensure visibility at the left and right inner positions below the electric role object 140a and the left and right ends of the electric role object 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side where the balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a flow) will be described. Fig. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Fig. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Figs. 7 and 8 show a state in which the configurations arranged on the base plate 60, except for the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65, have been removed.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60,
A collecting gutter 150 is provided to form a path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140 and the general winning opening 63 (see Figure 2) to flow into a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-like portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-like portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for the balls that enter the first winning hole 64,
A second flow path section 152 that forms a path for the ball that enters the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 15 that form flow paths for the ball that enters the general winning openings 63 arranged on both the left and right sides, respectively.
3.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are configured to be located in the center of the left and right of the game area, but the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is as follows:
The balls are moved from the center to the outside by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to install the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

Fig. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Fig. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. In Figs. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and the other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. In Fig. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The sorting device 300 has the insertion hole 311 fastened to the variable winning device 65 at the upper portion, and the insertion hole 331 fastened to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions.
Unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150, which are directly fixed to the ball slot 0, the distribution device 300
The presence or absence of such a piece does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment are the distribution device 30
0 is provided and the distribution device 300 is not provided. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be used as is.
It is possible to achieve commonality with

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection result of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described in detail later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 is
A fixed member 161 is fixed from the front side of the fixed member 161 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 is arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, and a specific winning hole 65a is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161.
the receiving member 163 configured to be able to receive a ball that has passed through, an intervening member 164 arranged on the rear side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the rear side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is flowing.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensionally shaped, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin portion that abuts against the base plate 60 at the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, substantially elliptical frame shape.
A through hole having a size that allows the placement of the ribs 61a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 16
Reference numeral 1 a denotes a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60 .

Inside the boundary portion 161a, a specific winning opening 65a, and an extended support plate 161b are formed which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped portions on the left and right sides, and which include a horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion which extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion which extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300 described later. The protruding support part 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate part of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support part 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge part of the boundary part 161a function as parts supporting the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

A symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary portion 161a, has the function of abutting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws to be screwed into the front design member 162 are disposed on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having female threads for screwing in the fastening screws to be inserted into the receiving member 163 are disposed on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

A fastening portion 161 having a female thread portion for threading a fastening screw inserted into the intermediate member 164
i is disposed outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position between the left and right) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is made of a glass unit 1.
1. The ball is allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a plurality of fastened portions 162a which are arranged at a position matching the through hole 161g of the fixed member 161 and have a female threaded portion formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole 161g can be screwed in, and a plurality of extension portions 162b, 162c which are extended toward the rear side in a shape that covers the fastened portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a.
The durability of 62a can be improved.

Furthermore, the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, so that the flow path of the balls can be restricted. That is, the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two parts on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, so that the balls on the extensions 162b can be prevented from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, and then flow down toward the outlet 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extensions 162c (two portions on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the inside of the left and right ends, so that the flow path of the balls that flow on the extensions 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls that flow on the extensions 162b.
Compared to the number of balls flowing down, the area in which the balls are placed can be narrowed (the density of the balls can be increased), and areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed) can be secured.

In addition, the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in a blank state to improve visibility on the back side, but the front design member 162 does not need to be blank. For example,
The front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated with a sticker with a pattern or character, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light on the groove. Also, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4.
63a4, a lower surface portion 163a forming a flow surface on the inside of the frame, a ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position corresponding to the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and into which fastening screws which are fastened to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastened portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides which are female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portion at an apex, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passing hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the passage of the ball through the ball passing hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and through which fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163 can be inserted.
a light emitting substrate 164c on which an LED is mounted and which is disposed above the insertion hole 164b;
The main body 164a is provided with a pair of fastening portions 164d formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed at both left and right ends of the lower end thereof, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper portion of the main body 164a and into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161 can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is disposed directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for a ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, when a ball is detected entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a, the light emitting board 16
By controlling the LED of 4c to light up, the player can easily know whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

From the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This makes it possible to more firmly fix the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 compared to a configuration in which the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, it is possible to suppress relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws are inserted to be screwed into the fastened portion 163e of the receiving member 163, and a lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side.
the electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, a slide portion 165d which engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating portion 165e which is rotatably supported on the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that its rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and which rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide portion 165d, and an upper cover portion 165g which is fastened to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws which are inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b enters and engages with this recess. The transmission protrusion 65c is disposed at a position eccentric to the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused by the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Fig. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and Fig. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 , the distributing device 300 includes a fastening portion 164 of the intervening member 164.
and a middle member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough. The middle member 310 is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough.
30, a board 350 housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and having a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, a state switching device 360 housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, and
The sliding displacement member 370 is disposed below the intermediate member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the intermediate member 330 and the sliding displacement member 370, and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough so as to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, an outline of the function of the sorting device 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that have passed through the ball passing hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b is inserted into the inside of the upper member 310, and into the upper member 310 and the middle member 330.
The balls flow down through the flow path configurations 334, 335, 336 formed between them, and then into the inside of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into a ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player,
The manner in which the ball flows down does not merely provide a dramatic effect that is pleasing to the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profit, such as bringing about a change in the profit that the player can obtain.

The difference in the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is mainly due to the sliding displacement member 37.
That is, depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, a difference occurs in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the point where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (the location of the slide displacement member 370, as described below), so in this embodiment, measures have been taken that take into account the concentration of the player's gaze.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material.
The upper member 310 has a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough so as to be able to receive a ball, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 attached as markers, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube portions 315 formed with through holes through which the fastening screws screwed into the inner member 330 can be inserted, a fastening portion 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screws inserted into the inner member 330 can be screwed, and a long, longitudinal thread protruding downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. the upper member 310 has a pair of front-to-rear long protrusions 317 arranged side by side, a pair of left and right inner protrusions 318 which are left-to-right elongated parts protruding downward from the underside of the upper member 310 and are arranged between the pair of front-to-rear long protrusions 317, a pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 which are left-to-right elongated parts protruding downward from the underside of the upper member 310 and are arranged on the left and right outsides of the pair of front-to-rear long protrusions 317, and an accommodating recess 320 which is formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives the balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and the upper front edge is shaped as if it has been cut with an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1 (see FIG. 12) in an inclined position. This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed to an extent that the ball does not enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, and will be described in detail later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined to match the flow path of the balls below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides is formed to be inclined downward as it approaches the left and right inner sides.
Furthermore, by configuring the left and right distance between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b so that it becomes longer toward the front, it is possible to ensure a clear field of vision for the player viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

A counterbore for receiving the head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface of the insertion tube portion 315. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion tube portion 315 is disposed at a position that matches a fastening portion 332d having a female thread portion formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is arranged with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made less noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together, while avoiding the fastening screw from spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is formed only on the right side is that the insertion tube portion 315 is already formed on the rear side.
The reason is that since the fastening portion 316 is provided at two positions, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head faces downward and is not easily noticeable, omitting the provision of the screw if it is not necessary improves the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be provided on the left side, or a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down while minimizing any loss in the appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

Each pair of long front-rear protrusions 317, inner left-right protrusions 318, and outer left-right protrusions 319 are formed.
The lower surface portions of the inner and outer circumferential portions 317 and 318 are formed as curved surfaces that are lowered as they move away from the same reference point.
8 and the left and right outer protruding portions 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the manner in which the balls flow down.

The central member 330 comprises the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame-shaped portion 332 formed in a frame-like shape (approximately box-shaped) having a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a frame-like shape (approximately box-shaped) having a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path forming portions 335 connected to the front end portions of the first flow path forming portions 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped portion 333, and a pair of third flow path forming portions 336 connected to the left and right inner end portions of the second flow path forming portions 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333.

The central member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 which is elongated in the left-right direction and formed through the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and which functions as a discharge path for balls, a partition plate portion 338 which is formed in the shape of a long plate in the front-to-rear direction so as to divide the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts, and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 which protrude as elongated rectangular protrusions in the left-right direction from the lower side surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Unlike the front portion which constitutes a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a portion for supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame portion 332 is formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the left-right center portion, and is provided with a sliding displacement member 3
70 can be positioned therein, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened portions 332c having female threaded portions formed so that fastening screws inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having a female threaded portion at its upper tip so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

The front frame portion 333 is provided with a light diffusion treatment on the inside of the frame and on the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion.
This results in reduced visibility on the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a generally square frame shape when viewed from above, and includes an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that constitute the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., as will be described in detail later.

In addition, the opening 335a, whose front side is open at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are configured as a pair of left and right holes, separated by a partition plate portion 338, and are formed to a size that allows the ball to be discharged in at least two paths. That is, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, since multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge holes 337, the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only functions to separate the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later.
This is a part for preventing misalignment between the lower member 380 and the lower member 380, and will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352. The lower portion 353 has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side thereof.
Equipped with.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine left-right positioning, the long left-right lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine front-rear positioning, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of this arrangement, along with the intention behind the arrangement of the light-emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device accommodated in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330,
An electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a slide portion 3 that is engaged with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be displaced linearly in the left and right direction and that slides together with the plunger.
62 and the left fastening portion 332d are inserted into each other to be rotatably supported, and the sliding portion 3
and a rotating portion 363 that rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the movable member 62.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disc portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front-to-rear of the lower side surface and is formed with an oval cross-section that is long in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling off upward. Therefore, the slide portion 362 can be supported by the disk portion 361a without being fixed to the slide portion 362 by adhesive or the like.
The arrangement can be maintained between the disk portion 361 a and the lower bottom portion of the central member 330 .

The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330. In particular, since the guided portion 362c is formed long in the left-right direction in this embodiment, the engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b can maintain the posture of the sliding portion 362. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube portion 363a formed in a vertically long tubular shape at the connection portion of the L-shape and having a through hole of a size that allows the fastened portion 332d of the inner member 330 to be inserted therethrough, and a protruding portion 363b protruding upward from the tip end of the short side of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape.
2b and a lower cylindrical portion 363b that protrudes downward from the tip of the L-shape on the long side and is inserted into a recessed portion 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.
3c.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361.
That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger is slid and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the upper cylindrical portion 3
63b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced accordingly. As a result, the sliding displacement member 3
Displace 70.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330.
The housing 363 includes a thin plate portion 371 that is supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom portion and a lower member 380, a pair of upper protrusions 376 that protrude upward from the thin plate portion 371 on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 that is recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion that protrudes upward at the center of the left and right rear of the upper protrusions 376 and is formed so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 that is recessed in a long length from the front end at the left and right center with a left-right width that is shorter than the spacing between the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that protrude downward in a ridge shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 that protrude in both the up and down directions in a ridge shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 that protrudes downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged above and below. Compared to contact on a flat surface, the middle member 3
The protrusions are for reducing the contact area between the sliding displacement member 370 and the lower member 380. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, and therefore, the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from slowing down.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is disposed so as to pass through the arrangement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the central member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusions 376 are disposed in the gaps on the left and right inside so as to sandwich the partition plate 338, and are configured to suppress misalignment in the left and right direction by abutting against the partition plate 338. This makes it possible to satisfactorily guide the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370, and to maintain the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so as to accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to pass through the through hole 332a for placement and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363
can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole having a shape that includes inside the entire area in which the upper protrusion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protrusion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are placed.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381 and a plate-like portion 38 formed in a thin plate shape that is long on the left and right.
2, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors SE1 on the lower side of the plate-shaped portion 382.
and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows the sensors to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 has a rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted, and
The upper and lower sides through which the ball passes through the through hole are open, and the other parts are closed to form a frame shape.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, and a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside.
A pair of protruding portions 383 are provided at positions spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the front end of the protruding portion 383.
a, and the supported hole 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 at a position rearward of the protruding portion 383
a pair of guide protrusions 384 protruding from the guide member 381 at positions where the guide member 381 can be inserted into the guide member 382; and a pair of guide protrusions 384 formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right outer sides of the guide protrusions 384.
5, a long guide hole 386 which extends in the same straight line as the protrusion portion 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 which is formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 which is formed through to allow the insertion of a fastening screw which is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the intermediate member 330.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion having a width slightly shorter than the width of the left-right gap of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370.
That is, the protrusions 383 function as guides that guide the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in such a way that they come into contact with each other, thereby making it possible to appropriately determine the left and right position of the middle member 330 based on the lower member 380. At the same time, the rear side of the frame front part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) comes into contact with the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, thereby allowing the alignment protrusions 339 to be fitted into the lower member 330 in the left and right direction.
The front-to-rear position of the intermediate member 330 can be appropriately determined based on 80.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336 as a component of the intermediate member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an elliptical shape that is long from side to side, and is aligned with the sliding displacement member 370.
The guide protrusion 384 is inserted into the supported hole 371a and limits the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

This can prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383. For example, the front displacement end of the sliding displacement member 370 may be
In comparison with a configuration in which the position of the projection 383 is determined at the position of collision with the projection 383, the durability of the projection 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guiding effect of the projection 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

Even if the guide protrusion 384 is broken, it does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part for preventing collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed to function for a set period (e.g., 3 years) without being broken.
However, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the fact that the guide protrusion 384 will be used in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the sliding displacement member 370 collide with each other after the guide protrusion 384 is broken.
The life of the lower member 380 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the remaining period may be designed to be withstood by the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in the shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is disposed with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be disposed in the gap.
The displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner side of the guide protrusion 385. This makes it possible to cause the forward and backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 with a small positional deviation in the left and right direction.

The elongated guide hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the insertion of the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 in the elongated guide hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the central member 330. In this embodiment, the curved surface portion 387 guides the ball flowing down after entering the outlet 71.
Details will be provided below.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward.
It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. Furthermore, the insertion hole 388 is disposed on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the range in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are disposed. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the vicinity of the detection sensor SE1 or the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being guided by a plurality of portions, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion portion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion portion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion portion 373, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion portion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion portion 376, etc. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among a plurality of positions, making it possible to avoid the load being applied locally and to avoid damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding portion that guides the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by a plurality of members, at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protruding portions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protruding portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and there is a large displacement, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball flow path, it is preferable to keep the displacement small, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good, it is possible to ensure that the displacement is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 relative to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to execute an error notification, indicating that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be poor.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 remains in an improper state, thereby reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the internal structure of the sorting device 300. Note that, here, the description will mainly focus on the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the ball flow path side.

FIG. 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 16 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 shown in FIG.
FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line VI-XVI, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the sliding displacement member 370 is shown in a state of being disposed at the front position. First, the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described in detail.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided into the ball passing hole 163b.
The ball passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and enters the first flow path forming portion 3
The first flow path constituent portion 334, the subsequent second flow path constituent portion 335, and the subsequent third flow path constituent portion 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed in a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow downward toward the front side in the front-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow downward in a left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the balls flowing downward in the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 33
6 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow down the back side in the front-to-back direction, rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction, based on the flow direction of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend angle, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, while the ball flows down the first flow path component 334, it accelerates toward the front side, and the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, the ball flows down the third flow path component 335, which follows the second flow path component 335, and the flow direction in the third flow path component 335 is not affected by the acceleration in the first flow path component 334.
In the flow path configuration portion 336, the flow is directed backward, which is the opposite direction of acceleration to that in the first flow path configuration portion 334, so that a flow pattern can be achieved that is less affected by acceleration in the forward/rearward direction.

Therefore, for example, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball consistently flows in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the flow speed of the ball from becoming excessively fast on the downstream side.
In other words, it is possible to make the speed at which the ball flows down the entire flow path uniform, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball at a high level and making it easier to avoid the player losing sight of the ball.

Also, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming portion 335.
When the second flow path forming portion 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming portion 335 is 0), clogging of the balls and backflow can be easily prevented.
That is, when the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the ball by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, since the switching angle of the flow direction of the ball is large and it is particularly necessary to reverse the speed direction back and forth, it is difficult to make the ball flow smoothly, and the ball is likely to become stuck, clogged, or flow back, which may cause malfunctions.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, if the angle of change in the flow direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, allowing the ball to flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion part 161
f is disposed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed such that the portion disposed downstream of the ball is further away from the path of the ball than the portion disposed upstream of the ball.
The left and right width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other is longer than the left and right width of the second flow path forming portion 335. Also, the rear end portions on the left and right ends of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side surface of the second flow path forming portion 335 in the vicinity of the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backwards when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall portion 334a, which is curved and formed at the front left and right ends of the central member 330, is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball by bending the flow direction of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path constituent part 334, a curved protrusion 334b which protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path constituent part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) which descends towards the front side, is formed as a part which guides the downstream flow of the ball by bending the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 33
4, the flow direction is changed by coming into contact with side wall portion 334a while flowing down, the flow direction is changed by coming into contact with symmetrical protrusion portion 161f while flowing down, the flow direction is changed by coming into contact with third flow path forming portion 336, and the flow direction is changed to third flow path forming portion 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and positional deviation in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The inclination angle and length ratio in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below.
Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of about 7° with respect to the horizontal.
degree, the second flow path configuring portion 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third flow path configuring portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path configuring portion 334, and a slightly gentle common inclination angle is set in the second flow path configuring portion 335 and the third flow path configuring portion 336.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is formed such that the front frame portion 333, which is formed in a square shape in top view, serves as the inner side surface, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 serves as the outer side surface. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, thereby forming a flow path having a width of 12 mm around the periphery.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance between the flow path is set to 1 mm on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is set at about 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Each flow path configuration portion 33 is arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333.
Of the portions constituting the ends of the first flow passage forming portion 334, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow passage forming portion 334 is disposed on the inner side (front side) of the apex of the square.
The flow path forming portion 334 is shorter than the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm when measured from the center of the sphere).
The length is set to about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 334 (22 mm at the center-to-center distance of the spheres).

It can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant from the ratio of the inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above. That is, the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path configuration part 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path configuration part 335 and the third flow path configuration part 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this way, the position of the ball moves to the rear side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-transparent resin part, making the visibility of the ball poor. The ball can be displaced to the front side early, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid the player losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, thereby reducing the burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on the ball flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction along the third flow path constituent portion 336 is smaller than when the ball flows down in the left-to-right direction along the second flow path constituent portion 335.
6 can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing downward.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent. However, since the amount of displacement of the ball in a front view is different, the apparent flow velocity of the ball (the displacement velocity of the ball in a front view) is greater in the third flow path component 336 than in the second flow path component 335.
It becomes slower than the ball flowing down the flow path configuration portion 335 .

The ball's flow path only changes at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player is likely to pay attention to the ball, and in other parts the ball's flow path is common to each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden of the player who focuses his or her gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path forming portion 335 (see FIG. 17).
), it is possible to prevent the fleshy portion of the second flow path forming portion 335 from blocking the line of sight toward the third flow path forming portion 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with a portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of a shaped portion is omitted on the upper and lower sides. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to a case where the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with a thickness on the upper and lower sides, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the symmetrical protrusion 161f will obstruct the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, and visibility can be improved.

In addition, the balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 are configured to gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the balls that enter the outlet 71 flow down below the third flow path forming portion 336 and are then guided by the lower member 3.
80 and is ejected downward.

Therefore, assuming that the balls flowing down third flow path constituent part 336 are viewed from diagonally above the front, the balls entering outlet 71 flow down the back side of third flow path constituent part 336. As a result, the balls flowing down third flow path constituent part 336 and the balls entering outlet 71 are viewed as overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end part of third flow path constituent part 336 increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path configuration portion 336, or the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and flows down the out port 71, the ball
The rear end of 36 comes into view.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are aimed at the specific winning hole 65a, i.e., regardless of the nail configuration (so-called gauge quality) of the nails planted in the base plate 60, most of the shot balls (other winning holes 63, 64)
The rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 (the portion that attracts the player's attention) is placed at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered the third flow path forming portion 336, excluding the balls that have entered the third flow path forming portion 336) gather. This allows the line of sight of the balls flowing down to be efficiently guided to the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

As described above, the visibility at positions closer to the front side has been improved. In addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at positions closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end portion of the third flow path configuration portion 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b having a shape similar to a prism and for diffusing light is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330. In Fig. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface and from top to bottom.

When the light diffusion effect occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is perceived as shining, and the surface can be made to shine brilliantly, but the light blocks the line of sight, making it difficult to see the area behind it.
When light is irradiated from the outside, visibility is poor. Conversely, when light is not irradiated,
At least, visibility can be improved as compared with a state in which light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be visually recognized as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts, such as the light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the rear side surfaces of the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the rear side surface of the front part of the rear frame part 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include light diffusion processed surface 314c, which is a plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 and is formed on the upper surface side of the portion that covers the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state, and light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower side surface of the portion of the middle member 330 that is forward of the rear frame-shaped portion 332.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light diffusing surfaces are formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the vortex, and upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each flow path component 334 to 336, thereby achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where light is not irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface, the third flow path forming portion 336
From the player's perspective, focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the ball that has changed direction to the left or right can be hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it difficult to see immediately.

Furthermore, even if the player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and dropped from the line of sight of the player who is viewing the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336 from an obliquely upward direction, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340.
By irradiating light onto 40, it becomes difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described later, the advantage that the player can obtain is controlled so as to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 .

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path constituent part 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path constituent part 336, so that attention to the rear end of the third flow path constituent part 336 can be further improved.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot can be created. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation according to the situation, the visibility of the ball can be switched between good and bad. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a state in which the black spot is hidden by the ball and a state in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 319b are disposed near the flow path configuration portions 334 to 336.
32e, 333b, and 340 are formed, but are consistently formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the balls flowing down the flow paths formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336.

This makes it possible to prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the balls.
The shape of 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusing effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the flow of the ball or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility of the inside of the flow path, the ball can be prevented from coming into contact with each of the flow path components 334 to 333.
This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by 6.

Alternatively, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to achieve both the effect of diffusing light and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that the visibility will remain high without any measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility due to the fastening screw is reduced.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal the areas where it is difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is not formed, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines.
It is possible to reduce visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including the area where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the rear side of each flow path component 334 to 336, and the purpose of this, in addition to providing a brilliant light, is to function as a screen for the substrate 350 and state switching device 360 arranged on the rear side.
In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the rear side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visible to the player.

The substrate 350 is accommodated in a state in which it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is disposed with a gap between the substrate 350 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 at the left-right center, and the sliding displacement member 370 is disposed in the gap (see FIG. 18 ).

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17 ).
The lower bottom portion of 2 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the center position on the left and right, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and a slide displacement member 370 can be positioned in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is disposed opposite the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the interposition member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper portion 352,
The light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a brilliantly shining effect.
Furthermore, the visibility of the area on the rear side of the interposition member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is disposed at the center position of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is disposed on the rear side of the detection sensor SE1,
Since the pair of detection sensors SE1 and SE2 obstruct visibility and make it difficult to see the object clearly, a sufficient effect can be obtained if the pair of detection sensors SE1 and SE2 are formed within the gap between the pair of detection sensors SE1 and SE2.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate light onto the sealing member 313 and the portion disposed below it through which the balls flow downward, but this will be described in detail later.

Next, the switching of the flow path of the balls that have passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 and the significance thereof will be described with reference to Figures 19 and 20. In the description of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 19 shows the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 30 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG.
15. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. In FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state of being disposed at the rear position.

Here, the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged in two sets symmetrically, and include a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which have the same function.
E11 is disposed on the inside in the left-right direction, and normal detection sensor SE12 is disposed on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of the four detection sensors SE1 is to detect the presence of the detection sensors S
The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that generates the payout of the winning ball. That is, when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the detection sensor S
When it is detected that a ball has entered E1, a predetermined number of winning balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 does not function as a detection sensor that produces the payout of prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects the entry of a ball and thereby changes the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not the game will transition to the high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next big win will be obtained.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position (see Figs. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is disposed so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the ball is prevented from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The upper protrusion 376 has a front surface 376a facing the ball, which is formed in an arc shape with a concave surface facing the flow path, so that the flowing ball can be smoothly guided toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20 ),
The slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability change state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the ball has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type is prepared as a probability jackpot and a normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as the operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern in which, in the case of a special jackpot, the ball easily passes through the through hole of the special jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the ball has difficulty passing through the through hole of the special jackpot detection sensor SE11, and the normal detection sensor S
The nozzle is controlled to move in a movement pattern that allows the nozzle to easily pass through the through hole of E12, and the details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the sliding displacement member 370 is directly related to the profits that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention.
A number of cases of fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the 70 arrangement have been discovered, so measures to combat this are considered important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. That is, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are disposed on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is
13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent act may insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1),
There is a possibility that a tampering attempt will be made to press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370 and push the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby creating a state in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the positioning of the slide displacement member 370 is such that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned lower than the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18 ). Therefore, when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 ends up being pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376.
As described above, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the outside to the left and right. Therefore, even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be escaped to the outside to the left and right, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the arrangement of the sliding displacement member 370 itself is also different from that of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1).
Since the sliding displacement member 370 is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side surface to the rear side, it can be difficult to make the thin metal wire reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the arrangement of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism for transmitting the driving force, and in such cases, the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply a load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

Furthermore, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball attempting to flow down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As described above, when the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor S
The profits that players can get will vary greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of E12.
It is advisable to avoid mishitting the ball as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are allowed to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable part is provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are allowed to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the ten balls flows down and passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the probability change state after the big win game is ensured. Based on this concept, in this embodiment, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce material costs and reduce product costs. Furthermore, as a result of not arranging the movable member, there is no need for maintenance due to the malfunction or failure of the movable member, and the service life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the life of the movable member, which is a good effect.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 are designed to guide the balls to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side. That is, a mechanism for preventing more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position is as follows:
This is achieved by the shape of the parts fixedly disposed inside the flow passage (i.e., the protruding parts 317, 318, 319), which will be described below.

First, the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is
In the short side direction, the surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, thereby reducing the bouncing of the balls (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when they flow from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short side direction allows the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path configuring portion 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, the balls flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path configuring portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility of the balls erroneously passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position.

Furthermore, regardless of the inclination of the short side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 have their left-right paths formed only by the second flow path component 335, and the inclination direction is toward the left-right center (the partition plate portion 338 side), so that the left-right velocity occurs inwardly to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) by mistake.

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, and 319 will be described.
The ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336 is first positioned adjacent to the left and right inner protrusions 318. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, and 319, but are positioned closer to the front side than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front side than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370. Therefore, the ball slides along the partition plate portion 338 and approaches the third flow path forming portion 336.
It comes into contact with the balls passing through the rear end of the flow path configuration portion 336 without leaking.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (FIG. 1
5), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to be wider outwardly and downwardly than the front end side of the protrusion, and the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17).
The ball passes through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed small, the direction of the flow of the ball is not determined to be downward or outward to the left or right only by the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318, but rather functions only as a momentum imparting portion. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are disposed upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparting portion described above occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The following describes the flow of the ball downward after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18 ), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the front-rear long protruding portion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protruding portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is made approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376.
The curved surface 376 starts from the inner left and right side and ends at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17 ). On the other hand, the front-rear long protruding portion 317 starts from the ceiling surface of the flow passage and ends at the front side surface 370 at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction.
The curved surface has an end point close to the end point (rear end position) of the curved surface 76a (FIG. 1
See 8).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by coming into contact with the left and right inner protrusion portions 318, and uses that momentum to flow downward in the outward left and right direction, thereby enabling the ball to flow smoothly downward.

Furthermore, left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the balls flowing outward to the left and right,
The ball bounce is suppressed, so that the ball can flow smoothly down the hole. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to change the direction of the ball flow but to suppress the ball bounce, the shape of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is significantly different from that of the front and rear long protrusions 317, and the protruding end of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is connected to the probability change detection sensor SE1.
The surface is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature extending from above the normal detection sensor SE1 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are located at the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e.,
Since the left and right outer protrusions 31 are disposed on the front side of the center of the flow passage (see FIG. 19),
When the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right outer protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front side.

These configurations make it easier to prevent ball clogging and backflow when multiple balls are flowing down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protruding portion 3
Since the nozzle 76 is retracted rearward from the long front-rear projection 317, the ball abuts against the long front-rear projection 317 and flows.

The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line is the third flow path forming portion 336
Since the center of thickness is located directly behind the center of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, it is easy to apply a load with a suppressed left-right component to the abutting ball. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward toward the front because the protruding tip of the front-rear long protruding part 317 is a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not travel completely to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and forward, and will flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusion 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by abutting against the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, the ball will not hit the rear end of the lower bottom of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the front frame-shaped portion 33
19) of the third flow path forming portion 336, and a situation in which the air flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily avoided.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear side and the ball flows toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced toward the left and right outward due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318 in the same way as when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front side and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. This use will be described later.

The sliding displacement member 370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. When the sliding displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (operation from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336 toward the sliding displacement member 370,
There is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is forced to flow in a direction (
forward-leaning loading may be applied.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, and the possibility of the ball flowing back can be reduced.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by arranging the left and right inner protruding portions 318 so as to collide with all balls, it is possible to generate an action of guiding the balls that reach the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the balls to flow back.

In addition, the opening operation of the sliding displacement member 370 (operation from the front position to the rear position) is not an operation in a direction opposite to the ball, but an operation away from the ball, so that, for example, even if the operation is performed when a ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, it is considered that the opening operation will not easily cause the backflow of the ball, even if it is controlled to be performed at an arbitrary timing without considering the position of the ball.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rolling forward on the upper surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (still in the stage before it flows outward to the left or right), the opening operation of the sliding displacement member 370 moves the ball as follows:
Since a load is applied in a direction that suppresses the rotation (rotating the ball backwards), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball is halted, and it becomes easier to move into free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its rolling up to that point, and it is possible to easily guide the ball to the special rate detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, how the sorting device 300 appears from the player's line of sight will be described. In the following, as an example, cases will be described separately for different angles of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG.

As a premise, a player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example,
The head is sufficiently away from 0 and the line of sight is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (Figure 22
Alternatively, the player may approach the pachinko machine 10 with his/her head facing in a direction that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23).
The player may play the game while looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 through a screen (see reference).
The former provides a wider field of view but makes it harder to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view but makes it easier to notice small details within that field of view.

Fig. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be mainly made in comparison with Fig. 22 and Fig. 23. For convenience, Figs. 21 to 23 illustrate the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In Fig. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is disposed symmetrically (see Fig. 13), only the left half is shown in the figure for ease of understanding.
The function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top has been described above, so here, the three light emitting means 351 arranged in the left half of the lower portion 353 will be described.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light toward the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can improve the player's ability to focus on the seal member 313 and its surroundings. Since the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18).
This prevents the seal member 313 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction due to the light emitted from the sealing member 313.

There are no limitations to the light emission control, but for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively.
When the ball enters the probability change detection sensor SE11, the control of the probability change detection sensor SE11 is performed.
The light emitting means 351 disposed directly above the ball is illuminated, while the ball is detected by the normal detection sensor SE12.
When the ball enters the target area, the light emitting means 351, which is normally located directly above the detection sensor SE12, is controlled to emit light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is
That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface 332.
e (see FIG. 18 ), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are disposed opposite the light diffusion processed surface 3
19a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each portion.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip-like light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal (5 degrees) in Fig. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path configuring portion 336. Therefore, in Fig. 22, it is possible to visually confirm the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the rear end portion of the third flow path configuring portion 336. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the third flow path forming portion 33
Since the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the 6 is narrower, the field of view is narrower than that of the 3rd view in the direction of FIG.
It becomes more difficult to confirm the change in the flow-down mode of the balls at the rear end of the flow path configuration portion 336. However, in this field of view, the upper protruding portion 37 when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction is not visible.
It is easy to grasp the displacement of 6.

The through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is aligned with the upper protruding portion 37 of the sliding displacement member 370.
Since the opening is formed to be a minimum size sufficient to pass the rear frame portion 332
In this way, the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) disposed inside the device can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when multiple spheres are arranged in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are arranged at the same position in Fig. 22. Therefore, the sphere on the front side hides the sphere on the back side.

Furthermore, when the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. After the ball leaves the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left-right direction, the visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame portion 333.
It is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball as it deviates from the downstream end position of the second flow path configuration part 335 (the position of the ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path configuration part 336 (
If there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left and right from the third flow path constituent portion 336) flowing into the position of sphere P2, that ball will hide the ball that is in the process of escaping left and right from the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the third flow path on the upstream side in the line of sight is
At the joining position of the flow path configuration portion 336 and the second flow path configuration portion 335, the third flow path configuration portion 336
The ball is configured to flow down a path including the inside and right edge of the ball (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be difficult to know whether the ball has flowed to the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path constituent part 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path constituent part 335 are clearly separated in the vertical arrangement, making it easy to avoid a situation in which the spheres on the upstream side are hidden. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path constituent part 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is small.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, once flows downward to the right, and then the probability change detection sensor SE
The flow path is switched between the flow path toward sensor SE11 and the flow path toward normal detection sensor SE12.
Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball's flow path is switched between flowing straight down or switching its flow direction to the right.

As another example of the switching mode, the switching position may be located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched to flow straight down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading to the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, the switching position is at least a position behind the center line of the third flow path configuration part 336.

In contrast, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball falls below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (the third
As a result, in addition to the effect of part of the sphere being hidden by the third flow path forming portion 336 itself, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outward beyond the range that can be seen through the third flow path forming portion 336, so that part of the sphere is hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 (see Figure 18).

Therefore, the area visible from the player's point of view of a ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down.
This can further improve the ability to focus on the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the multiple direction views (see FIGS. 22 and 23 ) described as direction views for identifying the flow direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path configuration portion 336,
Each method has its own advantages and disadvantages. As a result, even when the sorting device 300 is used to visually confirm the winnings, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can adjust and select the visual confirmation method that he or she prefers, and the game mode can be varied, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

The player's field of vision can be ensured in various ways. In this embodiment, the following method is particularly used:
A gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path forming portion 336
Since the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily viewed.

22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in Fig. 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Fig. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the light transmitted by the members is reduced due to their thickness, so the view is obstructed.

Since the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured to prevent light refraction (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the sorting device 300 from being impaired.

Even in the case where the portion cannot be made flat for functional reasons, the portion is formed so as to have a small effect on visibility. For example, the protruding support portion 161c for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 is
〜161e are arranged so as not to block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downward.
〜336 are arranged outside the line of sight of the player looking at them (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right lower sides).

Also, for example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the ball, and is formed thin with a minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, so that the visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, balls that have strayed from the specific winning hole 65a flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 on visibility will be described.

22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. When the opening/closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening/closing plate 65b land on the opening/closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening/closing plate 65b. These balls are guided by the extension portion 16.
2b and the extension portion 162c, and is guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, from the player's point of view, the arrangement of the balls running along the inner rail 61 is as follows:
Since it is located below each of the flow path components 334 to 336, it is easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 due to the balls flowing along the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, similar to the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.
This has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left-right center position of the game area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are located in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the line of sight is guided to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible by the player moving their line of sight up and down.

Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the ball shot toward the game area is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (a state in which fewer balls are wasted during a big win game) or whether the ball is likely to deviate and enter the extension portion 162b and the extension portion 16
Regardless of whether balls frequently flow down between 2c (whether there are frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336 by the flowing down balls can be achieved.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path configuration portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path configuration portion 335, and when the ball misses the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path configuration portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.
It can be directed to 6.

Normally, a ball heading toward the outlet 71 is treated as a wasted ball and has no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the ball heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration portion 336.

Furthermore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in a closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path constituent portion 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path constituent portion 335.

On the other hand, the second winning port 140 and the electric device 140 are provided above the center of the specific winning port 65a.
According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the specific winning opening 65a at the center position in the left and right direction, the balls can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a, so that the balls can be prevented from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the periphery of its rear end is reduced by the balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time it takes for the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the length of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the increase in the arrangement space that is likely to occur as a drawback of this can be avoided. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the arrangement distance between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is formed short from the player's line of sight.

Furthermore, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the lower rear of the specific winning opening 65a (see Figure 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in Figure 23, it appears to be positioned so close that the outer shape of the sliding displacement member 370 is embedded into the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from side to side, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends is collected at the bottom of the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the left and right symmetrical flow path components 334 to 336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left and right direction. In addition, the structure required for the flow path of the ball can be made to have a structure in which the left and right length becomes shorter the lower side, making it easier to arrange it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure in which the balls flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335 via the third flow path forming part 336 is adopted, so that the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface part 387) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming part 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by being able to shorten the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, it is possible to shorten the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 when designing a play area whose size when viewed from the front is limited to certain standards, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning port 65a can be positioned near the lower end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively utilized in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of an operating pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through opening 312 flows down through first flow path component 334, second flow path component 335, and third flow path component 336 in that order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, immediately after the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball enters the specific winning hole 6.
Even if a ball enters the third flow passage component 336, the ball will not reach the detection sensor SE1 disposed at the rear end of the third flow passage component 336 for 0.9 seconds.
For 0.9 seconds after b becomes the open state, the sliding displacement member 370 does not move toward the position, and the ball cannot pass through either the special probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the operating pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of the ball erroneously entering the prize.

For example, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type attacker,
In order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, it is possible to eliminate the need for a control to briefly open the opening/closing plate at the start of a round game R (a control that makes the opening/closing plate move unnaturally). This makes the operation of the opening/closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning hole a natural operation, providing an environment in which the player can enjoy playing the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the V-type variable attacker immediately after it is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, a ball that enters the V-type variable attacker immediately after it is opened can actually have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent a ball from entering the machine immediately after it is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334 to 336 and the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a first winning type selection table 202c.
At least a second winning random number table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. The value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning is stored in the first win random number table 202a.
If it matches any of the judgment values specified in a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special pattern.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the lottery for the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9" and the jackpot A is not included.
1 is defined in association with the above (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win A1, four rounds of big win games are played in the first round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is defined to correspond to the big winning A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win A2, four rounds of big win games are played in the first round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is defined as corresponding to the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win B1, four rounds of big win games are played in the second round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "40 to 49" is defined as corresponding to the big winning B2 (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win B2, four rounds of big win games are played in the second round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is defined to correspond to the big winning C1 (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win C1, four rounds of big win games are played in the third round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is defined to correspond to the big winning C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of the big win C2, four rounds of big win games are played in the third round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering the first winning slot 64), a 4-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to the case of a jackpot awarded in the drawing of special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a 4-round jackpot game ends in a short time compared to a 15-round jackpot game, so that the ball shot in order to win the subsequent jackpot can be started early.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for special pattern 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in Figure 24(b)).

In the case of the jackpot a, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are played in the third round of the variable winning device 65.
(details will be described later) and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in an operation pattern X (details will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 (a lottery based on a ball entering the second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, a player who wins a jackpot in the lottery for special symbol 2 can obtain a larger number of prize balls to be paid out than a player who wins a jackpot in the lottery for special symbol 1, and therefore the player's motivation to play the game for the lottery for special symbol 2 (a game in which a ball is shot to enter the second winning port 140) can be increased.

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage caused to the player will become large even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of easily causing a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 to the third operation pattern, the effect of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

That is, since the possibility of the big win game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 being drawn out can be reduced, a big win game that is pleasant for the player (with good time efficiency in paying out the prize balls) can be realized.

In addition, the setting of the big win type of the special pattern 2 is not limited to this. For example,
As the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. In addition, this jackpot type is a small percentage (for example,
It may be set at about 20%.

This can improve the player's ability to focus on the sliding displacement member 370, and can prevent the player from playing the big win game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement action of the sliding displacement member 370, and can feel happy or sad depending on the timing of the displacement action, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). This makes it easier to get the ball into the second winning hole 140, making it easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it becomes easier to win the special symbol jackpot, and
When a jackpot is hit, the probability of a special symbol becoming a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) tends to repeat, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly hoping for a transition to the probability of a special symbol becoming a jackpot, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for the winning of the normal symbols (20 in FIG. 24(c)).
2c1). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, "5 to 204" is specified as the judgment value for the normal pattern winning (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the change over time in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special winning determination,
After the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) is finished, the control of the (determined type) big win game is started. Below, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300, which is performed when the big win game is awarded, will be explained. In addition, in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be described.

In the case of the big win A1 or the big win A2, the opening and closing plate 65 is operated based on the first operation pattern.
When the special pattern variation display (pattern variation performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b is kept closed until a timer means (not shown) has elapsed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds).
The round game R of the th round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if the game balls are continued to be fired, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning hole 65a to one on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the specific winning hole 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "entering in succession"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning hole 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will arrive at each side of the specific winning hole 65a, and one ball will enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b.
In this embodiment, the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and at the same time, the sliding displacement member 37
0 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced from the front position to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334 to 336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow passage components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, so the visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a big win A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b.
In this embodiment, the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and at the same time, the sliding displacement member 37
0 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced from the front position to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path configuration portion 334 to 336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 on the left or right side is limited to one, so the visibility is not reduced by other balls, and the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is 0.8 seconds, which is the time when the balls are in contact with each of the flow path configuration parts 334.
〜336と336的时间，而是为对Sphere的时间大小。 Sphere is set from the idea of a shorter time than the time required for the sphere to pass through 336 to 336 and is set to a longer time than the time required for the sphere to reach 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning port 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry,
The movement of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and it is possible to increase the attention to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path configuration portion 336, so that the ball is unlikely to block the line of sight, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed in front of the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is likely to be focused on the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually noticing the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if a ball enters a specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually observed without being obstructed by the balls flowing downstream by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each flow path configuration section 334 to 336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to the ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big win B1 or the big win B2, the opening and closing plate 65 is operated based on the second operation pattern.
When the special pattern variation display (pattern variation performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b is kept closed until a timer means (not shown) has elapsed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds).
The round game R of the th round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if the game balls are continued to be fired, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open.
This is an opening time setting to allow multiple balls to score in succession on either side of a (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls scoring").

In this control example, the interval between launching the balls is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between the balls flowing down does not change from when they were launched, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of the big win B1, the sliding displacement member 370 is moved based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X.
In the case of the big win B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) to operate. In addition, in the case of the big win B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 to operate the slide displacement member 370 based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big win B1,
In this case, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration unit 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11,
In the case of the big win B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is detected by the normal detection sensor SE1
Pass 2.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of the big wins A1 and A2, so the player can see that the ball is hitting the probability change detection sensor S.
The situation passing through E11 can be easily seen.

On the other hand, when two or more balls are placed in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 on the left or right side, the upstream ball is placed in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball.
This will improve your ability to pay attention to the balls flowing down the 6.

In the case of the big win C1, big win C2, or big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern variation display (pattern variation performance) ends, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a,
The opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time, with the first operation time T1 being the limit.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, since the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, a situation may arise in which multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side.
On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336, unlike the second operation pattern. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern,
The third operating pattern is more likely to result in a situation in which the visibility of the balls arranged downstream of each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 is reduced by the balls arranged upstream.

In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of the jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is such that the opening and closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, and since the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the slide displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 on the left or right side differs depending on whether one ball is arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 on the left or right side or whether two balls are arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 on the left or right side.
When there is one ball placed at 4 to 336, as in the case of the jackpot A1 or A2, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 on the left or right side, the upstream ball is placed in the line of sight of the player who sees the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336.

In the third operation pattern, since there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the round game R, the arrangement of the balls in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 tends to become disorderly compared to the second operation pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) as the entry of the pachinko balls), and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, in the case of a big win of the special symbol 2, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operating pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the probability change detection sensor SE1
It is guaranteed that the ball will pass through No. 1. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and improving the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and after the first interval time Int1 between rounds has elapsed, the second round of round play R is started.

In the second round, similar to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds)
The timer means starts measuring the time, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole 65a.
From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see FIG. 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the elapse of the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning port 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly to the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the specific winning port 65a
The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is controlled to open and close the valve.

Then, when the final round game R is completed, the timer means starts the first inter-round countdown.
The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is controlled to keep the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the opening pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b (first operation pattern to
The ball entry pattern into the opening and closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference between the first and second operation patterns, and the detection sensor SE disposed downstream of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration part 336 is
This can make the visibility of the ball 1 different. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SE1 disposed downstream of the third flow path configuration portion 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may be reduced when multiple balls are inserted into each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336.
Since this may occur when the balls are placed simultaneously, the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally widening the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the case of the jackpot type of the second or third operation pattern). Note that in the first operation pattern, the entry of balls into the specific winning hole 65a is restricted, regardless of the launch mode.
It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1.

On the other hand, if the interval between shots of the balls is extended, the time until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, which may prolong the round game R. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R,
A short period (for example, 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass before the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, the ball may be prevented from being placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y).
This makes it possible to avoid the displacement motion of 70 being blocked by the sphere.

On the other hand, if the period until the balls are shot is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may prolong the round game R. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the sliding displacement member 37
The number 65 is symmetrical, and a ball can be placed in the winning hole 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned launch pattern that widens the interval between ball launches or the launch pattern that leaves a gap until the ball is launched when the ball lands on the left side, and launching the ball in any launch pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, a number of balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, attention is not paid to the balls flowing down the right-side flow paths of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336,
By focusing on the ball flowing down the left side of the flow path, you can avoid having your line of sight blocked by other balls.
It is possible to visually confirm whether the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly shot toward the right side of the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, and it is possible to prevent the round game R from becoming protracted.

The purpose of this splitting of balls into left and right directions is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds until a certain ball has passed through the left flow path, and during the other periods, it is sufficient to split the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths as desired.

As a result, in the case where the upper opening width of the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (
For example, even in the case where the ball entry paths are limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a and the nail arrangement (see FIG. 2), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which balls heading toward the specific winning hole 65a collide with each other and one of them spills out to the left or right of the specific winning hole 65a. Note that although the nail arrangement in FIG. 2 is asymmetrical, it may be symmetrical.

Next, there will be described the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the game board 13. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Fig. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and Fig. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In Fig. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. In addition, Fig. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figs. 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a bottom wall portion 511 and a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is arranged along the rear surface of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall portion 512 (for example,
The support plate portion 513 is provided as a flat plate (arranged parallel to the support plate 512) and supports the surface of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a plurality of insertion holes 513b that are drilled to allow the insertion of fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60.

The positioning protrusion 513 a is fitted into the fitting recess of the base plate 60 .
By positioning the rear case 510 relative to the base plate 60, inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 513b and screwing it into the base plate 60, the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 can be fixed together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various shapes are exemplified. For example, the inner shape of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 (in this embodiment, a circle or an oval)
Alternatively, in consideration of ease of assembly, a protrusion having a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the fitting gap may be used. In addition, if the inner shape of the fitting recess is rectangular, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular accordingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 is composed of a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the rear case 510, and a rear case 511.
The rear case 510 includes a second operating unit 700 disposed at the lower inside portion of the rear case 510, and a third operating unit 800 disposed at the upper inside portion of the rear case 510. On the left inside portion of the rear case 510, there are disposed a substrate having light emitting means such as an LED, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 which is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, is made of a light-transmitting material, and has a light diffusion treatment formed over its entirety.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 at a position to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 at a position below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 at a position above the opening 511a.
First, an overview of the operational control of this operational unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. In Fig. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in a performance standby state is illustrated, in Fig. 29, a state in which the first operation unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to a protruding state is illustrated, and in Fig. 30, a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to a protruding state is illustrated.

30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface of the covering member 787 facing the front side is different from that of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown by imaginary lines. Inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is easily obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, each operating unit 60
Visibility when viewed from the front from 0 to 800 tends to decrease.

In order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in Fig. 2, but the function is the same. Also, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 on the front side of the third operating unit 800 is curved downward, but the outer frame of the center frame 86 is not curved downward.
A circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to protrude from the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the front side of the third operating unit 800. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in Fig. 2, and the actual upper frame part of the center frame 86 (upper outer frame part) is disposed so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

31 and 32 show a state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.
31 illustrates an individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 with the second decorative member 880 facing forward, and in FIG. 32 illustrates an integrated state of the third operating unit 800 with the second decorative member 880 facing forward.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, if this is executed in the performance standby state of third operation unit 800, decorative members 870 and 880 will collide with the surrounding decorative members, causing a malfunction.
This is performed when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to a degree sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which it is capable of allowing displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 within the virtual circle 800F (see Figure 32), and is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

FIG. 33 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state in which the second operating unit 700 is slightly displaced downward from the extended state. FIG. 34 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 is displaced from the state in FIG. 33 to the intermediate performance state. FIG. 35 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 is displaced from the state in FIG.
From the state 3, the third operation unit 800 transitions to a performance standby state, and the first operation unit 60
0 is shown displaced to a protruding state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operation unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operation unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state.
By controlling the operation to be executable on the condition that the operation unit 600 is in a standby state, it is possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front.
Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be permitted).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operation unit 700 when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in a performance standby state.
00 to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33),
It is possible to prevent the operation units 600 and 800 from overlapping with each other in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the operation units 600 to 800 (it is possible to allow overlapping of the front and rear positions).

In particular, the second operating unit 700 is configured to have a plurality of viewing states, including a state in which the second operating unit 700 is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which the second operating unit 700 is viewed in a state in which the second operating unit 700 is slightly receded from the opening 511a but is disposed in close proximity to the third operating unit 800.
We are working to improve its functionality as a performance device.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a facing diagonally left in a performance standby state and a second performance surface 661 formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a.
The display device further includes a first display surface 661a and a second display surface 661b, and a third display surface 661c adjacent to the first display surface 661a and the second display surface 661b. Each of the display surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, and the like.

In the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is
Although it is positioned on the right side of the pattern display device 81, a location where visibility from the front is likely to be reduced due to the position of the center frame 86, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (with the front surface tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), thereby improving the visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, looking diagonally through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the protruding state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 protrudes in front of the third symbol display device 81, so that it faces the player who is viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the second performance surface 661b.
Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so as to face directly ahead, the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 has a presentation surface 66 that is visually recognized by the player depending on the arrangement.
Each of the presentation surfaces 661a to 661c is configured to be switchable and is visually recognized by the player.
In order to improve the visibility of the sensors 661a to 661c, the sensors 661a to 661c are configured to be able to change their posture depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but is designed to have an angle change intended to correspond to the player's line of sight. In other words, the closer to the center of the frame 86, the more the player's line of sight is in the front-back direction, making it easier to face the game head-on.
Visibility can be improved by having the presentation surface face forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer the presentation surface is positioned to the center frame 86, the more likely it is that the player's line of sight will be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by slanting the presentation surface so that it is directly facing the player's line of sight.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the plate.
In the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 34), the rear case 510
It is hidden from view by being placed in the upper right corner of the screen.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 at the front and rear when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the outer right end of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display performance can be performed that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, in the protruding state of the first operation unit 600, the protruding decorative part 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration of the plate front of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually recognize as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding beyond the right end RE1 of the region. This allows for a surprising presentation.

As an example of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the decoration on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative part 652b is a similar polka dot pattern, or a number displayed variably on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, a number to notify the winning or losing of a lottery)
In one example, a certain number is written in a font similar to that of the protruding decorative portion 652b on the front panel.

Examples of associating the above-mentioned displays with decorations include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b is decorated with a flame, thereby evoking the image of fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation pattern of the protruding decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation patterns can be configured by controlling the brightness of the protruding decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the protruding decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types.
It is possible to avoid restricting the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when expanding the display area beyond 1.

In addition, the object to be associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the second operation unit 7
It is also possible to associate the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., covering member 787) with the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b, or to associate the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operating unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotation member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the first decorative rotation member 650
The protruding decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually recognize the different appearances before and after the displacement.

FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 , the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed member 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed member 610, and a drive transmission device 630 for transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620.
and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620.
and a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640.
The decorative rotating member 660 is rotatably supported on the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 comprises a base member 611 arranged facing the front and rear of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630 and a fixing portion 61 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613.
4, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end portion of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed in a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved portions, and the details and function thereof will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape and a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted around the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610.
22, and a transmission slot 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a slot extending in a straight line.
The cylindrical portion 622 is provided with a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body portion 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise direction when viewed from the front).

In addition, when supporting the cylindrical portion 622 , with the support fastening portion 615 inserted into the cylindrical portion 622 , a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615 .
As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastener 615 so as not to fall off.

The long transmission hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in more detail below.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and a cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 engaged with the drive gear 632.
and a transmission gear cam 634 which is journalled on the cylindrical portion 613 c of the front cover member 612 in a state of meshing with the transmission gear 633 .

In addition, with the cylindrical portions 613b, 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical portions 613b, 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported by the front cover member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front cover member 612 has an arc-shaped hole 613d formed therethrough along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a, which protrudes cylindrically toward the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634, is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633.
The cylindrical portion 634a is provided with the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a, and an extension portion 634b extending in a plate-like shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and the front side of the cylindrical portion 634a is in contact with the rotating member 620.
The arc-shaped hole 613d and the elongated transmission hole 623 are inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d. The widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the elongated transmission hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the elongated transmission hole 623.

The extension portion 634b is a photocoupler type detection sensor KS which is fastened to the front cover member 612.
1. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading a change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 comprises a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding with a cylindrical cross-section from the back side of the main body 641 so as to be insertable into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being axially supported on the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 6
44, a driving force can be transmitted between them by meshing.

With the cylindrical portions 642, 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into female threaded portions formed at the tips of the cylindrical portions 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and includes an opening 645a formed on the circumferential surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotation member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms a perpendicular rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an illumination board 653 that is fixed to the rear side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side, and a rear rotating member 652 that is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the front rotating member 652 coaxially.
4, a wiring receiving member 655 which is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative part 656 which is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw which is inserted into the main body member 651 from the rear side, and an axially perpendicular rotating member 657 which is externally fitted and supported by the cylindrical part formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a extending cylindrically on the rear side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female thread portions 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip portion, and has a notch portion 651c cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane passing through the female thread portions 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, into the central hole of the front rotating member 652, the central hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed tubular portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip end.

That is, the above-mentioned cylindrical support portion 651a, front rotating member 652, rear rotating member 654, bottomed cylindrical portion 645, collar C1 and dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on an axis O1 extending in the front-to-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide long hole 616.

The dish-shaped cover portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and this opening C2a is positioned opposite a notch 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state, thereby forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side opposite the upper and lower sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a that faces the main body member 651), and is guided to the back of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminals are connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and the gear teeth 654a are formed so as to be able to mesh with the intermediate gear 644.
The portion a is formed along a portion of the circumference, not along the entire circumference, in order to provide a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative portion 652b protruding radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the protruding decorative portion 652b can be illuminated or blinked by light from a light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is a semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and a wiring receiving member 655
The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 65 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652.
That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 65
The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, not along the entire circumference, in order to provide a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decorative board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 arranged between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip portions of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 is also rotated and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later.
There is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through 655a may become twisted or arranged in a disorderly manner, so the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from twisting or being arranged in a disorderly manner.

In this embodiment, since the electric wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electric wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring is subjected to excessive strain or the electric wiring is twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in an approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The wire retaining plate 663 of the rotary member 657 functions as a retainer, and the semi-cylindrical portion 65
The second decorative rotating member 660 is supported by the axis-perpendicular rotating member 65.
Since the second decorative rotation member 660 is fastened and fixed to the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotation member 660 from coming loose from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The illumination board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness direction side of the illumination board 662, a first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and having an optical axis facing the thickness direction, a second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side and having an optical axis facing the thickness direction, and a third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and having an optical axis facing the width direction.

In this way, the light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each performance surface 661a to 661c individually, but since the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upwards) is illuminated when the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LED is arranged behind the illumination board 662, the light is
Since it is possible to avoid being hidden by the third performance surface 661c, the second performance surface 661b is easily visible due to the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c.
This can increase the variety of performance modes for illuminating the second performance surface 661b, and can improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has decorative letters and figures formed thereon so that they can be seen by the player. The decorative fixing member 670 is provided with an illumination board 671 that irradiates light diagonally to the left front from its rear side. The position of the decorative fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decorative fixing member 670 is always inclined diagonally to the right.
By tilting the direction of the light emitted from 71 to the left, the light can be directed to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be positioned.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in a performance standby state, and FIG.
Fig. 42 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in a performance standby state, and Fig. 42 is a side view of the first operation unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLII in Fig. 40. Note that, in order to make it easier to understand the shape, the base member 611 (see Fig. 38) and the fastening screws are omitted from the illustration.

In the performance standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. That is, at the start of the displacement, the assistance of inertia is not available compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to become large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 at the start of the displacement.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions (the position of the performance standby state and the position of the extended state) of the rotating member 620 is along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so that the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be changeable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the axis perpendicular rotating member 657
The gear teeth 657a mesh with the gear teeth 657b, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is
The rotation is transmitted to a second decorative rotating member 660 perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state will be described in chronological order. Fig. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate state, Fig. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate state, Fig. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, Fig. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state.
1 is a rear view of the operating unit 600. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 and the fastening screws are omitted from the illustration.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 66 of the second decorative rotating member 660
The first operation unit 61 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front side.
In the extension state 00, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see Figure 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

In the intermediate performance state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connecting portion between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b.
As shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is aligned with the curved portion 61
6b at the lower end position.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is
6a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is configured to be a curved displacement along curved portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640,
The first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven.

Therefore, without any countermeasures, there is a possibility that the sliding displacement of the part guided by the guide long hole 616 will result in large displacement resistance between the guide long hole 616 and the part. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 616 to be aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement in which it tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward.
In addition, for example, the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 is displaced from the extended state (see FIG. 46) in an upwardly-rightward direction, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend obliquely upwardly-right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616 can be suppressed.

Next, the effect of the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 will be described, including other effects, with reference to Fig. 47. Fig. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and Figs. 48(a) and 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values of the numerical values are illustrated with positive representing the amount of downward displacement and negative representing the amount of upward displacement, and in Fig. 48(b), the numerical values of Fig. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In Figure 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 associated with the rotation of the rotating member 620 is illustrated at 10 degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in a position when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state is illustrated in solid lines.

In FIG. 47 , the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An overview of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620.
The displacement is generated as a result of the combined vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 (driver side of the supported member 640) and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture displacement of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the rotating member 62
The velocity component of the displacement of 0 is larger in the left and right direction than in the up and down direction (the arrangement of the rotating arms is 4 degrees left and right from the vertical).
5 degrees). In other words, there are two conditions for the vertical displacement to be small.

In the extended state, both of these are reversed, and the conditions for large vertical displacement are twofold. Therefore, the configuration is likely to produce a situation in which the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described.
When the supported member 640 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (an intermediate position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is such that the curved portion 616b is combined below the straight portion 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced from the straight portion 616a by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling with force beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41).
The driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed to the left of the straight portion 616a (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the straight section 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen to appear to be displaced as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 centered on the driven side, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to the case where the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to move can be reduced, and the level of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small value, while the rotating member 62
The displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured with the rotational displacement of 0, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and makes it possible to make the displacement pattern of the second decorative rotating member 660 a forceful displacement pattern.

Furthermore, even under circumstances where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so that it is possible to reduce the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 and to lower the level of performance required of the drive motor 631. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of the drive motor 631.

The action of the curved portion 616b will be described.
The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connection portion with the first operating unit 60
48. The intermediate performance state is defined as the intermediate performance state of 0. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b corresponds approximately to the range of the angle width of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion in the guide elongated hole 616. In other words, the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured only with a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a curved portion is adopted to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is purposely employed to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end. This will be described below.

In either case where the support member 640 is guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the support member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the support member 640
However, the driven side of the shaft is displaced downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.
In the lower half of 16b, a curved portion 616b is formed so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction (leftward) along the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is oscillated from side to side, thereby ensuring a large displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement terminal of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement is slow at the start of the displacement, the displacement speed will become large at the end.

47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620, and becomes maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the displacement speed of the guide elongated hole 61 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end.
In comparison with the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide member 6, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the imaginary axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, which will have a negative effect on the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 616b is adopted in the guide slot 616,
The range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, the term "uniformity" does not only mean to make the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also means to suppress the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the side where the rotating member 620 starts to enter the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after the rotating member 620 starts to enter the lower half of the curved portion 616b.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b,
By providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the second decorative rotating member 660 caused by the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620
49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] associated with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39 ) of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the gear teeth 652a and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 6
The rotation transmission ratio between the second decorative rotating member 660 and the gear teeth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the second decorative rotating member 660 is set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ is the same as the rotation angle between the second decorative rotating member 660 and the gear teeth 657a of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44) is 45 degrees.
The angle from the intermediate performance state of 00 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 46) is 90 degrees.

In the performance standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates the first performance surface 661a to the left by 45 degrees (
The third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right, so that each time the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in accordance with the change in angle θ, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees, causing the third performance surface 661c to face the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b to face the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by the design of the guide elongated hole 616 for defining the posture of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the angle θ
The guide slot 616 is designed to satisfy both of the positions of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the above.

As a result, even if, as in this embodiment, only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for performance (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the driving motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the driving motor 631. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 from becoming constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be described below.

The change in angle θ is generally similar to the change in the magnitude of the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is generally larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and eventually becomes below the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reducing to approximately 7 degrees).

In this way, the angle θ of the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle is changed depending on the magnitude, so that the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be changed accordingly. That is, in a range where the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, and the position can be easily maintained, while in a range where the value of the angle θ is large, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, and the surface (presentation surface 661a to 661c) facing the player can be easily changed quickly.

The above-mentioned configuration makes it possible to vary the speed of the displacement movement of the second decorative rotating member 660.
As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, a change in position and posture due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and a rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a are simultaneously performed.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the curved portion 616b from the straight portion 616a of the guide elongated hole 616.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotating member 62
When the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates at a constant speed, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, and the change in the position in the rotation direction is clearly visible. That is, the player can visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is momentarily rotated.

In this embodiment, since the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is faced toward the front at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620 and is viewed as a single unit when positioned close to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28), it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward from the state when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.
It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the support member 640 is disposed at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniformity of the displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the cylindrical portion 6
43) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620.
This prevents the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of curved portion 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of rotating member 620 in a direction that bounces back (upper left direction) around circular through-hole 624 of rotating member 620. That is, the direction in which the lower half of curved portion 616b inclines toward the upper left is the short side direction, and since displacement of the driven side of supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 will be displaced downward and to the left along the displacement direction of the driving side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620).
As a result, the guide hole 616 is slightly swung left and right along the guide slot 616 and displaced downward.

On the other hand, the latter travels on a circle centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, and therefore the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described.
When the state changes from the extended state of 0 to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is designed to be minimum at the time when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600.
Therefore, the load required to raise and displace the bearing can be reduced.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the up and down direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around an axis in the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight elastic displacement locally by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to a case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the rotating member 620 is broken. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by abutment with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand the load that the rotating member 620 cannot bear by elastic deformation, so that damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even if the change in the position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from the performance standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the overhanging state is about 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative part 652
b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhang decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it is colliding with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28 ). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the overhang decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so that it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the protruding decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state, when the supported member 640 changes from its protruding state position to its performance waiting state position, the protruding decorative part 652b may protrude to the upper left side of the supported member 640, potentially causing a collision with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the protruding display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, thereby adversely affecting the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the driven side of the supported member 640 is used as a reference.
Since the protruding decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driving side of the support member 640, when the support member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, the support member 640 protrudes in conjunction with the third pattern display device 81.
When the third pattern display device 81 is displaced to the side where the third pattern display device 81 is retracted, the protruding decorative portion 652b is retracted in conjunction with the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the protruding decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be arranged on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's line of sight can be determined by the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640.
That is, the change width of the angle θ is about 135 degrees, and the position change angle of the supported member 640 is about 9
The difference is 0 degrees, which is 45 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is
It is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided by the angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and the angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is ((a1+b1)-(a2
+b2)-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

Therefore, the player can visually see that the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means other than the driving motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this manner, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, to consist of sections which are sliding movements and sections which are rotational movements, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually perceived as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect can be realized by designing the supported member 640 into a section in which the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative portion 652b
is visually recognized as being rotationally displaced, and in the section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being slidably displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is capable of being rotated and displaced to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may also be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the driving direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotating member 620 to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway through its descent, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to accurately stop the rotating member 620 at the desired stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the angle θ
The value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49 ) changes to an increasing value. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating member 62
Since the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced to zero, it is possible to easily stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the unit retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the field of view of the player looking at the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which the unit is disposed on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 and attracts attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) between the two.

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700.
51, mainly the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are illustrated in an exploded state, while the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is illustrated in a non-exploded state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 , the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, and a right front plate member 710 and a rear case 510.
a rotation arm member 720 arranged between the rear case 510 and the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510 and rotatable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510; a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotation arm member 720; a lift plate member 740 to which a tip end of the rotation arm member 720 is guidably connected and configured to be liftable and displaceable;
a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the frame 10; and a pair of front support members 760 configured as a left and right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750.
It is equipped with a concealing decorative member 768 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702, and a lifting and reversing performance device 770 that is configured so that the lifting plate member 740 and the front support member 760 can be displaced in a manner that combines lifting and lowering displacement and forward and backward displacement.

The right front plate member 710 has a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730,
The rear case 510 is provided with a gap forming portion 712 recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion to form a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) arranged to detect the position of the detectable portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined portion 714 formed at the front side of the left side portion inclined in a manner that approaches the front side as it approaches the upper side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastened portions 718 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensor 713 is a plurality of photocoupler type sensors that are arranged at intervals such that the detection groove is disposed at a position where the detection target portion 735 can enter.
13 are arranged to correspond to the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for performance, the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, respectively.

In other words, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The rotating arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and includes a main body 721 formed in an elongated plate shape that is V-shaped when viewed from the front, a support tube 722 that protrudes cylindrically rearward from a bent portion of the main body 721 and has an inner circumferential shape that is large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough, a long hole 723 that is formed in a long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721 along the longitudinal direction, and a support tube 722 that is formed in a long hole shape at the left end of the main body 721. The support tube portion 722 is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion portion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (in the direction of lifting the left side) between the support tube portion 722 and the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening portion 725.
When a fastening screw is inserted through the ring-shaped collar C3 in the support plate 701a and screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastened portion 725 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the rotating arm member 720 from being displaced such that it tilts toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720, and therefore makes it possible to stably support the displacement of the rotating arm member 720.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side of the main body 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722. Therefore, when a load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the rotating arm member 720 becomes zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right side front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are connected to the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions.
The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each journaled on a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the transmission gear 733. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, into which fastening screws that are inserted into shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are journaled on the cylindrical protrusions 711a so as not to fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical protrusion 711 a and an arc-shaped hole 711 b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711 a that axially supports the gear cam member 734 .

The gear cam member 734 is provided in an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft portion and protrudes toward the front side.
It comprises a detectable portion 735 formed so as to be able to be inserted into 11b, an extension portion 736 extended so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a protruding cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right side front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736 a is formed so as to be insertable into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720 , and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736 a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723 .

A female screw is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing this fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in accordance with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720,
It comprises a guided member 741 arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and elongated in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that the metal bar 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, and is capable of vertical displacement along the metal bar 702. The tips of the protruding portions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side are in contact with the rear case 510.
By abutting against bottom wall portion 511 of guided member 741, the axial rotation of guided member 741 is restricted, and the posture of guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 comprises a long hole portion 743 which is drilled in a long oval shape on the left and right sides with a vertical width such that the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 can be inserted through it, a cylindrical portion 744 which protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole portion 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 which are arranged below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right from the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is fastened to the cylindrical fastened portion 7
24, the lift plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in a state in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward.
70 is not fixed to the lift-up plate member 740 but is disposed on the front side of the lift-up plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced forward and backward with respect to the lift-up plate member 740 .

A coil spring CS2 is disposed so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied to the lift plate member 740 and the lift inversion performance device 7
70 and acts in a direction separating them.

The guide portion 745 is configured as a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending in the front and rear directions, and a rotating cylinder portion 74 that is rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shafts that protrude outwardly to the left and right directions from the plate portion 745a.
5b.

The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 is displaced forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the displacement in the forward and backward directions, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in such a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.
Equipped with.

The blindfold decorative member 768 is a three-dimensional decorative portion 7 formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material.
A substrate having an LED fixed to the front side is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is configured so that the light emitted from the LED can illuminate the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

Each front support member 760 comprises a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined in such a manner that the back surface of the plate approaches the front side as it moves upward.

The fixing plate portion 761 is a plate portion that is fastened to the front side of the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole from the front side and screwing it into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is disposed in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. In other words, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751.
The rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while being displaced in the front-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement will be described below.

52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG.
52(b) and 52(c) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

FIG. 53(a) shows a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG.
53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86, taken along line LIIIb-LI in FIG.
53(a) and 53(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line IIb.

54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG.
54(b) and 54(b) show the second operating unit 700 in an extended state.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and lowering reversal performance device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in Fig. 52 to Fig. 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The driving force transmission during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and lowering reversal performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Fig. 28, Fig. 30, and Fig. 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

When the driving force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the direction of displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the same as the direction of displacement of the long hole portion 72 of the rotating arm member 720.
Since the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the gear cam member 734, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate. The same holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the direction of displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is the same as the direction of displacement of the long hole 7
Since the rotational direction of the gear cam member 734 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating arm member 720, the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the rotating arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is positioned on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to displace to the front side in the fore-and-aft direction as it displaces upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is generated by the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lift-up/reversal performance device 770 being inclined at the receiving portion 762.
This is reduced by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotating cylinder portions 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56) that are arranged at symmetrical positions.
By rolling about the center of 4d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771 which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by designing the arrangement of the rotating cylinder portions 745b, which are aligned front to back, so that the front rotating cylinder portion 745b is positioned slightly higher, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder portion 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity (rotation axis position) of the performance device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity.
The horizontal plate 774c is prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b is stable in rolling between the first horizontal plate 774b and the front rotating cylinder portion 745b because a gap is generated between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b is stable in rolling between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b because a gap is generated between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c.
This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guide. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the front-rear direction displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and front-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the forward-rear displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to be a natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operation unit 700. That is, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is disposed below the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to assist the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the driving motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is disposed above the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to be stopped so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced so as to approach the intermediate performance state side by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, when stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate presentation state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operation unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, so that it is easy to prevent a large downward displacement from the intermediate performance state. And, even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operation unit 700 can be brought closer to the intermediate performance state side.

Here, we will explain the effect of displacing the lift-and-reverse effect device 770 in the forward and backward directions along with the lift-and-reverse displacement. As a premise, a movable role object is known that can be switched between a state in which it attracts the player's attention by displacing in and out of a frame bordered by a center frame 86 and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most such movable devices are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the front-to-rear distance from the third pattern display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been configured to be long, and at the edge of the field of vision where the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is viewed through the inside of the center frame 86, the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the playing area). Therefore, if the appearance of the movable reels retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in Figure 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in Figure 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in Figure 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that has the player side (front side) as its base end and widens toward the back side (sloping downward as it moves toward the rear), that is, the displacement direction along the direction of the player's line of sight at the edge of their field of vision, so that each decorative surface is easily within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but in the extended state (see FIG. 54), the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b
54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).
In the case of FIG. 2, the first minor decorative surface 787a2) and the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper side is positioned in the front-to-back gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located at the rear of it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so that it is easily visible when the player moves his or her gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") which is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to a standby state arrangement so that it is easy to see,
The inconspicuously positioned covering member 787 can continuously attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that it is possible for the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state to differ.

For example, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player can check the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if the player misses it or the operating speed is excessively fast), and the configuration allows the contents of the decorative surface to be understood only from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the LCD performance unfolding on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the top side as in this embodiment, the player can grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state by visually checking the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state.

In this way, for a player who misses the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the contents to be notified depending on the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.
Regardless of the above conditions, the attention of the covering member 787 can be maintained high.

In this embodiment, it will be explained that the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700, the covering member 78
The front surface of the cover member 787 and the rear surface of the center frame 86 are disposed opposite each other, and the center frame 86 is provided with a flow path forming portion 86 a formed to protrude toward the cover member 787 .

The flow path forming portion 86a is configured to, after a ball enters a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 and reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, swing the ball backward once as it flows down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86,
This is a portion that forms the rear side of the guide flow path that guides the ball forward again toward the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Since a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's gaze, particularly when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for performance, the covering member 787 is positioned on the back side of the rear end face BE1 (see Figure 52 (a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end face BE1 (see Figure 53 (a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end face BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-rear position as the front-rear position of the playing area. Therefore, it can be made to look to the player as if the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front side (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 displaces in the fore-and-aft direction, and the fore-and-aft position of its front end face is configured, in the extended state, to match (coincide) with the fore-and-aft position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the second operating unit 600 of the first operating unit 600 that is disposed close to each other in a front view in the extended state is
A performance surface 661b (see FIG. 29) and a performance device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700
The front and rear positions of and will match, making it easier to visually recognize them as one unit.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the performance device 780 in the front-rear direction is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the first operating unit 600
The box-shaped member 661 and the performance device 780 can be separated (independently) to make them easier to see.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the lifting and reversing plate member 740, and a performance device 780 configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 55 and 56.

Fig. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and Fig. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device 770. In the description of Fig. 55 and Fig. 56, Fig. 50 and Fig. 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 comprises a lower long portion 772 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, a through-hole tubular portion 773 that protrudes cylindrically from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the rear side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 toward the rear side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 by a connecting portion extending vertically and is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged from both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 to the rear side and are configured to be able to guide a linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the rear side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 so as to be able to support a drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lift plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744.
That is, by inserting the cylindrical insertion portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lift plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The guide extension portion 774 comprises a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b and whose width direction faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward to the left and right from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotatable cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported on the cylindrical portion 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is disposed opposite the lower bottom of the lift-up plate member 740 in the vertical direction in the assembled state, and the two abut against each other to suppress the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed opposite the lower bottom of the lift-up plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the lift-up plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is
The upper front inclined portion 71 is disposed so as to be shifted forward in comparison with the lower cylindrical portion 774d.
The inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 is set to be parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of localized loads.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically lined-up manner and having female threads formed on their inner circumferences, and a plurality of anti-fall-out plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The anti-fall-off plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws from the rear side into the insertion holes and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 has a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782.
The motor support plate portion 777a is provided with an insertion hole 777b at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d at both the upper and lower ends so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastening member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the rear side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female screw formed on its inner periphery, and a fastening screw is screwed into it while the cylindrical protrusion 777c is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby supporting the up-down reversal member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The insertion hole 777d is adapted to receive a fastening screw which is screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring fastening member 777e fastens the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 to the transmission device holding plate 7
This part is used to hold and fasten the transmission device holding plate 777 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that fits the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777.

The light-emitting performance means 778 comprises two elongated, plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, with light-emitting elements such as LEDs arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a, on which light-diffusing processing is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is provided with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, but details will be described later.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has a plurality of fastening portions formed on the rear side thereof,
The fastening screws are inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions, thereby fastening and fixing the unit, so that the fastening screws are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has insertion holes 7 on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws.
A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 778c from the front side of the upper long portion 7
The upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed by being screwed into the female screw portion 775b of the upper light diffusion member 778a.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be noticeable without any measures; however, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned so as to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so that the head of the fastening screw fixed in the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-down inverted member 781 journaled on a cylindrical protruding portion 777c of a transmission device holding plate 777, and a drive gear 78 that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-down inverted member 781.
A drive motor 782 having a drive shaft 782a fixed thereto, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 having one end pivotally supported on each of the longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of linear motion plate members 783 having the other end pivotally supported on a guide portion 776 and having its displacement guided in the left-right direction.
4, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (inverted) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation member 785 together with the linear plate member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation member 785 with the phase fixed so that they cannot fall off, and covering members 787 that are arranged in front of and behind the end plate members 785d and are formed with left and right lengths that cover the left and right side portions of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape and a main body plate portion 78
1a的後面头部781a的一对线状拆图形拆部781c， 对线状拆图形拆部781a从线状端781a向後面侧， 对线状拆图形拆部781d， 对线状拆图形拆图形拆图形拆图781d头处在线状拆图上。 1a is a gear-shaped transmission gear 781b protruding from the rear side of the center of the main plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding from both longitudinal ends of the main plate portion 781a toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d protruding from the front side of the main plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-to-rear direction in the center, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole. A fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the drive motor 782, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. That is, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c axially supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where one support hole 783a is formed displaces following the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c as the up-down inverted member 781 rotates and displaces.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. That is, the arc-shaped protruding portion 781 is arranged in one of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.
d is available for placement.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the up-down inverted member 781 can be determined between two postures in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture in between (a posture in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and journaled on a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with an inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite to the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel gear portion 783c formed as bevel-shaped gear teeth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.
And, it is equipped with.

A female screw is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side.
is pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in oval shapes extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in an upper and lower pair between the long hole portions 784c and protrude toward the back side, and a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction and protruding on opposing sides in the middle of the support plate portion 784d; a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female screw formed on the inner periphery side; a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d; a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the shaft support member 786;
and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold magnet 784g.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner periphery.
is axially supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so as not to fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction in the assembled state, and limits the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotation displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the anti-fall-off plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, thereby supporting the linear plate member 784 on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the axial rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement of the metal rod 785a, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right positioning of the metal rod 785a, as will be described in more detail below.

The placement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the pivot member 785, and will be described in detail later.

The axial rotation members 785 are arranged in a pair on the left and right and are supported by the linear motion plate members 784. The axial rotation members 785 are made of a metal material and formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and a recessed groove portion 785b is formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, and a bevel tooth portion 785b is formed on the intermediate arm member 783. The bevel tooth portion 785b is a member arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a.
3c, end plate members 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate members 785c are formed with bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the metal rods 785a and 785b.
The end plate member 785d is provided with a ring-shaped metal member 785e that is arranged around the metal rod 785a of .5d in a manner that it is raised from the end plate member 785d, and a rotational position stabilization portion 785f that protrudes from the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d and has a female threaded portion formed inside and a metal screw that is screwed into and fixed to the female threaded portion.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

In other words, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep groove portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the portion where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back surface side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is disposed so as to enter into the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. With the bevel tooth member 785c partially entering into the arrangement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the positioning hole 784g, but cannot fall off to the front side because the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and displacement to the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is a non-circular tip portion of the metal rod 785a.
For example, the inner circumferential shape corresponds to a D-shaped cross section, and the inner circumferential shape and the metal rod 78
5a and the tip end of the second retainer 5b are formed with a dimensional relationship of an interference fit, so that they are fitted and fixed.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female screw at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female screw, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784.
By configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner side of the bevel tooth member 785c, the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d can be made to easily coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a portion where the metal screw disposed therein is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a square plate shape and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between itself and the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a square box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between itself and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784.

When the fastening screw is inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole 786a and screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the pivot support member 786, the metal rod 78
5a to be prevented from falling off toward the rear side, and the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding half 784h
, 786b, and magnet Mg is held by magnet holding halves 784i, 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right components formed in a box shape with openings on the inside left and right sides, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the axial rotation member 785, with the opposite side being decorated with figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc. that can be read in different ways.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54 ) and a second main decorative surface 787 formed on the reverse side thereof.
b1, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the back side of the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2. The second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26).
and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retreat outwardly to the left and right in the portion between the recessed portion 787a and the recessed portion 787b.

The extensions 787c are formed so that the ends come into contact with or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26).
can be visually recognized as a whole.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located in the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion on the upper left and right center of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figs. 29 and 52) and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Fig. 30) in accordance with the operation of the performance device 780. First, a mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) illustrates the upside-down member 781 in a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) illustrates the upside-down member 781 rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that, in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are not shown in order to facilitate understanding.
5 is omitted in the illustration.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is connected to the upper detection sensor 778d (FIG. 56
In an inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781 d is disposed in a state of entering into the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778 d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see Figure 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, the outline of the device will be described. The device includes a top-bottom inverting member 781, an intermediate arm member 783, and a linear motion plate member 7
The structure of 84 is a well-known slider crank mechanism.
When the upside-down member 781 rotates around the center, the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the upside-down member 781
The other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 that is supported by the
The other cylindrical portion 783b is arranged to move in parallel along a moving axis HL1 passing through the center of the other cylindrical portion 783b.
The direction of displacement of the linear motion plate members 784 connected to the left and right linear motion plate members 7
84 are displaced in opposite directions to the left and right simultaneously along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in Fig. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it is rotated about 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in Fig. 57(a). The length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see Fig. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

57(a) to 57(b), the posture change around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front.
The angle is kept to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle of the spacing between adjacent teeth of 83c.

Since the bevel teeth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the bevel teeth portion 78
The transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth member 785c and the tooth member 3c occurs at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, that is, on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) shows a transmission device holding plate 777, a top-bottom inverting member 781, an intermediate arm member 783, a linear motion plate member 784 and a shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG.
58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 785, and FIG.
4 and a cross-sectional view of a pivot member 785.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the bevel teeth 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 are fixed to the pivot member 785.
58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as overlapping with each other for ease of understanding, and the width of this overlap is absorbed by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and a driving force is transmitted, thereby causing a rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. While the up-down inversion member 781 rotates and displaces by 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 57(a), the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction.

In addition, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel teeth portion 783 of the intermediate arm member 783
The bevel teeth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel teeth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel teeth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle of the bevel teeth member 783c around the other cylindrical portion 783b.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of Fig. 58(a) to the state of Fig. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is smaller than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a rotation of an angle of 30 degrees, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In this embodiment, however, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanying the pressing force is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c. As a result, the posture of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction is as shown in FIG.
) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the adhesive force generated from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see Figure 54) of the axial rotation member 785.

That is, the magnet M is arranged so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction.
The magnetic force of magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f, so that the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force in the forward rotation direction from magnet Mg.
The attraction force acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right-side shaft rotating member 785.

In addition, for the left-side shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, as in the right-side case, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite to the right-side case (see FIG. 55).
As a result of the magnet Mg acting to attract the metal screw f, the left-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg increases when the magnet Mg is pulled from the state shown in FIG.
3b is designed to be capable of generating a load exceeding the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the bevel tooth member 785b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction.

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in Fig. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in Fig. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f are separated from each other, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased.
This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785 .

This makes it possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the covering member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, thereby improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower portions.
When the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotational position stabilizing portions 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b) ). When the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b) ).
2(b), the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed adjacent to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the closely spaced arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the closely spaced arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement between the state shown in Fig. 58(a) and the state shown in Fig. 58(b). Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front beyond Fig. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and therefore the same effect is achieved. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is as follows:
Since it is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is inclined closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction.
Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational operation of the up-down inversion member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55 ) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, a change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. In FIG. 59(a) to FIG. 59(c), the reversing operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is illustrated in chronological order.
In a), the performance device 780 is illustrated in a vertically arranged upright state of the upside-down member 781.
FIG. 59(b) illustrates the performance device 780 when the up-down inverted member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically disposed state, and FIG. 59(c) illustrates the performance device 780 in an inverted vertically disposed state with the up-down inverted member 781 standing upright.

The upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A) to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is changed by 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A).
This causes the decorative surface visible to the player to be switched (see FIG. 5).
See 9(c)).

The upside-down vertical arrangement state is returned to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A) by rotating and displacing the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Therefore, the inversion operation is performed by reversing the direction so as to rotate and displace the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees and driving the drive motor 78
59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) can be repeatedly switched between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) every time the switch 2 (see FIG. 56) is driven.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates and displaces 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the shaft rotating member 785 rotates 180 degrees by engaging with the bevel tooth portion 783c.
Here, the right-side axial rotation member 785 rotates backward and the left-side axial rotation member 785 rotates forward, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c. That is, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d are
Rotate in the opposite direction.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second minor decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first minor decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (FIG. 59(b)
reference).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first minor decorative surface 7
87a2 (or the second minor decorative surface 787b2) and the first minor decorative surface 787 of the right covering member 787
a2 (or the second minor decorative surface 787b2) can be prevented from being viewed in unison.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be deliberately made to have different contents on the left and right sides so that the content of the decorative surface is difficult for the player to recognize, and therefore the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's focus on the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, it can also have the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, the second operation unit 700 is in a standby state for effecting (see FIG. 52), and the effecting device 78
When 0 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a
2 (or the second minor decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state, by preventing them from being viewed together during rotational displacement and by preventing the surface from facing the player in the extended state.

This allows the appearance of the second operating unit 700 to be changed depending on its placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the presentation performance is excessively low compared to the cost of placing the second operating unit 700 (the space it takes up, the burden of hiding it well).

After the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785
f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 78
It is possible to stabilize the posture of 7.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so that it is possible to reduce material costs and improve maintainability compared to the case where a dedicated metal member is designed.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited.
That is, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33) of the second operating unit 700, the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof are rotated and displaced.
Such decorative members will collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform the rotational displacement of the pivot member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive motor 73 which causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787
The drive control of the shaft rotating member 711 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.
Therefore, the rotational displacement of the cover member 787 and the cover member 85 can be normally generated.

The extensions 787c are disposed close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is vertically disposed, and in this state, are disposed facing each other in the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as a single unit, and since this configuration is necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57 ). The linear displacement of the length L1 allows the extension portion 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, thereby making it possible to avoid a problem in which the extension portion 787c and the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 collide with each other.

Furthermore, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) over the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs over the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

As a result, compared to a case in which the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low and the rotational displacement can be made less noticeable, so that the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 can be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a larger attractive force, thereby avoiding collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and makes it possible to avoid a reduction in the presentation effect due to the fastening screw.

In this embodiment, the decorative surfaces 787a1 and 787a2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are
Since the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of a2, 787b1, and 787b2 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is made asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

That is, the through hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, and the illumination board 7
It becomes impossible to place an LED on 87a (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is likely to be visually perceived as dark during the light emission effect.

Therefore, in the decorations on the left and right, the insertion holes 778c are arranged to avoid the places that need to be brightly lit and noticeable.
As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

In addition, it is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, when the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are the same, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically.
This makes it easier to design the illumination board 778a.

As shown in FIG. 59B, in this embodiment, during the reversing operation of the lift-and-lower reversing performance device 770, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly to the left and right, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is extended to the extension portion 787c.
Even when not surrounded by the housing 781, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be seen.

That is, in a front view, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side. Also, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to Fig. 26, the third operation unit 800 is a unit that is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see Fig. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be movable up and down as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the up and down direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and FIG.
60 and 61 are exploded rear perspective views of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800.
1, the parts that configure the displacement of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870, 880 as decorative parts arranged on the outside are not illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 , the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 to which a cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed at the center of the held member 810, and a movable member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery of the fixed cylindrical member 820.
The inner rotating member 830 is supported by a main body 831, the outer rotating member 840 is supported by a main body 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 (five in this embodiment) are rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a plurality of gear members are housed in the held member 810.
40 and a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a drive force for displacing the intermediate arm member 850;
Equipped with.

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a cylindrical fixing portion 812 that is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, and a photocoupler type sensor that detects the detection portion 84 of the outer rotating member 840.
A detection sensor 813 is fixed to the side capable of receiving the 4 with the detection groove facing the drive motor 86.
The motor holder 814 holds the motor 1, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as cylindrical portions that axially support the transmission gear 863 so that the transmission gear 863 cannot fall off, and a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as double cylindrical portions that axially support the load response gear 865 so that the load response gear 865 cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 has an inner periphery through which the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 864 are inserted when viewed from the opening direction.
It is designed with dimensions such that 65 protrudes inward.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 is made up of the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting decorative member 823 made of a light-transmitting resin material so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side.
24, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip on the rear side, and the held member 8 is inserted into the female screw.
By screwing in the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of 10, the fixed cylindrical member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 so as not to rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on its inner circumference, and electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 includes, as LEDs, inner light-emitting parts 823a arranged at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from the vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b arranged at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are L-shaped light-emitting parts whose optical axis faces the front side (forward).
The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).
It consists of:

The outer light-emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on a circumference.
As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is irradiated onto the plated portion 871a of the first decorative member 870, which is arranged closely spaced apart on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly positioned on the illumination substrate 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate and displace around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are each positioned at equal intervals on a coaxial circle, light from the same number of LEDs (in this embodiment, three) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational position of the first decorative member 870.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side portion can slide along the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 , while its outer diameter side portion can slide along the circular flange-shaped portion 831 a of the inner rotating member 830 .

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion protruding rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that the sliding member 825 is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 therebetween, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable therearound is prevented.
In addition, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821, and similarly on the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. This prevents the fixed cylindrical member 820 from being displaced by the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).
This can reduce the possibility of the inner rotating member 830 being damaged or deformed.

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831, with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed to allow the metal rods 832 to be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable by being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portion of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the above-mentioned circular flange-shaped portion 831a, a plurality of sliding protrusions 831b extending rearward in a protrusion-like manner from the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal rods 832, and a plurality of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange-shaped portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion portion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide against the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed into a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and thus reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding protrusion portion 831b is positioned at an angular position midway between adjacent metal rods 832, in other words, at a position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during a switching rotation operation described later, and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces the outer rotating member 840 radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is prevented by the sliding protrusion portion 83.
1b, the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830
Therefore, the contact area with the outer circumferential surface can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central circular gear 864 is positioned. By positioning the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, relative rotation between the central circular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 is disabled, making it possible to match the rotation angle of the central circular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are arranged at an interval in the linear motion displacement direction and protrude backward in a cylindrical shape.
It is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion 833c which is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 with respect to 833b and which is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d which is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is disposed on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28 ), and is disposed on the protruding portion 87 of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834.
The grooves 883 are slidably fitted onto the outside of the rotating member 834 to function as a displacement restriction groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female screw formed on the inner periphery thereof, and is connected to the decorative members 870 and 880.
The fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 88.
0 to the rotating member 834, as will be described in detail later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal positions in the circumferential direction around the main body 841, and gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841.
and a detection target portion 844 extending radially outward from the main body portion 841 in an arrangement capable of entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850 and screwing a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with a load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and comprises a base end rod portion 851 having one end journalled to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened towards the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission portion 854 is a portion that is interlocked with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and is formed in a supported hole 834 having a dimensional relationship that allows the rotation of the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 with the cylindrical protrusion 833a inserted therethrough.
54a, a guide hole 854b which is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and which guides the cylindrical protrusion portion 833b while it is inserted therethrough, and a bevel tooth portion 854c which is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as its central axis and which forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a plurality of transmission gears 862 that are axially supported in a non-detachable manner by the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 and are engaged with each other so as to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862.
63, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and the central annular gear 86
A pair of load response gears 865 are arranged forward from the arrangement of the double cylindrical protrusions 814 and are supported by the double cylindrical protrusions 816 so as not to fall off.
and a torque limiter 866 supported by the double cylinder of No. 6 and having a variable resistance according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central ring gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and the cylindrical portion 8 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 is attached to its inner circumferential side.
21 is designed to be able to be inserted therethrough, and is provided with a transmission protrusion 864a protruding from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the recessed portion 831c so that it can be placed into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830, and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a coaxial double annular shape arranged on the inner diameter side and outer diameter side of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In an assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recess 831c, the rear end of the main body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b with a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or a dimensional relationship of interference fit.
and the inner rotating member 830 can rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmitting protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If the intervals are equal, it is possible to obtain the following without taking into consideration the attitudes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864.
The transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c can be assembled by aligning their positions.
When the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals) as in this embodiment, it is considered that there is little effect caused by the position of the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864 being shifted during assembly, so that it is effective to make them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly work will require an additional step of aligning the central circular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 before assembling them; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be utilized to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is disposed so as to be meshable with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 .
The torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the inner rotating member 8
The load response gear 865 is configured to be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is regulated (restricted) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the outer rotating member 840 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to cut the connection and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and FIG.
62 and 63 are exploded rear perspective views of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800.
, the decorative portion of the third action unit 800 is illustrated, and the portion for configuring the displacement is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the third operating unit 800 includes the inner rotating member 8
The cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830.
The decorative member 870 includes a first decorative member 870 covering one side surface of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covering the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The first covering portion 875 is formed of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material on the inside of the frame, and has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface.
When the surface faces forward, the image or the like is made visible to the player.

In this embodiment, an independent pattern or the like is drawn on each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875. Therefore, by changing the first covered portions 875 that emit strong light through light emission control by the illumination board 823 or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to execute a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 comprises a second skeletal portion 881 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed so as to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 is provided with a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall out.

The second covering portion 885 is fixed by screwing a metal screw into a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. The magnet Mg2 is attached to the metal screw.
By adsorption of g2, the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the combined state (particularly, in the combined state, see FIG. 32) can be ensured.

The second covered portion 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and a maximum of five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement in the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880 is changed. In other words, the pattern does not have clear up, down, left, and right directions, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, it is preferable that the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other.
In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the second covering portion 885 side is firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, it is possible to improve the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

In each second covering portion 885, the magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed between the front and rear by a switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw to which each magnet Mg2 is attracted is adjacent to the second covering portion 8 on the opposite side.
Since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of adhesion when they are integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet.
The strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

That is, since the first covering portions 875 are each painted with an independent pattern, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the position of the first decorative member 870 is slightly misaligned,
There is no possibility that the image or the like that is to be visually recognized by the player will not be visible. Therefore, the first covering portion 875
This can avoid a decrease in the performance of effects that utilize pictures drawn on the screen.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering part 875 side is weakened, the arrangement of the combined first covering parts 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with (stopping from) the lifting and lowering displacement, and vibrations that occur with (stopping from) the rotational displacement as an integrated rotational motion or a switching rotational motion. This allows the first covering part 875 to be displaced in a displacement manner that is not possible with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, and therefore the presentation effect of the presentation by the first covering part 875 can be improved.

In view of the above, in a combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged in close proximity to each other,
The state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces the front side is also referred to as a united state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) show an outer rotating member 840.
66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 which is displaced as a result of the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the drawings are shown in a chronological order from the rear and front views, and the individual combined state (FIG. 64(
66(a) and 66(a) show the inner rotating member 830 rotating by 45 degrees each time.

64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830.
The rotation angle of 30 is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 is in the individual combined state, as viewed from the front (FIG. 6
6) counterclockwise (this rotation operation is also referred to as a "switching rotation operation" below), rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and thus relative rotation of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is permitted.
The position is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60 ), and the inner rotating member 83
Only 0 rotates.

64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced and rotated about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830 and is simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830,
That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained.Therefore, the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level compared to when the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700).

In contrast, in the above-described inversion operation of the second operating unit 700, the bevel tooth portion 7
By generating a rotational motion with high acceleration utilizing the elastic recovery force of the covering member 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), the covering member 783c at the outer displacement end in the linear motion direction (see FIG. 59(b))
This is intended to reduce the impression that the 87's placement is fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved. Even in a situation where a period in which the change in the left-right position is small at the end of the outward displacement in the left-right direction continues (a period near the dead point of the slider crank),
By increasing the rotation speed of the covering member 787, the dramatic effect produced by the movement of the covering member 787 is maintained at a high level.

Since the switching rotation operation includes a radial displacement, it is conceivable that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, which may cause a deviation in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but in this embodiment, the radial load of the intermediate arm member 850 is generated in the same manner at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the respective loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviation in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800
Therefore, in order to avoid collision with the surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so as to be executable in a state in which the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state as determined by the output of the detection sensor that determines the attitude of the lifting arm member 801.

In addition, in accordance with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also displace radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, displace circumferentially.

As the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate and displace around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the virtual position line 832F.
F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is
50 (see FIG. 60), the imaginary position line 832F is set in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

The rotating member 834 rotates together with the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880.
Since either of the above will face the front side, the maximum angle θ31 will be the maximum value of the angle θ31.
When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as a maximum value due to a rotation of θ32E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 is configured to rotate half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation about the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the above-described action of the magnet Mg of the second action unit 700, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) acts on the decorative member 870,
It does not have any effect of retarding the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of 880.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an adhesive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, a gap is created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the adhesive force can be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the adhesive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

This reduces the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, allowing the drive motor 861 to be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is maintained by configuring the rotational angles of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 so as not to be constant.

For example, during the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, when the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned with a reduced diameter and capable of rotating together (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F rotates further by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which the inner rotating member 830 can rotate together with the decorative members 870 and 880. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is utilized to rotate the inner rotation member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870 and 880. With the above-described configuration,
When the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which the inner rotating member 830 can rotate together with the decorative member 87
Since the driving force required for rotating the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving motor 861 from becoming excessively large when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

Furthermore, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible,
This improves the degree of freedom in designing the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

During the switching rotation operation, when viewed from the front, the intermediate arm member 850 is rotated relative to the adjacent intermediate arm member 85
0. Also, the extension arm 84 on which the cylindrical portion 842a is supported is disposed.
2. Therefore, unless measures are taken, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base side rod portion 851 and the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and collisions during the switching rotation operation can be avoided.

In addition, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation.
0 and the extension arm 842 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

64 to 67 have described a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66 ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are engaged with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the above-mentioned reverse direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 continues in the same direction even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the united state) due to rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, a load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the torque limiter 866 restricts the rotation of the load response gear 865.
The attitude maintenance of the fifth embodiment is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the direction of rotation, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational action is also referred to below as the "integral rotational action").

The integral rotation action occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are positioned close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, and the integral rotation operation can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled so as to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60 ) causes a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880,
A unitary rotational movement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without displacement in the radial expansion direction;
However, there is a priority order for the operations, and it is not possible to instantly execute any operation in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation is continued in this state, a unitary rotation operation can be performed. Also, while the unitary rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, it is not possible to instantly perform the unitary rotation operation by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse direction) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotational direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, drives the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction.
An example of the drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a time series.
The voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is controlled to alternately repeat normal performance and reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During the flip performance, an action including a switching rotation action is executed, and during the normal performance, an action not including a switching rotation action is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870, 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is put into the extended state, and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and the control for normal performance is executed after the state of the movable parts is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with the surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the movable parts cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

As the driving direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in Fig. 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (a driving mode in which the integral rotating operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see Fig. 66(a))), and the reverse rotation in Fig. 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front (
In the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation is immediately performed.

First, the drive control during the normal performance before the reversal performance will be described. During this normal performance, the third operation unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861
The first decorative member 870 stops or only the forward rotation drive control is executed.
The rotational movement of the second decorative member 880 is always a unitary rotational movement.

Since no switching rotational motion occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members occurs, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or a protruding state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be rotated together at the same time as the lifting and lowering displacement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be caused to rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered while the integrated rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the driving motor 861 is forward rotation only, the detection target portion 8 of the outer rotating member 840
Each time the detection sensor 813 detects the position of the detection groove 44, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched.
By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any posture.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, the detection target portion 8 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.
When it is determined that the outer rotating member 840 has entered the inner space, the driving motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving in reverse rotation, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the driving motor 861 continues to rotate in the same direction, it will reach a one-unit state.
The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 stops or only the drive control of the reverse rotation is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since a switching rotation operation does not occur, no collision with the surrounding decorative members occurs, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or a protruding state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the driving motor 861 is reverse rotation only, the detection target portion 8 of the outer rotating member 840
Each time the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches, and the voice and lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861
The reverse rotation is controlled to continue until the detection target portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, the detection target portion 8 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.
When it is determined that the outer rotating member 840 is in the inserted state, the driving motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. By the forward driving, the third operating unit 800 executes the switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to retreat from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is,
The voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the display transitions to normal performance again. The restrictions on the drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described in the normal performance that was placed before the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is provided in the third operation unit 80.
Determination of switching of the rotation mode of the outer rotating member 8 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation)
The detection sensor 813 can also be used to determine the reference rotation angle of the rotation angle of the rotation angle sensor 813. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to the case where an individual detection sensor is used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the one-combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the operational presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of announcing a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced from the posture of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the one-combined state is understood by the player as the second
The decorative member 880 is designed not to be significantly affected by the positioning in the rotation direction.
Even if the rotational direction arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the content that is perceived by the player as a single combined state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the image in the united state differs depending on the rotational direction arrangement, the integral rotation action for adjusting the posture after reaching the united state can be omitted, so that the drive control up to the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both of the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861 .
Therefore, compared to the case where the operating mode is fixed to forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of presentation modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 is
The opening extends from the rear end where the tube fixing portion 812 of 10 is disposed to the front end where the illumination board 823 is disposed, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and a terminal is connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, and the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 are configured to be able to control the emission of light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 is reflected by the light-transmitting decorative member 824.
The light source 824 serves to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges out toward the front side at the center of the bulging portion 824.
24a functions as a part that is visible to the player in the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated into the interior of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in Figure 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side in an individual combined state (see FIG. 69 );
Since it is possible to switch between a combined state in which the decorative member 870 is positioned at the front (see Figure 32), and a combined state in which the decorative member 880 is positioned at the front, the light LD1 can be switched between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the plated portion 87 of the first skeleton portion 871 is
1a, the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by reflecting the light LD1 toward the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be favorably increased.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly disposed, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illumination board 823.
The relationship between the arrangement of the first covering portion 875 and the arrangement of the second covering portion 875 may change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. For example, while the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 may easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and it may be difficult to perform the performance of rotating the decorative members 870 and 880 together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is made concave, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and is designed so that its center is positioned near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces in the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of its radius of curvature, illuminating the area near the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the plurality of lights L
D1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be stably irradiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation.

Furthermore, the first skeleton portion 871 includes an outer plated portion 871b that is plated in the same manner as the plated portion 871a and is disposed outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plated portion 871b in the same manner as the plated portion 871a.
Since the outer plated portion 871b is disposed further back than the plated portion 871a, the degree of light emitted by the outer plated portion 871b can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the intensity of light visible outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but since the joints are not completely blocked, not all of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, between the member edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering portion 885 disposed opposite to the member edge 875a, a gap VA1 is formed to an extent that the internal structure can be visually confirmed in FIG.
Since the covering portion 875 protrudes outward from the frame, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 8
It can be reflected by 71b.

Furthermore, a large gap VA2 that exceeds the area required to avoid component interference with the metal rod 832 is formed between the outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885.

First, the gap VA2 prevents the metal rod 832 from colliding with the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby allowing the length of the metal rod 832 to be sufficiently secured, and the metal rod 832 can move the linear motion member 8
33 and the rotary member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screws that are inserted through the skeletal portions 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light passing through the transparent portion of the framework 871, 881.
Since 80 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light passing through the gap VA and traveling outward is
It is perceived as light passing through equally spaced positions on a circle and traveling radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner by executing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870, 880. This makes it possible to execute a light emission effect in which the light radiating in the radial direction from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is visible in a rotating light emission mode, while eliminating the need to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b (for example, while keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the second skeletal portion 881 is entirely made of a light-transmitting resin material, thereby suppressing the reflection of the light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, the light LD1 that is irradiated into the frame of the second covering portion 885 can be the light (weak light) that is far from the optical axis, and therefore the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, and therefore the intensity of the light that is emitted radially in the radial direction from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

Within the frame of the second covering portion 885, a light diffusion decorative portion 885c is arranged in the circumferential direction. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c is made of a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and has a light diffusion process formed on the inside.
The light incident on the light diffusing decorative portion 885c is refracted and acts to emit light from the entire surface of the light diffusing decorative portion 885c.

This surface emission makes it possible to uniformize the light that is viewed through the light diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction.
This creates an effect in which the players can see them as one.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the performance of the presentation when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player can be improved.
This integration can be achieved by making the light diffusing decorative portion 885c appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction, thereby improving the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 adjacent to (in contact with) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 is
It protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see Figure 32), the extent to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

In this way, in the case where the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, when the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side, the first covering portion 87
This makes it easier to prevent the color of No. 5 from entering the field of view.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), there is a larger gap around the third operation unit 800 compared to when the other operation units 600, 700 are both in the extended state (see FIG. 33, F9).
Therefore, without any countermeasure, the third operation unit 80
The visual impact of the zero side is easily diminished.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, in the combined state, the end surface 885 of the second covering portion 885
Since 85b1 is disposed rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. This makes it possible to make the second covering portion 885 easier to see than the first covering portion 875 in the united state, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation that switches between the individual combined state and the united state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding protrusions 831b, if the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 becomes large.
The load transmission tolerance of the torque limiter 866 must be increased.
This tends to hinder miniaturization.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotation member 830.
This embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are only the front end portion that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end portion that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other portions. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, and makes it easy to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central circular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress displacement to the front side based on the central circular gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the rear surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular annular protrusion having an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and at its outermost diameter portion, a protrusion portion 822b having a semicircular cross section and protruding toward the rear surface side is formed in a circular annular shape.

Since the protrusions 822b come into contact with the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a comes into contact with the sliding member 825. This can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

Furthermore, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected in the event of an increase in weight due to the fastening screws can be reduced accordingly.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. In describing this fixing, reference will be made to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal portion 871 into a female screw of a fastening portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875, thereby fastening the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal portion 871.
The protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the skeleton portion 871 is inserted into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 is inserted into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.
This can be done by screwing it into the

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal portion 881 into a female thread of a fastening portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885, thereby fastening the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal portion 881, and then
The protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the skeleton portion 881 is inserted into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 is inserted into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.
This can be done by screwing it into the

In this manner, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834.
70 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement.

During the fixing process, the protrusions 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby determining the arrangement of the skeletal portions 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) and preventing the skeletal portions 871, 881 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

Furthermore, since the skeletal portions 871, 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the positioning of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the positioning in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly determined, thereby preventing the rotating member 834 from falling off from the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed in the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike the case where the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed in the rotating member 834 itself, the labor required for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

That is, for example, during disassembly, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the skeletal parts 871 and 881 be released from the positional restriction on the linear moving member 833, but also the rotating member 834 can be released from the positional restriction on the linear moving member 833. This can improve the work efficiency.

The combined operation of each of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Fig. 70 and Fig. 71. Fig. 70(a) to Fig. 70(d) and Fig. 71(a) to Fig. 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 for explaining an example of the combined operation of each of the operational units 600 to 800 in chronological order. Note that in the explanation of Fig. 70 and Fig. 71, Fig. 33 to Fig. 3
Please refer to 5 as appropriate.

70 and 71, the first operation unit 600 has its respective performance surfaces 661a to 661c, the second operation unit 600 has its respective performance surfaces 661a to 661c,
The decorations on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the operational unit 700 and the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operational unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable by letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is written vertically on the first performance surface 661a, and
On the third performance surface 661b, the word "Activate" is written horizontally, and on the third performance surface 661c, "!" is written along the longitudinal direction.
" symbols are illustrated, respectively.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "War begins," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 is illustrated with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated with the words "Patience!?"

In addition, inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, different alphanumeric characters (
The second covering portion 885 is illustrated with five integral "O" symbols.

In Fig. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for effect (see Fig. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in FIG. 70(b), the first operation unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operation unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state.

By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, it is possible to successively replace the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotation operation is continuing or after it has stopped, it is possible to protrude the third performance surface 661c into the interior of the center frame 86, thereby making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled so as to increase the likelihood of a big win in the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player who views the operation of the first operating unit 600.

When the integral rotational motion is stopped, the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second motion unit 700
The decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be visually recognized as a single unit.

This increases the attention drawn to the first decorative member 870 which is placed close to the second operating unit 700, and by starting a display performance related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operating unit 800 to a performance standby state, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that is to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 that is disposed close to the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 that is to be noticed is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned on.
By turning off the ED, it is possible to draw attention to any one of the first decorative members 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation movement of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation movement of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched in sequence in the rotation direction, so that the player can visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle.
0 are sequentially reached by integral rotational motion, and the first decorative member 8 to which light is irradiated is used.
70 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 are both provided with vertically long decorations, and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 faces the first performance surface 66 in the performance standby state.
As with 1a, the surface is formed to face in an oblique direction, which enhances the effect of being visually recognized as one unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be viewed as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

In FIG. 35, an intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated, while in FIG.
As shown in the figure, when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, thereby enhancing the effect of them being visually recognized as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the third pattern display device 8
Due to the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of 1 appear to expand further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

Furthermore, this allows the player to view the second presentation surface 661b as being positioned at the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second presentation surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b is the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second
By forming it with content related to the decoration of the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being viewed as a single unit can be enhanced.

In FIG. 70(c) and FIG. 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 8
70(d) shows the reversal operation of the second operation unit 700.
In the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is covered by the covering member 78 of the second operating unit 700.
Since the covering member 787 is not disposed on the left or right outside of the first operating unit 600, the inverting operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed even with the first operating unit 600 in the extended state.

When the covering member 787 is turned over, the left and right secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are different from each other.
As mentioned above, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 will be facing the front, making them non-distinguishable, but as shown in Figure 70 (d), different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content distinguishable to the player.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can recognize the content of "Pinch!?", and in this state,
By stopping the driving of the operation unit 700, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the second operation unit 700.

For example, when informing that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG.
By controlling the reversal so as to return to the state shown in Figure 70(c), and when the lottery result has not yet been announced or when it is to be announced that the lottery is a jackpot, the reversal is continued from the state shown in Figure 70(d) to the state shown in Figure 71(a), thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71A, the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state.
Above, a second minor decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are
Since the characters are arranged close to each other and written horizontally, it is easy for the player to see them as one. In addition, the content of the characters, which includes the meaning of "attack activated", makes it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In the first operation unit 600, in the presentation standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first presentation surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, so that the player can easily see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time", so that the player can easily see them as one.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the performance surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600
is configured to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

71(b) to 71(d), a first operating unit 600 and a second operating unit 7
71(b) , the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state.
71(c) is different from the state shown in FIG. 71(c) in that the third operating unit 800 performs a unitary rotation operation, resulting in a different arrangement of the first decorative member 870. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is performed from, the player can visually recognize the state as the same unitary state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of the winning or losing of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the pattern fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the winning or losing of a jackpot from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance ( FIG. 71(b
71(c) ) or the state shown in FIG. 71(d), the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not he will win the big win can be maintained in the same manner. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operational unit 800 can be kept high.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can be used to create a decoration that can be viewed either alone or as a single unit in combination.
The decorations formed on the operation units 600 to 800 are not completed for each of the operation units 600 to 800 alone, but are designed as decorations related to each of the operation units 600 to 800.

The execution of drive control of each of the operational units 600 to 800 is influenced by the arrangement of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each of the operational units 600 to 800 is executed at an inappropriate timing, the member operations may collide and cause a breakdown, so drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

For example, the change of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state is controlled to be executed when the state of the second operating unit 700 may be any state, and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operating unit 600 to an intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operating unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operation unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operation unit 600 may be in any state and the third operation unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operating unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operating unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 can be any, and the rotation action is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation action is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to an extended state and rotation is not performed or only a unitary rotational motion occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As described above, the drive control of each of the operational units 600 to 800 is not possible at any arbitrary timing, but is controlled so as to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made to Figs. 1 to 25 as appropriate. First, the front design member 162
An example of the decoration applied to the will be described.

Fig. 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. Fig. 72 is different from the content shown in Fig. 5 above in that the front design member 162 has a light-transmitting window portion 162d.

As shown in Figure 72, the front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300 has a front panel formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral areas.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1 with a central area cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, and since it is possible to provide a difference in the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, it is possible to increase the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed for the first purpose of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, his or her line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162, and for the second purpose of eliminating the dissatisfaction of players that they cannot grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that take into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

In addition, the means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be disposed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate.
The appearance of the front design member 162 may be changed according to the light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as an LED, or a pattern or picture may be directly drawn on the front design member 162.
Alternatively, the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the second window 162 may be formed as an opening.

In addition, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in Fig. 72, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, a shape in which the parts extending outward left and right are omitted so that the left and right width is equal to the left and right width of the range that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

In addition, the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, but is not limited to this, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the area with high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of multiple locations partitioned by lattice-shaped or ladder-shaped portions, the area may be partitioned in a manner in which multiple small windows are aligned, or the area may be partitioned in a manner in which window portions are randomly arranged. In addition, the shape of the window portion may be configured to be variable.

The surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a surface shape formed with many projections and recesses such as a surface shape formed by embossing, a surface shape formed with many grooves or protrusions, or a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface.
Any shape can be used as long as it can ensure higher light transmittance than the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 (corresponding to the formation area of the sealing member SL1), and various shapes can be adopted in addition to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above.

73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. In FIG. 73, a difference from the content shown in FIG. 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 which is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 which is formed continuous with and above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window 162d1 and the sub window 162d2 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336. That is, as shown in Fig. 73, the main window portion 162d1 is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336, and is formed into a V-shape that is inclined upward toward the left and right outside in accordance with the inclination of the second flow path constituent portion 335.

This allows the spheres flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained inside the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the spheres flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right position as the ball passing hole 163b.
The entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the side wall portion 33
The visibility of 4a is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a compared to cases where a design is assumed to be visible to players, such as when a good-looking shape is required.

The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the seal member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easy for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, the lighting timing of which is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down, thereby providing the player with a comfortable game experience.

FIG. 74 shows the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 30 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG.
75 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 650 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG.
74 and 75 are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 300. In Fig. 74 and Fig. 75, the difference from the contents shown in Fig. 23 and Fig. 18 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in Figure 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), a portion of the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 located at the front position can be seen below the opening/closing plate 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b as viewed from the direction of FIG. 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can be sure that the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 is detected by the probability change detection sensor S.
It can be easily predicted whether the light passes through E11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The view toward the upper protruding portion 376 is the inner surface 314b of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310.
This is also ensured by the fact that the surface 1 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined outwardly to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the balls flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

In addition, the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of the upper surface portion 314 being configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front.
When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed downward (viewed in an angled direction) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased.
While this has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of making light visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface 314, it has the disadvantage that, since the projected area of the upper surface 314 is larger, the area over which balls flowing below are hidden from the player's view may become larger.

In other words, while the fact that the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it moves forward is advantageous for the light production, it may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow downward.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby making it possible to reduce the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path component 336 from the second flow path component 335, and to improve the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in Figure 74, when viewing the sorting device 300 from a downward perspective (angled perspective), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window portion 162d2. Therefore, without any measures, the player will be forced to adjust his/her eye position or line of sight so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable game experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs light to the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, so that a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. Therefore, whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is turned on can be determined by measuring the distance between the sub-window portion 162d2 and the straight line LL1.
This can be seen by looking at 62d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, and allows the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light, which is the color of the sealing member 313, is reflected through the sub-window 162d2.
When it reaches 2d2, the sub-window portion 162d2 can be made to glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference between the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window portion 162d2 before the light reaches it, so that the player can easily tell whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not.
The sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is disposed) may be provided with a light diffusing treatment. In this case, it is possible to make the sealing member 313 easily emit light uniformly.

75, the straight line LL1 is disposed at a position (height position) that does not overlap with the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is disposed above the range in which the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336 can be disposed.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the straight line L
L1 is placed.

Furthermore, as described above, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the flow of the ball is hindered by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so that the flow range of the ball is shifted to the left and right outside of the left and right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, on the straight line LL1, balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (for example, the game area), balls entering the specific winning hole 65a, and balls flowing through the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path configuration portion 336)
By disposing the spheres flowing down the window, it is possible to prevent the light from being reflected and refracted by the spheres. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is reflected by the sub-window portion 16 regardless of the flow-down state of the spheres.
It is possible to stably reach 2d2.

In addition, the positioning of the seal member 313 in this embodiment may be advantageous to the player because it allows the seal member 313 to remain difficult to see unless the player changes his/her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always within the field of view, light enters the player's eyes every time the light-emitting means 351 emits light, which may be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light-emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range where the light intersects with the straight line LL1, a light diffusion process is formed on the fixed member 161, so that the light can reach the sub-window portion 162d2.
It may be configured so that it is difficult to reach the

In this case, unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in Fig. 74 to look directly at the seal member 313, it is difficult to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a game preference, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in Fig. 74, so that the game burden on such a player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the sub-window 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of the front and back surfaces is subjected to light diffusion processing, or that an air bubble is provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light that is visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased, making it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1, has been described. Next, the light irradiated from the LEDs arranged at four positions on the left and right at the bottom row, among the LEDs that make up the light emitting means 351, will be described.

FIG. 76 shows the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG.
76 is a cross-sectional view of the slide displacement member 370, the lower member 380, and the detection sensor SE1.
, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown in phantom lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inner sides of the bottom row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the left and right outer sides of the bottom row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in Fig. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is disposed inside the light diffusion surface 332e. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is executed in which the light diffusion surface 332e formed in the range extending from left to right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is executed on the rear side of the branching point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off into the special bonus detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit, when a ball flows through the branching point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned as it flows in front of the light diffusion processed surface 332e, which emits light over a range extending to the left and right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily grasp how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-rear protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 75). Although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protruding portions 318, the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so that light near the optical axis can pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

Therefore, a portion of the light irradiated from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 (see Figure 75).

Since the light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire range of the lower side surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14 ), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340.
This makes it easier to distinguish between balls flowing down inside the third flow path configuration portion 336 and out balls that pass through the outlet 71 (see Figure 75) and flow down the lower side of the third flow path configuration portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is on the outer side (upper side) of the light diffusion processed surface 332e and is aligned with the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b.
Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that is continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off to the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit, if a ball flows through branching point BP1, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 333b will emit light above and in front of the ball, and the ball flowing through branching point BP1 will be hidden by light diffusion processed surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball has flowed through branching point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the upper surface portion 3
14 light diffusion processed surfaces 314c are provided (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front and rear, the light diffusion processed surfaces 314c emit light that makes the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from above (see FIG. 74).

Further, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed up to the lower back surface of the second flow path forming part 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming part 335, the ball blocks the light (light diffused by the light diffusion processed surface 340) to create a shadow, making it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 17 and FIG. 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, a situation may occur in which the light is hidden by the sphere.
Since the optical axis of 1d (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) is positioned outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branching point BP1 (see Figure 76), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is blocked by the sphere placed at the branching point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the flow state of the balls in the sorting device 300, the light diffusion processed surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by emitting light from the outer light emitting means 351d.
When the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17) located in front of it is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure for smoothing the downward flow of the spheres is adopted as a device for preventing the light from being blocked by the spheres arranged at the branch point BP1. This structure will be described.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is disposed in the rear position (see FIG. 20), the ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down passes straight down and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and when the sliding displacement member 370 is disposed in the front position (see FIG. 18), the ball guide section 37
The liquid flows down along the inclination of 1b to the outside on the left and right and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down with the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the front position,
The through hole edge portion 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so as to connect the left and right outer edges of the special-effect detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside.
Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the through-hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow down outward in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier to prevent a ball that begins to flow down to the outside left and right along the slope of the ball guide portion 371b from flowing back inward left and right or bouncing after being bridged to the through hole edge portion 382a, thereby making the ball flow down more smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed on the inside of the front-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is disposed on the back side of the light diffusion surface 319a cannot occur, so that a situation in which light is hidden by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply arranged offset to the left and right, but are designed with an intentional difference in the positional relationship between the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front-to-back positions in front of them and the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By making the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches different positions, the front-to-back positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light-emitting means 351c is made to emit light and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is made to emit light are separately explained, and the explanation was made on the assumption that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off, but in actuality, the light emission control of each of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed one by one, and control modes such as both being turned on or both being turned off may also occur. Below, the light emission control patterns and the appearance of the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 at that time will be explained.

77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. In Fig. 77(a) to 77(d), in order to facilitate understanding, stripes as geometric lines of the light diffusion processed surface are omitted, and different combinations of on and off of the light emitting means 351c, 351d are illustrated, and the areas that are brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c, 351d are illustrated with a hatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) shows a state in which both the light emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, and FIG. 77(b) shows a state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on.
77(c) illustrates an inner lighting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. 77(d) illustrates an outer lighting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on.
Both illumination states are shown in which the light emitting means 351c, 351d are both illuminated.

In the both off states, as shown in FIG.
33b is not illuminated, and the visibility behind it is ensured, but it gives the player a dull impression.
It becomes difficult to distinguish the ball from the out ball flowing down the back (bottom) of 36.

In the internal lighting state, as shown in Figure 77 (b), the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing the visibility of the out balls flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1,
It is possible to improve the visibility of the flow of the balls at the branch point BP1. Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged in front of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in an unilluminated state, it is possible to prevent the branch point BP1 from being blinded by light.

That is, in the internal lighting state, the area from the third flow path configuration portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333.
This makes it easier for the player to grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branch point BP1. Also, because light is lit on the points that require attention in grasping the manner in which the ball flows down, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points, thereby reducing the stress of the player while playing the game.

A light diffusion surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), and is configured to make it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 to see behind them from their line of sight.

When the rear is viewed through the front frame portion 333, the front frame portion 333
The rear can be seen through the two inner sides that face each other at the front and rear.
Since there are many boards that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

The same thing happens when the front frame portion 333 is aligned with a line of sight (
The same can be said for a player who tries to see through to the back side using an inclined line of sight (usually directed toward detection sensor SE12) from a central position on the left or right side of the front side.

That is, in this embodiment, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface and the left and right inner side surfaces (side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) of the front frame portion 333 are arranged on this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to visually confirm the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 can make it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-rear direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the external light is on, as shown in Figure 77 (c), the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 333b are illuminated, so that the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branching point BP1 are hidden by light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed on the rear side (lower side) of the second flow path constituent portion 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335 can be improved.
In other words, when the outside is lit, there is an effect of increasing the player's attention by improving the visibility of the ball passing by the front side, but the visibility of the branching point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG.
The situation where the light is lit is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, and although the effects of both can be produced, they do not always complement each other with advantageous effects.

For example, because the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

The control manner for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c and 351d may be exemplified in various manners.
For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game where there is a possibility that the ball will enter the probability of a ball entering ...

Also, for example, control may be performed in such a manner that both lights are alternately switched on and off regardless of the type of round game.

In addition, the timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example,
1c, 351d may be controlled to light up, or the winning holes 63, 64, 140, 65
When it is detected that the ball has entered the through gate 67, the light emitting means 351c, 351a,
Alternatively, control may be performed so that d is lit.

Returning to Figure 73 to Figure 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls in the vicinity of the specific winning hole 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in Figure 73, the upper side of the extension part 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65
Since balls that deviate to the left or right outside of b and land on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b can be made to flow to the left or right outside (the side opposite to the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged), it is possible to prevent balls on the extension portion 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, the flow pattern of most of the balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, which makes it possible to prevent the balls from bouncing up (bouncing high) near the outlet 71. This makes it possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path configuration portion 336 located behind it from being hidden by the bouncing up balls, thereby preventing a decrease in visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed in a flat shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is formed in the center side (the partition plate portion 338).
The slope is downwards as it approaches the upper part of the strait.

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 becomes, so that the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the balls rolling from the second flow path forming portion 335 to the third flow path forming portion 335 become.
This makes it easier to distinguish between the spheres flowing toward the flow path configuration portion 336 and the spheres flowing toward the flow path configuration portion 336.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is configured to guide all balls placed on the upper surface of the plate 65b to the specific winning hole 65a.
The shape is such that the balls are poured into a bowl, but various geometrical features have been designed to ensure that the flow of the balls is not slowed down.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with a ball flowing rearward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the ball inwardly to the left and right.
The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate extending in the horizontal direction, but is a plate extending from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163.
It is formed like a plate that extends in a downward sloping direction inward to the left and right in accordance with the vertical displacement of the ball as it flows toward the target.

That is, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is arranged rearward as it approaches the left and right inner side, and is located further rearward than the left and right outer ends where the ball riding on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.
The left and right inner parts, which come into contact with the balls delivered to the receiving member 163, whose floor surface is lower than the opening and closing plate 65b, extend in a direction inclined downward.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height in the entire length of the ball), and to guide the ball smoothly. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship with the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can contact the guide plate portion 163a2 at the center height position in the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end portion (rotation base end side portion) of the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway.
At the center position of the left and right where the height position of 63a is the highest, the height position of the opening and closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface portion 163a slopes downward as it approaches the left and right sides, and is configured so that the top and bottom are reversed at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside of the left and right width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position for switching the manner in which the balls flow down between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (the front frame portion 33
It is designed to be located directly above 3.

In the left and right inner range of switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the ball's rolling surface, the ball's rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed, while the ball's rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b can occur with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b, collides with the receiving member 163 (its inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, after the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll, the ball can be prevented from climbing off the opening/closing plate 65b and onto the receiving member 163.

Furthermore, the ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but when the ball begins to abut against the lower surface 163a, the ball is caused to flow outward to the left and right along the left and right slope of the lower surface 163a.

In addition, the ball is unlikely to fall near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) restricts the ball from falling, so it can be said that the ball is also unlikely to bounce. However, the ball may bounce due to collision with another ball.

In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range outside the left and right pair of switching positions EP1 (the side where the ball passing hole 163b is arranged)), the receiving member 1
The ball is prevented from rolling from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163.
The ball's rolling can occur with little resistance. For example, due to collisions with other balls or vibrations from the gaming machine,
Even if the ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a is accelerated forward, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, thereby preventing the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allowing the ball to flow down smoothly, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, the backward rolling of the ball from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball first flows backward and then switches to a left-right flow, but a rolling mode in which the ball flows backward and then switches to a left-right flow from the range between the pair of switching positions EP2 and EP3.
1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, the flow is not in a path that intersects at right angles, such as in the forward/backward and left/right directions,
Since the ball can flow along the hypotenuse connecting the ends of a front-rear line and a left-right line, one end of which is located at the same position, the ball's rolling path can be shortened (in a right triangle,
The length of the hypotenuse is shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides.)

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backwards over the left and right positions of the opening and closing plate 65b, in this embodiment, the balls are configured to flow forwards in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, making it easier to avoid the flow of balls stagnating even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in Figure 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the outer left and right ranges of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see Figure 16), and has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward in the central left and right range of the pair of switching positions EP1 to leave space to the front.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device for lowering the possibility of balls getting stuck in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a.
It is possible to ensure the vertical width of the space in which the balls are placed.

This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, and to avoid the ball becoming caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path forming portion 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal) and is positioned to abut against a ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path forming portion 335 (5.
The mounting position is 5 mm higher than the mounting position.

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized in order to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sphere is located at a position off the center height of the symmetrical protrusion 161f.
By abutting against the floor, the ball can roll more smoothly compared to a case in which a load in the direction of lifting the ball or a load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If the visibility of the branch point BP1 is allowed to decrease, the symmetrical protrusions 16
By forming the thickness of 1f to be approximately the entire length of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from contacting the sphere at a position that is off the center height of the sphere.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in detail.
78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In Fig. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown as being transparent with imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is also visible.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, and its front end portion is also in contact with the discharge hole 33 that is arranged to face the front side position (see FIG. 78 ).
7, and the gap is maintained. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the objective of preventing the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the front end of the slide displacement member 370 from being scraped or deformed due to contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that the position shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent the ball from being pinched and stuck between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

That is, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so that the load acting on the ball has a directional component toward the left and right outside, and the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging.

Next, referring to Fig. 79, a description will be given of a device for guiding the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Since the player's profit can change depending on the arrangement of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is required to be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG.
The middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 38 along the line IXb-LXXIXb
79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Fig. 78. In the description of Fig. 79, Figs. 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in Fig. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the balls can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the balls rolling on this inclined surface, the configuration is such that the posture change of the sliding displacement member 370 that changes the inclination of the inclined surface is suppressed.

79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at the left and right ends but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380. As a result, the pair of ball guide portions 371b separated into left and right by the recessed portion 372 can be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported by both ends), so that the posture change of the sliding displacement member 370 can be suppressed.

In other words, even if the load applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide portions 371b is different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on them), each ball guide portion 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, so that tilting to the left and right (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the ball guide portions 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372,
That is, the sliding displacement member 370 can be restricted from being lifted up or from being tilted backward.

This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in an appropriate state, reduces the displacement resistance to displacement in the forward and backward directions, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-shaped portion that protrudes forward at the base end side of the upper protrusion portion 376, and the upper surface along which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it moves outward to the left and right.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of semispherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the semispherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to be in point contact.

As described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, along which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, so that the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is decomposed into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can cause the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the left-right direction (a direction that intersects with the front-to-back direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

At this time, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 and the protrusion portion 383 of the sliding displacement member 370 as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also makes it easier for contact friction to occur, which may result in functional problems.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction with a ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, the forward/backward displacement may be poor (e.g., no displacement may occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the protrusion 383 are configured to contact each other at a point, so that the area where frictional force occurs can be reduced, and contact friction can be kept small. As a result, even when the ball is placed on the ball guide 371b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced in the front-rear direction satisfactorily.

In particular, when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the forward/backward displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is such that the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.
Since this is a displacement action that switches the state to one in which the ball can enter the hole, by executing this displacement action well, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantage.

Furthermore, by making the displacement speed of this displacement operation high, it is possible to produce the effect of changing the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) illustrates a state in which the ball rests on the slide displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the ball is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in Figure 80(a), the ball that has rolled backward and reached the sliding displacement member 370 rotates forward. With the ball on the sliding displacement member 370, the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 13) is operated to displace the sliding displacement member 370 forward and backward to the rear position.
When the slide displacement member 370 is driven, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the rotation direction (guiding direction) of the ball (reverse rotation direction).

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the ball, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven with the ball on it, the ball is detected by the probability change detection sensor S.
It is possible to make the configuration such that it is easy for the water to flow down to E11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 to the side of the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 does not only have a function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape portion that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 arranged upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position, the ball that abuts against the long front-rear projection 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, the curve of the end of the long front-rear projection 317 is made into an approximately arc shape with a long front-rear width compared to the up-down width (see FIG. 18), so that the abutting ball is subjected to a load whose downward component is larger than the forward component. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that abuts against the long front-rear projection 317 from bouncing back in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path configuration part 336.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the direction in which the ball flows downward is left to the shape of the sliding displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370
Since the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface that curves outwardly to the left and right, the ball is guided outwardly to the left and right along this curve.

Here, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, if a ball flowing in the forward/backward direction collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with its momentum, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backward by the load at the time of the collision, and the state may switch to one in which the ball can pass to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the front-rear long protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, thereby correcting the speed direction of the ball downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

In addition, since the load applied from the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the spring force for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position (the spring force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 13)) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that spring force can be reduced. As a result, the design freedom of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed downward outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-to-rear long protrusions 317. This reduces the forward and rearward speed of the ball, stabilizing the positioning due to inertia caused by its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow back under the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the ball comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 when the ball is lower than the height position at which it comes into contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317.
80(a) ), the portion that comes into contact with the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, and the third flow path component 33
6. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protruding portion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to move from the upper side surface of the ball guiding portion 371b onto the lower bottom surface 336a, thereby reducing the degree of backflow of the ball.

In addition, the front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate portion 338 side is formed into an acute angle shape,
This is not a collision mode in which the flat surface collides head-on with the ball in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78).
The load applied to the ball from 76 is large in the left-right direction and small in the front-back direction.

This allows the ball that abuts against the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly in the outward direction to the left and right, so that when a ball is placed at the branch point BP1 and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from a rear position to a front position, it becomes easier to avoid a situation in which the ball becomes caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, causing a malfunction.

78, 79(b) and 79(c) will be described. Since the sliding displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the sliding displacement member 370 may be displaced in a forward tilting direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion formed with the upper and lower protrusions 374 extending from front to rear on both the left and right sides, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over that front-to-rear width. This makes it possible to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are formed long in the front-rear direction, the sliding displacement member 3
When a load is applied to tilt the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 can be prevented from concentrating on one point.
It is possible to suppress deformation (increase rigidity).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where a ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as the protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a of the sliding displacement member 370 is in contact with the partition plate portion 338.
The front position is set as a position where the partition plate portion 3 abuts against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 3.
The rear side surface of the slide displacement member 370 does not have a light diffusion surface, and the surfaces arranged to face the protrusions 378a at the front and rear and to be able to abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This makes it possible to stabilize the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front flesh portion of the protrusion 378a.

In this way, since the driving force is transmitted to the left-right central portion of the sliding displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner.
This makes it easier to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in its position in the rotational direction about the up-down axis during displacement in the forward/backward direction.

Furthermore, by pressing the front side surface of the protrusion 378a against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the attitude of the sliding displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotational direction about the vertical axis.

Here, when maintaining or returning the posture of the slide displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 with the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a, since the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a is small, a load is applied locally, which may result in a deterioration in durability of the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if a rotational posture deviation about the vertical axis occurs in the slide displacement member 370 before the front side of the protrusion portion 378a is pressed against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the posture deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the process of the front side of the protrusion portion 378a coming into surface contact with the rear side of the partition plate portion 338, and the posture can be corrected to the appropriate posture.

The partition plate portion 338 against the protrusion portion 378a not only serves the purpose of aligning the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting against it when it is displaced in the forward/backward direction, but also functions as a part that receives the forward tilt load applied to the sliding displacement member 370.

That is, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball guide portion 371
When a load is generated in a direction that changes the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on b, the protrusion 378 is inserted within the gap allowed for the sliding displacement member 370.
When a begins to be displaced (displaced in the forward tilt direction), the protrusion 378 a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 .

In this case, a resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, so that the displacement of the protruding portion 378a is suppressed.
It is possible to suppress changes in posture.

Next, there will be described details that have not been fully explained regarding the respective operating units 600, 700, and 800. First, as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a).

Moreover, Fig. 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Fig. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figs. 82 and 83 show a state in which the dish-shaped lid part C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is disposed at the right end of the displacement range.

81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetric shape in consideration of the load applied to the rotating member 620 during the execution of an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat sides that receive a load when the rotating member 620 is stopped. The first side surface 621a, the second side surface 621b, and the third side surface 621c are formed in order from the side closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the base end side protrusion 617a that protrudes from the front cover member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end side protrusion 617a).
The displacement of the base end protrusion 617a of the proximal end 21a is restricted, so that the displacement range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displacement range).
reference).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620,
The front cover member 612 is formed in a shape that can come into surface contact with the tip end protrusion 617b that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the tip end protrusion 617b).
The displacement of the side surface 621b is restricted by the tip-side protrusion 617b, so that the displacement range of the rotating member 620 is defined (for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displacement range,
See Figure 40.

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620,
The third side surface 621c is formed in a shape that allows it to come into contact with a rectangular box portion 618 that is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each of the side surfaces 621a to 621b of the rotating member 620
1c comes into contact with the corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, and the displacement is restricted.
A plurality of contact points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of 20.

The purpose of forming multiple abutment points in this manner is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of abutment among multiple points, and to suppress deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the front-to-rear load that may occur on the rotating member 620 among multiple points.

The load in the front-rear direction that may occur in the rotating member 620 is, for example, the second decorative rotating member 660.
Examples of such loads include a load in the forward direction due to the weight of the rotating member 620, and a torsional load due to inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilt direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load generated at the abutment position where the load is received becomes smaller as the abutment position is farther from the cylindrical portion 622. With one objective of reducing the load generated at the abutment position, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the cylindrical portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 is provided with a recessed portion 621d that is recessed in the direction away from the drive motor 631 to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e that is thickened to include the range that includes the recessed portion 621d and that abuts against the base end protrusion portion 617a as a rotating part centered on the tubular portion 622.

The base end side of the rotating member 620 is narrowed by forming the recessed portion 621d, and therefore, without any countermeasure, it is possible that the rotating member 620 may be broken due to an impact load.
By forming the recess 621d, the effect of the recess 621d on the strength can be offset, making it easier to prevent the rotating member 620 from breaking.

Furthermore, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range that includes a point where it can abut against the base end protrusion 617a, the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end protrusion 617a can be improved.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG.
84 and 85 show a state in which the width direction end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed to have a width (circumferential length) that is three times or more longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear side. Here, forming the width of the extension portion 634b to be sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

That is, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640, so that a load in the forward falling direction can be applied to the rotating member 620. Without measures, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-back direction, which may result in malfunction.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension portion 634b arranged to face the back surface of the fixed means 610 is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620. This allows the rotation member 620 to be connected to the fixed means 610 from the extension portion 634b via the cylindrical portion 634a.
The load applied in the forward tilt direction of 0 can be received over a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area over which the load is generated can be ensured). This reduces the load received per unit area, making it possible to prevent the extension portion 634b from being damaged and suppress the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, while a structurally advantageous effect can be achieved by ensuring a long width length of the extension portion 634b, the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the terminal position on the initial position side (see Figure 40) due to loads such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each member is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force caused by the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force caused by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear about the axis O1 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from the rear).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity (
In this embodiment, the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned at a position separated to the left and right from the vertical position of the axis O1, which serves as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a receive a load due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 in a direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625, so that the gear teeth portion 6
A load is applied to the rotating member 620 via the load sensor 25 in a direction rotating the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from the rear.
That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a rotational load due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the rotating member 6
The load is configured to rotate the bearing 20.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, when the extension portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the drive motor 6
Even if the current supply to 31 is controlled to be cut off, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can be caused to reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 show the elongated guide hole 6
16 is a rear view of the dish-shaped cover portion C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 chronologically illustrate the rotational operation of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

FIG. 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, and FIG.
) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, FIG. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described.
The electric wiring 618 is fixed at one end to a connector 618c disposed on a board accommodated in the
d is arranged to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged so as to detour around the underside of a partition portion 619 formed to protrude from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a.
The electrical wiring 618b is configured to have a length that takes into consideration the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having the opening C2a, and is disposed between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to bend under its own weight.

The partition portion 619 includes pillar portions 619a formed at both upper and lower ends, and plate portions 619b that are protruding in a long plate shape so as to connect the pillar portions 619a.
The plate upper portion 619 b abuts against the front side surface of the base member 611 .

A female screw is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening formed in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening the base member 61
1 and the front cover member 612 are fastened and fixed.
This not only serves to limit the position at which d is disposed, but also serves to ensure the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described, with particular attention paid to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the description will be focused on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, which starts from FIG. 86(a). The dish-shaped lid C2 is shown in FIG. 86(a), FIG. 86(b), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 87(b),
The downward displacement occurs in the time series shown in FIG.

From the performance standby state (see FIG. 86(a)), the width direction end of the extension portion 634b contacts the detection sensor K
In the operation up to the state where it is placed in the detection groove S1 (see Figure 86 (b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

As a result, before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starts to move downward in earnest, the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition portion 619, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2
This can prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 during the downward displacement process.

In particular, the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)).
In this embodiment, the opening C2a faces the side (lower side) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition portion 619, so that even if the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition portion 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, the orientation of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. At the end of the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618
In this way, unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (e.g., flapping due to slack in the front-rear direction) can be avoided while ensuring the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself.

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is set to be equal to or longer than the extension portion 6
34b.
Even if a partition is not provided between the electrical wiring 618d and the extension portion 634b, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from coming into contact with the extension portion 634b and receiving a load.

In this embodiment, the dish-shaped cover portion C2 is in the state where it is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88).
In the embodiment, the extension portion 634b is disposed away from the connector 618c (disposed on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634).
Since a large area can be secured for arranging the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the electrical wiring 618, the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.

Next, the description will be focused on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, which starts from Fig. 88. The dish-shaped lid part C2 is upwardly displaced in the time sequence of Fig. 88, Fig. 87(b), Fig. 87(a), Fig. 86(b), and Fig. 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced upward, the opening C2a faces downward, not toward the partition 619, from the lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the partition 619. This allows the dish-shaped lid C2 to be displaced upward while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

The orientation of the opening C2a is such that, even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 has passed the lower end of the partition portion 619,
While gradually rotating, the downward facing state (the state in which the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) is maintained (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so that it enters (is housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the arrangement of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.
Since the electrical wiring 618d is prevented from being positioned between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 when the gap between them becomes narrow, the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d can be reduced.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d
Since the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be disposed closely to each other, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be improved.

In addition, the restriction of the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is realized not by using a separate member such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotation member 650 to the main body member 651, but is also used to restrict the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a cable tie to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike a cable tie, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be arranged on an appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being stretched or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a sector-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotation member 650 and the second decorative rotation member 660.

In Fig. 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown by solid lines, and the box-shaped member 661 is shown by imaginary lines to make the inside visible for easy understanding.

89 shows an example of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and shows the dish-shaped lid C2 having an opening C2a through which the electric wiring 618d is inserted. The electric wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 into a wiring connected to a terminal of the electric lighting board 653 (see FIG. 41) and a wiring connected to a terminal of the electric lighting board 662.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a, and is provided with a wiring insertion hole 663a formed in a long hole shape through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b formed on either side of the insertion hole 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

Since the diameter of the wire retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) is
The wire retaining plate 663 can prevent the wire from falling off.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 is
The wire retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a are thereby fixed together.

In this way, the wire retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the axis perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition, the wire retaining plate 663 has a function of temporarily fixing the electric wire 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d is inserted through a long wire insertion hole 663a of the wire retaining plate 663.
The second decorative rotating member 660 is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by passing through the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660 and being pinched. In this embodiment, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not one or more rotations, but is a rotation of less than half a rotation (about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and not to twist the electrical wiring 618d.

It is considered that the load (load in the twisting direction) applied to the electric wiring 618d when the second decorative rotation member 660 rotates is large near the wire insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur. In this embodiment, the wire insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape, and the electric wiring 61
Since the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being sandwiched in the wire insertion slot 663a, the electrical wiring 618d is allowed to move within the shape of the slot.

Therefore, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs in the electrical wiring 618d, the electrical wiring 618
The load can be released by displacing the electric wire 618d within the wire insertion slot 663a, thereby improving the durability of the electric wire 618d.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described.
Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation of the rotating member 620, the electrical wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 is twisted in the rotation direction of the main body member 651. That is, in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, a twist is generated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from behind.

As the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 also displaces counterclockwise when viewed from behind, thereby reducing the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616.
Here, in the time series of FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d is connected to the connector 618
The slack between the plate-shaped lid portion C2 and the plate-shaped lid portion C2 changes from a large slack state to a small slack state.

Correspondingly, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as a state change from a state in which the terminal of the electrical wiring 618d on the illumination board 662 side is arranged on the back side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to a state in which the terminal is arranged on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electrical wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

That is, in the time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d is connected to the main body member 651
The state of the internal electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack (a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is located on the rear side) to a state in which there is a small amount of slack (a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship of the magnitude of slack is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d in association with the operation of the first operating unit 600.

a twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d at a portion disposed inside the main body member 651, and a twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d at a portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655;
The relationship between these two will be explained.

In the time series of operations shown in FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, while the electric wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 is twisted in the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 ( FIG. 8
9 (counterclockwise when viewed from the bottom in the direction of looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)
That is, they twist in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be minimally twisted when the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for performance, and is maximized when the electrical wiring 618d is in an extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause a problem (a performance standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is intentionally left loose to reduce the load on the electrical wiring 618d.
a) is in a state in which it is preferable to reduce the slack of the electrical wiring 618d between the
88), the twist caused by the rotational movement of the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the illumination board 662 is maximized to suppress the slack of the electrical wiring 618d (the electrical wiring 618
The displacement of d can be suppressed.

In this way, as a means for improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, there are two methods: one is to minimize twisting and generate sufficient slack, and the other is to reduce the slack by twisting and allow the surrounding members (e.g., the extension portion 634
b) and a state in which contact with the electrical wiring 618d is avoided.

As another embodiment, in the time series of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction of looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so that the twisting deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, a description will be given of the characteristics of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operating unit 600. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b), and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide elongated hole 616, the rectangular box portion 618, and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide long hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are illustrated typically, and the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order, with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 being omitted for ease of understanding.

90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 for performance (see FIG. 40), FIG. 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), FIG. 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 43), FIG. 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is disposed at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82), and FIG. 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is disposed at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82).
An arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 45) is shown.

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the protruding decorative portion 652b is a rectangular box portion 6
18 to the right. This allows the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, which makes it easy for the line of sight to be blocked by the outer edge member 73, thereby reducing the visibility of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

On the other hand, if the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while being positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the protruding decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b is changed prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b (see Figs. 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction about the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, due to this change in posture, after the protruding decorative portion 652b retreats from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(a)), the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 65
The downward displacement of 2b is initiated.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced in a direction approaching the rectangular box portion 618 (to the right) along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 (see FIG. 91(b)).
There is a possibility of collision with 8.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface thereof, which is recessed along the shape of the elongated guide hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the location where the elongated guide hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the elongated guide hole 616. In this manner, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind, which is to avoid collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the posture of the protruding decorative portion 652b continues to change, so that the protruding decorative portion 652b can be displaced in a direction away from the rectangular box portion 618.
In this embodiment, in the transition from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the protruding decorative portion 652b
The leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the protruding decorative portion 652b is designed to be equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the protruding decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618.

In the state shown in FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in the posture of the protruding decorative portion 652b are in opposite directions and offset each other.
The left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b was kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91 (b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement associated with the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction on the left and right, so that the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, although the protruding decorative portion 652b is always rotating about the axis O1 as a change in posture, the player feels that the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in the up-down direction with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) from FIG. 90(a) to FIG. 91(b), and
In (b) through (c) of FIG. 92, it can be made to appear as if it is being guided to undergo large displacement in the left and right direction.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference between the structure (shape of the member) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This allows for the execution of a surprising presentation.

That is, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is as if the protruding decorative portion 652b were a rectangular box portion 618.
This makes it appear to the player as if the character is jumping out from the right side to the left.
In the narrow range to the left and right of the center frame 86 (see Figure 30), where left-right displacement would be insufficient, the player can be shown an unexpected displacement that jumps out to the left and right, thereby increasing attention to the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left and right displacement of the axis O1 and the left and right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b are compared.
However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the axis O1 is a rotation axis of a part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the dish-shaped lid part C is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis.
The left and right displacement of the axis O1 has the same meaning as the left and right displacement of the axis O2.
This may be understood as a comparison between the left and right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left and right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Fig. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Fig. 85. Fig. 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Fig. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the opening 645a
The gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at the location where the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed and communicated.

As shown in Figure 93, the diameter of the wire retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wire retaining plate 663, so that the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 can be regulated by the wire retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are arranged on the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93).
The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is disposed with a small gap between a step formed in the semi-cylindrical portion 661 and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and
This allows for a stable arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by 51d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 is
The wire retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a are thereby fixed together.

As shown in Fig. 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is disposed rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore disposed closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 2) in the front-rear direction than the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is disposed closer to the opening 511a (see Fig. 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is disposed in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it overlaps with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is expanded to the right to the player.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (for example, see Figure 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 and toward the front, making it easy to view independently of the display of the third pattern display device. Conversely, this highlights the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side, appear to the player (creating the illusion) as part of the display.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b)
This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is a portion formed from hard resin, and its shape cannot be changed during construction; however, by controlling the light-emitting mode (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 to change, it is possible to change the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative part 652b is arranged so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 2
9), it is possible to easily create an effect that makes the player see (create an illusion) that the display area is expanded to the right.

Next, a detailed description will be given again of the second operating unit 700. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the up/down displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during the sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the oblique forward/backward direction), and is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a displacement in the up-down direction and a displacement in the forward and backward directions.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to be lifted and displaced in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, in addition, the left side rear plate member 750 and the blind decoration member 768 are also attached to the lifting plate member 740.
40, and prevents the lift plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The right side of the lift plate member 740 is supported by the pivot arm member 720.
The right end of the lift plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (upper front inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the lift plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-rear direction, and makes it possible to limit the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The performance device 780 supported by the lift plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction.
The guide for the zero displacement is configured separately for the gravity direction and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration in which the guide is inclined obliquely in the front-rear direction.

The extended state of the second operating unit 700 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a covering member 787
That is, in this embodiment, the second operation unit 700 is in a controllable state to execute a displacement (see FIG. 57) to switch the state of the extension state.
In the intermediate performance state of the second action unit 700 (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second action unit 700 (see FIG. 33), the second action unit 700 is controlled so as not to cause a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 are configured to be disposed at positions overlapping with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 can be improved.

An explanation will be given of the ingenuity of the configuration of the performance device 780 with respect to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, a drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is disposed at the left-right central position of the performance device 780 (a position where the center is disposed directly above the center of the insertion tube portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the attitude of the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782 itself, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the drive force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see Figure 95) of the second operating unit 700, which is capable of performing a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787, the left and right positions of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 are set to be equal to the left and right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right side.

In this way, while the support for the right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is provided solely by the pivoting arm member 720, which can displace the cylindrical fastened portion 724 in the left-right direction as a support position, when it is expected that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to fluctuate, that is, when a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 can be set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to a position to the right, thereby stabilizing the position or posture of the performance device 780.

The control for executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 is performed by the second operating unit 7
This is only performed when the covering member 787 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to set the second operating unit 700 to an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is executed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate performance state.

95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction to such an extent that it overlaps, as viewed in the front-rear direction, with the inner ends of a pair of front support members 760. This makes it possible to hide the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support members 760 from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the player from understanding that the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to the player being aware of the arrangement and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is visually recognized as overlapping in a line with the fixedly disposed three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in a front view (see FIG. 94).
It is arranged along the lower edge of the pattern display device 81, spanning the left and right length of the lower edge.

On the rear side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, a substrate to which an LED is fixed on the front side is disposed, and the light diffusion member 778b is illuminated by the light emitted from the corresponding LED.
78b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This light-emitting effect can be used to make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 look as if it is divided by light, or to make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 look bright with light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to combine the function of hiding the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see Figure 54) with the function of providing a light-emitting effect in conjunction with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covers the area (left side area) away from the rear of the light diffusion member 778b with a gap on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a member for hiding the horizontal member 742 across its vertical width, and is disposed so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the horizontal member 742 and itself.
That is, the electrical wiring for supplying electricity to the performance device 780 is connected from the rear of the concealing decorative member 768 to the
The light passes through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742, and is guided to the performance device 780 side, where it is connected to a drive motor 782, an illumination board 778a, a detection sensor 778d (see Figure 56), etc.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b
Since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is arranged in an overlapping manner, it is configured to easily block the player's line of sight, making it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768, which are originally arranged for light production,
By placing cover 742a in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

Furthermore, since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap front-to-back with the horizontal member 742 when in the standby state for performance (see Figure 31) or in the intermediate performance state (see Figure 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

In consideration of this, in this embodiment, the range in which the horizontally elongated member 742 is formed is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front.
Since 78 enables the electrical wiring to be concealed, the electrical wiring can be prevented from being seen by the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, extended state).

96 and 97 show a transmission device holding plate 777, a top-bottom inversion member 781, and an intermediate arm member 783.
96 is a front view of the linear motion plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785. Fig. 96 illustrates a horizontally disposed state of the up-down inverted member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are disposed on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and Fig. 97 illustrates an inverted vertically disposed state of the up-down inverted member 781 (see Fig. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but are formed by inverting the upper and lower members 781.
The curved portion 783d is curved upward from the lower surface of the intermediate arm member 783 when the inverted member 781 is in the vertically disposed state.
In order to avoid collision between the drive gear 782a and the retainer 782, the retainer 782 is curved so as to protrude in a direction away from the drive gear 782a.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the lift-up/lower-up/lower-up reverse effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the covering member 787
In order to make it possible to see inside through the wall, the outer shape of the covering member is shown diagrammatically in imaginary lines.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged near both the left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other.
87 directly together, but acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This makes it possible to prevent, for example, when one covering member 787 malfunctions, the other covering member 787 from also malfunctioning.

In addition, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the up-down inversion member 781 starts to rotate from the upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

As a result, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move away from each other in the left-right direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg.
Compared to the case where it is necessary to release the magnet's adhesion when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction, it is easier to avoid a situation where the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or the displacement becomes unstable, causing malfunction, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in Fig. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides in the left and right directions, and the effect of this will be explained. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed are arranged on the same side in the front-to-rear direction (the front side when the up-down inverted member 781 is in the upright vertical position, see Fig. 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 is changed from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A) to an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59C), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front is
Since the covering member 787 on the right side when viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction, a forward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force as the metal screw that is located in close proximity to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) moves forward, whereas the covering member 787 on the right side when viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction, so that a forward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force as the metal screw that is located in close proximity to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) moves forward.

Furthermore, for example, when the up-down inversion member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side when viewed from the front rotates backwards, so that as the metal screw that is located in close proximity to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) moves backwards, a rearward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, whereas the covering member 787 on the right side when viewed from the front rotates forwards, so that as the metal screw that is located in close proximity to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) moves backwards, a rearward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and the linear motion plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining the posture is as follows:
It is configured so that the front and rear directions are the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when loads in opposite front-to-back directions occur on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnet Mg on the left side is positioned in a lower position, so that the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides are positioned in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left axial rotation member 785 is positioned on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement imparted to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state will cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to rotate about a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotation direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.
In a configuration in which the bevel teeth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed and the covering member 787 is rotated vigorously by utilizing the elastic recovery of the bevel teeth member 785c after the magnet Mg is released from its attraction, the lifting and reversing performance device 77
It is expected that vibrations in the rotational direction will be easily generated in the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting/reversing performance device 770, which may result in damage to the lifting/reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in durability of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.
Therefore, in order to stabilize the displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 over the long term,
It is believed that measures will be necessary.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from each other from the attracted state,
A covering member 787 that rotates and a main body member 77 that supports the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture.
The direction of the load generated between the magnet Mg and the linear plate member 784 is the same on both the left and right sides. Therefore, the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state is the lifting and reversing performance device 770.
may be displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, this can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (displacement having a forward/backward component), and damage to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 due to the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adsorbed state can be avoided.

In the second operation unit 700, the direction of the sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-right direction) and the direction of the covering member 7
87 are arranged close to each other (vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 ), the displacement start direction (left-right direction).

Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent one displacement from occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when the slide displacement of the performance device 780 is executed, it is possible to easily prevent a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to displace from a state in which they are disposed close to each other (displacement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the third operating unit 800 will be described in detail. First, the intermediate arm member 850
99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.
9(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99 (a) and 99 (b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at a thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99( a ), the thickened portion 852 is disposed between the tip end bar portion 85 of the adjacent rotating member 850 .
3 and disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out the front side along the axial direction.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out like the recessed portion 852b, but the amount of hollowing out is relatively small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to prevent the amount of deformation from becoming excessive even if the base end reinforcement portion 852a comes into contact with the tip rod portion 853 formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852, and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has curved recesses 852c formed on both short side surfaces thereof.
The curved portion 852c is formed in a shape that can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate and are arranged close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the combined state. Therefore, which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm members 850 is in the curved shape portion 854d is different from the short side surface of the intermediate arm members 850 in the combined state.
The proximity of these two to each other depends on which combined state they form.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any combined state, so that the state change to the combined state can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, by designing the curved shaped portion 852c and the curved shaped portion 854d so that they can abut on each other, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being applied locally between the curved shaped portion 852c and the curved shaped portion 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by a lifting arm member 801. The direction of the lifting and lowering displacement and the linear motion member 833 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 are determined by the following factors:
and the direction in which the rotation member 834 starts to move are not necessarily perpendicular to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), since the imaginary position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set in a different direction at 72 degree intervals, it is impossible for the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834 to be perpendicular to the direction of the upward and downward displacement.

Therefore, there is a possibility that an unintended rotational motion (integral rotational motion or switching rotational motion) may occur due to the load or inertia generated when the third operating unit 800 is raised or lowered. The following describes measures taken to prevent this malfunction.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, which diagrammatically illustrates the displacement of the metal bar 832 and the intermediate arm member 850. As shown in FIG.

Figure 100 shows the virtual position lines 832F of the metal rod 832, including the virtual position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state and the virtual position line 832F that has been rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front until the angle between the virtual position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

That is, in FIG. 100, the angle θ51 is 45 degrees, and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, at the start of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 rotates the rotating member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotation of the rotating member 834.
The movable member is configured to be slidably moved.

The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 is the amount of change in the intermediate arm member 8
This means a rotation angle of 50, which corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a, 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the meshing of the gear teeth upright, and the rotation response changes depending on the size of this gap. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

That is, during the time period from the angle θ51 in the combined state to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is merely filled, and the meshing rotation does not start.
The rotating tip side portion of the third operating unit 800 slides and moves radially outwardly along the imaginary position line 832F.

That is, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individual combined state) starts, the rotation operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly a sliding movement along the metal rod 832 occurs.

101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In the explanation of FIG.
101, the third motion unit 800 in an assembled state is illustrated, and the torque limiter 866 and the magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third motion unit 800 are illustrated.

Here, the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (e.g.,
The rotating member 834 is configured so that rotation does not occur even if the rotating member 834 rotates by about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100).

As a result, as in this embodiment, a plurality of first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880
Even though a magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state and an adhesive force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, and therefore the magnetic force is likely to disappear.
Since the displacement at the start of displacement from the combined state of 80 is merely a displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), it is easy to maintain the combined state due to magnetic force.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (e.g., rotates by approximately 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 is configured to cut off the connection and reduce the resistance (to rotate freely) when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied during rotation in the forward direction.
In the rotation in the reverse direction, the torque limiter 866 is configured such that an idling rotation AR1 occurs so that the resistance is reduced (idling) in the rotation in the reverse direction. The torque limiter 866 is configured as a pair of the forward and reverse rotations configured in opposite directions.

In detail, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value in a clockwise rotation as viewed from the front, and the torque limiter 866 spins idly when the allowable value is exceeded. On the other hand, in a counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front,
It is configured so that idling rotation AR1 occurs, that is, idling.

In addition, the right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 in which the torque limiter spins idly when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, while generating resistance until the applied load reaches an allowable value when the load exceeds the allowable value, generating a switching rotation DR1 in which the torque limiter spins idly when rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In this way, a pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, making it possible to perform the switch rotation operation in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotation direction is not generated, the torque limiter 8
Since resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via a load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the door 66, it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction.
The magnets M are arranged in a concentric manner when the magnets M are combined into a circular ring shape.
g2 generates an adhesive force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 arranged adjacently and closely.

With this configuration, when the magnets Mg2 are disposed on both sides of the specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (i.e., when the second covering portions 885 are disposed adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides
In comparison with the case where both of the second covering portions 885 receive a biasing force from the magnet Mg2 in a direction toward the specific second covering portion 885, it is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering portions 885 in the combined state from becoming larger at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

Furthermore, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time the rotational movement around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have moved apart to the extent that the combination caused by the magnetic force is released (see Figure 100).Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it becomes a resistance force to the sliding movement of the second decorative member 880 radially outward.

In addition, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, it is possible to balance the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2. In other words, it is possible to make the arrangement of the third operating unit 800 more stable than when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

The shape of the five second decorative members 880 is the same for all five, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load having a front-to-rear component to the second decorative members 880.
When displacement from the combined state begins or just before the combined state is reached, a magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction, making it easier to avoid the second decorative member 880 vibrating in the front-to-back direction.

Fig. 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Fig. 102 illustrates an arrangement state corresponding to the individual combined state of the decorative members 870, 880, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member 840 arranged on the rear side is illustrated by imaginary lines.
is visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is moved in one direction (
The intermediate arm member 850 is configured so that at least one portion can be secured to restrict rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two portions.
A configuration for restricting the rotation of 0 will be described.

First, there is a contact protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The contact protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at an intermediate angular position between adjacent extension arm portions 842, and the inside of the contact protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at an intermediate angular position between adjacent extension arm portions 842.
The recess is made in a direction parallel to the axial direction.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so as to be able to abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a recessed portion 852b which reduces the deformation resistance of the thickened portion 852 to elastic deformation (see FIG. 99).
See (a)). Similarly, the abutment protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutment protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutment protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so that damage to the abutment protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The abutment protrusions 845 are not disposed at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but are omitted from the angular positions where the detected portion 844 is formed. This shifts the positions of the abutment protrusions 845 and the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, and allows the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 to be set in the axial direction of the main body 841. This facilitates the design of the molding die.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the abutment protrusion 845 is provided in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die.
Although the formation of the base end reinforcing portion 852 a is omitted, in this embodiment, a base end reinforcing portion 852 a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 .

The base end reinforcing portion 852a is in contact with the tip end bar portion 853 (FIG. 9) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850.
9(a)) and is configured to be able to come into contact with the distal end rod portion 853 when the distal end rod portion 853 over-rotates, thereby preventing the intermediate arm member 850 from over-rotating.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out like the recessed portion 852b, but the amount of hollowing out is relatively small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to prevent the amount of deformation from becoming excessive even if it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to abut against the curved portion 854d on a surface, and this can prevent excessive load from being generated locally between the curved portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are disposed opposite to each other, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is caused not only by contact with the abutment protrusions 845 but also by contact between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 and the base end side reinforcement portion 852a of the adjacent rotating arm member 850.
and the tip side rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other.
Over-revving of 50 is restricted.

On the other hand, even if the abutting protrusion 845 is omitted, the adjacent rotating arm members 850
The curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other,
By configuring the base end reinforcing portion 852a and the tip end rod portion 853 to come into contact with each other, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted.

These contact structures are configured to be related to each other (arranged in a circular manner) among the five rotating arm members 850. Therefore, at first glance, since the formation of the contact protrusion 845 is omitted in one location and there is little configuration for restricting the rotation of only the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location, it may seem as if the load upon contact is concentrated. However, in reality, the five rotating arm members 850 interact with each other to distribute the load upon contact.

This makes it possible to prevent the durability of a single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the contact protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing extremely.

In addition, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846, which extends in a circular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear side end portion of the abutment protrusion portion 845, is also omitted at the point where it overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutment protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for simplifying the design of the molding die, similar to the omission of the formation of the contact protrusion portion 845 described above. However, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is that even in the area where the formation of the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, the adjacent rotating arm members 8
This is realized by (the structure supporting) 50.

That is, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a correction of the misalignment of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) (see FIG. 65(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rotating arm member 850
Even if the arrangement of the tip of the base end bar 851 (FIG. 99) is unintentionally shifted forward or backward,
The rear side surface of the rotating arm member 850 (see FIG. 13(b)) is disposed opposite the annular plate portion 846 and is capable of abutting therewith, so that the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this abutment.

This function cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, since there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846.
Since the rear side surface of the tip side rod portion 853 is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842,
Even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is shifted forward or backward, the tip side rod portion 853
The rear side surface of the rotating arm member 850 is disposed opposite to and can come into contact with the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842, and the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this contact.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. As a result, the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced for all of the rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of a part of the annular plate portion 846.

FIG. 103( a ) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .
FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.
103(b) shows the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 85 in a combined state.
0 relative orientation.

The state shown in Figure 103(a) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in Figure 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (in this embodiment, 180 degrees) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed), and the state shown in Figure 103(b) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in Figure 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (in this embodiment, 180 degrees) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed).

Comparing the one-unit combined state with the individual combined states (see Fig. 64(a) and Fig. 66(a)),
Since the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 adjacent to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, there are differences such as the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutment protrusion 845 being on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d being reversed.

In order to accommodate this difference, the abutment protrusion 845 has an axisymmetric shape when viewed from the front, based on the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d have an axisymmetric shape when viewed from the front, based on the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar to the shape of the curved portion 852c, so that the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or in the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is sandwiched from both sides by the abutting protrusion portion 845 and the curved portion 854d.
Since the thickened portion 852 can be prevented from being displaced in either rotation direction, the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained, and the combined state can be easily maintained.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Fig. 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost radial positions (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the combined state), and Fig. 105 illustrates the combined state.

Fig. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Fig. 105, and Fig. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Fig. 104. The third operating unit 800 is configured by a metal rod 832 and an intermediate arm member 850.
The front-to-rear arrangement can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is disposed on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be reduced.
is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This allows the intermediate arm member 850 to function as a functional member rather than a decorative member.
This can prevent the 0 from standing out, and improve the appearance of the third operation unit 800.

When exposed (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance member that reflects light due to the gloss of its surface, and therefore can improve the performance effect of the light produced by the light irradiated from the outer light emitting part 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will block the light entering the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking the light and causing an unsightly appearance.

In this manner, in the present embodiment, in the midst of the switching rotation operation in which the metal bar 832 is exposed (see Figs. 104 and 107), the range in which the light effects are performed can be expanded by configuring the metal bar 832 to be capable of reflecting light.
The reflected light can be seen by the player not only in the area behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the metal rod 832 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the area ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832 arranged to extend radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front is exposed and visible.

In addition, as a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a includes a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having a light diffusion shape formed in a circular ring shape on the inner circumferential surface.
The light emitted from 3a can be irradiated onto the light diffusing shape portion 824b, and the light diffusing shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in a circular ring shape.

As a result, not only the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 but also the
Even during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement is released, the light diffusing shape portion 824b is visible as a bright ring, making it easier to maintain the presentation effect utilizing the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 has not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a in a front view.

The extension portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870, 880 in the combined state and therefore does not function as a decorative portion, but it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism portion during the switching rotation operation shown in Figure 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to cover and conceal mechanical parts that are difficult to use for presentation, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

Furthermore, since a decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulge portion 824a but also to the front side of the extension portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be made visible in the area where the mechanism portion is shielded and concealed, thereby improving the presentation effect.

An example of the drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the lifting arm member 8
The third operating unit 800 is moved up and down by the driving control of the driving motor 86.
The relationship between the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the drive control of the third operating unit 1 will be described.

According to this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform the vertical displacement and the rotational displacement independently of each other. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, there is a possibility that the third operating unit 800 may undergo a rotational displacement in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case,
The presentation effect may be reduced if the posture of the third operating unit 800 changes or if the combined state of the third operating unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870, 880 are displaced radially outward against the adhesive force of the magnet Mg2).

In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, an integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be executed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 during its upward and downward displacement as a performance action, thereby preventing a decline in the performance effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load is applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see FIG. 101), so that the combined state of the third operating unit 800 can be prevented from being released.

Furthermore, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform lifting and lowering displacement and rotational displacement, the posture of the third operating unit 800 may be controlled in advance to adjust the posture in the rotational direction of the third operating unit 800 so that the posture of the third operating unit 800 is such that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by lifting and lowering displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detection target portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68 ) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as an integral rotation operation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operating unit 800 will be designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state in which the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid a state in which this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, when the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases and exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the intermediate arm member 832 displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 from the combined state.
The direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is along the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 832. In other words, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of the metal bar 832, it is possible to make it difficult for resistance to the rotation of the metal bar 832 to occur, and the metal bar 832, the linear motion member 833, and the rotating member 834 are easily moved.
The resistance generated between the intermediate arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be kept small.

A state in which the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 are disposed at the radially outer end positions (FIG. 104)
In the case of the intermediate arm 850 shown in FIG. 1, the direction of displacement of the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm 850 (for example, the supported hole 854a) is aligned with the direction of rotation of the metal rod 832, so that it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm 850 move in parallel, particularly when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation is not performed properly.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which, once the switching rotation operation is started, the driving is continued at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached.
When the decorative members 870 and 880 are disposed at the radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104 ), they are subjected to inertia such that they rotate about the metal rod 832 .

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870, 880 rotates, and the bevel tooth portion 834a and the bevel tooth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (FIG. 65(b) and FIG. 67).
(see (b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is not in the radially outer end position, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is in contact with the metal bar 832.
This makes it easier for the metal rod 832 to displace in the direction along the axis of the shaft 834, making it easier to keep resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832 small.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected portion 844 does not change, so the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be realized by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling to stop the drive at that drive time, but depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the performance effect may be reduced.

In response to this, instead of a control mode that stops the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control may be adopted in which it is determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has started when the detection state of the detection target part 844 by the detection sensor 813 has changed (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive of the drive motor 861 is stopped before the decorative members 870, 880 have reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation is performed.

As described above, in terms of drive control, the switching rotation operation is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state, but the integral rotation operation can be executed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

As for the drive control, the switching rotation operation can be performed regardless of the arrangement of the rotation direction of the third operation unit 800, so that it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the presence or absence of the big win notification as described above in FIG.
The switching rotation operation can be performed not only from the state in which the detection target portion 844 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66( a )), but also from a state in which the detection target portion 844 is not disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection target portion 844 is not detected by the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed.
Since the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the object enters the detection groove 13, it is necessary to devise a control method.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed in a drive period that is set in advance as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813.
Alternatively, the driving of the driving motor 861 may be controlled so as to continue until the detection sensor 813 detects the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operating mode transitions to a united rotation operation, and by the detected part 844 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a period of time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, when the switching rotation operation is performed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operating unit 800 and the one-unit combined state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, the detection sensor 813
The driving continues until the detection target portion 844 enters the detection groove.

In the combined state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement is changed.
Even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until 44 enters, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

68, the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switching rotation operation is completed can be minimized because the detectable portion 844 is already disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844 disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 to retreat from the detection groove, so the length required for control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the freedom of rotational positioning of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action to switch from a normal performance to a reverse performance, is improved, and while the return action may normally be prolonged, the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance is shortened.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in rotational positioning of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detectable portion 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational positioning is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing a part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switch rotation operation as the remaining return operation.

Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, a plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 8
We will provide a comprehensive explanation of the common configurations adopted in all 00 versions, including the reasons for the differences in how they are adopted.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800 will be confirmed, and the reasons for the differences in their adoption modes (number of sensors, shape of detected pieces, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device provided in the first operating unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). Since the arrangement and posture of the other displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, are determined when the posture of the rotating member 620 is determined, the arrangement and posture of the multiple displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. This allows the number of detection devices to be reduced.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection groove allows the detected portion 735 to enter. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which correspond to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700, respectively.

The detection sensor 713 that judges the performance standby state is necessary to judge the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 that judges the extension state is necessary to judge the arrival at the upward displacement end position, as well as the reversing operation of the lift-down reversing performance device 770 and the position shift due to the influence of unintended load. The detection sensor 713 that judges the intermediate performance state is necessary to judge the arrival at the up or down position in the intermediate performance state, as well as the position shift due to the influence of unintended load. The reversing operation and the influence of unintended load will be explained in order below.

First, the inversion operation will be described. In the second operation unit 700, the gear cam member 734
In addition to the upward and downward displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational movement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is also configured to be capable of an inversion movement (see Figure 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if, for example, only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the proper performance operation may not be performed.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operation unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the up/down direction by performing a reversing operation of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and the position of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 can be properly maintained by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), so the correction of the positional deviation during the reversing operation is performed as follows:
This is easy since it is sufficient to rotate the gear cam member 734 to the end of its motion.

Next, the influence of unintended load will be described. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lift plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, a longitudinal displacement of the lift inversion performance device 770 occurs based on the lift plate member 740 for displacing to a longitudinal position corresponding to the vertical position of the lift plate member 740 (see Figs. 52 to 54).

Therefore, as the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction by a load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may change the attitude of the gear cam member 734. Examples of loads applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine include an impact load when a player hits the gaming machine, a load when the front frame 14 is opened or closed, etc.

Since there is a possibility that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-to-back width direction, for example, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, it will not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and there is a possibility that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will not be able to be maintained in the correct position.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the second operation unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, in the intermediate state, a load is applied to the gaming machine in the front-rear width direction, and the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting/reversing plate member 7
When the vertical position of the gear cam member 734 changes, the gear cam member 734 changes its position accordingly.
It is possible to determine that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (so that it reaches an intermediate performance state), thereby allowing the positioning of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be maintained properly.

In addition, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state is connected to the detection target portion 73 of the gear cam member 734.
When the detection target portion 735 is in the state where the detection sensor 713 is disposed, due to an unintended load,
When it is determined that the detection target portion 735 has come off the target position, in this embodiment, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detection target portion 735 has come off the target position. However, it is possible to determine whether the detection target portion 735 has come off the target position by first rotating the drive motor 7
31. This makes it possible to prevent the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 from colliding with each other.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is determined that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of causing the performance device 780 to displace upward, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it will be understood that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of causing the performance device 780 to displace downward, and if the drive is continued to cause an upward displacement again and the drive is stopped when the detectable part 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

In addition, the detection target portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 is the extension portion 634
Since there is no structural purpose as described in b, it is formed as a plate-like portion having a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (
56), which respectively correspond to an upright vertical arrangement state and an inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see Figure 59(a)) or an inverted vertical position (see Figure 59(c)).

For example, when only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright inverted member 781) is employed, it is possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state, and it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state changes due to an unintended load, poor control, or the like, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not preferable in terms of presentation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d is provided which corresponds to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state is present, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and the driving motor 782 is driven and controlled to return to the combined state based on the determination result, thereby returning the covering member 787 to the combined state. This can improve the presentation effect of the second operating unit 700.

In addition, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and a detection target portion 844 can enter the detection groove (see FIG. 60). The third operating unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (shared) for determining the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped (switching rotation operation).

In addition, the detection target portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is the extension portion 634
Since there is no structural purpose as described in b, it is formed as a plate-like portion having a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is disposed for the purpose of detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and the number of the detection sensors is only one, so that it is insufficient to determine deviation from the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, even if a displacement occurs that releases the combined state when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detection target portion 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then controlling the return to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a certain period of time (e.g., a short period of time) at regular time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66 (a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103 (b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, thereby preventing the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from being maintained in a released state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained.
In the second operating unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of the covering member 787.
In the operating unit 800, a similar technology is adopted in which the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. However, the design concepts of the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-rear direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a serving as the axis of rotation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to the case where the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, it is possible to reduce the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 moving toward and away from each other, thereby reducing the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to operate.

On the other hand, in the third operating unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 applies a load in the rotational direction to the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that would cause the decorative members 870, 880 to wobble in the rotational direction due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to appear to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29).
By displaying a position corresponding to where the protruding decorative part 652b will be placed near the right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the protruding decorative part 652b as a single display performance.

In the second operating unit 700, the first minor decorative surface 787a2 is disposed at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIG. 26
52). For example, near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81,
By displaying the position where the first minor decorative surface 787a2 is to be arranged, the display area and the first
This makes it easier to view the secondary decorative surface 787a2 as a unified display presentation.

In the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 8 that are individually combined and visible to the player are
75 is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is arranged so as to surround it in a front view. Therefore, for example, by displaying the position where the first covering portion 875 is arranged in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to easily visually recognize the display area and the first covering portion 875 as a unified display performance.

In addition, if the third operation unit 800 is driven and controlled so as to rotate integrally, it is possible to perform a roulette-like operation in which each of the first covering portions 875 rotates. In this case, for example,
By moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covering portion 875 in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covering portion 875 as a single display performance.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment includes a first flow path configuration part 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path configuring portion 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path configuring portion 334 in the first embodiment, a configuration disposed on the right side will be illustrated and described, but a configuration disposed on the left side can also be the first flow path configuring portion 2334. In addition, the configurations may be different between the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path configuring portion 2334 and the other is the first flow path configuring portion 334.

Fig. 108 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Fig. 15. As shown in Fig. 108, the first flow path forming portion 2334 of the sorting device 2300 has a through hole 2410 formed in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the curved protrusion 334b.
The slide member 24 is guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be slidably displaceable back and forth.
20, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be capable of generating a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420.

108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is illustrated by a solid line.
The driving force of 30 causes the slide member 2420 to slide and displace to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is located inside (above) the bottom surface 2334c of the fixed flow channel, on which the balls can roll.
In the rear arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude (recess) inward (upward) beyond the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, at the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and at the rear position RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut against each other.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 is displaced while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be kept small.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward toward the front.
Since the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 is the front-rear direction, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 is along the direction in which the ball flows downward. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 affects the strength of the rotation of the ball.

The ball rolls on the bottom surface 2334c toward the front, so that a forward rotation occurs in the direction of travel (forward).
When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the slide member 2420 moves to the front arrangement F
When the ball is slid from P to the rear arrangement RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rotation of the ball, making it possible to increase the degree of rotation of the ball and increase the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from a powered state to a non-energized state (see FIG. 108),
When the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, the slide member 242 is moved relative to the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b.
A forward load (friction force) is generated through the upper surface of the ball. Therefore, the forward rotation of the ball is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball is reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be decelerated.

Furthermore, the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is located at a position higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b.
Since the vertical position of the upper side of the ball is on the upper side, a load is generated in the direction of pushing the ball upward in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the flow speed of the ball can be decelerated.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, by executing control to cause the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300.
The time from passing 63b until reaching branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be variably controlled.

In this embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is positioned rearward of the second flow path configuration portion 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420.

That is, since the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before being introduced into the second flow path forming portion 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract attention, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given a rotation or displaced in the vertical direction. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player as he or she visually watches the ball flow down the second flow path forming portion 335.

In this embodiment, when the ball is disposed above the bottom surface 2334c, the slide member 242
When 0 is displaced, a contact load is applied, while before and after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (
When the ball passes above the bottom surface 2334c (at the time of stopping), no contact load with the slide member 2420 is applied.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between a ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is operating and a ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 109. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the third embodiment of the sorting device 3300, the probability change detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear side of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As an example of a modification of the arrangement of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, an arrangement to the right of the center will be described, but the configuration to the left of the center can be designed as desired.
For example, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, so that the arrangement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is different on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300. Also, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged side by side as described in detail below, so that the sorting device 330
The arrangement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured symmetrically on the left and right of 0.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of a sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at a front position, and Figure 109(b) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at a rear position.

109(a) and 109(b), imaginary lines show the guide path of the ball after it has flowed through the third flow path configuration portion 336. In this manner, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in FIG. 109(a) and FIG. 109(b), a middle member 3330 of a sorting device 3300
The rear frame portion 3332, which defines the ball guide path to the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, is configured in a shape that is open so as to be able to receive a ball from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position.
The right end of the front side surface 376a and the rear inner surface of the opening portion 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are set at a position where they are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the sliding displacement member 3370 in this manner, the sliding displacement member 33
If 70 is positioned at the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 will be caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and will pass through the normal detection sensor SE12, whereas if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned at the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 will be caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and will pass through the special rate detection sensor SE11.

That is, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration part 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position where the ball flows to the right.

Therefore, from the player's perspective when viewing the third flow path configuration portion 336 from the front side, it can be made difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod shape, and an upper front protruding portion 3376 formed integrally with the upper protruding portion 376.
b, and an upper lateral protrusion 3376 c formed integrally with the upper protrusion 376 .

The rod-shaped guide portions 3371c have upper surfaces that are flush with the upper surfaces of the ball guide portions 371b, and are formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.
The third flow path forming portion 336 is configured so as to penetrate the front side surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 and be capable of being housed on the rear side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336.

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 337
When the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is in contact with the discharge hole 337.
It is disposed across the front-to-rear gap between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned at the rear position, the lower left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the ball from being erroneously guided down.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336 is arranged to rest on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c that is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, so that the ball and the ball guide portion 371
In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371 can prevent the vehicle from colliding head-on with the vehicle in the front-rear direction.
This makes it easier to avoid situations where the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow back forward, or the ball getting caught between the front side of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is the same as the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment.
is a shape portion that is formed integrally with the upper protrusion 376 in the same positional relationship as the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper horizontal protrusion 3376c is the same as the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment.
The portion having the same shape as that of the upper front protrusion 3376b is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in the same relative positional relationship as that of the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action that the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c have on the ball they come into contact with occurs as an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in a fixed position such as the front-to-rear long protrusion portion 317 or the left-right inner protrusion portion 318 (see Figure 18), when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusion portions 3376b, 3376c can eliminate the effect of urging a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same symbols, and their explanations are omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 111(a) shows the third flow path configuration portion 3 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110(a).
36, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370
110(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path configuration part 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. 110(b). In FIG. 111(b), for ease of understanding, the illustration of the upper contact part 4373 is omitted.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through.
A front slide member 4371 that slides left and right above the probability change detection sensor SE11,
A rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12;
Equipped with.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 are slidably displaced in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid.
When the state is changed from the front open state shown in FIG. 11 to the rear open state shown in FIG. 110(b) and FIG. 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides leftward, and the rear slide member 437
5 is configured to slide to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged to cover the upper part of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment part 4373 formed in the same shape as the left and right inner protrusion parts 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part not shown.
In FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a abuts against the upper abutment portion 4373 and receives a load, so that it is swept downward (to the lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it abuts the ball at different points and is configured to change state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 disposed so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper contact part 4377 formed in the same shape as the front-rear long protrusion part 317 (see FIG. 17 ), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown).
In FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed with a shape that is the reverse of the upper surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)).
)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.
In FIG. 1B, the ball passes through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a and contacts the upper contact portion 4377.
When it comes into contact with the wall and receives a load, it is swept downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured such that when the front open state and the rear open state change, it abuts the ball at different points and changes state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible that a ball that has passed backwards above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby improving the attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336.

As a mode of returning to the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, for example, when the ball passes backward on the upper side 4372a, the solenoid is driven so as to change the state from the rear open state to the front open state. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper side 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper side 4376a to the front side, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, the timing when the ball passes through the third flow path component 336 and the timing when the slide displacement member 4
When the driving timing of the third flow path configuration unit 370 is synchronized, the ball can return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine configured so that a ball that passes above the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the downstream side does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11,
This improves the ability to pay attention to the ball after it has passed through 36 and the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path of the balls is common up to the third flow path forming portion 336, and the branch point BP1 is disposed behind the third flow path forming portion 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the branch point BP1 is disposed behind the third flow path forming portion 336.
The flow path of the balls changes upstream of the flow path of the balls. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 112 (a) and Figure 112 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112 (a) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position and the ball is guided to the probability change detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370, and Figure 112 (b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the left position and the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370.

112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path configuration portion 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this manner, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be able to slide and displace in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protrusion portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed to be thin enough that the ball can ride up after passing through the first flow path forming portion 334. The upper protruding portion 5376 has a left side surface 5376a facing the ball formed in an arc shape with the flow path side being concave, so that the flowing ball can be smoothly guided backward.

According to this embodiment, like the sorting device 5300, the forward and backward width of the ball's flow path is made long, and a configuration is adopted in which the visibility of balls flowing down the front side is higher than that of balls flowing down the rear side, while the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the front side where the visibility of the balls is higher, making it easier for the player to distinguish the flow pattern (flow path) of the balls.

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position, the entrance of the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that the ball can enter. On the other hand, the ball flowing down the upstream side of the entrance of the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is blocked by the first flow path configuration part 3
As it flows down 34, it flows toward the front.

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration portion 334, a velocity in the opposite direction to the rear is unlikely to occur, so that the ball is unlikely to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, a member for blocking the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is intentionally omitted, thereby reducing material costs.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not join together.
In the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merging flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left side is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 113 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Fig. 15. As shown in Fig. 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends in a straight line to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b with a space for one sphere, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336 as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 includes a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. This allows a difference in height between the balls flowing from the merging flow path 6341 to the connection point JP1 and the balls flowing down the right flow path and then down the third flow path forming portion 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when the balls do not contact each other. This allows the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b (see FIG. 16 ) to reach the branch point BP1 to be changed depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening and closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entry state. Therefore, by changing the timing at which the ball arrives at the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370 can guide the ball to the branch point BP1 when the slide displacement member 370 is in a different position.
It is possible to reach 1.

The premise for balls to contact each other is that the balls merge and that there are balls flowing down the merge flow path 6341. If the player wants to cause balls to contact each other, he or she can play by adjusting the firing intensity so that the balls enter each of the pair of ball passing holes 163b on the left and right (see FIG. 74), and if the player wants to avoid balls from contacting each other, he or she can play by adjusting the firing intensity so that the balls enter only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (the right side).

According to this embodiment, the adjustment of the ball launch strength is related to the presence or absence of contact of the ball at the connection point JP1 and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a continuous ball. That is, the two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be caused to flow down to the branch point BP1 in a state of being closely arranged.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path to the branch point BP1 was only the flow path formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Fig. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Fig. 114. As shown in Fig. 114 and Fig. 115, the sorting device 7300 includes, in addition to the ball passing hole 163b, a ball passing hole 7163b formed at an approximately left-right center position as a path through which the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71 which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1 used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state based on whether a specified number of balls have entered.

A cylindrical flow path 7164 is disposed downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b and extends in a direction that slopes downward toward the rear with a rectangular cylindrical cross section. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. That is, the balls that pass through the ball passing hole 7163b are configured to flow down inside the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336.
is set to be equal to the length of time it takes for the ball to pass through.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25 ), as described above, the liquid passes through the sphere passing hole 163 b and enters the flow path configuration portion 33
The balls passing through the ball passage hole 7163b can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position.
The ball that flows down the branch point BP4 reaches the branch point BP while the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position.
It is possible to reach 1.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear position.

That is, even if the driving control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the specific winning port 6
The ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can be configured to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning hole 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed from a general direction during a game, the cylindrical flow path 716
The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is designed to avoid a decrease in visibility of the branch point BP1, the sliding displacement member 370, and the flow path configuration portions 334 to 336 due to the presence of the slidable member 370.

Thus, according to this embodiment, while maintaining high visibility of the branching point BP1, by increasing the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branching point BP1, it is possible to increase the variety of lengths of time it takes for the ball to reach the branching point BP1, thereby improving the player's attention to the specific winning port 65a.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 116. In the first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 is connected at one point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. In the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 8616 is connected at multiple points (two points), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is
Beneath 6a, it is bent twice to the left and right.

That is, the guide long hole 8616 comprises a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately arc shape) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O
Since the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In addition, the axis O1 is at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., the first curved portion 8616
When the second curved portion 8616b is disposed at the connection portion between the second curved portion 8616c and the second curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and therefore the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In this way, since the axis O1 can be easily stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions, the axis O1 can be stopped at an intermediate position, and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43) that is stopped at an intermediate position can be easily stopped at an intermediate position.
This allows for an increased variety of stopping positions.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 117. In the first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path. However, in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured with a first path configured with a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path.
In addition, the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and
The explanation will be omitted.

117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 includes a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b similar to the guide elongated hole 616 in the first embodiment.
It has an angle maintaining portion 9616c extending obliquely to the right from the connection point of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connecting portion 9616d extending from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and connecting to a midpoint of the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 displaces while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated toward the tilting side from a state in which the axis O1 is positioned at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced along the angle maintenance portion 9616c, so that the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained in a position in which the third performance surface 661c faces forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced, the box-shaped member 66
In one rotation mode, the third performance surface 661c can be maintained in a position facing forward throughout the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintenance portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, a change in the angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, so that the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the inclination angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the axis O1 may be different from the curved portion 616
b is different from the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by making the path along which the axis O1 displaces different between the left and right, it is possible to make the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the upper end of the movable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the lower end are each of the same type. Therefore, the box-shaped member 6 when the axis O1 is located at the upper end or the lower end of the movable range is
The position 61 can be maintained (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is disposed between the ends (midway position) of the displaceable range, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 6
60 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) and the supported member 64 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1
It is possible to generate multiple types of displacement speeds of 0 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotation member 660.

The guide slot 9616 is merely configured with a plurality of paths, and does not include a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions caused by a defect in the path limiting mechanism, and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be described below. First, the rotating member 62
A case where 0 is rotated and displaced in the tilt direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (FIG. 40) is rotated so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.
(see reference)

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction), and is displaced to the lower end position of the elongated guide hole 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is operated to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is located at the connecting portion of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b.
is driven and controlled, and then the drive motor 631 is again driven and controlled in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the extension direction (up and down direction) of the straight portion 616a is reduced, so that the choice of whether the axis O1 is to displace along the left path or the right path is made based on the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to a member downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the transmission of the driving force. In other words, since the displacement resistance is accordingly smaller, the axis O1 can be allowed to enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 can be controlled to stop midway or not to select the path along which the axis O1 is displaced.

Furthermore, when the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 diagonally in the upper right direction, making it difficult for the axis O1 to be displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is
Since the curved portion 616b is set at a midpoint of the curved portion 616b, the right side surface of the curved portion 616b
The surface is formed as an upper left inclined surface located on the upper right side of the axis O1 located at the bottom end position of the substrate 10.

Therefore, in a state where the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, the circular through hole 6
This makes it possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle having its center at 24.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300 and then flow backward has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without configuring a portion that flows downward toward the front.

In the first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape that can block the flow of the balls by contacting it may be used. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed so that many small protrusions are protruded from the flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment, the balls entering the specific winning opening 65a flow down the sorting device 300 mainly through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the center of the specific winning opening 65a to the left and right, and the balls may be formed to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, the balls will not pass through the opening, but the system may be configured so that when multiple balls enter a specific winning hole 65a together, the balls can pass through the opening.
In this case, the time it takes for a ball that enters a specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, branching to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or branching to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is characterized by the flow path configuration units 334 to 335.
Although the flow path direction and inclination of 36 have been described, they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into consideration the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

The term "lying" refers to the pachinko machine 10 being installed not in a vertical position but in a position inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (lying) inclined backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). In comparison with the above explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not lying down), when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have an inclination in the front-rear direction, changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming portion 334 is designed to be inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front side, and the third flow path forming portion 336 is designed to be inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear side, but when the installation angle is also considered, the first flow path forming portion 334 and the third flow path forming portion 336 similarly form flow paths inclined downward by 6 degrees.
The flow path configuration portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction and is therefore less susceptible to the influence of the installation angle, and can be considered to have an inclination of about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down in the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. Therefore, the flow speed of the balls in the left and right directions can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. In addition, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because the sorting device 300 has flow paths in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the quality of the laying (angle setting) will be affected.
Since the direction in which the balls flow down the flow passage configurations 334 and 336 changes (is reversed) due to the tilt angle, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the lay angle.

In addition, if the flow path of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is in a forward and backward direction and is configured to be visible, it may be possible to grasp the degree of laying of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is really desired to make the degree of laying understandable, it is sufficient to configure the flow path of the sorting device 300 so that it is easy to see.

On the other hand, in the above first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "relaxation" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334 to 336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover them on the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side is configured to reduce visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made poor except for the normal player's line of sight (in the range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

In addition, each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering flow path shape or a flow path that is bent in a step-like manner.

In addition, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Furthermore, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336.

In the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 is 0.3
In the above description, the balls are designed to pass through the third flow path component 336 in 1 second, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls may be designed to pass through the third flow path component 336 in 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls to pass through the sorting device 3 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).
Even if the ball enters the third flow path constituent portion 336 at 00, the ball flowing upstream down the third flow path constituent portion 336 can function as a screen for the ball flowing downstream down the third flow path constituent portion 336.

In the above-described first embodiment, the flow path length of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is secured to secure the flow time of the balls, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
It is also possible to provide long, alternating ribs protruding from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ribs. This makes it possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the length of the path.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly or unevenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path forming portion 334 and the second flow path forming portion 335 and forming a ridge only on the third flow path forming portion 336, the balls can be configured to quickly reach the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 slowly.

In addition, the protrusions may be provided in a direction such that they protrude alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the ball's downward flow path, or they may be provided in a direction such that they protrude upward from the bottom with a predetermined interval between them.

In the case of protrusions from the left and right direction, since the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370,
By protruding from the left and right outer wall parts to the left and right inner wall parts, the load from the protrusions is
By directing the ball toward the partition plate portion 338 side rather than toward the sensor SE12 side, it is easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a protrusion extending upward from below, there is a possibility that the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into consideration the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so as to be movable in and out of the water. In this case, the protrusions may be configured to block the flow of the balls when in the protruding state, and to allow the balls to resume flowing when in the retracted state.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the balls flowing down the front side of the sliding displacement member 370 are used to blind the object is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
A movable decorative member is disposed in front of the flow passage configuration parts 334 to 336.
The decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of the ball.

In addition, the case where the ball is used for blindfolding is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the near side. For example, in the case where a mirror is placed on the rear side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the blindfolding function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the balls reaching the slide displacement member 370 are concealed has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be disposed behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning holes 63 may be concealed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are formed of linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The flow path may be formed as a meandering flow path, or as a flow path that branches into multiple paths, or the flow path may be configured so that the balls are more likely to remain in areas with a larger flow path width.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case where the blindfolding effect is produced by the balls moving toward the sliding displacement member 370 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be formed by the sliding displacement member 370.
70 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), so that the slide displacement member 370 is concealed by the discharge path and a ball arranged in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment, the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a is directed exclusively to the first flow path configuration portion 334.
In the above description, the balls flow through the specific winning opening 65a to the second flow path component 335 (nearby side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes the balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select the balls that flow to the second flow path component 335, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls themselves, or it may be driven by a drive device to perform a constant operation from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or it may be controlled to operate in a constant pattern from the time the power to the pachinko machine is turned on.

In the case of driving control, for example, when the type of ball changes, the second flow path configuration portion 33
For example, when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a,
In the case of balls that exceed the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path configuration section 335 can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

In the case where the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined operation may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or a different operation may be performed depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow to the second flow path configuration part 335 side, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may flow to the second flow path configuration part 335 side. Also, the reverse may be possible.

In addition, these operation modes are detected by a pair of detection sensors S
The downstream of E1 may be the same for both, or may be different for the left and right.

Here, if the time it takes for the balls to flow down from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the long ball discharge time may cause the game to drag on. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to make the first number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a flow down to the second flow path configuration part 335 side, and the subsequent balls may be discharged without passing through the second flow path configuration part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to completely flow down the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third symbol display device 81, and the balls are caused to flow toward the front side near the lower end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third symbol display device 81 or toward the front side of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit the player can obtain by the flow of the balls down the sorting device 300 with the contents of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can easily know whether the profit he or she has obtained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, the case where the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336 as a reference has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are not shifted up and down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336 as a reference and can be seen overlapping each other. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can be made to function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as being switched to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach the winning hole 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and arrives at the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has elapsed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, if the trailing ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blind for the forward flow ball, the player cannot see the timing when the flow of the forward flow ball switches (downward) toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 because it is hidden by the trailing ball. Moreover, since the trailing ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, it is thought that the player will think that the ball has not entered the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and therefore, in a gaming machine in which the display effects for the time-saving state and the probability variation state are the same to maintain the player's sense of expectation, the effect of the display effects can be improved.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, a crane may be provided or the path width may be widened to increase the degree of freedom of the ball's flow direction), and the ball may be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone depending on the difference in speed and rotation of the ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the sliding displacement member 370. That is, each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the sliding displacement member 370 from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.
At least one of the above may be provided in a protruding manner.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as the operation pattern Y that takes into consideration the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is hidden by the ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by utilizing a magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not limited to this. For example, the guide slot 616 may be bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed at which the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Furthermore, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change in the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the above-described first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide elongated holes 616 through which the axis O1 can move may be formed, and the guide elongated hole 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the above first embodiment, the configuration in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the first performance surface 661a diagonally to the left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face the right side when the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the left side of the third pattern display device 81, or the lower side (
When the display is placed on the upper side of the screen, the presentation surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) toward the front.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaced member may be arranged on the base end side of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaced member is favorable for ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a member that slides laterally is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is limited to an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only an angle above the horizontal but also an angle below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this preferable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides intersecting at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed as a pentagon in cross section, and each side may be controlled to be stopped in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one unit with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to facilitate maintaining the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be disposed near the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an attractive force between the magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, so that this attractive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, instead of being formed linearly. In addition, in the case where the coil spring CS2 is used, the spring is not limited to one that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured so that a biasing force is generated in response to the expansion and displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 7
85c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the pivot member 785.
For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the above first embodiment, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the rear end of the play area to the front, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced downward to protrude forward. In this case, it may be displaced forward from below over the upper edge of the center frame 86, or may be disposed above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).
It may also be in a form that protrudes forward from the

In the first embodiment, the rotation of the covering member 787 is reversed to form the secondary decorative surface 787a.
In the above description, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are not visually recognized together, which reduces the discrimination ability, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be rotated facing outward to the left and right, rather than facing the front side. Also, even if the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are rotated in the same direction, the rotation angles may be shifted.

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 by utilizing the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783, the intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove,
The rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched from a state in which the detection target portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detection target portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed in a state in which the detection target portion 844 is not arranged on the detection sensor 813.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the magnets Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, the torque limiter 866 is provided to clearly separate the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of the switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter is more effective.
It is possible to reduce the displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating part 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inside has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left and right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inside. The former is more advantageous than the latter in that it is easier to rotate the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction.
The momentum of the ball toward the flow path configuration portion 335 can be reduced.

In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 compared to the latter.

In addition, the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that is inclined downward toward the inside in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
The rolling surface (bottom surface) of 6 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the left-right direction. In this case, the degree to which the ball is biased toward the partition plate portion 338 is reduced, so that the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the locus of the ball passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the locus of the ball passing through the branching point (by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the ball passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the back side, and the light can be made to not reach the light diffusion processing surface 333b (dark state).

That is, the outer light emitting means 351d continues to be lit, and the flow of the ball at the branch point and
The light diffusion processing surface 333b (and the light diffusion processing surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion processing surface 333b) can be correlated with the light and dark of each light diffusion processing surface 314c and 340.
Since 14c, 333b, and 340 have a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the first embodiment, the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 is described as being during a big win game, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
The light may be controlled when a winning entry into the winning slots 64, 140, etc. is detected, or when an input operation is performed on the frame button 22, or when a winning entry exceeding a specified number (the number of winning entries that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, the maximum number of pending fluctuations based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140) occurs.

In the above first embodiment, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, and therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor for detecting the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is shifted due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even though this was not apparent during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the shift can be determined by the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotational movement (e.g., roulette type), or a shape that makes the flow of the ball irregular (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) may be provided so that the ball can flow down in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning hole (winning hole 64, 140), or as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning hole 65a, or as a device for guiding the ball to other winning holes or winning areas.

In the above first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is arranged in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be arranged in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), in the left or right corner (outside the left or right edge of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when arranged in the upper corner of the play area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined diagonally upward from the horizontal plane, so that the downstream balls can be configured to hide the upstream balls in the flow path portion that is inclined downward toward the front side.

In addition, the structure of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have an inclination in the opposite direction, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is set to the flow passage configuration portion 335, 336 in front view.
In the above description, the design is based on the shape of the sliding displacement member 336 and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but the design is not necessarily limited to this.
The sliding displacement member 370 may have a shape that allows (only) the sliding displacement member 370 to be visible, or may have a shape that reduces the visibility of the sliding displacement member 370. Also, the sliding displacement member 370 may have a shape that allows (only) the sliding displacement member 370 to be visible at either the front position or the rear position, and cannot be seen at the other position.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334 to 336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides and are not allowed to merge, which reduces the number of balls entering one flow path (allows the balls to be dispersed), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while also allowing the paths of any of the balls that have passed through each flow path to be switched by the slide displacement member 370.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d is determined based on the pair of left and right configurations of the sliding displacement member 370 (for example,
The ball guide portion 371b and the upper protruding portion 376 may be shaped so that only one of them is visible and the other is invisible. In this case, the player can predict the path of the ball on the invisible side, which increases the player's interest.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guiding portion 371b is the backward direction (the forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336).
We have described a case in which the sliding motion suppresses the ball's forward rotation and reduces the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which a ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be a forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward so that the ball guide portion 371b is aligned with the third flow path component 3
The upper protrusion 376 is configured to be able to open the probability change detection sensor SE11 by entering the lower side of the ball guide 371b. The upper protrusion 376 is configured as a separate body from the ball guide 371b, and is arranged to protrude toward the branch point BP1 side when the ball can land on the ball guide 371b. When the ball guide 371b is displaced to a state where the ball cannot land on the ball guide 371b, the upper protrusion 376 is displaced in the opposite direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide 371b, so that the passage of the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 is secured.

In this case, the sliding of the ball with the ball as the ball guide portion 371b slides can accelerate the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction, thereby increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball falls instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment, the control of the rotating member 620 is performed by providing the extension portion 63 in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is turned off.
In the above embodiment, the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 64b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the detection sensor KS1 detects that the 34b has been placed, the driving power of the driving motor 631 may be reduced and the motor may be rotated weakly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position for the performance standby state).

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 has the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751.
Although the groove of the receiving inclined portion 762 is configured as a straight inclined groove in the above description, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the groove to have a partial curve, such as a curved front side at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-down sliding displacement, front-back sliding displacement, and posture displacement in the front-back direction.

The grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 may have various shapes. For example, the grooves may be in a V-shape (or an inverted V-shape) when viewed in the left-right direction.
The shape may be curved in a circular arc.

In the above first embodiment, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the components to avoid collision between each other (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used in which the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 is set to avoid collision between the members.

In the above first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 has been described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the pivot tip of the pivot arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the pivot tip of the pivot arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, it is possible to ensure a long support position interval between the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivot arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows the lifting plate member 740 to be stably supported.

In the third operating unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a part that is visible to the player without changing its shape regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or an integrated state. In both the individual combined state and the integrated state, the bulging portion 824a is configured to be visible to the player as a part (center portion).
In the above description, the components are designed to have shapes that minimize any sense of incongruity between them, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by changing the illumination state (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a,
The object viewed at 24a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

For example, with respect to either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880,
The shape of the covering parts 875, 885 may be modified to extend toward the center of the circle in the combined state, and the extended part may be configured to cover the bulging part 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the united state, the bulging part 824a can be hidden so as not to be visible to the player, so that the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulging part 824a, the first covering part 875, and the second covering part 885 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the third operating unit 800 includes a plurality of decorative members 870, 88
Although the case where the magnet 10 is attracted by magnetic force has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The combined state may be maintained by a load caused by engagement of the recesses and protrusions, or the combined state may be maintained by a biasing force of a spring member.

In the above first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that builds momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode for providing momentum, the rotation may be controlled in the reverse direction as a preparatory operation (preparatory operation). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 outward in the radial direction from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction caused by the magnetic force.

In the above-described first embodiment, as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, a case was described in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to cause radial displacement before the reversing operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be written on the plane on which the metal rod 832 serving as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged.
When configured to arrange the above, even if an inversion operation occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, so that wobbling that occurs in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation operation can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 by 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative members 870 and 880 may be configured to be combined again by rotating them by 120 degrees. In this case, the covering portions 875 and 885 may be configured to be different from each other while the side that is visible in a front view of the decorative members 870 and 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation operation.
It is possible to perform a movement presentation in which the angle at which the character is viewed is changed (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the movement and 60 degrees to the left after the movement).

In addition, the structure of the intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that the lengths are not common to each other.
By configuring the formation range and shape of the bevel teeth portion 854c to be non-common, in the switching rotation operation, decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 180-degree inversion operation and decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree inversion operation may be configured to coexist. For example, among five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880
is configured to rotate 120 degrees by switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870, 8
The optical axis 80 may be configured to rotate 180 degrees by a switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal movement in the switching rotation movement can be set arbitrarily.
The angle may be 0 degrees, 120 degrees, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 degrees and 360 degrees.

In the above first embodiment, a pair of left and right torque limiters 866 are arranged in left-right asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be arranged in left-right symmetric positions, or both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right, or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment, the multiple (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured to have a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and the guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, so that the start timing of the sliding displacement along the metal rod 832 is made different between the linear motion members 833.

For example, the design may be changed so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter.
By mixing in an intermediate arm member 850 in which the shape of the guide hole 854b has been correspondingly modified in design, it is possible to provide a difference in the timing at which the linear motion member 833 starts to move during the switching rotation operation.

As a result, the decorative member 8
At the timing when the decorative members 870, 880 are displaced radially outward from the combined state,
Since a difference can be created between the magnet Mg2 and metal screw Nj2, the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required for removing the adhesion can be reduced, so that the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the arrangement of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

In addition, it is not necessary that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 occurs every time. For example, while the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (on the outward path),
It may be configured so that this does not occur when the combined state is reached by the switching rotation operation (return route).

For example, by configuring the design of the intermediate arm member 850 so that the displacement mode is different between the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (a state in which the rotating tip is positioned on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are positioned at the outermost diameter position, and the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm portion i850 rotates from a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are positioned at the outermost diameter position to the combined state, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that causes a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attraction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensor K
The number of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be provided in the extension portion 63.
Alternatively, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used instead of the three detection sensors 713. As an example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extension portion 634b in the intermediate performance state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600 can be detected is exemplified.

Also, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged at positions capable of detecting the detected portion 844. As for the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, five detection sensors 813 may be arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, so that the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 can be determined in five types (five different patterns depending on the rotation direction).

In the second embodiment, the ball continues to roll regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 is
The length may be configured to be equal to the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front arrangement FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball can be strengthened and the ball can be made to easily become stuck.

In the second embodiment, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but a protrusion for decelerating the ball may be provided on the first flow path forming portion 2334. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set to a height at which the ball rests on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the bottom surface 2334 decelerates the ball when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP.
In this case, the deceleration action of the protrusions may be controlled by changing the position of the slide member 2420 from the front position FP to the rear position B.
P state or

In the third embodiment, the sliding displacement member 3370 is made of the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protruding portion 33
In the above description, the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c are integrally formed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c may be configured to protrude upward and downward in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned at the front position and the rear position, thereby forming a state in which the ball is in contact and a state in which the ball is not in contact.

There is no limitation on the front-to-rear arrangement of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, but having the special rate detection sensor SE11 at the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winning into the special rate detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the slide plate 43
In the above description, the upper contact portion 4377 and the upper contact portion 4376 are integrally formed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper contact portion 4377 and the upper contact portion 4377 may be formed as separate members and may be configured to operate synchronously (linked) by adjusting the timing. The upper contact portion 4377 and the upper contact portion 4377 may be configured to slide in the front-rear direction.

In the fourth embodiment, when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the slide members 4371 and 4375 slide and displace.
In the above description, the ball is returned to the front side by the inclination of the slide plate 4372, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be provided behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 when the state is changed from the rear open state to the front open state can be guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor.
The greater the right gained by the ball entering E11 (such as winning multiple jackpots or gaining the right to move to a higher probability state), the greater the attention that can be paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the flow path from the raised floor 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path in which the connection point JP1 side faces rearward near the raised floor 6342. This allows both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path configuration part 335 to have a rearward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to collision between them.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. Also, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reversed inclination in the front and rear directions.
The probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured to be disposed near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily cause the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the front side, and it is possible to improve the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a long hole having a branch, and the axis O
In the above description, the location of the axis O1 in the elongated guide hole 9616 is changed depending on how a load is applied to the guide hole 9616. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be changed.
In the case of the support member 616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may be configured to alternate between being configured as a long hole and being blocked. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, so that the support member 64
0 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, in the case of the long guide hole 9616 having a branch, by blocking one of the paths, the axis O
In this case, the guide elongated hole 96 may be provided with a switching valve for limiting the displacement path of the first displacement path.
Since the shape of the support member 6 is fixed, and the changeover valve can restrict the displacement path of the axis O1, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path.
40 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, examples of control of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 118 to 87, as a first control example, the present invention will be described with reference to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine").
An example of control when applied to a pachinko machine 10 (referred to as "a pachinko machine 10") will be described. Fig. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, Fig. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device 65 provided in the area below the front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 118, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 118) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having ball entry holes 63, 64, 640 through which a number of nails or balls can enter is attached detachably from the back side of the inner frame 12.
The balls are then dropped down into the inner frame 12, where they are inserted into the game board 1.
The game board 13 is provided with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that launches balls into the front area (play area) of the game board 3, and a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 118) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side.
The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side on which the lock is provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are each released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is connected to the third symbol display device 81.
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed in (see Figure 119) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
18) An indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left corner, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination part 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (FIG. 11) on the front of the game board 13 is
9) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, in order to create a more brilliant appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area surrounding the illumination parts 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 0, there is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball in front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Also, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off. In other words, in this control example, launching means for launching the ball into the play area formed on the game board 13, and the operating handle 51
and a firing intensity varying means for varying the firing intensity based on the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the control handle 51. This allows the player to perform the action of firing a ball using the firing means and the action of varying the firing intensity of the ball, simply by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the operation of firing a ball toward a specific play area among the play areas formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, and the player can play the game without imposing an excessive burden on the player.

In this control example, the firing strength is configured to be variable based on the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a firing strength selection button may be provided that allows the player to select the firing strength, and the firing means may fire the ball at a firing strength that corresponds to the operation result (selection result) of the firing strength selection button.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 is made of a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63,
The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is constructed by assembling the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 118).
The base plate 60 is formed so that various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by a player from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 118) of the front frame 14.
The configuration will be described.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 118), forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) formed in front of the game board 13 and partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the outer rail 6 (FIG. 119), which prevents the ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage.
At the tip of the ball 2 (upper right part of FIG. 119), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball.
When a ball is shot with a force greater than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is attenuated.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be operable when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) performed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640.
In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 having two types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is used, and therefore the results of the two types of special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery) are displayed on the first pattern display device 37; however, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special pattern (first special pattern), it is sufficient to provide a display area for one type of special pattern on the first pattern display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a symbol that is advantageous to the player, a symbol that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error by the 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Multiple LEDs
D is configured so that the light emission colors of the LEDs are different (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. Note that in this control example, the various game states are notified by the combination of the light emission colors of the light-emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice, and for example, the various game states may be notified by varying the length of the period when the light-emitting means is on and the period when it is off (blinking pattern).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a judgment is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery). If it is judged that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a big win game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where a ball can easily enter the specific winning hole 65a, and a game is executed in which a lot of prize balls can be won in a short period of time by making the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a. This big win game is executed (when) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), and it is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1
The opening period is a period during which a closed state is set so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65, and the round game period is a period during which an open state is set. After one round game period ends, a predetermined period (for example, 0.5
A big win game period is set, which consists of an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period ends, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds).

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped (determined), the opening period is set, so that the specific winning port 65a
Since the ball can be prepared to be shot in any direction according to the timing when the ball is released, the jackpot game can be played smoothly. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Furthermore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being executed immediately after the last round of game is completed, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is completed, thereby enabling a smooth switch between games.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, multiple types of jackpot games can be executed, and the number of rounds (number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not a jackpot is won by the lottery of special symbols, but also in the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning.

In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content that is executed after the jackpot game ends is set to be different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot, the ending period of that jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) may be set to be longer than the ending period of another jackpot game (
For example, it is preferable to set the ending period to be longer than 2 seconds, and configure the device to be able to execute a performance that informs the player in advance of the game content that will be executed after the big win game ends during the ending period. This makes it possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game are the same, it is preferable to configure the ending period of the jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

Furthermore, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning a jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be specified in advance based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time the jackpot is won, and the ending period of each jackpot game can be set in advance according to the specified content.

A specific description will be given later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, two states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols) are combined with two states with different probabilities of winning the regular symbol lottery (high probability state for regular symbols, low probability state for regular symbols) to be described later, and three types of game states can be set. Specifically, the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for regular symbols)
The system is configured to allow the setting of a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). The lottery for special symbols is also
The lottery for normal symbols is also configured so that it is easier to win in a high probability state than in a low probability state, so that of the multiple game states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the special probability state is the game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the other game states, and the special probability state and the time-saving state are the game states in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the normal symbol lottery than in the other game states.

In addition, when a player wins the regular symbol lottery, a winning game (regular symbol winning game) is executed in which the special symbol lottery is likely to be executed.
The electric role 640 attached to the reel 40 is opened, and a normal winning game is performed in which a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time-saving state, i.e., the high probability state of the normal pattern, are set, the game state is easier to execute the special pattern lottery than in other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the period from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (dynamic display period) is configured to be shorter than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time-saving state, i.e., the high probability state of the normal pattern, are set, the special pattern lottery can be executed in a shorter period than in other game states, and the game state is easier to execute a new special pattern lottery.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that opens during a jackpot game, and only if the ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game can a high probability state of a special symbol be set after the jackpot game ends. Then, depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game), and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game). Hereinafter, advantageous jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during a jackpot game, will be referred to as a variable jackpot game,
A jackpot in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed is called a probability variable jackpot. Also, an unfavorable jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game, is called a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed is called a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win, it is determined that the player has lost and no special benefit is awarded to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be modified in any way, for example, as follows:
In some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot, a small prize game may be executed in which the player is given fewer benefits than the jackpot (for example, a benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot (or a small prize) as the stopped symbol after the variation ends, but also shows a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. At the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are a plurality of left general ball entry holes 63 into which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the left general ball entry hole 63.
A variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a first ball entrance 64 or a second ball entrance 640.
The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the opening (start winning) of the opening (start winning), and a second symbol display device (not shown) that is composed of an LED that performs a variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) in response to the ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67.
0, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example,
The three middle and lower pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230(a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 types of main patterns with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". These third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, and the third patterns are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of this control example performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first pattern display device 37. Note that the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

As shown in Fig. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main pattern sz is formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating a number. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each identification information, the lottery result of the special pattern can be visually notified to the player, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a jackpot game occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 for the special symbol.

The main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, one each at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling left and right with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern column Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner, while the middle pattern column Z2 is
The lower pattern row Z3 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and is configured to be scrolled from right to left to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) fz that do not show the lottery results of the special patterns are also formed between the main patterns sz. In Fig. 122(b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) fz are displayed using patterns that resemble triangles.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two active lines L4, L5 formed in the diagonal direction, and when each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed stopped, if the third pattern (main pattern sz) stops on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in Fig. 122(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1 to L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each pattern column Z1 to Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be made difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (the middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, among the above-mentioned three symbol strings (Z1 to Z3), a specific symbol string (symbol string Z2), i.e., a symbol string in which the variable display is stopped last among the multiple symbol strings, is configured to have a larger number of main symbols than the other symbol strings. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (e.g., the number "4") is made larger than the other symbol strings. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identification information imitating a specific number) passing through the pay line can be increased compared to when the other identification information is in a reach state, so that the player can visually predict that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. Also, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player may find it difficult to distinguish them), but the third symbol may be displayed in a different manner depending on the type of the special symbol that is being changed.
The display mode and display area of the pattern may be different.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result) is displayed, and the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) for indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information is displayed to show the lottery status of the ordinary pattern (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and is configured so that a fourth pattern (ordinary pattern fourth pattern) to show the lottery status of the ordinary pattern (ordinary pattern) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol can be notified to the player. In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display form imitating figures such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. 122(b)
(see small display area Dm1) shows the situation in which the special symbol is changing, and the small display area Dm1, D
By stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in m2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 122(b)),
Although it is configured to show the result of the lottery for the special pattern, it is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode using a number as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors may be used to show that the special pattern is changing by using the numbers or a display mode that changes colors, and the display mode showing a specific pattern or color may be stopped to show the result of the lottery for the special pattern.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing), and the selection result). However, this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing).
As shown in FIG. 22(b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is located on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol is displayed is located on the upper left side of the main display area Dm.
m2) is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, the position and size of this fourth pattern display area may be configured to be variable depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the central part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, the fourth pattern display area and the fourth pattern display area of the normal figure are used to limit the area in which the variable performance is performed, and the performance effect can be prevented from being reduced. In this case, the fourth pattern display area and the fourth pattern display area of the normal figure are deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired rights (reserved memories) for the special symbol lottery. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this control example
0 means that the ball is in the first position when a variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37 or when a winning game is being played, that is, when a new special symbol lottery cannot be performed.
When a ball enters the ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of entries is reserved for each ball entrance up to a maximum of four. The reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the same number as the reserved number of entries. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to four, so that a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The standby area Ds1b is an area for displaying reserved symbols in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be stored (8 balls) is 100.
The eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the symbols are displayed in order from the left. When a reserved ball with a special symbol is acquired, the reserved symbol is displayed on the lowest numbered pedestal among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 that does not have a reserved symbol displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 122 (b), four reserved balls of the first special pattern are stored in reserve, and in the waiting area Ds1b, four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) in display modes (white circles) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first base hr1 to the fourth base hr4.

The active area Ds1a is a display area in which the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently active special symbol change is shifted and displayed. The active base hr0 is the active reserved symbol hz0.
In other words, when a new special symbol variation is started, the waiting area Ds1b is displayed.
The reserved symbol hz1 displayed on the base hr1 of the execution area Ds1a is shifted to the base hr0 of the execution area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, when a preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) showing the expectation of a big win is performed for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the player can easily determine that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview performance is performed is being performed.

Furthermore, by making it possible to display the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern change currently in progress, the effect of varying the display mode of the reserved pattern can also be performed on the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern change currently in progress, so that the player can play the game while expecting the display mode of the reserved pattern to be varied for a longer period of time than when the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern change currently in progress is not displayed.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds allows the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern showing a reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) or a reserved pattern showing a reserved ball of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved pattern), and the special pattern 1 reserved pattern is displayed as a white circle (see FIG. 122(b)), and the special pattern 2 reserved pattern is displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124(a)). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern, making it easier to determine whether to continue playing to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display content of the reserved pattern.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol are displayed, and the smallest numbered pedestal (the smallest numbered pedestal is the pedestal hr
1) is configured to execute a special symbol lottery using reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols displayed. In other words, the reserved symbols are configured to be displayed in the order in which they are used in the special symbol lottery, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the reserved symbols may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls were acquired, and consumption order information may be attached to each reserved symbol to indicate the order in which they are used in the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of which reserved symbol the reserved ball acquired at which timing corresponds to which reserved symbol.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a maximum of eight reserved patterns can be displayed side by side, but this is not limited to this.
In this case, for example, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special reserved pattern 2 is set, the display area of the reserved pattern of the special pattern 1 may be displayed more prominently than the display area of the reserved pattern of the special pattern 2, and when a game state (probability change state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to acquire the reserved pattern of the special pattern 2 is set, the display area of the reserved pattern of the special pattern 2 may be displayed more prominently than the display area of the reserved pattern of the special pattern 1.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical, and the same game result is awarded when playing from the right side and when playing from the left side. Therefore, although it is not displayed,
For example, if the pachinko machine 10 can be set to have a case where right-handed play is more advantageous than left-handed play, or a case where left-handed play is more advantageous than right-handed play, depending on the set game state, a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction to shoot the ball (play direction) may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

To explain in more detail, the guidance display area can be configured to display a "right hit" display mode to guide the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode to guide the player to play left-handed games, the "right hit" display mode being displayed during game states in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as during a special bonus state, a time-saving state, and during big win games, and the "left hit" display mode being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after right-handed games have ended.
It is preferable to configure the display mode of "left hit" to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) even when it is detected that a right-hand hit is being performed during a game state in which a left-hand hit game is advantageous to the player, that is, during a normal state. Also, it is preferable to configure the display mode to be able to display various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in each of the above control examples as appropriate.

<About the performance content of the first control example>
Next, referring to Figs. 123 to 131, characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 123(a), the display screen when a reach is achieved in the normal state will be described. Fig. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a reach is achieved in the normal state (normal state). In this control example, the variable-displayed third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the normal state.
The symbols are displayed in the order of upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z2, and the activated lines L1 to L5 (Figure 1
22(a)), the game enters a ready state when the upper and lower pattern rows Z1 and Z2 are displayed as stopped as part of the third pattern combination indicating a jackpot win, and the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed variably along the active line along which the upper and lower pattern rows Z1 and Z2 are displayed as stopped as part of the third pattern combination indicating a jackpot win. After the game enters a ready state, the middle pattern row Z2 moves at a low speed (the time required for one main pattern (third pattern imitating a number) to move is about 0.5
The time is configured to change at a rate of 100 s per second.

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols ("1" to "3", "5" to
Since the middle symbol column Z2 has one main symbol with the number "9" and two main symbols with the number "4", when the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner, it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution.
Alternatively, the display may be changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when a specific transition condition is met.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), which third pattern (FIG. 123(a)
In this case, even if the waiting state is reached with the identification information imitating "9" (the third symbol imitating a crab), the middle symbol sequence Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) displayed during the waiting state is the number "1
The slow-speed varying display is configured so that the identification information (third pattern resembling an octopus) resembling a " is first visible.

In addition, in this control example, depending on the fluctuation state of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state is reached,
The presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to be variable, and can be changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution after the reach state is reached (5 seconds after the slow-speed variable display is executed) or at the timing when it makes two revolutions (10 seconds after the slow-speed variable display is executed). Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what timing the presentation mode (reach mode) will be changed.

In this control example, the timing for changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the identification information for a combination indicating a jackpot (the same identification information as the identification information for which the reach state is stopped) passes the reach effective line after the reach state is reached, or when the identification information shifted by one from the identification information for a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the specific identification information corresponding to the type of identification information for which the reach state is stopped passing the reach effective line, it is possible to present to the player the middle symbol row Z2 with a combination that will result in a jackpot.
It is possible to provide a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, when it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached passes through the reach effective line, it is possible to overlap the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that becomes a jackpot with the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) for the player, so that when the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot approaches the reach effective line, the player can be made to pay close attention to the variable presentation with a great sense of expectation.

Here, in this control example, as described above, regardless of which third pattern is used to enter the reach state, the middle pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a slow-speed fluctuating manner so that a specific identification state (the third pattern imitating the number "1") is first visible. Therefore, for example, if the combination of third patterns that are finally stopped and displayed is a combination that is shifted by one type from the combination of third patterns that results in a jackpot (one frame off reach) (if the final stop display mode is determined in advance), a new problem occurs in that the period from when the reach state is entered until all of the third patterns are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of third pattern that is in the reach state.

Specifically, when the third symbol imitating the number "1" is used to reach the winning state, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time of the winning state to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 with one frame missing the winning position as the final stop display mode, and when the third symbol imitating the number "6" is used to reach the winning state, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time of the winning state to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 with one frame missing the winning position as the final stop display mode.
This will require multiple rounds of testing.

Therefore, in order to establish a reach state with different types of third symbols in a variation pattern in which the same variation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process of calculating backwards from the stop display timing of the third symbol to set the timing at which the reach state will occur. In other words, there was a problem that the period from the variation start timing to the reach state will vary depending on the type of third symbol that will be in the reach state, resulting in a non-uniform reach performance, which will reduce the performance effect.

In contrast, in this control example, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the determined variation time by a variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an added time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern that is in a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the added time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the added time. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as an additional time. In other words, the voice lamp control device 1 determines that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time based on the notified content of the additional time command.
13. This allows the type of the third symbol that is to be in a ready state to be set simply by checking the content of the time addition command.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(b) to FIG. 126, the contents of the performance regarding the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described.
Referring to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 during the execution of a normal pattern variation that has resulted in a winning win in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of a normal pattern variation that has resulted in a winning win in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when a normal pattern variation is executed, a variation display mode (shown by an arrow in the figure) indicating that a normal pattern variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm,
An icon resembling the electric device 640 that opens when a normal symbol wins is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and a highlighting (in the figure, six lines) is displayed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. Note that, since the situation shown in FIG. 123(b) is during the normal symbol variation that has been won, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is,
The display mode is an image of the electric device 640 in a closed state.
The player can be made to predict that a normal winning game will be executed soon, which can increase the interest of the game.

In FIG. 123(b), an example is given of a normal symbol variation in progress when a winning symbol is selected, but the system is configured to form a small display area Dm3 during a portion of the normal symbol variation in progress when the lottery result is a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation), and to execute an effect (fake effect) that displays an icon resembling the electric device 640. In this case, a performance mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, an effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when there is no winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery, so that the player can play while expecting that a normal symbol winning game will be executed. Also, in FIG.
In b), an example was given of a presentation suggesting the start of a normal winning game by displaying an icon resembling the electric gamble 640 in the small display area Dm3. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be applied to other games as well.
It may be configured so that a comment suggesting the start of a regular winning game is displayed in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

Also, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of a normal winning game. In this case, only when the normal symbol variation is being executed while the special symbol variation is being executed, a performance suggesting that a normal winning game will be executed is executed. For example, the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for executing the special symbol lottery,
The ball is passed through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter than the through gate 67, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is not indicated in advance to the player who is only performing the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the bonus (
Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed or that the game of shooting the ball is being executed continuously.

In addition, the expectation of the suggestive performance suggesting the start of the normal winning game may be configured to be different depending on the game content being played. For example, when playing normally, when a suggestive performance suggesting the start of the normal winning game is executed, the normal winning game is executed almost 100% of the time, and when playing a game (stop-hit game) in which only the normal pattern lottery is executed without executing the special pattern lottery, that is, when playing normally, the normal winning game is executed only about 10% of the time even if a suggestive performance suggesting the start of the normal winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing a stop-hit game to grasp the start timing of the normal winning game based on the suggested performance executed, and a penalty can be imposed.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be pre-determined. Then, a command (information) indicating the pre-determination result can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive performance that suggests that a normal symbol winning game will be played soon can be executed before the normal symbol variation that has been won is executed, that is, from the stage where a normal symbol reservation that has been acquired as a pre-determination result is a winning one. In this case, it is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executed in a performance mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 123 (b). For example, the suggestive performance can be executed in the same performance mode as the performance that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, or the pre-determination result for the special symbol reservation that has been acquired, and the executed suggestive performance can be configured to notify the player only that a situation favorable to the player will soon come.

In this way, the greater the divergence between the timing when a normal winning game is actually executed and the timing when the suggestive effect is executed, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation mode of the suggestive effect intended to indicate that a normal winning game will be executed, and ultimately, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the presentation when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state will be explained. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the presentation displayed when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal times (in the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the low probability state of the normal pattern is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, when a right-hit game is executed,
In any case where a left-handed play is performed, about half of the shot balls pass through the through gate 67. In addition, the machine is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights for normal symbols (normal symbol reserve).

In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal pattern lottery is continuously executed, and the normal pattern winning is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when the normal pattern winning is won in the normal state, the normal pattern winning game (long opening winning) in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric role 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, it is configured so that the ball launched can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is suppressed that the player cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern winning game during the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs with a low probability.

In the normal state, when you win the regular pattern lottery, as shown in Figure 124 (a),
In the small display area Dm2, the combination (in the figure, 2) indicating that the result of the normal pattern lottery is a winning combination is displayed.
When the winning symbol is displayed, the symbol (symbol) is stopped and a winning game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric chute (electric device 640) in the open state is displayed in the small display area Dm3.
The normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be run in parallel (overlapping),
The display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the change in the special symbol, and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1 are continuously executed even during a normal symbol win game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol (shown as a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special symbol 2 reserved balls) of the second special symbol acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) in priority to the special symbol 1 reserved symbol (shown as a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special symbol 1 reserved balls) of the first special symbol acquired. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 124(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and the state after the maximum number of four special symbol 2 reserved balls has been acquired.

In this control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball acquired later is executed with priority over the special symbol 1 reserved ball acquired earlier. By configuring in this way, when a normal winning game is executed during a normal state and multiple special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in succession with priority, so that a period during which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed can be set as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player and a dedicated performance can be executed, and a performance that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

In this control example, the waiting area Ds1b is configured to display the acquired special reserved ball 1 and special reserved ball 2 side by side (up to 8 balls are displayed), but for example, if a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 1 and a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 2 are used, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed preferentially is not acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed to be more prominent than the special reserved ball display area, and if the reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed to be more prominent than the special reserved ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the lottery for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the normal winning game in the normal state or the start of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. In other words, even during a normal winning game, if the second special symbol variation starts, a chance zone presentation, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 124(b), is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end of the normal winning game is reached, for example, if a normal winning game (5 seconds) is executed while a first special symbol variation with a long variation time (e.g. 60 seconds) is being executed, the words "Chance Zone Waiting" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and the currently executed first special symbol variation is executed.
When the special symbol variation ends, a standby screen is displayed to inform the player that a second special symbol variation will start.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when a normal winning game is executed during the first special symbol change, the third symbol change performance (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display area Dm corresponding to the first special symbol change being executed is continuously displayed, while the main display area D
In this case, it is preferable to configure the size of the display area used to display that a normal winning game is being played based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being played, so that it is possible to change the size of the display area used to display that a normal winning game is being played based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being played. For example, if the first special symbol variation being played is a jackpot,
The small display area Dm3 may be formed smaller than the example shown in FIG.
It is preferable to configure the small display area D3 so that the small display area D3 is not formed.
By forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to suppress the decrease in visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating a big win. Also, when a normal winning game is started without forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is a big win variation, so that even if the small display area Dm3 does not inform the player that a normal winning game has been executed, the electric device 64
It is possible to focus on the operation status of 0. When using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so that the same presentation mode as the big win variation is executed even in some cases where the special pattern variation being executed is not a big win variation (is a miss variation).

On the other hand, when the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a miss change or when a special pattern change is not being executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the entire main display area Dm may be used to display that a regular winning game has been executed.

In other words, when multiple pieces of information (lottery results and winning game status) need to be displayed overlappingly within the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient to configure the display so that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed preferentially, and display in various display modes based on the technical idea. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. For example, some players consider information indicating that they have won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery to be advantageous, while other players consider a performance with a lower appearance rate to be advantageous than the result of the special symbol lottery to be advantageous. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operation means that the player can operate, and an advantage degree selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means, and to configure the display mode corresponding to the various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the advantage degree selected by the advantage degree selection means. This allows various pieces of information to be displayed in a display mode that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the performance contents in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 124(b) to FIG. 126. FIG. 124(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, a comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set during the period until all the special symbol 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the current advantageous period is in progress.

In addition, in the sub display area Ds, when a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the words "High probability of winning the chance" are displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that there is a high probability of winning the chance state. A detailed description will be given later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example,
The probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery is the same, but the chances of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery are higher than those of winning the jackpot in the first special pattern lottery.
It is configured so that the probability variable state is easily set after the end of the big win game. Therefore, in the normal state where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the period of the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to win the big win that will result in the probability variable state than the period other than the chance zone in the normal state, so as shown in Figure 124 (b), the words "Probability variable GET high probability" are displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the probability variable state can be obtained with a high probability.

In addition, although detailed explanation will be described later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-variation performance is executed to make it look like multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) indicating the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special symbols 1 (in the figure, "2" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 (in the figure, "3" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display area Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable performance is performed during the chance zone, it is possible to make the player think that multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been performed, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In this control example, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a part of the main display area Dm (the small display area Ds11 and Ds12), but without being limited to this, it is possible to configure the number of reserved special symbols not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or to configure the number of reserved special symbols to be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is sufficient to configure it so that it is difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures, for example, it may be switched from a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily identify the number of reserved special figures to a display mode in which the color is changed corresponding to each reserved special figure. In this case, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the reserved special figures, it is possible to suppress the current reserved special figure number from being easily identified, so that the same effect as this control example can be achieved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, indicating that the second special symbol is currently fluctuating. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlap), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is executed may overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period (see FIG. 124(a)) or may not overlap. If the normal symbol winning game is executed overlapping with the first special symbol fluctuating period, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first special symbol fluctuating period being executed ends, and if it does not overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special pattern lottery will differ depending on the fluctuation status of the first special pattern when a regular winning game is executed, resulting in a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the currently executed special pattern fluctuation is the first special pattern fluctuation or the second special pattern fluctuation.

In contrast to this, in this control example, when the second special pattern change is executed, character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the player can be easily informed whether the special pattern change currently being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Next, referring to FIG. 125(a) and FIG. 126, among the variation effects executed during the chance zone, the content of the pseudo variation effect (special variation effect) will be described.
FIG. 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance, FIG. 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation performance executed when the special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired, and FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation performance executed when the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired.

Here, the contents of the special variation performance (pseudo variation performance) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third symbol is stopped (provisionally stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation performance that makes the player think that multiple special symbol variations have been performed. First, a reach performance is performed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation performance, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (displayed as "353" in the figure). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation performance, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and the player is configured to think that the second special symbol lottery performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable performance, the reach performance that gives hope for a big win is stopped with a performance result that indicates a miss (
A special first half performance will be executed, in which the screen will be temporarily stopped.

After that, in the latter half of the special variation performance (about 30 seconds), a variation performance (special latter half performance) is executed to restart the temporarily stopped third pattern. This special latter half performance is executed by restarting the already acquired special pattern 2.
The presentation mode is configured to be different depending on the reserved number. For example, when the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is secured, the special latter half presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone as shown in FIG. 125(b), and when the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not secured, the special latter half presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed after the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 126. In other words, in this control example, as a special variation presentation, the type of special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed ends is determined based on the reserved number of special symbols, and the presentation mode of the special latter half presentation is set in a presentation mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a special second half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the change in the second special pattern during the chance zone (see Figure 125 (b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the second half period is varied in accordance with the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have already been acquired.
Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the special variation performance is executed, if neither the special pattern 2 reserved ball nor the special pattern 1 reserved ball is secured, one variation performance (third variation performance) is executed using the entire variation period of the second special pattern variation without executing the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in FIG.
The game is configured to execute a variation performance in which the symbol is never temporarily stopped. This allows the player to feel that multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one second special symbol variation, since the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only when the number of reserved special symbols is secured.

In addition, only when the result of the second special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the number of provisional stops of the third pattern executed during the latter half period is set to be different from the number of reserved special patterns 2 already acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third pattern is provisionally stopped five or more times, the player can expect that the second special pattern variation being executed will win the jackpot. As described above, in this control example, since the player is configured to have difficulty in distinguishing between the case where the third pattern is provisionally stopped and the case where it is stopped, it is difficult to accurately determine the number of provisional stops. Therefore, the number of provisional stops and the number of stop displays can be mixed together to make the player think that the provisional stop display has been performed five or more times, or a part of the provisional stop display can be thought of as a stop display, and the number of provisional stop displays can be thought of as not reaching five times even though the provisional stop display has actually been performed five or more times, providing the player with the fun of predicting the performance result.

It should be noted that other configurations may be used as the presentation mode of the special variation presentation. For example, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Alternatively, at least a part of the presentation mode of the special variation presentation (for example, the background color, the effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be gradually changed depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Also, a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third pattern has been temporarily stopped at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third pattern (for example, the first, second,
The display may be configured to display the number of times the message was received.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the special variation effect is executed without securing the reserved ball for the special symbol 2, the characters "Chance Zone End" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally).
Since the presentation mode is executed as the special latter half presentation, after the player thinks that the chance zone has ended, the presentation result of the special variable presentation, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol, is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is unexpected.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed in some of the second special symbol variations during the normal state, and the rest are configured to execute one variation performance for one second special symbol variation. Therefore, when multiple (maximum four) special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired in a normal symbol winning game, it is possible to suppress the special variation performance from being executed for an unnecessary long time.

Next, the content of the presentation executed during the big win ending period in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 127. Fig. 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half period of the ending period of a normal big win game.
FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, FIG. 127(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this control example, when the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which the high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than when the jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not easily set. Specifically, the high probability jackpot game is configured to set the jackpot ending period to 17 seconds, and the normal jackpot game is configured to set the jackpot ending period to 15 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period (before the high probability state is set) that the game content will change significantly through the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the high probability state). In addition, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends by using a long ending period.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, even if a special jackpot game is executed,
Unless the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 flows down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120), the special probability state is not set. Therefore, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the special probability jackpot game, the special probability state is not set after the special probability jackpot game ends, and the game enters the time-saving state (
A low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state is set is executed during the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect and the actual game state set will differ, causing a problem of dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the presentation period of the notification effect will differ, causing a problem of the notification effect being executed that feels strange to the player.

Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation mode of the notification presentation executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when a normal big win game is executed, the text "Chance mode 100 times" is displayed as a notification effect executed during the big win ending period, which indicates that a time-saving state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) (FIG. 127
(a)), and then, for the latter half of the period (7 seconds), if you win a jackpot during the time-saving state (
If a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery), a notification effect (see Figure 127 (c)) is executed in which the words "Get a jackpot and super chance during chance mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a special state is likely to be set.

On the other hand, when a sure-variant jackpot game is executed, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is configured to display the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" (see FIG. 127(b)) during the first half period (10 seconds) to indicate that a sure-variant state will be set, and then, during the second half period (7 seconds), to display the words "Be careful not to forget to take your card" (see FIG. 127(d)) as a warning that is not directly related to the game content.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is configured to be preset at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game.

Here, even if a certain jackpot game is executed, during the jackpot game,
In this case, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(b) is changed to the display mode in which the word "Super" is not displayed and the notification effect performed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period of the big win is changed to the notification effect performed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period of the normal win game (FIG. 127(c)
(see reference) is switched to the

More specifically, in the display mode shown in FIG. 127(a), the display layer (display image layer) on which the word "Super" is displayed is different from the display layer (display image layer) on which the word "100 chance modes" is displayed. The display layer (
The display instruction to the display screen (display layer) can be switched on or off. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a big win game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the latter half of the big win ending period, which is set to be the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types. In addition, in this control example, the latter half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period with the same length for all jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first half of the jackpot ending period may be configured to be the same length for all jackpot types. Furthermore, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of the jackpot types. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be configured to be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be configured to be the same length.

In addition, in this control example, the ending period is set to a different length depending on the type of jackpot that has been won, but without being limited to this, the length of the ending period may be configured to differ depending on the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the performance executed during the chance mode will be described with reference to Figs. 128 to 130. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set 100 times after the end of the big win game. Furthermore, if the ball enters a specific area (
If you pass through the V gate (65v), the high probability state of the special pattern will be 5 times higher after the big win game ends.
The number of times is set to 0. Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the system is configured to be able to set a case where a V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball during the big win game has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v, and a case where a V notification effect is not executed.

If the V notification effect is executed during the big win game, a performance mode (special chance mode) is set to notify the player that a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) has been set after the big win game ends. If the V notification effect is not executed during the big win game, that is, if the ball enters the specific area (V gate) 65 during the big win game,
When the ball does not pass through v, or when the V notification presentation is not executed even though the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a presentation mode (chance mode) in which it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game is set.

When the chance mode is set as the performance mode, the words "Chance Mode in progress" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds to indicate the period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (see FIG. 1).
28(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) is a 20-minute game after the chance mode is set.
This shows the state in which the special pattern variation is being executed, and the remaining period notification mode is
"80" indicates that the chance mode will end if the special pattern change is executed 80 more times.
The word "times" is displayed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a sure-win state or a time-saving state from the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can play while hoping that the current game state is a game state (sure-win state) that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, only when the V notification effect is not executed during the big win game, even if the probability variable state is set after the big win game ends, the chance mode can be set as the effect mode. Therefore, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big win game,
That is, even though the player is informed that the probability variable state will be set after the big win game ends, the chance mode will be set after the big win game ends, and the player will be confused.
When a V notification effect is executed to notify that 65v has been passed, a super chance mode is set as an effect mode for indicating that a probability variable state is set after the end of a big win game, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed, the chance mode is set as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, the super chance mode may be set in some cases where the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it has become impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), a determination is made as to whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game and whether a V notification effect has been executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery) where a determination result that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a determination result that a V notification effect has not been executed are obtained, a display mode (Figures 127(b) and 127(d)) indicating that a special probability state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game can be displayed, and a super chance mode can be set as the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, even if the V notification performance is not executed during the big win game, the possibility of the super chance mode being set can be left, so that the player can play with a sense of expectation until the big win game ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of the big win game, the game state may be set to the time-saving state or the probability state. And, regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues is displayed. In other words, the gaming machine is configured to be able to set a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) as advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state as gaming states to be set after the end of a jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period from the end of a jackpot game until 50 special symbol variations are executed), and the second advantageous gaming state continues for a second period (the period from the end of a jackpot game until 100 special symbol variations are executed), which is longer than the above-mentioned first period, and when the first period has elapsed after the first advantageous gaming state has been set after the end of a jackpot game, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period has elapsed, and when the second period has elapsed, the normal state is set. In this gaming machine, regardless of whether the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a remaining period notification is possible to indicate the remaining period until the advantageous gaming state ends (the second period).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of the duration of the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Furthermore, in this control example, when the remaining period of the second period (the remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state is configured to be executable using the notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.

Here, referring to Fig. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be explained. Fig. 128(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in Fig. 128(b), when a chance mode is set while the probability variable state is set and a predetermined notification condition is met, a game state suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed (displayed in a white display mode in Fig. 128(b)). Then,
The small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays a comment "Big Win Expectation Increase". By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which of the advantageous game states is set while informing the player of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 128(b) can be displayed when the special pattern change being executed is a big win change, or when the acquired special pattern 2 reserved ball contains information about winning the big win, during the period during which the probability of a big win state can be set in the chance mode (within the period until the special pattern change is executed 50 times after the big win game ends).

By configuring in this way, during the chance mode indicating the period during which the advantageous game state advantageous to the player continues, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the probability variable state is set, information regarding winning the jackpot) can be displayed using the same display mode, so that it is possible to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand. Also, even if the time-saving state is actually set, it is possible to display a display mode that is likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set based on winning the jackpot, so that it is possible to make the player think that the probability variable state is set at a rate higher than the design value, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, it may be configured to execute the performance during the chance mode using a technical idea different from the technical idea of the above-mentioned control example. For example, when the chance mode is set during the high probability state, if a jackpot is won or the acquired reserved ball for special chart 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, a suggestive performance to suggest that the currently set game state is a time-saving state (for example, a performance in which the display mode of the remaining time notification is displayed in a different display mode (kanji numeral display mode) from that shown in Fig. 128 (a) and (b)) may be executed. This allows the player to think that he or she has won a jackpot during a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state in an advantageous game state, and increases the player's motivation to play.
In addition, since the ratio of the probability variable state being set in the game history can be made to appear lower than the actual ratio, the player can play the game with a higher expectation that the probability variable state will be set in the next big win game.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b), in this first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period (remaining period) during which the chance mode will continue is changed to make it possible to suggest the currently set game state to the player, and it is configured so that the game state suggestion effect suggesting the currently set game state can be easily understood by a player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode. However, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, and for example, a first display mode (e.g., the character "Chance") that is more likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., the character "Pinch") that is more likely to be displayed when the time-saving state is set than when the probability variable state is set may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or
The display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) displayed on the display surface of the first display unit may be changed to execute a game state indication effect.

In addition, in this first control example, both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of times the special symbol variation is executed reaches a predetermined number of times.
As shown in FIG. 8(a) and FIG. 8(b), the display mode of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period during which the chance mode will continue (the remaining period during which the high probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue) is used to suggest the current game state. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol will continue until the next big win game is executed,
The above-mentioned configuration of the chance mode may be used. In this case, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the duration of the chance mode,
The remaining period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (the period until the time-saving state ends) is notified by a remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time-saving state is set, a presentation is executed to notify that the normal state has been entered, and if a special probability state is set, a presentation can be executed in which the word "Congratulations" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special pattern will continue until the next jackpot game is played, that is, a display mode indicating that the remaining period for which the special probability state will continue is the period until the next jackpot, and the word "Congratulations" may be displayed if a specified notification condition is met during the period in which the chance mode is set.

In other words, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) which is updated from time to time in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode which is updated every time a special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode which only indicates that the remaining period of the chance mode exists, that is, a remaining period notification mode which does not indicate the number of remaining times of the special symbol which can be executed during the chance mode, as in the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128(a), may be used, or a remaining period notification mode which can roughly notify the remaining period of the chance mode by varying the display mode (for example, varying the display color) in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which a plurality of remaining period notification modes can be displayed, and the display modes of the plurality of displayed remaining period notification modes are combined, so that the player can grasp the remaining period of the chance mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the contents of the effects executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation contents and operation timing. Although detailed explanations are omitted, the operation effects are configured to change the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, to execute a guide notification to have the player operate the frame button 22 as part of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and to execute an effect in a different mode of effect when the player operates the frame button 22, and to enliven the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play games other than the action of launching balls, and to suppress the player from getting bored of the game early.

Here, among the above-mentioned operation effects, the contents of the various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be explained. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) is set, a different change time can be selected according to the number of times the special symbol changes after the advantageous gaming state is set. Specifically, the period from the first to the twentieth time that the special symbol changes after the advantageous gaming state is set is the first period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time (for example, 5 seconds) is likely to be selected, and the period from the 21st to
The period from the 49th time to the 50th time becomes a second period in which a longer variable time (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) than the first period is likely to be set, and only the 50th time becomes a specific period in which a specific variable time (e.g., 20 seconds) is set, and the period from the 51st time to the 100th time becomes a specific period in which a variable time (e.g., 20 seconds) similar to the second period is likely to be set.
For example, the third period is configured to be easily set to a value between 10 and 30 seconds.

In other words, during the predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, that is, during the predetermined period after the end of the big win game, the special symbol variation is likely to be executed in a short variation time.
If a jackpot is won during the period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play multiple jackpot games at short intervals. This makes it possible for the player to think that the next jackpot game is being played as part of the previous jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the second and third periods, the special symbol fluctuations are more likely to be executed with shorter fluctuation times than when the normal state is set, and are more likely to be executed with longer fluctuation times than in the first period. This makes it possible to ensure a period during the chance mode during one special symbol fluctuation during which a suggestive performance is executed to suggest whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state. Also, in the specific period (the 50th special symbol fluctuation after the advantageous game state is set), a specific fluctuation time (20 seconds) is always executed.
A special symbol variation is performed, and a suggestive performance is performed for 20 seconds to suggest to the player whether or not the probability variable state has been set (is set).

In this way, by making it possible to select different change times depending on the number of times the special pattern change is performed, it is possible to execute a performance according to each change number using an appropriate period of time.

FIG. 129(a) shows a state in which the chance mode is set as the presentation mode.
FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents that are displayed during a period other than a high-speed fluctuation period (a normal fluctuation period) when a normal state is internally set. FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents that are displayed during a period other than a high-speed fluctuation period (a normal fluctuation period).
13 is a schematic diagram showing the display mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display display shown in (a). In this control example, during the normal variation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the player can press (operate) the frame button 22 to alternately switch between the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode).

129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a framed button 22 is displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm in a display mode indicating that it is operable (in the figure, an arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of button depression), and the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays the words "sea mode," indicating that sea mode is currently set. When the player operates the framed button 22 in this state, the display switches from "sea mode" to "mountain mode," as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, the contents of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be explained with reference to Fig. 130. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state or the probability variable state is set to when the 20th special symbol fluctuation ends), the background image is configured not to be switched (to be difficult to be displayed). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time for one special symbol fluctuation,
If the background image is switched, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will change frequently, making it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery, so the background image is configured not to be switched (to be difficult to understand). However, if all player operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

Therefore, in this control example, if the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period,
Instead of switching the background image, a different effect is executed.
As shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the sub-display area D
The word "Special Mode" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the main display area Dm, and the player is notified that the current period is a high-speed fluctuation period. During this "Special Mode", regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the third symbol fluctuation effect is also executed in a "Special Mode"-specific fluctuation effect. Also during the "Special Mode", the icon HR10 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 130(b), a game status suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed.

In this way, even if the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation presentation to be executed can be varied depending on the timing of the operation, so that the player can be motivated to play by pressing the frame button 22 at various timings.
The same guide display (icon HR10) is used to guide the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, and when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation presentation that is executed is made different depending on the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know what kind of operation presentation will be executed until he actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, which makes the player more motivated to operate the frame button 22.

In this control example, the frame button 2 is pressed during the high-speed fluctuation period.
When the player operates the button 2, multiple operation effects can be executed, and the ratio at which each operation effect is selected is varied according to the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state based on the appearance ratio of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is repeatedly executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the background image is switched when the frame button 22 is pressed. Specifically, when the reserved ball (special pattern 2 reserved ball) of the second special pattern acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information on winning the jackpot, the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning the jackpot and the special pattern change executed before the special pattern change (the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning the jackpot) are configured to be executable, and when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the conditions for executing the special pattern change are satisfied, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (e.g., sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (e.g., space mode). In other words, when the background image is switched based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases, so the player can be encouraged to actively press the frame button 22.

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the special operation (long press) on the frame button 22 is configured to be executable to switch the display of the background image. This special operation (long press) is determined to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for two seconds, and the period until it is determined that the operation has been executed is longer than the normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. Therefore, since it is an operation that is difficult to execute frequently compared to the normal operation (press), even if the switching display of the background image is configured to be executable, it is possible to suppress the switching display of the background image from being frequently executed. In this control example, the long press operation is used as a special operation with a longer operation time than the normal operation, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22 as the operation means, an operation means having multiple operation units (e.g., a cross key) may be provided, and a special operation performed by operating the multiple operation units in a predetermined order may be specified.

Next, referring to Fig. 131, the contents of the performance executed during the "super chance mode" in which the player is notified that the probability variable state is set will be explained. Fig. 131(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode", and Fig. 131(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents when the second special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode".

In this control example, when a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. When a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable state is set with a high probability (a probability variable jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). The probability variable state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the probability of a special symbol being selected is reached, the player must win the jackpot in the second special symbol selection before the specified number of special symbol selections (50 times) are performed (the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1.
As long as the player wins the second special symbol lottery, the probability of the probability of the special symbol being selected is high.

On the other hand, even if the probability variable state is set, for example, if the probability variable jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the probability variable state is set immediately after the jackpot game ends, that is, in the state in which the probability variable state is set, the special symbol 2 reserved ball is not acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball is acquired, the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 100% of the time, whereas when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 50% of the time.
The probability of a jackpot game being played is 0% and the remaining 50% is a normal jackpot game. In other words, even if the probability of a jackpot game is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of a jackpot game being played may not be looped.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the high probability state, if the player quickly determines that the jackpot won is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) for which a normal jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play will decrease. Therefore, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the high probability state, a double reach effect is easily executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the high probability jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state,
The above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (see FIG. 131(a)).
.

This makes it possible to prevent a reach effect from being executed in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in a reach state when a normal jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the special pattern fluctuation period, and to suppress players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the period in which the special patterns change.

Also, as shown in Fig. 131(a), in this control example, during the "Super Chance Mode", similarly to the above-mentioned "Chance Mode", the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures. And, at the top of the main display area Dm, the characters "Super Chance Mode" are displayed as a display mode to inform the player that the current probability change state is in progress.

Here, during the super chance mode, the double reach (
In the case where a double reach effect is executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to a certain jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state, there is a risk that the player will easily understand that the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation, so in this control example, the double reach effect shown in Fig. 131(a) can be executed even in the variation effect executed in response to the second special symbol variation. In other words, the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot can be executed in the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which a certain jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this manner, even if the double reach presentation shown in FIG. 127(a) is executed, it is made difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the lottery of the second special pattern, an effect is executed in which the type of third pattern that reaches the reach state when the middle pattern row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third pattern corresponding to a sure jackpot (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9), as shown in Figure 131 (b), (promotion effect to a sure jackpot double reach).

By configuring in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery is a big win, the player can be notified in advance that a high probability big win game will be executed. Also, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while expecting that it will be upgraded to a high probability double reach midway.

In this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach performance being executed to the double reach performance with a certain probability, a variable condition is set that is established when the variable state of the middle pattern Z2 becomes a predetermined state (one lap has passed). However, the variable condition is not limited to this, and for example,
A variable condition may be set to be established when the third pattern corresponding to a reach state (the third pattern which is a combination that results in a jackpot) passes through a reach effective line as the third pattern variably displayed by 2, or a variable condition may be set to be established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of the third symbols in the reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbol (shown by a triangle in the figure) is erased, and the upper symbol row Z1
"3.2.1" is displayed from the left as the lower pattern row Z2, and "1.2.
It may be configured to execute a triple reach effect in which "3" is displayed. Even in this configuration, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reaches of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot compared to the double reach effect, so that it is possible to visually inform the player that there is a high possibility that he or she has won the probability variable jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied to a variable performance executed during a normal state. For example, when a variable condition is established during a normal single reach performance in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in a reach state, the third pattern in the reach state may be
The type of the symbol may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probability of a big win, or the number of the third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while expecting a more advantageous presentation result to be provided until the variable presentation ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example,
The relationship with the performance mode to be executed will be explained. Fig. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third pattern, and Fig. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third pattern.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to Fig. 25, but in this control example, a variation pattern obtained by combining a basic time and an added time is defined as a variation pattern (variation time) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. The period corresponding to the basic time is defined as a common variation pattern, and the period corresponding to the added time is defined as a specific variation pattern.

That is, in this control example, the third symbol variation presentation mode executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary the period from when the ready state is displayed until the third symbol is stopped and displayed according to the type of the third symbol that will be in the ready state. And, the third symbol according to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol that will be in the ready state. By configuring in this way,
The third pattern change performance (the third pattern change performance executed in accordance with the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the patterns start to change can be made common.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 132(a), in the case of non-reach variation performance, since the additional time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation performance (for example, at a timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later, the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a stationary display mode in which a reach state does not occur on the effective line, and two seconds later, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a stationary display mode in which the lottery result is a miss. After that, after a one-second stationary display period (fixed time), the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed as fixed.

As shown in Fig. 132(b), when the reach variation performance is executed, the basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the performance mode from the reach state to 5 seconds is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the performance mode from the reach state to the middle symbol row Z2 making one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the performance mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the presentation mode of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of the big win game will be described. FIG. 133(a) shows a normal big win, FIG.
b) shows the flow of the ending period for the special jackpot,
FIG. 133(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the special jackpot. The normal jackpot is 15 seconds, and the special jackpot is 17 seconds.
The video game is configured so that a period D is set, and an ending performance is executed that is divided into a first half period and a second half period (see FIG. 127).

In this control example, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

First, referring to Fig. 133(a), the contents of the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed will be described. In this control example, in order to prevent various processes executed during the jackpot game from becoming complicated and the processing load during the jackpot game from increasing, the presentation mode of the presentation (ending display presentation) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the round game (game in which prize balls can be obtained) during the jackpot game is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When a normal jackpot game is executed, the display mode of the ending performance (see Fig. 127 (a) and (c)) is set to inform the player that the "chance mode" will be set (time-saving state will be set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. Then, in the normal jackpot game, if the ball enters a specific area (V
Since the ball does not pass through gate 65v, a preset ending performance is executed as the ending performance of the big win game.

Next, referring to Figures 133(b) and 133(c), the contents of the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game when a guaranteed jackpot game is played will be explained. When a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the ending presentation is decided based on the decision result. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is played, a guide announcement is given to the player to guide the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and a notification is given to inform the player that the ball will actually pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.
It is determined whether or not to execute a V notification effect in which a V passage notification is executed to notify the player that the player has passed through the V gate 65v, and if it is determined that a V notification effect is executed, a display mode (see Fig. 127 (b) and (d)) is set as an ending effect to inform the player that a "super chance mode" will be set (a probability variable state will be set) after the end of the big win game. On the other hand, if it is determined that a V notification effect is not executed, the following is set as an ending effect.
A display mode is set to indicate to the player that a "chance mode" will be set after the end of the big win game (a display mode in which the "Super" display is deleted from the display mode in FIG. 127(b) and see FIG. 127(c)).

When executing the V notification performance, the "
A guide notification is executed in which the comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V-pass notification is executed in which the comment "Get V!!" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.
Even if the announcement is made, the ball remains in a specific area (
If the player does not pass through the V gate 65v, the player is notified of the specific area (V gate 65v)
Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game ends, the above-mentioned V passage notification is executed, and if the V round game ends without the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the words "Too bad you didn't get a V!" are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the big win game arrives, a judgment is made as to whether or not to replace the display mode of the ending performance set in advance based on the actual game result of the V round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification performance is to be executed at the start of the big win game, a display mode indicating that the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the ending performance (see Fig. 127 (b) and (d)) is set in advance.
If the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending performance is executed without switching the display mode of the ending performance. On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game, so the display mode of the ending performance is switched to a display mode indicating that the "chance mode" is set (
A replacement process is then performed, and the ending presentation is executed in the replaced display mode (a display mode in which the display of "Super" is deleted from the display mode of FIG. 127(b) and see FIG. 127(c)).

In addition, when the V notification performance is not executed, the V notification performance is not executed during the jackpot game, as in the normal jackpot game, and the various performance displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 indicate that the V round game is being executed and that the ball is in the specific area (V gate) 65v
A big win game is executed in which the player cannot know that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, an ending performance is executed in a preset display mode. This makes it possible to provide a state in which a "chance mode" is set after the end of the big win game, even if a probability variable state is actually set.

Furthermore, when the "chance mode" is set while the probability variable state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability variable jackpot game), so that it is difficult to know in advance that the probability variable state will be set by the effect during the jackpot game. Note that in this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game where the V notification effect is not executed, the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, even though the probability variable state is actually set. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, the V passing notification may be not executed at a predetermined rate, and the specific area (
V Gate) If the ball passes through 65V but the V passage notification is not executed,
The "chance mode" may be set after the big win game ends.
In this case, it is preferable to configure the V notification effect so that it can be executed even when a normal jackpot game is executed.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily create an event in which the V passing notification is not executed even though the V notification display has been executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the "chance mode" being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the V notification display has been executed.

Next, the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of the big win game will be described with reference to FIG. 134. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, after the end of the big win game, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set for a first specific period (when the special symbol variation is 100
Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends for a predetermined second specific period (period until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times). Then, if the game state set after the jackpot game ends is a time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (
See FIG. 134(b). In addition, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the presentation content during the jackpot game (depending on the presence or absence of a V notification presentation), and as shown in FIG. 134(a), when it is notified that the probability state is set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, when the display mode of the entry into the "super chance mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "super chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display a in FIG. 134(a)), and when it is not notified that the probability state is set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, when the display mode of the entry into the "chance mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in the display a in FIG. 134(a), when the "Super Chance Mode" is set after the big win game ends, the "Super Chance Mode" continues until the probability change state ends, and when the game state transitions from the probability change state to the time-saving state, the "Chance Mode" is switched to and displayed. In this case, while the "Super Chance Mode" is set, the display in FIG.
As shown in (a), the remaining period is the period until the probability of the bonus ending (maximum 50 times).
is displayed in the small display area Ds2. This allows the player to be informed in an easy-to-understand manner of the duration of the most advantageous game state for the player. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131(a), a pre-notification effect may be configured to be executed to notify the player in advance that the time-saving state will be set 50 times after the probability variable state ends. For example, when the remaining period mode (in FIG. 131(a), which indicates the remaining period of the probability variable state, is displayed in white as "49 times"), becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, "10 times" or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time-saving state will continue to be set later may be displayed in a display mode different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probability variable state (for example, "50 times" is displayed in black). This allows the player to be informed in advance that a game state (time-saving state) more advantageous than the normal state will be set even after the probability variable state ends.

Also, when the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probability variable state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be displayed, and each time a special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be subtracted by one. Alternatively, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probability variable state and the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state set after the probability variable state ends may be displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probability variable state may be subtracted first, and when the remaining period of the probability variable state becomes 0 and the time-saving state is entered, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be subtracted. Even in this case, it is possible to notify in advance a player playing in the probability variable state that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the probability variable state ends.

Next, the effect during the chance mode will be explained using display b in Fig. 134(a) and Fig. 134(b). In this control example, the chance mode is set as the effect mode in some cases where the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to Fig. 128, a game state suggestion effect is executed that changes the notification mode of the remaining period notification. This game state suggestion effect is set so that the chance mode during the probability variable state has a higher appearance rate than the chance mode during the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the operation effect during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In this control example, the operation effect (when the player presses the frame button 2) executed during the chance mode is
2 (operation means) by the player, and depending on the operation timing and operation method of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), during the chance mode when the time-saving state is set, the operation method is the button PUSH.
When "normal press" is executed, during the high speed change period until the special symbol change is executed 20 times, an operation effect of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the change effect being executed will be in a reach state during the third symbol change, or a "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and thereafter (after the number of special symbol changes is 21), an operation effect of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed. Also, as an operation method, when "long press" of the button is executed, during the high speed change period until the special symbol change is executed 20 times, an operation effect of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed, and during the period from the number of special symbol changes of 21 to 50 (second period), an operation effect of "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and thereafter (after the number of special symbol changes is 51), an operation effect of "state suggestion" which suggests the game state which has been executed in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (
In order to indicate the game state that was set after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot game), a "past state indication" operation presentation can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode when the probability variable state is set, when the button push "normal push" is executed as an operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation performance of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the fluctuation performance being executed will be in a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state, or "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (second period), the operation performance of "background mode transition" or "state suggestion" can be executed, and thereafter (after the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation is 51 times or later), the operation performance of "background mode transition" can be executed. Also, when the button is pressed and held "long press" as an operation method, the operation performance of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state is set or when the probability-changing state is set, the "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, and the duration of the chance mode (100 times of time-saving) is divided into a plurality of periods according to the number of special symbol variations executed during the chance mode, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) is made different for each set game state and period. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it is possible to have the player predict the currently set game state based on the contents of the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation, and therefore it is possible to have the player eagerly operate the operation means in playing the game.

As explained above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if a "normal press" operation is performed on the frame button 22, the "background mode transition" operation presentation is less likely to be executed than in other periods. However, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which transition to background mode is less likely to occur) may be set at other timings. For example, the period until the end of one special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game may be set as the normal time-saving fluctuation period, and the period from the execution of the second special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot game to the execution of the twentieth special pattern fluctuation may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring in this way, for example, during the first special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, as a notice mode for notifying the player that a high-speed variation period will be set, a comment such as "You will not be able to change the background mode from the next variation! Please select your desired background now" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the player can be prevented from suddenly being set in a period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed variation period), and from being unable to play in the desired background mode, resulting in a decline in motivation to play. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the display to display comments such as "There is a possibility that the chance mode is a high-speed variation state! Don't give up!" and "When the display mode of the remaining number of times changes, it's your chance!" as a guide mode for explaining the game content of the "chance mode" to the player using the one special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the case where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot, as in this first control example, the background mode during the "chance mode" can be selected during the playing period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and when the "chance mode" is set, the player can be notified that the background mode cannot be changed for a specified period (during the high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting hole (through gate) 67.
The pachinko machine 10 performs a variable display in which the symbols are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time.
When it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a "X" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the varying display on the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this control example, the ``○'' pattern), a winning game (normal winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (normal symbol change time) is different depending on the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol that is set. When the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol change time is 10 seconds, and when the high probability state (
When the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds, the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds. This makes it possible to greatly separate the frequency of normal symbol winning games in the low probability state of normal symbols from the frequency of normal symbol winning games in the high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, the normal symbol variation time can be shortened in the high probability state of normal symbols compared to the low probability state of normal symbols, thereby increasing the number of normal symbol lotteries (normal symbol lotteries) that can be executed per unit time, and further making it easier to win in the normal symbol lottery that is executed. Therefore, while it is difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, it is easy to execute a normal symbol winning game when the high probability state of normal symbols is set.

In this control example, the high probability state of the normal pattern is higher than the low probability state of the normal pattern.
The set normal symbol variation time and winning probability are configured to be advantageous to the player, but this is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be advantageous to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the same normal symbol variation time (for example, 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. This allows, for example,
In a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time required for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state of normal symbols (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) is difficult to execute to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game is easy to execute, a long-term normal symbol variation executed during the normal state (a normal symbol winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state)
This can prevent a situation where a transition to a time-shortened state occurs during execution of the time-shortened state, and a long period is set during which a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-shortened state, even though the time-shortened state has been set.

As described above with reference to Figure 2, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, various devices are arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (is unlikely to be any difference) in the game value obtained by the player whether the player plays a game in which the ball flows down to the left area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down to the right-hand area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to a perpendicular line to the center of the game board 13, and in the lower region of the variable display unit 80, there are arranged a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball enters and which can trigger a lottery for a first special pattern, a second ball entry port 640 provided below the first ball entry port 64 and which can trigger a lottery for a second special pattern when a ball enters the port, an electric device 640a provided at the second ball entry port 640 and which is opened in a normal winning game which is executed when a winning normal pattern lottery is won, and a variable winning device 65 provided below the second ball entry port 640 and which is opened in a jackpot game which is executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery.

A ball shot by a left-handed player flows down the left side area and passes through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a rate of 1/2. The ball that passes through the through gate 67 also passes through the through gate 67.
The balls that do not pass through the first hole are also picked up by the nails planted in the game board 13 and sent to the first hole in the lower area.
The ball flows down toward the ball entry port 64. Here, the ball that flows straight down between the nails enters one of the two general ball entry ports 63. In this control example, it is configured so that about 1/50 of the balls that flow down the left side area enter one of the two general ball entry ports 63, and when a ball enters the general ball entry port 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640, and when the electric device 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 2), one ball enters the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 1 in 2 balls that are shot in a left-handed play and flow down the left side area, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. The variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640 when a jackpot game is not being played, and when a jackpot game is being played, two balls enter the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 2 in 3 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the variable winning device 65 will be explained. This variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a big win game that is executed when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a high probability state of a special symbol can be set after the big win game ends when a ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the big win game passes through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the variable winning device 65.

In addition, depending on the type of the jackpot won, a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is likely to pass through a specific area (V gate) (variable jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through (normal jackpot game) can be executed.
A jackpot game in which a ball that enters into the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate), that is, a jackpot game in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V gate) if normal play is played during the jackpot game, is referred to as a certain variable jackpot game, and a jackpot game in which a ball that enters into the variable winning device 65 has difficulty passing through the specific gate, that is, a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) even if normal play is played during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot game.

As described above, even if a high probability jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this control example, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the round game (V round game) that is easiest to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) is executed in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned configuration is used, the presentation mode of the notification effect for informing the player of the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game (e.g., the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period) cannot be set in advance (e.g., at the start of the jackpot game), and the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to the ball output and control processing related to the display are executed closely, resulting in a problem that the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, when a special jackpot game is executed, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate), and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is executed, and the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched only if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate).
In this way, when a normal game is played during a jackpot game, the presentation mode of the notification mode is set in advance assuming a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the notification mode is switched only when it is determined that an unexpected game state is set.
The frequency with which a control process for setting the presentation mode of the notification presentation during a jackpot game is executed can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the probability variable jackpot game, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to inform the player that the probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends before the probability variable state is actually set (during the jackpot game) in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, if the probability variable state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of the fact for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be short.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, simply executing the process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game will not be enough.
Since the length of the ending period is different, there is a problem that an unnatural notification effect is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) in a probability variable jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode is stored in advance in the display control device 1.
14 characters must be stored in the ROM 234, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be the same regardless of the jackpot type (probability jackpot, normal jackpot), and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half period of the normal jackpot game ending period. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not give the player a sense of incongruity without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability jackpot game.

In this control example, the big win ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period,
By configuring the length of the latter half period to be a common length regardless of the type of jackpot, the presentation mode of the notification presentation executed when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific area (V gate) during a guaranteed jackpot game can be switched and set, but without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of a jackpot game, or it is possible to continuously execute the round presentation executed during the final round period of a jackpot game for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then execute a notification presentation to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area may be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 may be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, while the game of putting the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is being executed, the player can play the game in any game method, and the second ball entrance 64 can be executed in any game method.
In a game in which the ball is aimed at 0 (a game during a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 is located in the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80 and in the right area (
The through gate 67 in the left side area is attached to the game board 13.
The through gate 67 in the right area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After the lottery for the second symbol wins, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the above-mentioned second symbol reserved lamp 84. The second symbol reserved lamp 84 is provided in a number equal to the maximum reserved number, and is disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this control example, or by the first symbol display device 37a, 3
7b and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). Also, the normal symbol start gate (
The number of the through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (for example, two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example,
It may be to the right of 0. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 by left-handed play are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. Below the variable display unit 80 (below the electric prop 640)
A variable winning device 65 with an opening width of about 50 mm is provided so that both a ball shot by a left-handed play and flowing down the left side area, and a ball shot by a right-handed play and flowing down the right side area can win. By providing a variable winning device 65 with a wide opening width in this way, both a ball that flows down the left side of the electric role 640 in a left-handed play and a ball that flows down the right side of the electric role 640 in a right-handed play can win in the variable winning device 65.

Here, referring to FIG. 120, the specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 65 will be described.
FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65.
FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device 65.
As shown in FIG. 20(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball that flows down the opening and closing door 65b in the open state and enters the specific winning port 65a flows down in the left and right directions.

Specifically, the ball that flows down the left side area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left side slope of the guide member 65d and enters the first opening 65
In addition, the ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

And, below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, there is a variable winning device 65
A ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) is provided for detecting a winning ball,
When the ball detection sensor detects a ball, a payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, by providing an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and won in the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and won in the variable winning device 65 can pass, and by providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, the player can play the same game whether he plays left-handed or right-handed during a big win game.

Next, the flow of the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a will be described with reference to Fig. 120(b). As shown in Fig. 120(b), the ball that passes through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

An outlet 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3, and the balls that flow down the third flow path 65e3 enter the outlet 65h and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the balls that enter the outlet 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that enter the outlet 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and an outlet 65h2 is provided at the downstream end for receiving balls that have passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. The specific area (V gate) is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passing ball, and when it is detected that a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period during a jackpot game, the detection result is stored, and when the jackpot game ends, the stored result is referenced to set the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Here, the operation of the switching valve 65y during a big win will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member that is driven by a V solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137), not shown. When the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), the second flow path 65e2
When the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state), it maintains an open state to allow the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the fourth flow path 65e4.

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an OFF state, and is controlled to be ON only for a predetermined period during a jackpot game. Specifically, it is controlled to be ON when a specific round game (first round game) among multiple round games executed during a jackpot game is started, and to be OFF when the specific round game (first round game) is finished, or when the play time of the specific round game has elapsed a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during a jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, only when a big win game is being executed (when big win control is being executed), it is possible to make the ball enter the variable winning device 65, and to make the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. Also, the special privilege (
Since the setting of the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to be awarded at the end of the jackpot game (the process executed at the end of the jackpot game), even if a fraudulent act of passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v is performed at a timing other than during the jackpot game, the bonus will not be awarded to the player.

In this control example, in the big win control process executed during the big win game, the switching valve 65 is controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the timing when a specific round game is started.
The control unit 61 is configured to execute a switching control for switching y, but the control unit 61 may be configured to execute the switching control based on other triggers. For example, the switching control may be executed when a big win game starts, when the opening period of the big win game ends, or when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during a big win game is measured and the measurement result becomes a specific number. In addition, when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number, the number of balls in the whole big win game may be the object of discrimination, or the number of balls in each round game may be the object of discrimination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to know at what timing during a big win game a state in which it is easy to pass a ball into a specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when a jackpot game is executed and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 65b may be configured to be different for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if the same switching control is executed for the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of jackpot, a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V gate) 65v during the period in which the state in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) is set,
It is possible to execute a big win game that is difficult to pass.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example.
As shown in FIG. 1, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of the game in this control example will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example.
As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and is configured so that the normal state is set in the initial state (the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)).

During the normal state, a game is played mainly on the first special symbol lottery, which is executed by inserting a ball into the first ball entrance 64. In the normal state, in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set,
The probability of winning the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when the player wins the jackpot, either "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the jackpot type. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (variable jackpot game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is executed, and when "jackpot B" is selected, the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game.
A jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball through v is executed.

If the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This high probability state is terminated when the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, and the game state transitions to another game state. Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed reaches 50 times while the high probability state is set, the game state transitions from the high probability state to the time-saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is performed. In this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the special bonus state to the time-saving state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special pattern variation corresponding to the 50th special pattern drawing is displayed as stopped, but it is sufficient that the 51st special pattern drawing is not executed in a state in which a high probability state for the special pattern is set. For example, the gaming state may be transitioned immediately after the 50th special pattern drawing is executed (at the start of the 50th special pattern variation), or immediately before the execution of the 51st special pattern drawing (at a timing when the execution conditions for the 51st special pattern drawing are met but the special pattern drawing has not been executed).

Since the probability of winning is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric device 640 is more likely to open due to a normal symbol winning game than in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and a game is mainly played by the second special symbol lottery. In the probability of winning, where the high probability state of special symbols is set, the probability of a big win for the special symbols is set to 1/50, and when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big win type is "Big Win C" (selection rate 3/10), "Big Win D" (selection rate 4/10), or "Big Win E" (selection rate 4/10).
10), or "Big Win E" (selection rate 3/10).

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which a 4-round jackpot game is executed,
"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which a 7-round jackpot game is played.
"Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which a 16-round probability variable jackpot game is executed. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the probability of executing the probability variable jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 7 rounds of play are always executed, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, 8.8 rounds are executed on average (4 rounds is 30%, 7 rounds is 40%,
A round game of 16 rounds (30% of the total number of winning balls) is executed. Therefore, in terms of the average number of winning balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that a 4-round game will be executed, so the number of winning balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game will be the smallest when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of winning balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the first special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery.

Next, the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be explained. If "jackpot B" is won in the first special symbol drawing executed during the normal state, if the number of special symbol drawings executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, or if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the high probability jackpot game, the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol drawings executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100, or if a jackpot is won before reaching 100. In other words, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (if jackpot B is won), the special symbol fluctuation will be 10 times after the end of the jackpot game.
The time-saving state is set for the period until the 00th execution (the time-saving count is set to 100).
On the other hand, if the number of times of special symbol selection executed during the probability variable state exceeds 50 times, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times after the probability variable state ends.

During this time-saving state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as in the above-mentioned probability state, so the electric device 640 is easily opened, and the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Also, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower probability of winning than in the probability state, and the second
The ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same as in the probability of winning. In other words, the time-saving state is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability of winning in terms of the probability of winning the jackpot by the special symbol lottery. In this control example, the probability of winning and the time-saving state are configured to be the same in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability of winning is configured to be the same in the probability of winning and the time-saving state.
The variation time of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state may be made different, and for example, the special symbol variation may be made possible in a shorter variation time during the probability variable state than during the normal state.

<Electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a lottery for a special symbol, drawing a lottery for a normal symbol, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81.
The M203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.
With reference to Fig. 138, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for the lottery of special symbols, the lottery of normal symbols,
Setting the display on the first pattern display device 37, setting the display on the second pattern display device 83,
And, in order to set the display in the third pattern display device 81, the main control device 110
It is used in the MPU 201 of the present invention.

For the selection of special patterns and for setting the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a first winning random number counter C1 used for the selection of special patterns, a first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot type of the special pattern, a stop type selection counter (C3) used for selecting the stop type of a miss in the special pattern, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is used.
Each time the counter is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and the counter is a loop counter that returns to 0 after it has reached the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball opening 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4).
In the first ball entrance 64, a first winning random number counter C1
, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS
1 are stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

Then, when the starting condition (changing condition) of the special pattern is met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, which has information on the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed, are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values is initiated.

In this control example, the special symbols are of two types (first special symbol and second special symbol), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbols may be of one type.
When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values is started. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 using multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (
In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This allows the next special symbol variation to be executed promptly when the start condition of each special symbol is established.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery result for the special symbols is configured to be either a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result for the special symbols is a miss, the player may win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to be awarded a bonus, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, the RAM 20 of the main control device 110
A small win type counter can be provided within 3, and the obtained small win type counter value can be stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area and can be referred to when a lottery for special patterns is executed.

In addition, in the case where a small jackpot can be won by the special pattern lottery, for example, the transition of the game state based on winning a big jackpot and the transition of the game state based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and further, based on the set jackpot type, a new game state may be set after the jackpot game ends, and when a small jackpot is won, a small jackpot game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot, and the game state may not be transitioned even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this manner, the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition can be varied depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), thereby providing a wide variety of games.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, there is a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry of a ball (passage of a ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation first areas).
In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.
Each value of is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal pattern is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal pattern execution area,
A normal pattern variation based on various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 138. The first win random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and
The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.
The value of the random number that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, a jackpot for the special symbol is determined.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to Fig. 140(a). Fig. 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a jackpot in the lottery of a special symbol.

Specifically, the first winning random number table 202a specifies the value for determining a big win according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 140(a), for a game state with a low probability of a special symbol (normal state, time-saving state),
The values of the winning random number counter C1 are set to "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination values.
Any other value ("5 to 999") is stipulated as the judgment value for a miss. In addition, for a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol as a game state, "0 to 19" of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stipulated as the judgment value for a big win, and any other value ("20 to 9
99") is defined as the loss judgment value.
Since the update range of a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999", in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of being judged as a jackpot is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of being judged as a jackpot is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).
It becomes.

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of a special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four game states set by combining a special symbol state and a normal symbol state, or simply, the state of a special symbol may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "miss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, as a third lottery result,
It may be configured to be able to determine a "small win" as a type of "miss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to configure it so that a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give a small amount of bonus (prize balls) to the player when the big win is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is a type of "miss", it is possible to give the player prize balls by the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure it so that the process of changing the game state (setting the game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the bonus given to the player based on the big win and the bonus given to the player based on the small win.

As described above, when the special symbol lottery results in a "small prize", the first prize random number table 202a may be configured to specify the value of the first prize random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small prize". By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery and the small prize lottery can be executed in the same process, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big prize lottery and the small prize lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prohibit a big prize and a small prize from being won in the same special symbol lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (
In this embodiment, the timer is updated once for each timer interrupt process, and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is updated to the second ball entrance 640.
At the moment the ball enters the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203, the reserved ball is stored therein.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won by referring to the first winning type selection table 202c. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

FIG. 141(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the big win type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 141(a),
02d has a special symbol 1 jackpot table 202d1 which is referred to when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 which is referred to when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special chart 1 big win table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141(b). FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 1 big win table 202d1. As described above, this special chart 1 big win table 202d1
is a data table for selecting the type of jackpot to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern, and different jackpot types are defined according to the obtained value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a "jackpot A" is specified in correspondence with the range of "0 to 49" for the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50". Note that if the ball does not flow down (pass) through a specific area (V-gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (
When the bonus is not V, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is set to "0" after the big win game ends.
Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A". Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability of the "jackpot A" being determined is 50% (50/
100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 241(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99
" is set to correspond to the range of "Big Win B" as a big win type. This "Big Win B" is a big win type in which the number of rounds of the big win is 7, and a normal big win game is executed. After the big win game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1
"00" is a jackpot type in which the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set to "0." Furthermore, in the "jackpot B," it is stipulated that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B". Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability of the "jackpot B" being determined is 50% (50/
100).

That is, when the first special symbol lottery is won, two jackpot types (
The number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same for jackpot A and jackpot B, but the ease with which the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game is different, and the jackpot game is configured so that the jackpot game in which the ball flows down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is executed more easily in "jackpot A" than in "jackpot B". Therefore,
"Jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "Jackpot B".

Next, referring to FIG. 241(c), the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained. FIG. 241(c) shows the special chart 2 jackpot table 202d2.
This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2.
02d2 is a data table which is referred to when a jackpot type is selected upon winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the special chart 2 big win table 202 in this first control example
In d2, three jackpot types, "jackpot C" to "jackpot E", are defined as jackpot types for the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is set in the range of "0 to 29" and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has 4 rounds,
This is a jackpot type in which a special jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50". If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C",
It is stipulated that the ending period of a big win game is set to "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C". Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of the "jackpot C" being determined is 30% (30/
100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 69
The "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 and a special jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1
In the case where the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability jackpot game (non-V time), the probability jackpot counter 203i is set to "50".
The value of 03i is set to "0." Furthermore, in "Big Win D," it is stipulated that the ending period of the big win game is set to "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D". Therefore, when the second special symbol is selected as a jackpot, the probability of the "jackpot C" being determined is 40% (40/
100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 99
" is associated with the range of "Big Win E" as a big win type. This "Big Win E" is a big win type in which the number of rounds of the big win is 16 rounds and a sure-win game is executed. After the big win game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "
The special area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize device 65 during the special prize game is set to "50".
If the ball does not flow down (pass) (non-V), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set to "0" after the big win game ends. Furthermore, in the "Big Win E", it is stipulated that the ending period of the big win game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E". Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of the "jackpot E" being determined is 30% (30/
100).

That is, the three jackpot types that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery (
All of the jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E) result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is different. The jackpot E, which results in the most rounds of game, is the most advantageous jackpot type to the player, and the jackpot A is the least advantageous jackpot type to the player.

As explained above, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game is always played, so in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game ends, this is a more advantageous jackpot type than the first special symbol lottery, which plays a guaranteed jackpot game 50% of the time. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special symbol lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Also, the second special symbol lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other aspects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. In this control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are specified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be set based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the control examples described above.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot games are executed for all jackpots, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be possible to execute a different number of rounds of games depending on the selected jackpot type. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, the time-saving state is set for the same period (time-saving times 100 times) after the jackpot game ends for all jackpots, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the time-saving state is not set for some of the jackpot wins (some of the jackpot types that are set), or the time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) are made different depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the selected jackpot type, and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set.

Returning to Fig. 138 for further explanation, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of what are known as short-time misses, long-time misses, normal reaches, super reaches, etc. Determining the display mode, specifically, is determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one each time the main process (see Fig. 167), which will be described later, is executed once.
The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) that stores a random number value for determining one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.
It is located inside.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142(a),
2b is a normal table 20 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state.
2b1, and a probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 used when the probability variable state or time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state,
The variation pattern (variation time) selected can be varied depending on the game status.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Fig. 142(b) and Fig. 143. Fig. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of special pattern that was drawn and the result of the special pattern lottery that was executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG.
42(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the win/loss judgment is a big win, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) variation pattern with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although a detailed description will be omitted, in this control example, the added time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is set to "3 seconds", when it is "1", the added time is set to "3.5 seconds", when it is "2", the added time is set to "4 seconds", when it is "3.5 seconds", when it is "4.5 seconds", when it is "5.5 seconds", when it is "6.5 seconds", when it is "7.5 seconds", when it is "8.5 seconds", when it is "9.5 seconds", when it is "10.5 seconds", when it is "11.5 seconds", when it is "12.5 seconds", when it is "13.5 seconds", when it is "14.5 seconds", when it is "15.5 seconds", when it is "16.5 seconds", when it is "17.5 seconds", when it is "18.5 seconds", when it is "19.5 seconds", when it is "20.5 seconds", when it is "21.5 seconds", when it is "22.5 seconds", when it is "23.5 seconds", when it is "24.5 seconds", when it is "25.5 seconds", when it is "26.5 seconds", when it is "27.5 seconds", when it is "28.5 seconds", when it is "29.5 seconds", when it is "31.5 seconds", when it is "32.5 seconds", when it is "33.5 seconds", when it is "34.5 seconds", when it is "35.5 seconds", when it is "36.5 seconds", when it is "37.5 seconds", when it is "38.5 seconds", when it is "39.5 seconds", when it is "41.5 seconds", when it is "37.5 seconds", when it is "39.5 seconds", when it is "37.5 seconds", when it is "39.5 seconds", when it
If the time is "4.5 seconds," the additional time is "5 seconds,"
If the number is "4", the additional time is "5.5 seconds", if the number is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds", if the number is "6", the additional time is "6.5 seconds", if the number is "7", the additional time is "
If the answer is "7 seconds" or "8," the additional time is "7.5 seconds," if the answer is "9 to 11," the additional time is "8 seconds," if the answer is "12," the additional time is "8.5 seconds," if the answer is "13," the additional time is "9 seconds," if the answer is "14," the additional time is "9.5 seconds," if the answer is "15,"
It is specified that when the number is 1, the additional time is "10 seconds," when the number is 16, the additional time is "10.5 seconds," when the number is 17, the additional time is "11 seconds," when the number is 18, the additional time is "11.5 seconds," and when the number is 19, the additional time is "12 seconds."

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the added time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 in this control example), the reach effect can be executed with various types of third patterns without varying the period from when the variation effect is executed to when the reach state is reached.

Furthermore, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (Reach) with a variation time of 43 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this Super is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of either 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the details are omitted because the content is the same as the normal pattern described above.

Here, in this control example, the presentation mode of the reach presentation is configured to be variable depending on the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command; specifically, when the number of seconds included in the addition command is "3 seconds to 12 seconds", a normal reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle pattern column Z2 moves around one revolution and then stops) is executed, and when it is "13 seconds to 22 seconds", a super reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle pattern column Z2 moves around two revolutions and then stops) is executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, in a case where a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during an initial predetermined period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, the period in which the same performance mode is executed is set based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time), and the variable performance after the branch is executed based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an addition time).
Therefore, for example, even if the overall variable time is the same, different variable performances can be easily set on the voice lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio indicated by the added time in the variable time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are set to be the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed according to the length of the variable time set as the added time. However, without being limited to this, the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds, and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, and the added time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" solely for determining the type of third pattern.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, a performance is executed in which the variation performance of the third pattern that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation performance, so even if the type of the third pattern of the middle pattern column Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern with the number 1 added), the display order of the third pattern of the middle pattern column Z2 can be changed in the middle of the variation to correspond to the third pattern that will finally stop without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so there is no need to set the type of the third pattern that will reach the reach state by changing the added time, as in the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when a miss is determined, a fluctuation performance of the third symbol is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss without reaching a winning state. Therefore, there is no need to set the added time.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a reach-miss with a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this reach-miss is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second units according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, so a detailed description is omitted. In other words, even when the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. Note that when the lottery result is a miss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is a combination other than that of a big win, so on the voice lamp control device 113 side,
A correction process is executed so that the third symbol is set to a value shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command that is referenced when a winning combination is achieved. As a result, when a reach miss performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (
The presentation mode in which the winning combination is displayed (miss stop display) can be easily set.

On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit, and when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, as described above with reference to FIG. 124(b) to FIG. 126, the variation performance in the chance zone is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating a basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the normal state, the performance mode of the special variation performance in which the third symbol varies in the up and down direction is set as shown in FIG. 124(b). Then, the performance mode in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) is set at the timing of the passage of the basic time as shown in FIG. 125(a). Then, when an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation performance is ended.

On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), the third temporarily stopped one is counted as shown in FIG. 125(b) and FIG. 126.
A variable effect is set up in which the pattern restarts.

Next, the contents of the probability change/time-saving table 202b2 will be explained with reference to Fig. 143. Fig. 143 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability change/time-saving table 202b2. This probability change/time-saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when the probability change state or time-saving state is set, and includes the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol varies after the end of the big win game),
Each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, a high probability state (probability change state or time-saving state) of a normal pattern is always set after the end of a big win game. And, the high probability state of the normal pattern that has been set is configured to continue until the time-saving end condition is met. In this control example,
As conditions for terminating the time-saving feature, a first time-saving feature end condition that is established when the number of times that special pattern variations have been executed since the high probability state of normal patterns has been set reaches 100, and a second time-saving feature end condition that is established when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed while the high probability state of normal patterns has been set, are provided, and when either of the time-saving feature end conditions is established, a transition is made from the high probability state of normal patterns to a low probability state of normal patterns.

During this high probability state (probability change state, time-saving state) of the normal symbol, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is set to be more likely to be selected than during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time can be increased, and an efficient game (special symbol lottery game) can be provided to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to "1 to 20 times", regardless of the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is selected. In other words, the predetermined period from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times) is a high-speed variation period (first period) in which the special symbol lottery is executed with a variation time shorter than other periods. By setting this high-speed variation period, it is possible to make the next jackpot game be executed in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can be made to think that the next jackpot game has been executed in relation to the first jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed variation period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" is always selected, so that it is possible to easily set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special symbol lotteries.

In addition, if a jackpot is won when the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) will not have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball) that has already been acquired, and if a jackpot is won when the normal state is set in the special bonus state or the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) it is highly likely that the special symbol 2 reserved ball will have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is likely to be executed using the special symbol 2 reserved ball.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery of any symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed, so as shown in Fig. 143, the same variation pattern is selected regardless of the symbol type during a predetermined period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times) after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. This allows the same special symbol variation to be executed even if the special symbol lottery of any symbol type is executed, making it easier to set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special symbol lotteries.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is configured so that when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, both the balls shot by the left-hand hit game and the balls shot by the right-hand hit game reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one ball out of two balls, so that the special pattern lottery can be executed without interruption just by continuing to execute the game of shooting the ball during the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, 100 seconds, which is the period until the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends (5 seconds x 20 times), is set in advance as the high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance of 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance spanning 20 special pattern lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, a switching process for switching the performance mode of the continuous performance already set may be executed, and the process for executing the performance during the high-speed fluctuation period can be simplified.

In addition, a determination means may be provided to determine whether or not the 100-second continuous performance set during the high-speed fluctuation period is to be temporarily stopped. For example, when it is determined that the period from when the special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and when the next special symbol fluctuation is executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation has been interrupted, a process to temporarily stop the continuous performance being executed may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent only the continuous performance from progressing ahead even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, a process to temporarily stop the continuous performance being executed may be executed.

In this control example, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected during the high-speed fluctuation period is as follows:
Although the same variable time (5 seconds) is selected, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable pattern in which a variable time other than 5 seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable to set a variable time of 5 seconds or more more easily when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win than when the result is not a big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from when the performance mode of the previously set 100-second continuous performance is switched to when the special pattern indicating a big win is stopped and displayed, so that the big win can be notified in a performance mode that allows the player to fully understand the lottery result, and the performance effect can be improved.

Also, instead of setting the performance mode of the continuous performance all at once for the time (100 seconds) expected as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) may be divided into a plurality of periods, and for example, the first continuous performance to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) may be set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous performance to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) may be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (performance mode of the latter half of the continuous performance) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous performance for the entire period of the high-speed fluctuation period, but only during a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, a special pattern fluctuation (total of 20 times) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period)
The continuous performance may be executed only during the period from the 10th to the 20th variable period.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will continue. The type of special pattern (pattern type) is the first special pattern (special pattern 1).
In this case, when the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special pattern fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", i.e., in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and when the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (short miss) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and during the second period in which 21 or more special pattern variations have been executed since the high probability state of the normal pattern was set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed as long as the game is continued. However,
As described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a game board 13 configured to allow balls to enter the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 regardless of whether left-handed or right-handed play is being performed, so that, for example, if play is interrupted during a special bonus state or a time-saving state, a first special pattern lottery may be executed after play is resumed.

As mentioned above, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, unlike if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, there is a 5% chance that a regular jackpot game will be played.
0%), and the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed in the game state (probability change state, time-saving state)
If you win the jackpot that will trigger a regular jackpot game in the first special pattern lottery,
Among the winning jackpots, the lottery results are disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in this control example, the variable performance (variable performance using the third pattern) executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to suggest to the player not only whether or not a jackpot has been won, but also the type of jackpot, and for example, when the main pattern sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a winning jackpot, it suggests a winning jackpot in which a guaranteed jackpot game is executed, and when the main pattern sz with an even number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a winning jackpot, it suggests a winning jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed.

Therefore, in the case where a reach state (a state where a part of the main pattern sz, which is a combination indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed, is displayed in a stopped state and the remaining pattern row is displayed in a variable state) is created with the main pattern sz with an even number in the variable performance executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, the player is made to think that he/she won an unfavorable jackpot from the point before the special pattern variation is displayed in a stopped state, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, in this control example, in the case where a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed is won in the first special pattern lottery in the game state (probability change state, time-saving state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, a variable performance (double reach performance) is always executed in which both the main pattern sz with an odd number and the main pattern sz with an even number are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a). This makes it possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot from a point in time before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

In order to execute this double reach effect, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. Note that if the above-mentioned double reach effect, which is a variation effect executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, is executed only when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the player will know that the first special symbol has won the jackpot at the time the double reach effect is executed.
In this control example, a variation pattern (variation time of 30 seconds) for executing a double reach performance is selected in a portion of cases (approximately 80%) where the first special pattern lottery results in a miss, a portion of cases (approximately 25%) where the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, and a portion of cases (approximately 5%) where the second special pattern lottery results in a miss.

By configuring in this manner, when a double reach effect is executed during a probability change state or a time-saving state, it is difficult to know whether the corresponding special pattern drawing is for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and it is also difficult to know whether the drawing result is a jackpot or not, allowing the player to play with a sense of expectation until the result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, since the double reach effect is executed for the second special symbol lottery, which always executes a jackpot game when a jackpot is won, the effect result indicating that a jackpot game in which a jackpot game is executed is won for the entire double reach effect (the effect result in which the main symbols sz with odd numbers are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win) is
This makes it easier to create the double reach effect compared to when the double reach effect is executed only for the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for a sure-variable jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will be continued. The type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1
), when the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special pattern fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)," a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is selected, regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, during a big win game, the ball enters a specific area (V gate 65) in the variable winning device 65.
When v is passed, a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, and as the conditions for terminating the high probability state of the special pattern, a first high probability end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 50 times, and a second high probability end condition that is established when a jackpot of the special pattern is won in a state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, are provided, and when either of the conditions for terminating the high probability state of the special pattern is established, a transition is made from the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state of the special pattern.

In other words, depending on the game result during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability of special symbol fluctuation is increased until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is performed reaches 50 (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol).
is set, and then a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set until the number of times the special symbols are executed reaches 50 times, or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is executed reaches 100 times after the end of the jackpot game.

The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a game state indication effect to indicate to the player the currently set game state. For example, when a V notification effect is executed to notify the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is a special probability state, and when the presentation mode during a jackpot game is set so that a V notification effect is not executed even if the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to tell whether the current game state is a special probability state.

When the Super Chance mode is in progress, the special symbol variation of 50
Since the probability variable state ends at the 50th special symbol variation (specific period), a presentation is executed to indicate that the probability variable state ends and then the chance mode (time reduction) is set, using the "20 seconds" variation time set at the 50th special symbol variation. Also, when the chance mode is being executed, a presentation is executed to indicate whether the probability variable state was set or not during the specific period.

In this way, when executing an information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the lottery results of the special pattern (information to inform the player that the game state is changing or information to suggest the game state that was previously set) using the special pattern change period to show the lottery results of the special pattern during a specific period, by fixing the change time of the selected special pattern change, it is possible to reduce the variation in the presentation style (including the presentation time) of the information notification effect to notify the player of information other than the lottery results of the special pattern.

In this control example, the special pattern change that ends the probability change state (5 after the end of the jackpot)
The period during which the special pattern change (the 0th special pattern change) is executed is set as the specific period, and the change time of the special pattern change is fixed to "20 seconds," but it is not limited to this and may also include the time before and after the special pattern change that ends the special variable state. For example, the period during which the 45th to 52nd special pattern changes after the end of a jackpot may be executed as the specific period (the period during which a fixed change time is selected), and the change time of the special pattern change executed during that specific period may be used to execute an information notification performance.

In addition, the presentation mode of the information notification presentation may be changed depending on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the above-mentioned specific period. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot,
The presentation may be changed to one that does not notify information indicating that the special state has ended, or the presentation may be changed to one that indicates that the previously set game state (the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game) is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state), regardless of the game state that is actually set.

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period may be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and for example, the timing of the execution of the information notification effect may be delayed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery compared to when a jackpot is not won. This makes it possible to interest players not only in the content of the information notification effect but also in the execution timing, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as in the above example, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period is varied depending on the result of a special pattern lottery, the information notification effect may be set in advance to be executed at a specific timing, and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the above-mentioned specific timing, or the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may not be set in advance, and one execution timing may be determined from among a plurality of execution timings depending on the result of a special pattern lottery executed during a specific period.

Next, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and when the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".
It is specified that the "0 second" fluctuation pattern (second super fluctuation) is selected.

This third period is a period during which the game state is in a time-saving state. In other words, even if the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game, this is a period during which the probability variable end condition is met and the time-saving state is set. During this third period, as with the above-mentioned second period, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method executed. During the time-saving state, executing the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous for the player than executing the first special symbol lottery, so the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period is configured to easily select a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state,
Since the first special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set, it is possible to make it easier to acquire reserved balls for the second special symbol during that time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from being executed frequently during the time-saving state.

In addition, during this third period, the double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is executed in the same manner as during the second period described above, so if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery,
It is specified that a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in some of the cases of losing wins, some of the cases of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, and some of the cases of losing wins.

Next, the contents of the various variation patterns stipulated for the second special symbol lottery when the special probability state or the time-saving state is set will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol variations are performed after the end of the big win game) is "1 to 20 times (first period)," a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, during the first period, when the first special symbol lottery is performed and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is selected.
The same variation pattern (5-second variation) is selected as when the special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, the number of times of change (the number of times of special pattern change executed after the end of the big win game) is "21 times to 4
9 times (second period)" and the lottery result (the lottery result of the special design) is "win",
The acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149." The fluctuation time is "1
The variation pattern (second short variation) of "0 seconds" is stipulated to select the variation pattern (long variation) of "30 seconds" for the range of "150 to 198", and the lottery result is "
In the case of a "miss," a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the range of "0 to 191" of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198."

A high probability state of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (probability state, time-saving state)
During the second period, except for the variation pattern in which the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed (the variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 30 seconds), the variation pattern with the variation time of "10 seconds" is selected. In other words, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time in a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed efficiently. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, and allows the player to play in a comfortable manner.

In this control example, the short-term fluctuation time is set to "10 seconds", but this fluctuation time may be set to be shorter. In this case, it is preferable to set a time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the interval (about 1.2 seconds) at which the ball shot to the game board 13 can reach the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 decreases despite the player continuing to shoot balls, and the first special symbol lottery, which is set as a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery, is executed.

Next, when the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol variations are performed after the end of the big win game) is "50 times (specific period)", regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (medium variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is selected. The variation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the variation pattern selected in response to the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198", and when the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected for the range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

As described above, in this first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 and a probability variation/time-saving table 202b2, and is configured to change the data table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern depending on the set game state. This makes it possible to change the type of variation pattern selected depending on the set game state, and to show the player the result of the special symbol lottery in various variation patterns, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the system is configured to select a variation pattern by referring to the same data table (table 202b2 for probability variable and time-saving) when the game state is set to the probability variable state and when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the "chance mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to know whether the time-saving state or probability variable state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the set game state based on the type of variation pattern selected in response to the executed special pattern lottery. In this control example, the data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern during the probability variable state, the data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state,
However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to refer to different data tables.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a data table for probability variation, which is referred to when selecting a variation pattern during probability variation, and a data table for time reduction, which is referred to when selecting a variation pattern during time reduction, and provide a specific variation pattern, which is specified only in one of the data tables, as a type of variation pattern selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). This allows the player to grasp the currently set game state based on the type of the selected variation pattern only when the specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability of each variation pattern being selected may be different between the probability variation data table and the time-saving data table. By configuring in this way, the bias of the variation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the "chance mode" can be analyzed, and the player can be provided with the fun of predicting the currently set game state.

As described above, in this control example, the data table to be referenced when selecting a variation pattern is configured to differ depending on the game state to be set, but the data table to be referenced may be selected based on conditions other than the game state. For example, when a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the data table to be referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the same time-saving state may be configured to differ based on the game state set when the previous jackpot was won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern) set when the previous jackpot was won, the display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V during a jackpot game (whether or not a V was won).

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is preferable to set a command including information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table).
When the third side receives the variation pattern command, it becomes possible to determine the type of the variation pattern that has been set this time, as well as the circumstances under which the current game state was set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it is possible to determine that, for example, even though a guaranteed big win game has been executed, the ball was not able to enter the V and a time-saving state has been set, and to set a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a "regret mode").

Returning to FIG. 138, the explanation will continue. The second win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 299). Also, when the second win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4 by a timer interrupt process (
156), for example, periodically. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start gate (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 20 in the RAM 203 is updated.
3c.

The value of the random number that becomes a winning number for the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the second winning random number counter C4
When the value of the random number for winning, set by the second winning random number table 202c, is equal to the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is a winning pattern. The second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low probability of winning normal patterns and one for high probability of winning normal patterns, in which the probability of winning normal patterns is higher than the low probability, and the number of random numbers for winning jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between low probability of winning normal patterns and high probability of winning normal patterns.

The contents of the second winning random number table 202c are shown in FIG.
The description will be given with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140(b), in the case of a low probability state of a normal pattern, the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is defined as a normal winning value of "0 to 2", and in the case of a high probability state of a normal pattern, the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is defined as a normal winning value in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this control example, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/100) is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the time-saving state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal symbol during the normal state, so that the normal symbol winning game is executed during the normal state and the second ball entrance 640
It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (1/2) is set to a high probability. This makes it easier to play the normal symbol winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, different lengths of variation time are set as the variation time of the normal pattern variation to show the result of the normal pattern lottery according to the set game state, and a longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the variation time of the normal pattern variation according to the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal pattern is set is won, the electric role 640 is opened in an operation mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a normal pattern winning game can be executed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win a normal pattern lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special pattern lottery being executed can be left for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 167).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110
Depending on the values of these counters, etc., the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed, such as drawing a jackpot lottery, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

Returning to Fig. 137, the explanation will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 138. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Fig. 139(a). Fig. 139(a) shows the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.
2 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment
The ROM 202 stores a first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202,
The game machine 100 includes at least a first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a big winning type selection table 202d.
b. The second winning random number table 202c and the big winning type selection table 202d are as follows:
The various counters shown in FIG. 138 have been described above, so their description will be omitted.

Returning to Fig. 137, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in Fig. 138, as well as a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O
The data processor 100 has a work area in which values such as 0 and 1 are stored.

In addition, the RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the time of turning on the power after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the values stored in the RAM 203
The restoration of each value written in is executed during the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 166). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power failure is turned off.
The MI interrupt process (see FIG. 165) is executed immediately.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.
, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, and a time reduction counter 203h.
, probability change counter 203i, big win start flag 203j, big win in progress flag 203k, probability change setting flag 203m, probability change passing counter 203n, winning number counter 203o, remaining ball timer flag 203p, remaining ball timer 203q, probability change effective flag 203r, probability change effective timer 2
03s, a discharge number counter 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a memory area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), up to the maximum number (four in this control example).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (initial entry), up to the maximum number (four in this control example).

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the display of the special symbol are stored, and when the special symbol stops changing, if various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in preference to the first special symbol lottery, if various counter values are stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are configured to store counter buffers (
138) obtained from the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2
, the stop type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.
When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) detects that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), the counter 01 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) detects that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), the counter 01 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start execution of the special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 performs the processing such as the big win lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is stored.
Among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (counter C1-C3, CS1 values), the data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. Note that, in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203c stores the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (initial winning).
When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (initial winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is configured so that data (counter C4 value) corresponding to one initial winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times.
The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c stores data of reserved balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (initial winning), starting from the reserved area with the earliest consumed data among the reserved areas with empty data.

In addition, when the normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start executing the normal pattern variable display performance based on the initial winning, each counter value is stored, and this is a memory for storing data (the value of counter C4) to be referenced in processing such as the normal pattern winning lottery and setting the display (variable pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variable display performance of the normal symbol, it shifts the data corresponding to one of the start winnings among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processing such as the winning lottery and the display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Note that, in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d controls a variable display performance performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.
The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of up to four times.
The initial value is set to zero by the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (see reference). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d up to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, one is subtracted from the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d each time a variable display performance is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is calculated based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning).
When the counter value is stored in the counter 203d, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.
1), zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variable display performance is executed.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is calculated based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning).
When the counter value is stored in the counter 203e, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, the variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

In addition, the determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.
is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal pattern is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status (time-saving counter 203h) to be set after the end of the big win game.
Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, a normal state is stored, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, a time-saving state is stored, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, a special probability counter 203i is 0, a special probability counter 203i is 0.
When the value of the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0, the probability variable state is stored.

Furthermore, in a state where a jackpot game is being played, a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played are also stored. In addition, normal winning game information indicating that a normal winning game is being played is also stored.

Then, based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, a status command is set, and the status command is output to the voice and lamp control device 113. The voice and lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In the start-up process (see FIG. 166) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on,
The state command is configured to be set corresponding to the information stored in the

This makes it possible for the voice and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating the state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is set. After the end of the jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the time-saving counter 203j
The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the next big win game is executed (until the big win is won). In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "
It is sufficient to configure it so that "10000" is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern and a condition for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h, only a condition for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to decrement when a termination condition that may be established depending on the contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, when the result of the lottery for each symbol executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented.
The value of the first input may be subtracted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one. However, depending on the type of the termination condition that is satisfied, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented by multiple values at once (
For example, 2) the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be subtracted, or the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the condition for ending the time-saving state may be varied depending on the content of the condition for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows the player to be interested not only in the jackpot game but also in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that has been executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The probability counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. In the probability counter 203i, a value is set after the end of the big win game based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big win game (S21 in FIG. 170).
02). Then, when a jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a high probability state of a special symbol is set, the probability counter 203i
The value of the probability variable counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big win game is played (until the big win is won). In this case, the value of the probability counter 203i is set to "
It is sufficient to configure it so that "10000" is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for subtracting the value of the probability counter 203i, only the condition for subtracting the value of the probability counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (varied) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established, the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be decremented. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the probability variable counter 203i may be decremented.
The value of the first input may be subtracted.

Furthermore, the value set in the probability variable counter 203i may be different based on the type of big win won and the passing status of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, or the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted based on conditions other than the number of times the special symbol changes, similar to the content of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h described above, or the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted multiple times at once when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variable counter 203i is established. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special symbol will continue, so that the player can keep an eye on the results of the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol without getting bored.

In this control example, the condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, the probability variation counter 203i
As a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i, only a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed in other ways.
The value of the probability counter 203i may be subtracted when a termination condition that may be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where a high probability state of a special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of a normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win win), the value of the probability counter 203i may be subtracted, or the value of the probability counter 203i may be subtracted based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the probability change counter 203i is decremented by one, but the value of the probability change counter 203i may be decremented in a lump (for example, 2) depending on the type of the end condition that is established, or the value of the probability change counter 203i may be decremented to "0" regardless of the current value of the probability change counter 203i. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the probability change state will continue, and to make the player interested in the game during the probability change state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the probability variable state may be varied depending on the conditions for setting the probability variable state (jackpot type). This allows the player to be interested not only in the jackpot game but also in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203j is set to on when it is time to end the variable display indicating a jackpot. Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a jackpot game (special game state) starts after a special symbol is selected as a jackpot (see S1903 in FIG. 168). Also, in the jackpot game (special game state),
At the end of the process, the flag 203k is set to OFF (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157), the big win flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a big win is occurring (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a big win game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state is determined by the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 1) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a big win game.
It is determined whether the ball enters (flows down) this specific area (see 20).
When it is detected that a ball has entered (flowed down) into the specific area (V gate) 65v (passing through the special probability switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the special probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this special probability setting flag 203m is set to OFF when the big win game ends (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Note that this special probability setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and when it is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state it was in just before the power was turned off. Also, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is in an initialized state.

In addition, when the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the probability change switch was passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the probability change switch was passed, the probability change setting flag 203m may be set to ON and restored. In this case, the determination of whether the probability change switch was passed before the power is turned off is performed by checking whether the probability change passing counter 203n, which will be described later, is 0.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the probability variable setting flag 203m to ON and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability change switch (flowed down a specific area) in one round during a jackpot game (one round of a jackpot in this embodiment). It is possible to determine whether all balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by adding up the probability change passing counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t described later. The probability change passing counter 203n is updated by adding one each time a ball passes through the probability change switch (flows down a specific area). In addition, after executing a process of determining whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match, it is reset to the initial value "0". In addition, the probability change passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203o counts the number of winnings of the variable winning device 6 in one round of the big win game.
The counter is for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning hole 65a of 1.5, and is updated by adding 1 each time a winning ball is detected in the specific winning hole 65a.
When one round is completed, the number of winning medals (winning medal number counter 2) in the variable winning device 65 is
03o) and the number of dispensed pieces (discharge number counter 203t and probability change passing counter 203n
After it is determined whether the winning number counter 203o matches the winning number counter 203o (the sum of the winning number counter 203o and the winning number counter 203o), the winning number counter 203o is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the winning number counter 203o is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a ball dumping period after one round ends and the specific winning port 65a is closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that it is a ball dumping period. This remaining ball timer flag 203
While p is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203q described later is updated by incrementing by 1. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a timer for counting the number of balls remaining when a preset round ends and the variable winning device 65
This counter is for determining whether the time required for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds.
A counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203q. When the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) is reached, a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls dispensed. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is issued. Therefore,
It is possible to notify early that game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65.

In addition, if the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability setting flag 2 is not set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch.
03m may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability of a bonus being given illegally.

The probability change effective flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (entry of the ball) of the game ball is valid when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after the switching valve 65y is switched to a position where the ball cannot be distributed to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When the probability change effective flag 203r is set to on, it indicates that the game ball is passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a normal period.

The probability change effective timer 203s is a counter for counting the time from when the probability change effective flag 203r is set to ON.
After the specific area (V gate) 65v is switched to a position where the ball cannot flow down, the period required for the ball to pass through the probability change switch normally can be determined. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds.
The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if a specific area (V gate) 65v is passed after that, it is judged as an illegal act and is not judged as having been passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud such as illegally causing a game ball to enter a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and pass through the special variable switch, or pushing the game ball up from below the special variable switch with a piano wire or the like to pass through, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect the ball as having passed through using radio waves or the like.

The discharged ball number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged in one round from the variable winning device 65. This discharged ball number counter 203t is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls.

The other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc.

The payout control device 111 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by driving a payout motor 216. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes various drive motors for operating the driving devices for the effects provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to other device 228 to drive a device for performance (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a voice corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 judges an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the type of the error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the ROM2 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example
The contents of the ROM 22 of the voice and lamp control device 113 will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 144(a), at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a special chart 2 effect selection table 222b during normal play, a special chance effect selection table 222c, a continuous notice execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation effect selection table 222f are stored in the memory.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (such as a complete miss, a reach miss, and various reaches) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is executed in which the third symbol is displayed by horizontal scrolling in response to the special symbol variation executed on the third symbol display device 81. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special symbol game) while predicting whether the special symbol variation this time is a big win or not by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81.

The normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table which is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal state is set and the normal pattern lottery is won, the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds to play the normal pattern lottery. The second special pattern lottery can be played by inserting a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern lottery. In other words, in a game state (normal state) in which the second special pattern lottery is difficult to play, if a predetermined execution condition is met (if a normal pattern lottery is won), it is possible to easily obtain the lottery opportunity for the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved ball) for a predetermined period (during the normal pattern game period) (to make it easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the normal table 202b1 (FIG. 142
As shown in (b), there are two types of fluctuation patterns: one with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" and one with a fluctuation time of "40 seconds".
A "40-second" fluctuation pattern or a "50-second" fluctuation pattern can be selected, and when a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a "40-second" fluctuation pattern is set, the presentation mode of the fluctuation presentation is set by referring to a normal special symbol 2 presentation selection table 222b.

Here, the contents of the normal special pattern 2 performance selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal special pattern 2 performance selection table 222b. This normal special pattern 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third pattern variation performance when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special pattern variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are specified in accordance with the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result), the special pattern 2 reserved number, the special pattern 1 reserved number, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common miss reach performance is executed in correspondence with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 125(a)). After that, a pseudo-variable performance (see FIG. 125(b)) is executed as the performance content (performance mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b.
b) to 126) are configured to be executed during the addition time (30 seconds).

Specifically, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the performance counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to the range of "0 to 79", and the fluctuation pattern is set to "pseudo 3 performance", and when the number of reserved special charts 2 is set to the range of "80 to 99", the fluctuation pattern is set to "special pseudo 2 performance". When the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the performance counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is set to "pseudo 2 performance".
When the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89", and the fluctuation pattern is set to "pseudo 1 effect", and when the value is set to a range of "90 to 99", the fluctuation pattern is set to "special pseudo 4 effect".

In addition, if the lottery result is a big win and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, the number of reserved special charts 1 will be 1 to 1.
If the number is 4, a "special ending effect" is set, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0, a "pseudo-none effect" is set.

If the lottery result is a miss, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 3, the value of the performance counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special figures 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 3 performance". When the number of reserved special figures 2 is 2, the value of the performance counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special figures 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 performance". When the number of reserved special figures 2 is 1, the value of the performance counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special figures 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 performance".
When the value of f is in the range of "0 to 99", the variation pattern is "pseudo 1 performance", and when the number of reserved special chart 2 is 0, "no pseudo performance" is specified.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting the performance mode of the pseudo-variable performance of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbols 2 and the reserved number of special symbols 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variable performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variable performance executed during the one special symbol variation period seem as if it is a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of pseudo-variations (the number of temporary stops of the third pattern) executed in the pseudo-variation performance is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special patterns 2 already acquired, it is possible to make the player think that all of the reserved special patterns 2 acquired during the normal pattern winning game executed in the normal state have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo-variation performance in which a jackpot is won is executed, the player can think that he/she has won a jackpot as a result of acquiring many reserved special patterns 2 during the normal pattern winning game executed in the normal state. Also, when a pseudo-variation performance in which a miss is won is executed, after making the player think that all of the reserved special patterns 2 have been consumed, a variation performance using the reserved special patterns 2 is executed next (because the chance zone continues), so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

In addition, in this control example, since pseudo-variable effects (special pseudo-2 effects, pseudo-4 effects) that are set only when a jackpot is won are provided, the number of pseudo-variable effects executed in the pseudo-variable effects,
This can make players interested in the special chart 2 and the reserved number.

Next, the contents of the probability variable performance selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable performance selection table 222c. This probability variable performance selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when setting the performance when a 30-second basic time variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is executed during the probability variable state (time-saving state), i.e., during the high probability state of the normal symbol. This probability variable performance selection table 222c is referenced when setting the performance mode of the variation performance for the executed special symbol variation, and is set in the variation display setting process (S4 in FIG. 182).
"Super Chance Mode" is a presentation mode that notifies the player that the game is in a special chance state in the special game 1 presentation mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) executed in the special game 1 presentation mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 113).
In the case where the variable time (basic variable time) of the variable pattern to be executed this time is "30 seconds" (S5007: Yes in FIG. 183), or in the case where the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) is being executed, the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (
This is referenced when the player is in the "Super Chance Mode," a presentation mode which notifies the player that a special state is in progress (see S4907 in FIG. 184) (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes), and the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern being executed this time is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes).

In this control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state of a normal symbol,
A jackpot that can only be won in the first special symbol lottery (a jackpot that normally results in a jackpot game)
In order to prevent a situation in which a player realizes that he has won before the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a double reach presentation is executed in which both of the third pattern (third pattern with an even number) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed and the third pattern (third pattern with an odd number) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a special jackpot game is executed are in a reach state.

Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery when the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed in the probability variable state or the time-saving state, the above-mentioned double reach performance is also executed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always executes the probability variable jackpot game when a jackpot is won. Also, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set both have a variation time of "30 seconds".
The variation pattern is selectable, and when the "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected, the double reach effect is executed. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect, which is the same variation effect, is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the special symbol variation being executed by the executed variation effect, and by sharing the performance data used for the variation effect, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the performance data used for various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 146, the probability variable performance selection table 222c specifies different performance modes according to the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol lottery result), and the value of the performance counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), the value of the performance counter 223f specifies a "probability variable single reach" in the range of "0 to 49" and a "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", and when it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), the "double reach" is specified, and when it is a miss, the "non-reach" is specified.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a sure-win, the value of the performance counter 223f is set to the range of "0 to 49" for "special double reach" and "5
The range of "0 to 99" is set as "Double Reach of Probability Change", and in the case of miss, the performance counter 22
A "double reach" is defined as a 3f value in the range of "0 to 4," a "double reach with guaranteed variance" in the range of "5 to 10," and a "non-reach" in the range of "11 to 99."

By configuring in this way, even when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variable state,
When the second special pattern lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third patterns, including the third pattern corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in Figure 131 (a)) will also be executed, making it difficult for the player to understand which third pattern change effect corresponding to which special pattern lottery is being executed when a "double reach" is executed.

Furthermore, when the "special double reach" is set, the presentation mode of the "double reach" is set first, and then a reach presentation in which the presentation mode changes to the "probable double reach" shown in FIG. 131(b) is executed. Therefore, even if the "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while expecting it to be upgraded to the "probable double reach" midway. In this "special double reach", the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

In addition, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, if the change pattern (special miss) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, the miss reach performance shown in FIG. 125(a) is executed, and then the third symbol is displayed as it is in a display mode indicating a miss. On the other hand, if the change time is "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0
When the "10 seconds" variation pattern (special win) is selected, after 10 seconds of pattern variation,
The third symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a display pattern (for example, "777") indicating a jackpot win.

In this way, as a variation effect corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the normal state,
A special variation pattern that executes a pseudo variation performance multiple times during a special pattern variation period, and
By providing a normal variation pattern in which one variation performance is executed during the period of the second special symbol variation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing a new second special symbol variation is executed, so that the player can play the game while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the more variable effects (including pseudo effects) are executed during the chance zone, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the normal variation pattern variation time (10 seconds) is specified to be the same as the pseudo variation time (10 seconds) of one execution in the special variation pattern that executes a pseudo variation performance multiple times during one special pattern variation period, so that, for example, when the second special pattern variation executed in the normal variation pattern is executed after the second special pattern variation executed in the special variation pattern, the variation performance for 10 seconds will be repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the pseudo variation performance is repeatedly executed as the special variation pattern or whether the special variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are executed consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special pattern variation is executed, so that the player can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation during the normal state, the variation performance of the special variation pattern is executed. However, without being limited to this, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selected as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state. Also, in this control example, the pseudo variation time, which is a part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds,
When the probability of winning is high, the pseudo-variable performance is likely to be executed for a period other than 10 seconds. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the execution period of one variable performance will be longer.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the explanation will be continued. The continuous notice execution selection table 222d is a table for selecting whether or not a player has won a big prize, which is included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110.
This is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to establish an execution condition for a continuous preview performance that is executed across a period of multiple special symbol variations based on the above. When the execution condition for the continuous preview performance is established, a special effective time that effectively determines an operation on the frame button 22 is set. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous preview performance is executed.

When this continuous preview performance is executed, the background mode changes to a different background mode (sky mode) from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a continuous performance is executed using the period until the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition was met is displayed. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, during the high speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation is executed), the background mode is configured to be less likely to change based on the operation of the frame button 22 compared to other periods. Even during such a high speed fluctuation period,
Since the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, unlike the normal background mode transition, it is possible to execute a background mode transition that increases the expectation of winning the big prize, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed variation period, the variation time of the special symbol variation is likely to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is transitioned as in other periods, there is a risk of missing the important result of the special symbol lottery, so it is configured to be difficult to transition to the background mode. However, when the background mode is transitioned based on the execution of the continuous notice performance, the continuous notice performance is executed using the variation time of the special symbol variation multiple times, so the performance result of the continuous notice performance is not displayed immediately after the background mode transition. Therefore, even if the background mode transition is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than the background mode transition can be executed, and even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early. Among these, the background mode transition is executed based on the establishment of the execution condition of the continuous notice effect, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be increased.

Here, the contents of the continuous notice execution selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 147(a). FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous notice execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), the continuous notice execution selection table 222d specifies whether or not to establish the execution condition of the continuous notice performance in accordance with the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) included in the received winning information, the special pattern 2 reserved number (reserved ball number of the second special pattern), and the acquired performance counter 223f value.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a "jackpot", the reserved number of special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", "continuous notice available" is set, where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is met, and when the value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "80 to 198", "continuous notice not available" is set, where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is not met. Also, when the reserved number of special charts 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "continuous notice available" is set, where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is met, and when the value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "150 to 198", "continuous notice not available" is set, where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is not met.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "miss", the reserved number of special chart 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", "no consecutive notice" where the execution condition of the consecutive notice performance is not met is specified, and in the range of "195 to 198", "with consecutive notice" where the execution condition of the consecutive notice performance is met is specified. Also, when the reserved number of special chart 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "no consecutive notice" where the execution condition of the consecutive notice performance is not met is specified, and in the range of "190 to 198", "with consecutive notice" where the execution condition of the consecutive notice performance is met is specified.

As described above, in this control example, the more reserved special symbols 2 are, the easier it is to establish the conditions for the execution of the consecutive notice performance. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a big win, the conditions for the execution of the consecutive notice performance are more likely to be established than if it is a miss. By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play (second ball entrance 64) in order to execute the consecutive notice performance.
0) and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, the larger the number of reserved special charts 2, the higher the chance of winning when the conditions for executing the continuous notice performance are met. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous notice performance with a high chance of winning, the player can be motivated to play the game (the game of putting the ball into the second ball entrance 640), and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this control example, when a winning information command (a winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110, the continuous preview execution selection table 222d is referred to to determine (determine) only whether the execution condition for the continuous preview performance is satisfied. Even if the execution condition for the continuous preview performance is satisfied, the continuous preview performance is not executed at that time, and the continuous preview performance is executed when the frame button 22 is operated within a specific period after the execution condition is satisfied. As a result, when multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and multiple winning information commands are received, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the winning information that is the subject of the execution condition. Therefore, when the continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous preview performance will continue, and it is possible to prevent the performance content of the continuous preview performance from becoming monotonous.

As described above, this control example is configured not to notify (suggest) the player that the execution conditions for the consecutive preview performance have been met, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) performance to notify (suggest) the player that the execution conditions have been met, for example, the character "Waiting" may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify (suggest) the player that the execution conditions for the consecutive preview performance have been met. By configuring in this way, when a notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview performance, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this control example, as shown in Fig. 129(a), an icon HR10 resembling the frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as a valid period notification mode capable of notifying the player that a valid period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player has been set (that the valid period is in progress), but it is configured so that it is not possible (difficult to) determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether a special valid time set when the execution condition for the continuous preview performance is satisfied is set or a normal valid time is set. By configuring in this way, the player can eagerly operate the frame button 22 to execute the continuous preview performance, since he does not know whether the continuous preview performance is executed or the normal operation performance is executed until he operates the frame button 22.

Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 may be configured to allow the player to distinguish whether the currently set effective period is the special effective time or the normal effective time, or the timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to allow the player to distinguish whether the currently set effective period is the special effective time or the normal effective time. Also, the period during which the special effective time is set may be made different from the period during which the normal effective time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special pattern variation has started), and the player may be notified (suggested) that the special effective time has been set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the consecutive preview performance, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22. Similarly, in a case where the player is not notified (suggested) that a special effective time has been set, it is possible to configure so that only a performance that notifies (suggests) that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met (for example, displaying the words "Waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) can be executed. This allows
It is possible to suppress the frame button 22 from being operated unnecessarily when the execution conditions for the consecutive preview performance are not satisfied. In addition, when the execution conditions for the consecutive preview performance are satisfied and the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, a notification display may be executed to notify the player that the current time is outside the special effective time (for example, a display of "not now" in the sub-display area Ds), or a guide display may be executed to guide the player to the special effective time (for example, a display of "not now" in the sub-display area Ds).
s) to display "Please press again in 2 seconds."

Furthermore, in this control example, when a winning information command including winning information for the second special pattern is received, processing is executed to establish the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance by referring to the consecutive preview performance table 222d, but without being limited to this, the control may also be configured so that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are established when a winning information command including winning information for the first special pattern is received.

Returning to FIG. 144, the V notification execution selection table 222e is a table for selecting the V notification during a big win game.
This is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a notification effect. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big win game.
When a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability variable state) of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (normal jackpot game) are executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and depending on the arrangement of the switching valve 65y, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is passed through a third flow path 65e3 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and a third flow path 65e4 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.
The switching valve 65 is configured to distribute the flow of the air to a fourth flow path 65e4 through which the air can pass.
y is controlled so as to switch to a positioning situation in which the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round of play when a special jackpot game is executed.

The V notification effect is a V guidance effect that informs a player who is playing a big win game of the period (V period) during which the ball can pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v and the game method for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V period effect that informs that the current time is a V period, and a V
A V success effect notifying the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the period, and a V failure effect notifying the player that the ball has not passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period;
By executing this V notification effect, when a probability variable jackpot game is executed, a game for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v can be easily performed, and since the ball is notified to the player that it has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this control example, after a normal jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134). Furthermore, the "chance mode" is also set in some cases where a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to play while expecting the probability variable state, since the possibility of the probability variable state being set internally can be left even when the "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game. However, if a V notification presentation is executed during a jackpot game, it is easy to know whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and thus it is difficult to know whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a special symbol variation terminating condition that is established when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times as the special symbol variation terminating condition for terminating the special symbol variation state as in this control example, the special symbol variation state ends without winning the special symbol lottery, so that even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, it is likely that the special symbol variation state was not set.

Therefore, in this control example, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game, and the presence or absence of a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined based on the result of the process. Then, during a jackpot game in which a V notification effect is not executed, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v (if a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends), a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way,
It becomes difficult for players to determine whether or not the special state is set internally,
This allows the player playing the "chance mode" to play the game while expecting that a probability variable state has been set, without giving the player a sense of distrust.

Here, the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to Fig. 147(b). Fig. 147(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the V notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e is a table showing the contents of the big win related processing (see Fig. 180) executed in the main processing (see Fig. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113.
180 (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when it is determined that it is the timing to start a special jackpot game (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes), this is referenced when deciding whether or not to execute a V notification display during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 180).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), the V notification execution selection table 222e specifies whether or not a V notification will be executed (the judgment result of whether or not a V notification effect will be executed) in accordance with the jackpot type (the jackpot type that won the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot game being executed this time and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V notification yes" is specified, indicating that a V notification effect will be executed, and when it is in the range of "150 to 198", "V notification no" is specified, indicating that a V notification effect will not be executed. Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification yes" is specified,
In the range of "190 to 198", "No V notification" is specified.

When the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, in which a special jackpot game is executed, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 75%.
When the first special symbol lottery is used to win a jackpot, 50% of the time the game will be a guaranteed jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% of the time the game will be a regular jackpot game ("jackpot B"). Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is used to win a jackpot, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game in about 37.5% of cases, and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game in about 62.5% of cases. In addition, the game is configured such that the probability of the jackpot game being executed among the cases where the V notification effect is not executed is about 20%.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" is set, which is a jackpot that is selected in the second special symbol lottery and in which a jackpot game with a high probability of being selected is executed, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 90%.
Therefore, in reality, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed is executed in about 10% of cases. In this way, by providing a case in which the V notification effect is not executed even for a jackpot win in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes a jackpot game with a high probability of being executed, it is possible to increase the percentage of the game state being in a high probability state when the V notification effect is not executed, that is, when the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, as mentioned above, the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot ("
The ratio of V notification effects being executed is different between when a player wins a jackpot ("jackpot A") and when a player wins a jackpot ("jackpot C, D, E") in which a jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery, which makes it difficult to execute a jackpot game in which a jackpot game is executed, is configured to make it difficult to execute a V notification effect when a jackpot game is executed, compared with when a player wins a jackpot game in which ...

In this control example, as shown in Fig. 147 (b), the execution rate of the V notification effect is made different depending on the type of jackpot, but the execution rate of the V notification effect may be made different depending on other factors, for example, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be made different depending on the number of times the jackpot is won without transitioning to the normal state (the number of consecutive wins), or the execution rate of the V notification effect may be made different depending on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22. By making the execution rate of the V notification effect different depending on various conditions in this way, it is possible to set multiple apparent probability rates (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed in the entire jackpot win), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is executed, that is, in the specific area (V gate) 65
The above-mentioned V notification effect is configured to be executable only when a jackpot game in which the ball can pass through v is executed, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executable even when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, the V notification effect is executed in accordance with the timing at which the V period (the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability variable jackpot game (the timing at which the round game of the first round is executed), and finally, a V failure effect is executed to notify that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Furthermore, when the V failure effect is executed despite the normal game during the jackpot game, for example, a V failure effect may be executed even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability variable jackpot game, and a "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, a pattern can be set in which the V notification display is not executed during the special jackpot game whether the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery; however, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that the V notification display is always executed when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, in which case the special jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

Returning to Fig. 144(a), the explanation will be continued. The button operation effect selection table 222f is a data table which is referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and when it is determined that a valid operation has been executed on the frame button 22 during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in Fig. 186) executed in the main process (see Fig. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see Fig. 144), the effect selection table 222f is referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means (see Fig. 144).
86: S5314: Yes), and the result is referred to (see S5315 in FIG. 186).
By varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the button operation presentation selection table 222f, a wide variety of operation presentations can be provided to the player.

Here, the contents of the button operation time performance selection table 222f will be described with reference to Fig. 148(a). Fig. 148(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the button operation time performance selection table 222f. As shown in Fig. 148(a), the button operation time performance selection table 222f defines a time-saving state selection table 222f1 that is referred to when the time-saving state is set, and a probability variable state selection table 223f2 that is referred to when the probability variable state is set.

In this control example, when the time-saving state is set and when the probability variable state is set, the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode.
Regardless of the game state that is set, a common variation effect is executed during the "chance mode". Furthermore, when the probability variation state is set and when the time-saving state is set, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to the same variation pattern table (probability variation/time-saving table 202b2).
The special symbol change executed during the "Chance Mode" and the third symbol change effect executed in response to the special symbol change make it difficult to know whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time-saving state, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the current state is the probability variable state.

However, if information suggesting the currently set game state is not provided to a player playing in the "chance mode", there is a problem that the player will quickly become bored with playing in the "chance mode". Therefore, in this control example, multiple types of operation effects are configured to be executable during the "chance mode", and the execution ratio of each operation effect is configured to differ depending on the set game state. In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but
By varying the ratio at which each operation presentation is selected, the current game state can be predicted based on a plurality of operation presentations that are actually executed, thereby providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game state.

Similarly, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the normal state is set, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies that a special state is set, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed as part of the variable presentation are configured to determine and execute one of a plurality of presentation modes, but detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation time performance selection table 222f will be described with reference to Fig. 148(b). Fig. 148(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. This time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the operation performance during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set, and different performance modes of the operation performance are defined according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of the operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to
In the range of "149", "None" indicates that no operation performance is performed, and in the range of "150 to 189",
In the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" is defined, which indicates a presentation that suggests whether the currently executed presentation will be in a reach state during the third symbol variation. In the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" is defined, which indicates a presentation that suggests the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" is defined, which indicates that the background mode is transitioned to the background mode, in the range of "0 to 198" of the acquired presentation counter 223f.

In this control example, multiple operation methods are set that the player can execute with respect to the frame button 22. The operation methods are a "normal press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, a "long press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or more, and
are set. Different operation effects are executed according to the operation method of the player. This allows the player to execute various operation effects by selecting the operation method of their choice. This makes it possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In this control example, the above-mentioned two types of operation methods are used as the operation methods that the player can operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an operation means other than the frame button 22 (e.g., a second frame button) so that a different operation presentation is selected depending on the type of frame button pressed by the player, or within a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds),
A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operation methods are set in accordance with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a "normal press" is determined at the time when the player presses the frame button 22, and then, if the pressed state continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds), a "long press" is additionally determined, thereby executing an operation presentation dedicated to the "long press."

Furthermore, as the operation means that the player can operate, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that the player can press, operation means consisting of a lever member that the player can tilt up, down, left, right, and the like, or a rotating member that the player can rotate may be provided. Also, instead of the player directly operating a member, an operation means (such as a touch sensor) may be provided that is capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed by providing a proximity sensor with a predetermined detection area and having the proximity sensor detect a hand that has entered the detection area, and any operation means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily perform a predetermined operation and allows the player to select different operation methods depending on the content of the operation.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided, or only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, when only one type of operation method is provided, a configuration may be used in which different operation presentations are performed depending on the interval at which the operation is performed. This makes it possible to allow the player to select from various operation presentations even if there is only one type of operation method.

Returning to Fig. 148(b), the explanation of the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 will be continued. When the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched is stipulated. Also, when the operation method is "long push", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is stipulated.

And, if the operation timing is during a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation method,
And, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, the operation performance is not executed. Finally, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is stipulated. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating a performance for suggesting a game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the big win game)) is stipulated in the range of the acquired value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 198".

Next, the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation time performance selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2. This probability variable state selection table 223f
2 is a data table to be referred to when determining the presentation mode of the operation presentation during the “chance mode” in which the probability variable state is set, and includes the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired presentation counter 22
Different operation presentation styles are defined depending on the value of 3f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 119
In the range of "0", "none" is set, indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", "reach suggestion" is set, indicating an effect that suggests whether the currently executed variable effect will be in a reach state or not during the third pattern change, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" is set, indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "background mode transition" is set, indicating that the background mode will be transitioned. Also, when the operation method is "long press", in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" is set, indicating that the background mode will be transitioned.

In addition, if the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period) and the operation method is "normal push"
In addition, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", a "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified, and when the value is in the range of "170 to 198", a "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is specified.
Within the range of ", a "status suggestion" is defined which indicates a presentation to suggest the currently set game status.

And, if the operation timing is during a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation method,
And, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, the operation performance is not executed. Finally, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is stipulated. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating a performance for suggesting a game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the big win game)) is stipulated in the range of the acquired value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 198".

As explained above, when the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode after the end of the big win game, different data tables are referenced for the time-saving state and the probability variable state to select the presentation mode of the operation presentation, and the ratio at which each presentation mode is selected is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player predict the currently set game state based on the presentation mode of the executed operation presentation, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among a plurality of game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode at a specific operation timing, as a presentation mode (advantageous presentation mode) that is likely to be executed when a favorable game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, for example, a "state suggestion" operation presentation executed by a "normal press" during the "first period" is provided as a presentation mode that is likely to be executed when the favorable game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, when the "state suggestion" operation presentation is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period", the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation that a favorable game state has been set.

Furthermore, since the operation presentation can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more times the operation presentation is executed in the advantageous presentation mode described above during the "first period", the higher the expectation that an advantageous game state will be set, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among multiple game states (probable chance state, time-saving state) in which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode, a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode) is executed only when a favorable game state (probable chance state) that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, for example, an operation presentation of "background mode transition" executed by "normal press" during the "first period" is set, so that when the operation presentation of "background mode transition" is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", it can be understood that a favorable game state has been set.

In addition, as the advantageous presentation mode and the final presentation mode described above, a presentation mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal press" during the "second period") is used.
The presentation mode of the "state suggestion" is configured so that when it is executed by "normal pressing" during the "first period", the expectation that the probability of a special state being set is high, and when it is executed by "normal pressing" during the "second period", the expectation that the time-saving state is set is high. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing a game while analyzing which presentation mode was used to execute the operation presentation during which period when the "chance mode" is set.

With reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the contents of the presentation modes of the operation presentation that can be selected when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) and the contents of the data table (button operation presentation selection table 222f) that is referred to when the selection is made have been described above. In this first control example, different data tables are referred to depending on the set game state. In each data table, the same presentation mode is specified with a different selection ratio. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only from the presentation mode of the executed operation presentation, and makes it possible to grasp the current game state by grasping the selection ratio of each presentation mode by executing the operation presentation multiple times. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game by executing the operation presentation multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referred to depending on the set game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different data tables may be referred to based on the currently set game state and the currently set presentation mode to select the presentation mode of the operation presentation. In this way, when the probability variable state is set, different operation presentations can be executed when the "super chance mode" is set as the presentation mode and when the "chance mode" is set.

Here, when the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode, for example, there is no need to execute the "State Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests that the current game state is set. Instead, the presentation mode of the "Reach Suggestion" or the winning information storage area 2 is executed.
It is advisable to define a "predictive suggestion" presentation mode that suggests whether or not the winning information stored in 23b contains information indicating a specific lottery result (a big win or a variation pattern in which a variation time of more than a predetermined time is set). This allows the player to enthusiastically execute the operation presentation even when the "super chance mode" is set.

Furthermore, the type of the data table (button operation time effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is set to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern), the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81,
Alternatively, it may be configured to differ depending on whether or not a V win occurs during a jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "chance mode" can be made different between the case where the "chance mode" is set after the end of the normal jackpot game and the case where the ball cannot enter the V during the probability jackpot game and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set after the probability jackpot game ends, it is preferable to specify a presentation mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a probability jackpot game. This makes it possible to make the player think that the probability jackpot state is set even though the time-saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to specify a presentation mode of "past game history notification" that notifies the player that the previous jackpot game was a probability jackpot game but was not able to enter the V. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(b), the RAM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113
As shown in FIG. 144(b), the R
The AM 223 includes a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e,
Performance counter 223f, secondary state setting area 223g, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h
, special effect in progress flag 223i, V winning flag 223j, V effect execution flag 223k, V notification flag 223m, time reduction counter 223n, special continuous notice flag 223o, effect mode memory area 223p, continuous notice in progress flag 223q, SW effective time counter 223r,
Special effective time counter 223s, operation counter 223t, other memory area 223z
At least one such measure is provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing corresponding to the command is executed. In detail, the command storage area 223a is configured as a ring buffer and is a FIFO (First In First Out) area.
When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols.
The winning information included in the winning information command output from the player 10 is stored in the first area in order. The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls and the like before the balls start to change.

In this control example, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to a maximum of four.
Since each of the winning numbers can be reserved and stored, the winning information storage area 223b stores the first
Four reserve areas for the special symbols and four reserve areas for the second special symbols are formed.
In this control example, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are configured not to be executed at the same time. When a new special symbol drawing is executed in a state where a reserved ball of the first special symbol and a reserved ball of the second special symbol are both held, the reserved area of the second special symbol is selected.
The oldest stored winning information (the winning information stored in the first area) is configured to move to the execution area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is configured to shift to the reserve area with the next lower number. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to execute the second special symbol lottery with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is one in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which reserved balls are acquired regardless of the type of special symbol (so-called winning order consumption pachinko machine 10), eight reserved areas may be provided in the winning information storage area 223b, and the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 may be stored in order starting from the first area. Also, if the pachinko machine 10 is one in which the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed simultaneously (overlapped) (so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10), a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol may be provided instead of one execution area in the configuration of this control example, and the winning information stored in the first area of the reserved area corresponding to each special symbol may be transferred to the execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 for counting the reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the reserved ball number of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot obtain the value of the main control device 1.
The number of reserved balls of each special pattern is counted based on a reserved ball number command transmitted from 10, and the number of reserved balls is managed by a special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is subtracted in the main control unit 110 to execute a new first special pattern lottery, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the main control unit 110 subtracts the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern to execute a new first special pattern lottery,
When the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is subtracted to execute a special pattern lottery, a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command, special symbol 2 reserved ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and calculates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (the first
The voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved symbol. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub display area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 122 (b)
As described above, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d controls drawing of the image so as to display the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110.
The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball counter 203e.
The number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the execution of the special symbol lottery is pending.

The special pattern variation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special pattern variation pattern command that notifies the variation pattern of the special pattern output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variation display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81. The special pattern variation start flag 223d has a first special pattern variation start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special pattern and a second special pattern variation start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special pattern, and is set to on or off according to the type of special pattern indicated by the special pattern variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command that notifies the variable stop type of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. Note that this special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when the first special symbol stop type selection flag 22 corresponding to the first special symbol is received.
3e1, and a second special symbol stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol, which is set to on or off in accordance with the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special symbol stop type command) transmitted from the main control unit 110.

The performance counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various performances, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this performance counter 223f is composed of multiple counters, each of which is specified to have a different update rule. Each counter is configured to perform a counter update process each time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. And, when multiple types of variation pattern selection and various performance selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the performance counter 223f is configured to obtain the values of different counters and execute the process. As a result, even if a process using the value of the performance counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process), it is possible to suppress the selection of various performances using the same value of the performance counter 223f.

In the slave status setting area 223g, data corresponding to a status command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game status can also be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave status setting area 223g. The status setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backed-up game status can be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113.
The sub-state setting area 223g has a current game state storage area for storing the currently set game state, and a past game state storage area for storing the game state that was set before the current game state was set, and is configured to be able to calculate the process by which the current game state was set. This makes it possible to determine, for example, if a time-saving state is set, whether the time-saving state was set after the end of a big win game, or whether a high probability state was set after the end of a big win game and then the time-saving state was set when the high probability end condition was met, and to execute an effect based on the determination result (a past state suggestion effect for suggesting the past game state to the player). The sub-state setting area 223g can store the normal state, the high probability state,
In addition to the time-saving state, game states such as a big win game state and a normal win game state can also be stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to a normal symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a counter for counting a value corresponding to a normal symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110.
The value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls of normal symbols held in the RAM 203 of No. 01. The details are omitted because they are the same as the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c described above except that the target is changed from special symbols to normal symbols.

The special effect flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the second special symbol variation during the normal state is satisfied. Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, or when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired while the first special symbol variation is being executed. And, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol variation is executed while the special effect flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol 2 reservation is 0. In this control example, in order to indicate the period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON, the "chance zone" performance (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a big win game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set in the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command has been received (S4407 in FIG. 177: Yes) in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning flag 223j is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referred to (S4801 in FIG. 181) in the ending process (S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the big win related process (S4218 in FIG. 180) and determines whether the ball passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the current big win game (
Then, the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) is performed.
When it is determined that the setting is set to ON in (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), the setting is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a big win game, and depending on whether or not a V win occurs,
The system is configured to change the presentation mode of the presentation executed at the time of winning (at the end of the V round) and at the end of the big win game. Furthermore, the system is configured to change the presentation mode at the time of the V winning and the presentation mode at the end of the big win game depending on whether the V notification presentation is being executed or not. In this way, the presentation that is variably set based on the presence or absence of the V winning is set to V.
In order to enable execution at a timing (ending time) different from when a prize is won, the presence or absence of a V prize can be determined by the setting status of the V prize flag 112j.

The V performance execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that a V notification performance is to be executed during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when it is determined that a V notification performance is to be executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes),
If the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No),
, the V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the V notification effect. If it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the big win related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, if no V winning occurs during the big win game, the V winning flag 112j is referenced (see S4715 in FIG. 181).
In the case where it is determined that the setting is ON (S4802 in FIG. 181: Y),
es), and executes a process for switching the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S4 in FIG. 181).
804), and then is set to OFF (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when a sure-variable jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute a V notification effect during that jackpot game, and if it is determined that a V notification effect should be executed, a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a sure-variable state will be set is set as the presentation mode during the ending period at that point in time. In other words, when a V notification effect is executed during a sure-variable jackpot game, the player is notified of this at the time of a V win, so the ending presentation executed during the ending period is also configured to have a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a sure-variable state will be set. Therefore, if a V win is not achieved during a jackpot game, the presentation mode of the ending presentation is set to a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(a) and (d)) indicating that a time-saving state will be set.
(c)) is switched to the above.

On the other hand, if the V notification display is not executed during a sure-variable jackpot game, even if a V is won, the player is not notified of this, and a display mode (see Figures 127 (a) and (c)) for indicating that a time-saving state will be set is pre-set as the display mode of the ending display, so that even if a V is not won during a jackpot game, there is no need to execute a process to switch the display mode of the ending display.

The time-saving counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a big win game), a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) is set. When the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes "0", it is determined that the state has transitioned to a low probability state of normal symbols. Also, based on the value of the time-saving counter 223n, a detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined.

The special consecutive preview flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the consecutive preview performance is satisfied during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the performance mode is set to "chance mode", and is set to ON when the execution condition of the consecutive preview performance is satisfied. When the special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period during which the operation of the operating means can be effectively determined is set, and when a specific operation is performed on the operating means during the special effective period, the consecutive preview performance is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, when a special symbol winning information command (a winning information command corresponding to a special symbol) is received, the special symbol winning information command process (see S4406 in FIG. 178) is executed. When it is determined that the current time is a high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and when it is determined that a continuous notice performance is to be executed by referring to the continuous notice execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), the signal is set to ON (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes).
8 S4507).

Then, in the special pattern 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the change presentation corresponding to the second special pattern change, the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) which is executed when the "chance mode" is set, references the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to on, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s as the special effective period during which operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, by setting a special effective period in which the operation on the operation means is judged to be valid only when the execution condition of the consecutive preview performance is satisfied, and by making the consecutive preview performance executable only when the player executes a specific operation on the operation means within the special effective period, it is possible to make the player eager to play in order to execute the consecutive preview performance. Also, by varying the notification mode of the notification performance for notifying the player of a plurality of pieces of information for executing the consecutive preview performance (information indicating whether the execution condition of the consecutive preview performance is satisfied or not, information indicating the period (the period set) in which the special effective period is set, and information indicating the operation content performed on the operation means to execute the consecutive preview performance), it is possible to easily variably adjust the difficulty of executing the consecutive preview performance.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are easily satisfied when (or when) a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game and execute the consecutive preview performance. In addition, when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are satisfied, if the player executes a specific operation on the operation means outside the special effective period, it is preferable to configure the system so that a notification performance is executed to notify the player of the timing when the special effective period is set. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means, and prevents the player from getting bored of the game early.

The presentation mode memory area 223p is a memory area in which various presentation modes that are set during a high probability state of normal symbols are stored, and different presentation modes are stored according to the value of the time-saving counter 223n. When determining the current presentation mode, the stored presentation mode is read out. Specifically, in the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read out (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the presentation mode corresponding to the read out value (high-speed period (high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period),
A second period (second period) is usually set and stored. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol transitions to a low probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous notice execution flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, in the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185),
The setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185). If it is set to ON (
5 S5208: Yes), a performance mode corresponding to the continuous preview performance is determined. Then, when the continuous preview performance ends, it is set to OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a different performance mode that does not correspond to the continuous preview performance from being set in a new variable performance executed during the continuous preview performance.

The SW effective time timer 223r is a frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third symbol.
A timer for measuring a valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the above, wherein when the valid operation period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period is set, and as time passes,
The value is subtracted. If the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to 0. In this manner, by setting a valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent excessive execution of effects (operation effects) that are executed when the operating means (frame button 22) is operated.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate, but for example, when multiple operation means such as a second operation means are provided in addition to the frame button 22 (first operation means), different operation effective periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing a SW effective time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set the operation effective periods of each operation means to overlap each other.

The special effective time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) for validly determining an operation on the frame button 22, which is set only when the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed with the special continuous notice flag 223o set to ON, and is configured so that when the special operation effective period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective period is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186)
In this control example, it is determined whether or not the special operation is within the valid period (S5306 in FIG. 186), and if it is determined that the special operation is within the valid period (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as valid.
When the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation valid period (
The special operation effective period is configured to execute different operation effects when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period (period in which the value of the special effective time timer 223s is greater than 0), and specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period, a continuous preview effect spanning a plurality of special pattern change periods from the next special pattern change to the end of the target special pattern change is executed. When the continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode is configured to transition to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period in which the background mode transition is suppressed by the operation of the normal frame button 22, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a jackpot just by executing the background mode transition.

The operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and the value of the counter is updated as time passes while the player is measuring and pressing the frame button 22. Based on the value measured by the operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see FIG. 186).
(See S5313 of this document).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to Fig. 137, the explanation will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits a display command to notify the display content of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 1).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, and supplies various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and a 12-volt voltage for driving motors, a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a 10-volt voltage for logic circuits.
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 150 to Fig. 155. Fig. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 comprises an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241, and a memory 242.
41.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234.
, an image controller 237 is connected via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model having a different probability of winning a jackpot with a special pattern or a different number of prize balls paid out for one jackpot with a special pattern, there are models having the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first.
AM233 will now be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

Further, as will be described in more detail later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but rather are stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts in the display control device 114, which in turn reduces manufacturing costs and suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have the problem that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. In this way, because the read speed of NAND flash memories is slow, the MPU 231 does not directly read data from the character ROM 2.
If the control program is read from MPU 231 and various processes are executed, it may take a long time to read the instructions that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as MPU 231, this may result in a deterioration in the processing performance of the display control device 114.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) as described later.
) and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands constituting the control program without delay.
14, high processing performance can be maintained, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to diversify,
To easily execute complicated performances.

The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third
This is a memory that stores data of an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and the character ROM 234 is
The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the M234, which will be described later, is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
An image controller 237 is also connected to the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 reads image data stored in the character memory area 234a2, which will be described later, from the character memory area 234a2.
A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237
Transfer to M236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR type ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 which stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 which stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily made large-capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND type flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, so that the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 232 via the bus line 240, for example.
Based on the address transmitted from the address read/write unit 37 , the corresponding data is read from the NAND type flash memory 234 a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.
34a. The ROM 34 performs the well known data address translation so that data can be read from and written to 34a.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, which includes the error bit.
Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the M234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and prevents access to the defective data blocks.
The MPU 231 and the image controller 237 each store data in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Without considering the address positions of different defective data blocks,
4 can be easily accessed.
Even if the flash memory 234a is used, the access control to the character ROM 234 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND type flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the buffer RAM 234.
If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from N
The data is read from the AND type flash memory 234a (or the NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process and writes the data corresponding to the specified address onto the bus line 24.
0 to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237.

The buffer RAM 234c is configured with two banks, each of which is a NAND
The ROM controller 234b can set one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to output data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. This allows the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 to be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. The NOR ROM 234d stores a first program storage area 234a1 for storing, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.
At least a program memory area 234d1 is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. As a result, the display control device 114
In the first program memory area 23, various controls can be executed.
4d1 is one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e.,
The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and also points the instruction pointer 23
1a, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d.
The instruction code at the corresponding address in the program set in the buffer R34c is read out.
The data is read from the AM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

In this control example, all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234.
a, but in the boot program, after the system reset is released,
The reason why the predetermined number of instructions, beginning with the instruction to be processed first, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d by the programmable logic circuit 31 is as follows: That is, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory, in that, as described above, when reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until when the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading the data to setting it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H".
Therefore, the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the display control device 1
This creates a problem in that control of the third pattern display device 81 at 14 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in the NOR type ROM 234d, the address "0000H" can be read from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released.
When the address "0000H" is specified, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "00
00H" can be received, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 that stores a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., control programs other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first transfers the data in the first program storage area 234 to the data table storage area 233b.
According to the boot program read from the second program memory area 234a1, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program memory area 234d1 is set.

Here, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is
As described above, since the capacity is equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, when the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H" and the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c,
The boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is read from the program storage area 233 in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1.
When transferring the boot program to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the other bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, and then moves the instruction pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a.
In this way, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231
The MPU 231 can read out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes.
Instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having a program storage area 233a and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having a program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the following:
The remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) are all stored in the second program storage area 233b.
4a1, a predetermined amount is stored in the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 23
At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231
Specifically, the second predetermined address is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.
87 (see S6002) is set to the start address of the program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b.
The various processes are executed using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the program.

Therefore, most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 23, which has a slow read speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the character ROM 234 and the program storage area 23 of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released,
By transferring the control program to the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is made up of a high-speed DRAM, and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

As described above, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234d.
Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the program storage area 233a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a.
By simply adding the OM 234d, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and therefore the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortened start-up time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) transmitted from the MPU 231, and develops the image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed.
Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image.
In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of image and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from MPU 231 at each image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the drawing and display processing of an image have not been completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that images are drawn using image data stored in resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory facilitates large ROM capacity, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234a, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, can be read at the time of drawing an image.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from 34, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display has been decided by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 controls the MPU 231 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed.
is configured to instruct the image controller 237. As described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image, but when drawing an image, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, and the time required for reading can be omitted, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Moreover, by storing image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured with a 132-kbyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data to the image controller 2 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list.
The instruction to transfer image data to the character ROM 234 includes the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and information on the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236).
The address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is included in the data.
The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included.

The image controller 237 reads the character data from the character ROM 23 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction.
One block of data is read from a predetermined address of the video RAM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is read out from the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.
Then, the process is repeated until all image data stored in the storage destination address range from the storage destination start address to the storage destination end address specified by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a period of time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is
a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time.
It is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data while the image data is being transferred to the normal video RAM 236.
When 236 is occupied, the video RAMs 235, 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, which prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

Also, the buffer RAM 234c is used to store the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM
Since the transfer of image data to 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 stores image data transferred from the character ROM 234.
The images are stored without being overwritten while the power is on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character design area 235e, and the error message image area 235f are provided. In addition, the power-on variable image area 235b,
At least a third pattern area 235d is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on.
The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be stored in the main control device 11 is stored. Also, the power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be stored in the main control device 11 is stored.
This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image which displays the lottery results performed in 0 through a variable presentation.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231
187. The image controller 237 then transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the image display unit 34 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described with reference to Fig. 151. Fig. 151 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 into the power-on main image area 235a.
When the image is transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b, the image is transferred to the resident video RAM 2
The remaining image data to be stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 35.
While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the image data shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on, the main image shown in 51 (a) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display variable pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variable pattern, is received, the display control device 114 displays the power-on variable image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 151(b).
As shown in Fig. 151c), the power-on variable image of the "X" symbol is displayed alternately in the same position as the "○" symbol during the variable period.Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is determined from the display variable pattern command and the display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special symbol big win", the image shown in Fig. 151(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 151(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can check the operation of the resident video RAM 235 without worrying that the operation is stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
The process can wait until the transfer of image data to 35 is completed.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, the character R
By using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the OM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the special symbol entrance 64, the power-on variable image area 235b
The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to draw the power-on image using image data corresponding to the power-on image stored in the image controller 237, and to alternately display the images shown in Fig. 151 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81.
A simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the special ball entrance 6
When a ball is detected in number 4, a corresponding variable effect can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is the third pattern display device 81
152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 will be described. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 152(a) shows the rear image A corresponding to the "town stage" in FIG. 152.
52(b) is shown for rear faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage" and "sky stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 152, the rear images corresponding to the rear faces A to D are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each of the backs A to D are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images covering the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When a change in the type of the back surface is determined based on a back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to the "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back surface image as the initial position of the display area, and displays the image at the initial position on the third pattern display device 81.
The image controller 237 is controlled. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches an image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear surface E changes over time in the following order: (a) → (b) → (c) → (
a) → ... are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white and then orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating rear image returning to the rear image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described.
, the image data for the entire range of the rear face A, that is, corresponding to positions a to d, is all stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "town stage," is displayed, so by making all the image data for the rear face A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" resident in the rear face image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, back B corresponds to the "forest stage", back C corresponds to the "river stage", and
The back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" is a part of the back surface, as shown in FIG.
That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
Image data corresponding to the rear face E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on, and remains resident there.

In order to instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to store the entire range of image data for all rear images in the resident video RAM 235. However, this would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used as the resident video RAM 235.
This may lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of the stage is determined by a lottery at the start of the change, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be used to instantly change the initial positions of the backs B to D to the third position.
The pattern display device 81 can display the image data, and the image data can be scrolled or changed in color over time. As for the rear faces B to D, only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored, so that the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be prevented from increasing, and the cost can be prevented from increasing.

In addition, for the rear faces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the images from position b' to position d is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236.
The range from position a to position b is set. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, the range of image data is set so that after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, since the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, the remaining images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 sequentially over time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay after the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

For rear faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other in the image data corresponding to the image between the position b' and the position b.
Under the control of the image controller 237 by 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth transition.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, and then the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is a third symbol display device 81
In other words, the third pattern area 235d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns.
When performing a variable performance in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if a NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started in the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to main symbols that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol and an additional symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, or a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern is configured to be displayed in a different display mode depending on the background mode (back image) that is set. Therefore, the third pattern area 235d stores the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after switching every time the background mode is switched. This makes it unnecessary to store image data for all the third patterns corresponding to all the background modes in the third pattern area 235d, so that the memory capacity can be reduced.

In this control example, since the player can switch the background mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22), there are cases where the background mode is changed multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the background mode is changed after a predetermined period (for example, 1
During the period from the first to the second background mode switching time (0 seconds), the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third pattern area 235d. This makes it possible to prevent the process of storing image data in the third pattern area 235d from being performed in a cumbersome manner even if the background mode is frequently switched. In addition, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of a plurality of third patterns corresponding to each of a plurality of background modes in advance.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is stored in the character symbol area 235e.
When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 stores the character design in the character ROM 234.
Instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image controller 237 can draw a specific image by reading out image data that is resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235.
Even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the memory 34, the character design can be changed instantly.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the type of the error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error.
Since image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 can display the following based on the received error command:
By reading out image data that is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, each error message image can be instantly drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234, and therefore eliminates the need to read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234.
Even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the memory 34, an error message corresponding to the error command can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 instructs image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area in which the type of image data should be stored, among the sub-areas provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. In response to this, image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by MPU 231 from character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified sub-area of image storage area 236a via buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 develops one frame of image in the frame buffer by writing one frame of image drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and while developing the image in one frame buffer, reads out one frame of image information developed earlier from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out an image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer, and outputs the image to the third pattern display device 81.
The image of one frame that has been read out can be displayed on the LCD.

The frame buffer that develops one frame of image and the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read out to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are as follows:
Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, ...b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a program storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a data table storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e
j, rear image change flag 233w, rear image discrimination flag 233x, demo display flag 233
y, and has at least a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs from the character ROM 234, transfers them to the work RAM 233, and stores them in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter
As described above, the work RA executes various controls using the control program stored in the work RA.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area which stores a display data table which describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance which is displayed based on a command from the main control unit 110, and a transfer data table which specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance which is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RA in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.
M233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU
231 performs the third calculation using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b.
It controls the display of the pattern display device 81. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, the various data tables will be described in detail. First, the display data table is
One is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control unit 110, and display data tables corresponding to, for example, variable performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variable performance is either a jackpot A or a jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now enter a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, the round effect is an effect to inform the player of the number of rounds that will now begin, and the ending effect is an effect to inform the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed frozen and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at a time corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite is to be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to the magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information for specifying the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined for each address include one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and drawing information for each sprite such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and letters.
One or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type is displayed as one of the rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", or "island stage");
Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described.
When specifying that a rear image different from rear images A to E is to be displayed, the rear image type also includes information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the rear faces A to E is to be displayed based on the rear face type, it determines the rear face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the rear faces A to E as the drawing target, and determines the range of the rear face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a rear face image different from the rear faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the rear face image to be displayed based on the rear face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information regarding the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or
The display may indicate either the time elapsed since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the time elapsed since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) are described with symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol is that the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance and the stop symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third pattern is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third pattern, and by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed. While the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed, the third symbol is not visible to the player, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance during that time, so that the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153) describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table.
For each address between the address containing the information, there is written a drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
The display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the third pattern display device 81, and the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time a drawing process for one frame is completed, and the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this manner, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110
A command (e.g.,
Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a display variable pattern command, etc., the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, if the system is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the processing load for starting and executing the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous as the effect images become more diverse, is large, and this limits the processing capacity of the display control device 114, which may result in a limit to the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled.
By simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
It can be displayed as 1.

The reason why a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that in the pachinko machine 10, the presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, a configuration in which a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is a feature of the pachinko machine 10.
This can only be realized by the fact that the configuration of 0 determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the results of a lottery held based on the initial winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table.
It is prepared in accordance with the display data table prepared for each performance, as described above.
Image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table is stored in the character ROM 23 and is not resident in the resident video RAM 235.
4 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof.

If all image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, thereby making it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is described (address "
(These are "0001H" and "0097H"). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (see FIG. 15).
4, address "0002H" is the relevant address).

The transfer data information includes the character ROM in which the transfer target image data is stored.
the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of H.234,
And the top address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is included.

In addition, in the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written, as in the display data table, and in the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 154), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is written. Then, in each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
155)。 When the display data table to be used is selected according to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the data table storage area 233b, if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, and the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite, the transfer of which should be started at that time, is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of Fig. 154, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the corresponding address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237.
If the address is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin there. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table,
Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw a specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is reliably transferred to the character ROM 23 at the desired timing.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, the transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Fig. 151 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c indicates that image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on main image area 23 of the resident video RAM.
5a or the power-on variable image area 235b, it is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 187). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in FIG. 199(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 189).
If the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see FIG. 189 (
On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the main control device 110
In response to a command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from
In order to display various images, a command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 20(a)) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
0).

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110.
Based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the U231
The performance mode to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 is determined, a display data table corresponding to the performance mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) for each frame, which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237, based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that when all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, so the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, is specified (
That is, if no null data is written), a drawing list (see FIG. 155) which describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame is written.
The transfer data information is added to the

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is for designating an address for acquiring the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once in accordance with the storage of the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later, and also specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
At that time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should start is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed.
Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in drawing a sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table.
In this way, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw one frame of image. As shown in Fig. 155,
The background image used in the frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2,
For each sprite, such as a reserved ball number pattern 1, a reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes predetermined image data stored in the character ROM 234 for the image controller 237.
Transfer data information for transferring data from the video RAM 236 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes the display position coordinates,
The information includes the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter designation information using a method designated by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates.The image controller 237 then writes the drawn image to the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
36c.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the sprite (display object) data is stored in the RAM
The type and address are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed.
Depending on the sprite type, U231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 selects, in one frame of image,
Rearrange the sprites in order from the sprite that should be placed in the back to the sprite that should be placed in the front.
Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at an address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored) to the transfer data table buffer 233e.
The image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the storage start address and storage end address in M234 and the storage start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the image data to be transferred is to be stored. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the transfer data information in the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information.
The image data is read from a predetermined area (an area indicated by the source start address and source end address) of the normal video RAM 236 and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the presentation time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 2 is started every time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed by the MPU 231.
33h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 196).
When the value of 3h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 resets the display data table buffer 233d
It is judged that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in has ended, and various processes that should be performed in accordance with the end of the effect are executed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates whether the corresponding image data is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
5, the flag indicates the storage state, which indicates whether image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 or not.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is set by the MPU 23 during main processing when the power is turned on.
The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Moreover, image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 200) and the image controller 237 is made to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data from being stored in the character ROM.
This makes it possible to suppress transfer of the image data from the display control device 114 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is used to select from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") to which an image drawn by the image controller 237 is to be expanded.
When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, information on this designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded in the designated drawing target buffer.
7, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, reads out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process to display an image on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". In this way, the drawing target buffer is updated to the first frame buffer 236b every time a drawing list is sent.
The drawing list is transmitted every time the MPU 231 executes drawing processing of the V interrupt processing (see S6306 in FIG. 189(b)) based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). In addition, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). This allows the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 195(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demo effect is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo effect is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 196), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). The demo display flag 233y
This makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag that indicates whether or not a confirmation display effect is being executed.
Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stopped symbols are displayed stationary (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the variable pattern. If this fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set on when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7215 in FIG. 191(a)).
6505, S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6 in FIG.
(See 905.) This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 156 to FIG. 172, the MP in the main control unit 110
The control processes executed by the MPU 201 will be described below. The processes executed by the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into a start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, a main process which is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and an NM process.
and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the I terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

In the first control example, as described above, in a state in which both the lottery right for the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Also, by passing a ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while a jackpot game is being played, a high probability state for the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends.
Furthermore, as a termination condition for terminating the probability variation state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the termination condition that is established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a termination condition that is established when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) is set.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101
That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switches is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0.
Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103).
The first winning type counter C2 and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 999, respectively in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are
The data is stored in the corresponding buffer area of M203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is performed.
A special symbol variation process is executed to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figs. 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107).
The through-gate passing process will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 163 and 164. After the through-gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is executed by detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 5.
This is a process for determining whether or not to launch the ball, on the condition that the launch switch 51a detects the launch status and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104).
7 (see S104) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode by a predetermined control, sets various commands for executing the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and displays the judgment results (win/lose judgment results).
A control is executed to stop the display in a display mode showing the special symbol. The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described below.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201).
It is determined whether k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is being won (a jackpot game is being played) (S201: Yes), the process ends.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is not being played) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202:
No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next,
The MPU 201 determines whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the MPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and sets a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it calculates the reserved ball number command of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command.
The value 03e is extracted, and the extracted value is stored in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.
Then proceed to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (N2)
is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

In the process of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is.
In the process, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later.
The voice and lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, and then the voice and lamp control device 113 calculates the reserved ball number of the first special symbol counter 203 from the reserved ball number command.
The value of d is extracted, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223 c of the RAM 223 .

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S2
13), and the process proceeds to S208. In the process of S208 executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol big win determination process is executed (S208), and then,
The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, and then the process is terminated.
Details of ) will be described later with reference to Figures 158 and 159.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S20
2: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not the variable time has elapsed (S214). If the variable time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S21
5), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated according to the updated value of the fluctuation time counter. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S209) is
The counter is set at the start of the special symbol variation, and is updated (subtracted) each time the process of S215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the variation time has elapsed (S
214: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the processing of S215 is 0, a display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S216).
The stopping symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).
When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big win is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a big win of a special symbol, one of the big wins A to E is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.
Either of the following is determined.

In this control example, in the case of a jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of a jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of a jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, and in the case of a jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is judged whether the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, S1901:
The process branches to Yes and an opening command is set (S1902).
A big win presentation starts on the symbol display device 81.

In the process of S217, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special pattern (S217: No
), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the outside (
S1801), the status command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice and lamp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command.
This allows the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to coincide with the state of the actual pachinko machine 10. In the process of S220, a special figure determination command is set (S220
), and then this process ends.

Next, the special symbol big win determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Fig. 158 is a flow chart showing this special symbol big win determination process (S208).

In the special symbol big win determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301).
Based on the winning random number table 202a (see Figure 140 (a)), it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

After the process of S302 is completed, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery is a big win (S3
03), if it is determined that it is a big win (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set as a big win (S304), and the first
A special winning symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 37 is set (S305), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the current lottery result is not a winning symbol (S303: No), a losing symbol of the special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S
306) and then this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special pattern variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special pattern jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special pattern jackpot has been set (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)-(c)) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the variable type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area is
The value of S2 is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, or special state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S404).

Then, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d read out in the process of S404 (S4
05), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405, a special symbol variation pattern command is set (S406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the special symbol (S408), a value indicating the change time of the selected change pattern is set to the value of the special symbol change time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol change, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. 160.
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This is a process that is executed when the special symbol variation time has elapsed (when the variation stops), and a process is executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the probability variation state is set to continue, or to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S221) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state of a special pattern (S501).
If it is determined that the value of 03i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the probability of winning is increased by 100%.
The value of 3i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S502), and then it is determined whether the updated value of the probability change counter 203i is 0 (S503). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S503: Yes),
The time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Also, in the process of S501, the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0 (0
If it is determined that the special symbol is selected (S501: No), the current state is not a high probability state for the special symbol, so the above-mentioned processes of S502 to S504 for updating the value of the probability change counter 203i are skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

Also, in the processing of S503, if the value of the special probability counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the special probability counter 203i is greater than 0 and the special probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), the processing of S504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S505.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S505:
Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and the time-saving counter 2
It is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S507). If it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), the value of the probability change counter 203i, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (S509), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S505: No), or if it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S509.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described.
The start winning process (S105) is shown in FIG.
In step S105 of step 1, it is determined whether a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning). If the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 20 up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four balls in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640).
3a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 2
When the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the winning/losing judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.
Next, step S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, the ball enters the first ball entry hole 6, which is the first start hole.
First, the controller 10 determines whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S601). In this step, the controller 10 detects whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 through a ball detection switch (not shown).
The controller 204 determines that the ball has entered the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d (S601: Yes) (S602), and determines whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not reached the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one (S604), and the voice lamp control device 113
A reserved ball number command is set to notify the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S605).

Then, various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2
, fluctuation type counter CS1) are read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and R
The balls are then reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of AM203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

Also, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S60
1: No), or in the process of S603, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit value (S603: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203
The process of adding the value of d (N1) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, as for each process from S607 to S612, the only difference is that the process executed for the second ball entry port 640 is the same as the process executed for the first starting port (first ball entry port 64) executed in each process from S601 to S606, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing each process from S601 to S612, a read-ahead process is executed (S613), and this process ends.

This pre-read process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG.
A process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, a process may be executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

Furthermore, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw for a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the right to draw for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance; however, without being limited to this, for example, the content of the right to draw for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S613) based on the added winning information (winning information) is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S603 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the reserved ball number of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be imparted when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this look-ahead process (S613).

In the pre-read process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, the various counter values, that is, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas in the pre-read reserved storage area (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is judged based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-read reserved memory area. Here, both the hit/miss judgment in the case of a low probability state of the special pattern and the hit/miss judgment in the case of a high probability state of the special pattern are judged. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is executed based on the newly reserved winning information, so it is difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is executed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the winning/losing determination result is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and the variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read out (
S704), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is not a jackpot (S70
3: No), a winning command including information that can identify a winning combination and a variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S704 or S705 is set to include, in addition to the information for indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has different meanings depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information for indicating the values of the various counter values read out in the process of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this process is then sent to the main control device 11.
The signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of 0 (see FIG. 167).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a winning command is received, it can change the display mode of the reserved ball (for example, by changing the color of the reserved ball to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it can execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change begins to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose determination result) can be set regardless of the game state; however, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose determination result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose determination result for the low probability state of the special pattern may be distinguished, and a winning command may be set based on the results of each distinction; alternatively, a determination value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state may be specified, and a winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern may be set only when that determination value is read out.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes for which no pre-reading performance is performed.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/loss judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not varied depending on the number of reserved balls, but a fixed variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, making it possible to determine the game state at the start of the variation by determining the variation order until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and stored information when performing a look-ahead.

Furthermore, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a pre-reading process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the pre-reading process. However, without being limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the win/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information contained in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and when it is determined that the look-ahead performance is to be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not executed, a specific look-ahead process (prediction of the winning/losing judgment result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress the malfunction in which the result of the look-ahead process executed without a title is illegally obtained by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106).
S106) is a process for controlling the display of the change in the second pattern (normal pattern) and the opening time of the electric role device 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal pattern change (lottery) (a process for executing the normal pattern change, a process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal pattern change to be executed, a process for updating the normal pattern change that is being executed, a process for stopping the normal pattern change, and a process for determining the game content of the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, the current normal symbol (second
It is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a winning symbol (when the winning symbol stops displaying) to when the electric role 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S801: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S801: No),
, it is determined whether the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner (S802). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, that is, that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently possible (S802: No), next, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f
The value (M) of the number of times ...

If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is determined to be 0 in the process of S804 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is determined to be greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). In other words, if the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (winning information to be used for normal symbol variation is reserved and stored) is determined to be satisfied in the process of S804, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal symbol variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806
In the process of S806, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4, is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on or not, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern (S808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S808: Yes), the second winning random number table 2 for high probability is selected.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), the second winning random number table 202c for low probability is used to obtain a winning/losing judgment result (lottery result) based on the winning judgment value of the winning/losing random number table 202c for low probability (S809).
Based on the hit/miss judgment value (see FIG. 140(b)), the hit/miss judgment result is obtained (S810
), and proceed to processing S811.

In the process of S811, it is determined whether the normal pattern change (lottery) this time is a winning one (S81
1), if it is determined that it is a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode when it is a win is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern variation (lottery) this time is not a win (it is a loss) in the process of S811 (S811: No), the display mode of "×" which is the display mode when it is a loss is set (S813),
Proceed to processing of S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S814). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S814 that the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is not in progress (S814: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S816), and the process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the normal symbol variation time is made different depending on the probability state of the normal symbol to be set, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to always set 3 seconds as the variation time regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, at the timing of the end of the big win game when the game state is switched from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol) where a long variation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) where a short variation time is likely to be set, the normal symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state is not executed even though the time-saving state is set.

In addition, the method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be changed according to the game state, the number of normal symbol reserved balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example,
The normal symbol variation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (normal reserved number). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol variation time.

In this way, by configuring the condition in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to be variable according to the length of time for which the normal pattern is set to fluctuate, the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be easily varied according to the game status, thereby creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, in the processing of S802, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S802: No), it is determined whether the change time of the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S817), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S817: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S817 that the variable time has elapsed (S817:
Yes), and then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the process of S818, if the current normal symbol lottery is a winning combination, the second symbol display device 83 displays "
On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery result is a miss, the second symbol display device 83 displays a stopped "X" symbol (lights up). That is, the setting is made to stop the display mode set in the above-mentioned S812 or S813 process.

When the stop display is set by processing S818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S812 or processing S813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol this time is a win (S819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol this time is not a win (a miss) (S819: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol this time is a win (S819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S820), and if it is determined that the time-saving state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S820: Yes), the game content of the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric role 640a for 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) (S82
3) Proceed to processing of S822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S820 that the game is not in a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols),
S820: No), as the game content of the normal winning game, the opening time of the electric device 640a is 5
The game content (opening action) of 1 time per second is set (S821), and processing proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823 (S822), and this process is terminated.

Next, the opening and closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role object 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the timing for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S8
The system is configured to perform a judgment of whether the normal pattern is a hit or miss based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing when the processing of S816 to S811 is performed) and to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the processing of S817).

That is, in this control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol
Depending on the results of the variable processing (lottery processing) for the special pattern that is executed in parallel during the period in which the above is being executed, a high probability state for the normal pattern may be set at the timing when the win/loss determination for the normal pattern is made, and a low probability state for the normal pattern may be set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is set.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric reel 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern (high probability state, low probability state) set at the time when the win/loss judgment of the normal pattern is made, there is a problem that the electric reel 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. As a result, the electric role 640 is set in the opening pattern according to the set game state.
a can be released.

In this control example, the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is performed, and the opening pattern of the electric gimmick 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric gimmick 640a that is moved in a winning game of the normal pattern is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, the electric gimmick 640a may be configured to open long only when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is performed and also when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric gimmick 640a that is moved in a winning game of the normal pattern is set, or the opening pattern of the electric gimmick 640a may be set based on the game state set at the timing when the hit/miss judgment of the normal pattern is performed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, various information (such as the result of the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation time, and the normal symbol winning scenario) determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 108) is set with commands indicating the contents of each information, and the main control device 110
The signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to Fig. 164. Fig. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 156), and judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67,
This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area when a ball passes through. This is also a process for acquiring the lottery result (the winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see S811) is executed in the normal pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163)).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, the ball passes through the normal pattern starting hole (through gate).
It is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S902), and then it is determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol has reached the upper limit value) (S903).

In the process of S903, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 4 (
If it is determined that the number of the first and second inputs is equal to the upper limit of 4 (S903: No), the process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see Figure 140 (b)) (S906), a normal winning information command including the normal winning judgment result (the advance judgment result obtained in the processing of S906) is set (S907), and this processing is terminated.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the process of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary discrimination result of the special symbol set in each of the above-mentioned control examples. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the reserved normal symbol, and to execute the performance based on the preliminary discrimination result.

Specifically, in a state where the chance zone is set, that is, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during the normal state, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a winning of the normal symbol, an effect that continues the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if all the second special symbol lotteries are completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the effect mode of the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, the effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 124(b)), rather than the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 122(b)). By configuring in this way, when multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state,
The chance zone can be set for a long period of time, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, if the chance zone has not ended despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player can understand that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, so that the player can be interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example,
As a variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to Fig. 165. Fig. 165 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 203. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110.
The MPU 201 then suspends the ongoing control, starts the NMI interrupt process, and writes the power failure occurrence information to the RAM 2 as the power failure occurrence information setting.
03 (S1601), and the NMI interrupt process is terminated.

The above-mentioned NMI interruption process is also executed by the payout/launch control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is sent to the power outage monitoring circuit 252.
This signal is output to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the dispensing control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 166, when the power supply to the main control device 110 is turned on,
Next, a description will be given of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the computer 10. Fig. 166 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is started by resetting the power supply.
In the RA, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is performed to wait for the sub-control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then,
Access from M203 is permitted (S1703).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704). If it is turned on (S1704: Yes),
The process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705). If not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power failure did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1712.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes),
A judgment value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707:
No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, so in this case, the process is also terminated.
The process proceeds to 2. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in a working area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, the dispensing control device 111 which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device)
In order to initialize the dispensing control device 111, a dispensing initialization command is sent (S1712).
When the main control device 110 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes in a state in which it can start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed,
The RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when the power interruption occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed based on a RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S
In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent (S1709) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption, and the process proceeds to S1710. The payout control device 111
When this payout return command is received, the data stored in the RAM 213 is retained,
The game ball payout control can now be started.

Next, a performance permission command that permits the execution of various performances is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 167, after the above-mentioned start-up process, MPU2 in main control device 110
167 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the CPU 101. The main processing is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (
S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111
A prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won is sent to the
7) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 158) are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is written to the RAM 203
The data is stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Once the updating of the variable type counter CS1 is complete, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set in the voice lamp control device 113 to execute a jackpot performance, and a jackpot control process is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

The details of the big win control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172. In this big win control process (S1804), a specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as a winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round in the big win state, and the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a)
It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole (specific winning hole 65a).
The opening and closing of the winning hole or the like (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the big win control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that the opening/closing control of this electric role is the same as the opening/closing control of S82 in the normal symbol variation process.
This is continued until the period set by the process of S821 and the process of S823 ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, a special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 1
When a variation pattern is set by S209 of 59), the first pattern display device 37A, 37B starts displaying the variation according to the variation pattern. In this control example, from the start of the variation until the variation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

In addition, the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, and if the color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player will not be able to confirm the change in the color of the LED.
In order to allow the player to confirm the change in the color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on.
D changes its lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S20 in FIG. 159)
When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by S407) has ended, the fluctuation display being executed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (lit up) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special pattern is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern), the other special pattern is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss pattern), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device (S180
8). In the second symbol display update process, when the second symbol change time is set by the process of S815 and the process of S816 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 163), the second symbol display device starts a change display. As a result, the second symbol display device displays "○" as the second symbol.
A variable display is performed in which the "" and "X" symbols are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 163), the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second symbol display device in a display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 163).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S18
09), if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No),
In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output a power failure signal SG1, and the power supply is not cut off. In this case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S
If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process returns to S1801.
and repeatedly executes the above-described processes from S1801 onwards.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810:
No), until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CIN
I2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).
.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), the counter is cleared to 0. Then, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1.
The updated values of NI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is performed in the same manner as the process of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time,
and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. This makes it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and prevents fraudulent play from being performed targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to the winning is obtained.

Furthermore, in the process of S1809, if the power interruption occurrence information is stored in RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power has been cut off due to a power outage or power off, and as a result of the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputting a power outage signal SG1, the NMI interruption process of FIG. 165 has been executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S181
5), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.
The checksum values in the stack area and working area backed up in 203.

The process of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game state carried out in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1811 and S1812 carried out within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power outage occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S1801 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process,
Therefore, in the process at the time of power cut, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area, and the value of the stack pointer is not saved.
By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1801. This reduces the control load on the main control device 110.
This allows accurate control without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, the contents of the big win control process (S1804) will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win control process (S1804). This big win control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see Fig. 167) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the big win and opening or closing the specific winning hole 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big win state with a special symbol.

In the big win control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether the big win start flag 203j is on (S1901). If it is determined that the big win start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), an opening command for the big win is set (S190
2), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is OFF (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether or not the jackpot in progress flag 203k is ON) (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is OFF) (S1904: No), then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1905).

In the process of S1905, when it is determined that it is the timing to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a big win operation setting process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906), and this process is terminated. The details of this big win operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the big win has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending period (S1907: Yes),
An ending command is set (S1908), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third pattern display device 81
An ending performance indicating the end of the big win begins.

In the first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a process for determining the jackpot type is executed using the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)).
In the process of S1908, the display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined in accordance with the type of big win is set. Note that, unlike the first control example, the length of the ending period is not set when the big win is won.
The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the timing is the start of the ending period (the end timing of the final round), it is determined whether a V has been won during this jackpot game (whether the special probability setting flag 203m is set on), and when it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is set on, 17 seconds may be set as the ending period of the jackpot game in order to display a 17-second ending (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a special probability state has been set, and when it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is not set on, 15 seconds may be set as the ending period of the jackpot game in order to display a 15-second ending (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)) indicating that a time-saving state has been set.

By configuring in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the game result during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period according to the game state that is actually set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any timing between the time when the game result during the jackpot game is determined and the time when the ending period starts. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example,
After the th round play is completed (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area (V gate 65V) is completed), the presence or absence of a V win may be determined, and based on the determination result, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the period in which the second to final rounds of round play are being played.

Furthermore, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V is won during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, as in this first control example, the ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the type of jackpot that is won. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when a special jackpot is won, and 15 seconds is set in advance when a normal jackpot is won. When it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game results during the jackpot game, that is, when a special jackpot game is played but a V cannot be won during the jackpot game,
The length of the ending period that is preset may be made variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during a big win game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the time when the execution period of the ending presentation has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed (S1910) to set the game state after the end of the jackpot, and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No),
Executes a winning process to control the winning of the specific winning port 65a (S1911).
Then, an abnormality process is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally (S1912), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to Figs. 171 and 172.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 169. Fig. 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this big win operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, if it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the big win type is set (S2003).

Here, a detailed description will be omitted, but in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one big win game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (first round) is made different depending on the big win type. Specifically,
Only in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, a round game is executed in which the switching valve 65y is operated so that the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) as the first round of the round game. By configuring in this way, the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) can be increased only during a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of a sure-win game is being played, a V notification effect is executed in which the characters "Aim for the V" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of a specific period during which it is easy to make the ball flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) during a long-term jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "Aim for the V" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V).
In this way, the player can be easily informed that the conditions for setting the probability variable state after the big win game is completed are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be changed depending on the establishment of a condition. For example,
It is advisable to change the color of the text "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which it is easy to make the ball flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, change the size of the display area, or change the text to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly").
This can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation in which the ball is likely to flow down into the V-gate 65V.

In this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y is changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which the ball is unlikely to flow down to the specific gate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate in a common operation pattern from the start of the big win game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a is opened may be changed depending on the type of big win, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which the ball is unlikely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) may be set. This allows the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y to be common, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current big win game is a big win game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, since the operation content of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and the failure of the V-type device (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processes of S2002 and S2003 are skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning hole 65a is set (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2005.
In the process of 05, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2
005), and then this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for the external output process (
S1801), the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command and sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), it is possible to open the specific winning hole 65a in each round of the jackpot, and to set the specific area (V gate 65V) so that the ball can pass through in the first round.
In C to E, the player simply shoots the ball in the first round, and the ball almost certainly lands in a specific area (V
Since the player passes through a gate 65V, a probability variable state (a high probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a normal symbol) can be set after the end of the big win game.

Next, referring to the flowchart of Fig. 170, the details of the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Fig. 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in Fig. 168), and as described above, it is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1910), first, it is determined whether the high probability setting flag 203m is on (S2101). If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the high probability setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the high probability counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102) and the process proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, in the process of S2101,
If the probability change setting flag 203m is off (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2103.

In the process of S2103, the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2103).
Next, a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the slave status setting area 223g according to the game status notified by the status command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10.
Next, the big win flag 203k and the probability change setting flag 203m are both set to OFF (S2105), and this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end process (see Figure 170), the game status after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed in the big win control process (see Fig. 168), and as described above, is a process for performing control in response to a win in the specific winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether the current time is the round valid period (S2201). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set.
In other words, it is the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened to when the interval period ends.
In the process of S2201, if it is not the round valid period (S2201: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the current time is the round valid period (
S2201: Yes), and then it is determined whether a winning has been detected in the specific winning port 65a (S2
202), if a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), a winning command indicating that a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if a win at the specific winning port 65a has not been detected in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped, and
Then, proceed to processing 2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (
S2205), if the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), the round time (3
If the round time has elapsed (S2206), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S220
6: Yes), and proceed to the process of S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round game of the current jackpot. In this control example, the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time elapse and number of winnings regardless of the jackpot type and number of rounds, but the end condition of the round game may be different depending on the jackpot type, or the end condition of the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds to be executed.

In the process of S2207, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S2207), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has been set to be closed is set (S2208).
It is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning hole 65a is based on the end of one round (S2
209), if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes
), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that the current closing of the specific winning hole 65a is due to the end of a round other than the first round (S2209: No),
Since the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, S221
The process for 0 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the probability change effective flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Also, in the process of S2205, it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2206).
If the answer is 205: No) and if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), the processes of S2207 to S2211 are skipped,
Processing then proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S221
2), if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), it is then determined whether the high probability effective flag 203r is on (S2217). In the process of S2217, if the high probability effective flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203r is on (S2217: No), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s (S2218), and then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219). If the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is not the upper limit (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, and the specific area (V gate 65V
) and executes a process of updating the probability variable setting flag 203m. As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203s is not at the upper limit, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the probability variable state can be set taking into consideration the time for the ball to be cleared. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variable state from being granted by illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the special chance valid flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is reset (S2221), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S221
On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), add 1 to the value of the probability change passing counter 203n (S2214).
, the probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), and a V winning command is set (S
2216) and then this process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
This abnormality process (S1912) is a flowchart showing the big win control process (
This is a process executed in the game (see Figure 168), and as described above, this is a process for determining whether a ball that entered a specific winning port 65a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality process (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current round is valid or not (S2
If it is not the round valid period (S2301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round valid period is in progress (S2301: Yes), then
It is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, a ball outlet switch (
The determination is made based on whether a sensor (not shown) detects the passage of the ball.

In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the outlet 65h1 (S23
02: Yes), and add 1 to the value of the discharge number counter 203t (S2303), and
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has not passed through the outlet 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S23
04). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No),
On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S23
04: Yes), and since it is the ball removal period, the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 to the value (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S23
If the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit (S2306: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2
306: Yes), and then it is determined whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the probability change passing counter 203n and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203t) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203o) (S2307).

In the process of S2307, if it is determined that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308) and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the voice and lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Winning ball number mismatch error") is displayed, and the hall computer is notified.
An error signal is output. Therefore, during the period when the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period when the switching valve 65y is in the closed state), it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally causing the ball to flow into the fourth flow path 65e and pass through the specific area (the V-gate 65V).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309).
Next, the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning ball number counter 203o, the discharged ball number counter 203t, and the probability change passing counter 203n are reset (S2311), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 172), it is possible to detect and notify early on the occurrence of a malfunction in which a ball that has entered a specific winning port 65a is unable to be discharged normally, for example due to a ball becoming jammed inside the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 173 to FIG. 186, the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113
The control processes executed by the MPU 221 are roughly classified as follows:
There is a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Fig. 173. Fig. 173 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S40
01). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on or not, the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) is performed to determine whether the current startup processing is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage").
As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power cut from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes a power cut process of S4117. Before the execution of such a power cut process, a power cut process in progress flag is turned on, and after the power cut process is completed,
The power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, R
It is confirmed whether the data in the AM 223 has been destroyed or not (S4003).

The confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data "55AAh" is written as a keyword in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked to see if the data is "
If the value is "55AAh", then there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the value is not "55AAh", then data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005.
Transition to 08.

If this startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off,
Since the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost due to a power outage), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4
On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power-off process of S4117 is completed, or if the current startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4004.
Transition to 008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is
This is started after a momentary power outage occurs, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset during the power-off process of S4117. In this case, since the power-off process is in progress, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore,
In such a case, since the control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004.
Start M223 initialization.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004
The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not, and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is repeated for "0FFh", "55h", "
This RAM 223 read/write check is performed in the order RA
All memory areas in M223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (
S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM corruption check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data corruption has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S400
7), and an infinite loop continues until the power is cut off. Any abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008
The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (S411 in FIG. 119).
6). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on only when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. In such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009).
After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the interrupt permission is set (S40
11) and proceed to main processing. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110 and the like.

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006.
In this case, the process has been started by going through the process of S4008, or by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110).
008: No), skipping S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010).

The clear process in S4009 is skipped because, when the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, the RAM has already been cleared by the process in S4004.
All memory areas of RAM 223 are cleared, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by saving the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If one millisecond or more has not elapsed (
S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without executing the processes of S4102 to S4111.
This is because S4111 is a process related to display (performance) and does not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variable display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first,
A command output process is executed to transmit various commands for the display control device 114, which are set by the processes of S4103 to S4113, to the display control device 114 (S4102).
Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the third symbol display device 8
Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the display device 110. If the power is not being turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without any notification being made by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then, a reserved number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. For details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107),
This will be described later with reference to Figure 186.

After the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S410
8), and then executes sound editing and output processing (S4109). In the lamp editing processing, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing and output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 22
Sound is output from 6.

After the process of S4109, execute the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S4110), and then execute the performance update process (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, proceed to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S4108 is executed. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After the process of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display performance on the third symbol display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power-off occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not corrupted (S4115: NO),
o), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes. If the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a staff member of the hall to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112).
) is a main process ( FIG. 17 ) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
4) and, as described above, judges the command received from main control device 110. Details of the command judgment process (S4112) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), a status command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is terminated.
202) receives a state command indicating the current game state, sets a mode presentation mode corresponding to that game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation mode (e.g., a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a state command indicating a sure-win state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when a state command indicating a time-saving state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Note that the game state that is actually set and
The control of switching between the presentation modes in the mode presentation to be executed will be described later in detail. The state command reception process (S4202) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the state command has not been received (S420
1: No), then, determine whether a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it is determined that the special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), set the special chart fluctuation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special chart fluctuation pattern command to ON (S4204), and extract the fluctuation pattern command from the received command (S4205). Then, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special chart stop type command has been received (S420
6), if it is determined that the command has been received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (the first special symbol stop type flag 223e1, the second special symbol stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special symbol stop type command is set to ON (S4207), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4206 that the special chart stop type command has not been received (
S4206: No), then it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209).
9: Yes), extract the reserved ball number from the received reserved ball number command, and store the corresponding value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210
Specifically, when a reserved ball number command for a special symbol is received, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the variable display of the special symbol) of the main control device 110 are extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter values.

In addition, when a reserved ball number command for a normal pattern is received, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the variable display of the normal pattern) is extracted, and the voice lamp control device 11
The value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of No. 3 is updated.

Here, the reserved ball number command is executed when the balls enter the various ball entrances (the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640,
When a ball enters the through gate 67 (start winning) and the value of the various reserved ball number counters is incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed, the value of the various reserved ball number counters is decremented. Therefore, when a start winning or variable display setting is performed, the special pattern reserved ball number counter 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is sent by the process of S4210.
23c, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be different from the value of the various reserved ball number counters 223c of the main control device 110.
Even if the values of 03d, 203e, and 203d deviate from those of the main control unit 110, when a reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning or the variable display setting, that is, when the number of reserved balls is changed, the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 is corrected, and the main control unit 110
The various reserved ball count counters can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f.

In addition, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S
In the process of S4211, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (S4212),
4211: Yes), executes a winning command process (S4212), and ends this process. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the memory area (
This process stores (stores) the winning information in the winning information storage area 223b in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and executes a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information. The details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S42
11: No), then it is determined whether a symbol determination command has been received (S4213), and if it is determined that a symbol determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S4214), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether a general symbol-related command has been received (S4215).
), if it is determined that the map has been received (S4215: Yes), the map-related process is executed (S42
16), and then this process is terminated. Note that the execution of the map-related process (S4216) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a general map-related command has not been received (S
4215: No), it is determined whether a big win-related command has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that a big win-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), a big win-related process is executed (S4218).
After that, this process is terminated. For a detailed explanation of the big win related process (S4218),
This will be described later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big win-related command has not been received (S4217: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4219).
This process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 176, the status command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this status command receiving process (S4202). This status command receiving process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes a process for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently depending on the set game state. The details of the status command receiving process (S4202) will be described below.

When the state command receiving process (S4202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game state is to be changed (S4301).
It is determined whether the game state set in S4301.g is different from the game state indicated by the currently received state command. If it is determined in the process of S4301 that there is no change in the game state (S4301: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4301: Yes).
4302).

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes),
A display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state), (S4302: No
), and then, it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time-saving state (S4306). If it is determined that the game state is the time-saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time-saving state) (S4306: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is set to 100 (S4
307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (S4306
: No), and then it is determined whether the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309).
If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the process proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g is set in the past status area (S4304), the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g (S4305), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the commands set in the processes of S4308 and S4311 are
4, the variable performance display during the normal state is executed. In this way, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this way, for example, it becomes possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and the common command received on the display control device 114 side.
Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to combine a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can control the voice lamp control device 1
13, information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting is output to the
It is preferable to provide a discrimination means for discriminating whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate, and if the discrimination result indicates that the information is not appropriate, to set a simple display variable pattern command indicating appropriate information, and to rewrite the contents of the display data already set to the simple display data.

By configuring it in this manner, when the voice lamp control device 113 is not set with appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simplified display data showing appropriate information can be set, and a variable presentation display based on the simplified display data can be displayed. This prevents a variable presentation display with content different from the actual game result (the result of the lottery for special symbols) from being executed, which would reduce the player's motivation to play. In addition, the simplified display data mentioned above can be, for example, display data that displays a special mode (e.g., a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any game state, or a fourth
It is sufficient to use display data that has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, such as display data for executing variable display of patterns.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game status and the received variation pattern.

Next, the contents of the winning command process (see S4212) executed in the command judgment process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command process (S4212).
4212) is a process executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110, which is set when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a winning information command for normal symbols is acquired when the right to draw a normal symbol is acquired, or a V winning command, which is set when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401), and it is determined whether the command received this time is a winning information command for normal drawings (S4402). If it is determined that the command is a winning information command for normal drawings (S4403),
4402: Yes), it is determined whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal winning) (S4403), and if it is determined that there is winning information (S4404: Yes),
4403: Yes), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is one with a high probability of winning a normal symbol (S4404).

Here, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state of a normal pattern, that is, it is a normal state (S4404: No), since it is a state in which the lottery right for a normal pattern lottery that wins a normal pattern during the normal state has been acquired and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command for suggesting the long opening of the electric chute is set (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as various display commands set in the control process of other voice lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect (for example, an effect that incites whether or not a small display area Dm3 is formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) that suggests that a normal pattern winning game is performed during the normal state and the electric role 640a is long-opened (opened for 5 seconds) is executed.

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestive performance is executed only when the player acquires the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that wins a normal pattern during the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and it is also good to configure the above-mentioned suggestive performance to be executed when it is determined that the winning information command for normal patterns contains winning information indicating a specific losing win. This makes it possible to set the case where a normal pattern winning game is executed when the suggestive performance is executed, and the case where it is not executed, so that the player can play while predicting the game content to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the player acquires the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state, the suggestive performance is executed. In addition to this configuration, the timing when the game that will actually be played with a normal symbol is determined based on the currently executed special symbol lottery or the pre-determined result of the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, that is, the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command for normal symbols that indicates a winning symbol is executed (
It may be configured to execute a pre-game state process to determine whether the game state at the time when the normal winning game is executed is a normal state or not, and execute the above-mentioned suggestive performance when it is determined to be a normal state. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the winning information command for normal figures has not been received (S4402: No), if it is determined that there is no winning information in the process of S4403 (S4403: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 in the process of S4404.
If it is determined that the number is greater than the maximum number (S4404: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4406.

In the process of S4406, the special winning information command process is executed (S4406), and S44
The process proceeds to step S4407. Details of the special winning information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4407, the command received this time is a V-winning command (winning process (FIG. 171
If the command is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408).
The process proceeds to S4409. Also, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S
If the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes),
The effect execution flag 223k is set to OFF (S4410), a display command for notifying the V winning is set (S4411), and the V notification flag 223m is set to ON (S4412).
In addition, in the process of S4409, if the V performance execution flag is set to 2, the process proceeds to S4413.
If 23k is off (S4409: No), the process also proceeds to S4413.

In the processing of S4413, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the special winning information command process (S4406) executed in the winning command process (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special winning information command process (S4406).

When the special winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), then:
It is determined whether the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the consecutive notice execution selection table 222d (FIG. 147(a)) is used to select whether or not to perform the consecutive notice (S4504).
Next, it is determined whether or not a consecutive announcement is to be executed (S4505). If it is determined that a consecutive announcement is to be executed (S4505: Yes), the special consecutive announcement flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

In addition, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), in the process of S4503, the special consecutive notice flag 2
If it is determined that 23o is on (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4505 that continuous notices are not being executed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4507.

In the processing of S4507, a display command based on the information contained in the received special prize information command is set (S4507), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the map-related process (S4216) executed in the command judgment process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described.
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related process (S4216). This normal symbol related process (S4216) is a process for receiving a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110,
This is a process that is executed when a normal win start command, indicating that a normal win game has started, or a normal win end command, indicating that a normal win game has ended, is received.

When the normal pattern related process (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether a normal pattern variation pattern command has been received (S4601). If it is determined that a normal pattern variation pattern command has been received (S4601: Yes), a display normal pattern variation start command is set (S4602). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4603).
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes),
), this process ends as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4603: No
), it is determined whether the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command received this time is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal symbol lottery that has resulted in a normal symbol winning (S4604), and if it is determined that the normal symbol winning has not been determined (S4604: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal winning is won (S4604: Yes), since the normal winning is a variation in which a long opening winning is executed, a display command indicating that the long opening is waiting is set (S4605), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this control example, the normal symbol variation is based on whether or not the normal symbol variation is a winning variation.
) (display mode forming small display area Dm3) is used, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (display mode forming small display area Dm3) for a specific out-of-normal fluctuation (for example, a part of an out-of-normal fluctuation in which the same fluctuation time as a normal hit fluctuation is set).

In addition, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed depending on the content of the change performance (third pattern change performance) corresponding to the special pattern change being executed. For example,
When a variable performance with a high expectation of a big win (for example, a reach performance) is being executed in the pattern variable performance, it is preferable to configure the display content to be changed so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variable performance with a high expectation of a big win (for example, a reach performance) is not being executed. In this way, by providing a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, and controlling the display content, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information unnecessarily, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the normal map variation pattern command has not been received (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the normal map win start command has been received (S466). If it is determined that the normal map win start command has been received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4607: No), a display command indicating that the long is open is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. S4608
By setting the display command in the process, the display mode shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Also, in the process of S4607, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes),
The process of S4608 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the normal start command has not been received (S
4606: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4609), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), it is next determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4611: Yes).
Then, it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the special effect in progress flag 223i is not set to ON (S4612: No), a display command indicating that the chance zone has been entered is set (S4613), and the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to OFF (S4614).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processes of S4610 to S4612 that the discrimination result is other than the above-mentioned discrimination results, the process ends.

Next, the contents of the big win related process (S4218) will be described with reference to Fig. 180. Fig. 180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win related process (S4218). In the big win related process (S4218), a process is performed to make the third symbol display device 81 execute a performance display corresponding to the big win game executed when the big win is won, and when the big win is won, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether the currently received command is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4702).
The display big win start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the main process (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 221.
In the command output process (S4102) of the command output process (see 4), the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703).
If it is determined that the jackpot is a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), the chance mode starts (
On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is not a normal big win (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined that the winning is a special big win, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147 (
b)) is used to select whether or not to execute the V notification effect (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705).
Yes), the V performance execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), and an ending display mode indicating that the super chance mode has been entered (the probability change state is set) is set (S47
07) and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is determined that there is no V notification effect (S4705:
If the answer is No, the process proceeds to S4708 described above.

That is, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, the set jackpot type (
The ending period of different lengths is set according to the type of the jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game being executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is started. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information showing the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information showing the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control to pay out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so that the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the like can be controlled.
In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the big win game, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special pattern when it is confirmed that a jackpot game will be executed, or it may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4709).
), if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and the current round number is set to 1.
It is determined whether the current round is a V round (S4711).
If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4712). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4712: Yes), a display command for informing the V winning is set (S4713).
In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4711 that the number of rounds this time is not one round (V round), that is, that a round game other than the first round will be started (S4711: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4712 that the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the round number command has not been received (S470
9: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes), an ending process is executed (S4715).
If it is determined in the process of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), the process ends.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is the same as the jackpot-related process (S4 in FIG. 180).
This process is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received via the terminal 218 (see 218), and executes a process for finally determining the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801). If it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (
S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S480
4), this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), the V performance execution flag 223k
It is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4802), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period is set (S4803), and processing proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and a process is executed to switch the display mode of the latter half of the ending period (see FIG. 236(d)), which was previously set in response to the setting of the probability variable state, to the display mode (see FIG. 236(c)) corresponding to the setting of the time-saving state. In this control example, the display period of the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so that the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described with reference to Fig. 182. Fig. 1827 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed by the MPU 22 in the voice lamp control device 113.
This is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the third symbol display device 81
In order to execute the variable performance, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variable display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4901: No),
Since the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, S490
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S490
2), and then execute a special chart 1 performance mode setting process for generating a display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type for notifying the display control device 114 (S4
903), shift the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b (S4904), and proceed to the process of S4905. Special symbol 1 performance mode setting process (S4903)
Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4905: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4909.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 2 variation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes
s), set the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 to off (S4906), and then
The performance mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Details of the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4909, the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223
Then, when it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4909: No), the main control device 1
Since the variable pattern command has not been received from the special pattern selection flag 223e1 or the special pattern selection flag 223e2, the process is terminated.
If it is determined that 3e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2, which is set to on, is set to off (S4910), and then the special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903). This special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is a process similar to the variable display setting process (FIG. 1
This is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special pattern in step S4113 of FIG. 82, and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, the time-saving counter 223
It is determined whether the value of n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 in the process of S5001 (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5004.
The processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not the presentation mode is the super chance mode (S
If it is determined that the mode is the super chance mode (S5005: Yes),
The variable time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is extracted (S
5006), and it is determined whether the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). If it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the high probability performance selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008).
), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S5009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5007:
If the answer is No, the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), it is then determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010).
If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the above-mentioned S5009 is performed.
In the process of S5010, if it is determined that the game is in the chance mode (S5010: Yes), a chance mode effect setting process is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.
The process proceeds to step S5009. Details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (S4907). This special chart 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) is a process similar to the variable display setting process (FIG.
This is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special pattern in step S4113 of 2), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal state (S5101). If it is determined that it is a normal state (S5101:
Yes), a display command indicating that the chance zone has been entered is set (S5102), and then
The special effect flag 223i is set to on (S5103), the effect mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 effect selection table 222b (see Figure 145) (S5104), a display variable pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5105), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the state is not normal (S5101:
No), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106
), if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes
), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5107), and the time-saving counter 2
In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped and the process of S5109 is started.
Then proceed to process 09.

In the process of S5109, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not the presentation mode is the super chance mode (S
If it is determined that the mode is the super chance mode (S5110: Yes),
The variable time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is extracted (S
5111), and it is determined whether the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). If it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the probability variation performance selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5111).
3) The above-mentioned process of S5105 is executed, and the process ends.
If it is determined that the time is not 0 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, in the process of S5110, if it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the chance mode effect setting process is executed (S5114 (S501
2)), and proceed to the process of S5115.
Details of step 5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S5115, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the processing of S5105 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 185, the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Fig. 185 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in Fig. 183) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in Fig. 184).

In the chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that has been read is 99 or not (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the process of S5202 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that has been read is 79 or not (S5204).
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes),
The normal first period is set in the presentation mode memory area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the process of S5204 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that was read out is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the presentation mode memory area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the process of S5206 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No),
, the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether the continuous notice execution flag 223q is on (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is on (S52
08: Yes), the continuous performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the special effective time timer (S5211), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213. In the process of S5210, even if it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the process proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 186, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Fig. 186 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) is executed in the main process (see Fig. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a presentation (operation presentation) according to the player's operation in order to enhance the presentation effect in the third symbol display device 81,
A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

In this control example, the player is allowed to operate the frame button 22 using a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, it is possible to distinguish between a "normal press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) and a "long press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (2 seconds or more). Then, it is possible to execute different operation effects depending on the operation content that is determined. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 using a variety of operation methods in order to execute various operation effects, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on. Note that in this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but this is not limiting, and one type of operation method or three or more types may be provided. Also, in this control example,
Although the operation means that the player can operate is one type, the frame button 22, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of operation means that the player can operate may be provided.
It may be configured to determine not only the operation for each operation means but also the combination of the operation contents executed for a plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, a first operation means and a second operation means), it is determined that the same operation has been executed when a first operation is executed for the first operation means and when a second operation is executed for the second operation means (
By configuring in this way, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation means and the arrangement position of the second operation means are separated, the player can select the operation means which is easier to operate and enjoy the operation.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, the SW effective time is set to 0
Is it greater than the SW valid time counter 223r? In other words, is the SW valid time set?
It is determined whether the value of is greater than 0 (S5301). Note that this SW effective time is set in accordance with each variation pattern when a variation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S530
1: Yes), and a value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223r (S53
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5303.

In the process of S5303, it is determined whether the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S
If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Y),
es), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305.
The process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305),
If the valid time has elapsed (S5306: No), it is then determined whether or not the valid time has elapsed (S5306). If it has been determined that the valid time has elapsed (S5306: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it has been determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes),
es), and set the value of the operation counter 223t to a value corresponding to 2 seconds (S5308), and
In the process of S5306, if it is determined that the valid time has not elapsed (S5306: No), or in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.
The process proceeds to step 309.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310).
s), the value of the operation counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and the decremented operation counter 223t is
It is determined whether the value of the operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313).
If it is determined that the value of t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the subtracted value of the operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313:
If the answer is No, the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (
S5310: No), the value of the operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and
Proceed to process 4.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current mode is the chance mode (S5314
If it is determined that the current mode is the chance mode (S5314: Yes), the button operation time effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) is used to select the effect to be executed (S53
15) Then proceed to processing of S5309.

In the process of S5314, if it is determined that the current time is not the chance mode (S5
The process proceeds to S5309 where other button processes (such as changing the background) are performed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (S4107) described above with reference to Fig. 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and the special effective time are configured so that the remaining period is 0 at the time when the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. In other words, the number of times that the operation performance is executed during the period in which each effective time is set is set to 1. This makes it possible to prevent the operation performance from being executed excessively.

Note that the process for the remaining period of the SW valid time and the special valid time is not limited to this. For example, when the valid time is set to 10 seconds, if an operation of the frame button 22 is accepted within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set (S53 in FIG. 186),
It is also possible to configure the system so that a new effective time is set during the special symbol variation period (S5310: No, S5313: Yes). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of operation effects executed during one special symbol variation period depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 187 to Fig. 201. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 187. Fig. 187 is a flow chart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following procedure.
When the power is turned on to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released,
The PU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" by its hardware configuration, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240.
The OM controller 234b receives the address "0000H" from the bus line 240.
When it is detected that the program is
The boot program stored in the character RO1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.
It fetches the instruction code received from M234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character R
When the OM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c.
31 consumes a lot of waiting time from when it designates the address "0000H" to when it receives the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, in the present control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d.
Since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the address "0000H" in the NOR type ROM 234.
The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the first program storage area 234d can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H".
The main processing can be started in a short time in 231. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls can be executed for the third pattern display device 81.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed during main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, especially when random access is performed, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are directly read and processed by the DRA.
The program transfer section 233 transfers the program data to a program storage area 233a and a data table storage area 233b provided in a work RAM 233 configured by M and stores the program data therein.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

In addition, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102.
By setting the predetermined address, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
Instead of reading out the control program from the D-type flash memory 234a and fetching instructions, the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a is read out and instructions are fetched to execute various processes.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured from the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing according to those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the N
The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the AND-type flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) to be executed after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) (S6105), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM which has a fast read speed and perform various controls, so that high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114 and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions starting from the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes the first program storage area 234d.
1 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in
However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 may be a part of the boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated a plurality of times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then execute the processes of S6103 to S6105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This makes it unnecessary to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process.
This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance section more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 187, when the boot process is completed, the work RAM 23
The MPU 231 executes an initial setting process in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the MPU 231 (S6002).
It also performs various settings for registers in the MPU 231 and for I/O devices. It also performs settings for the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, and the like.
The memory of M236 is cleared. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power-on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power-on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power-on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of power-on main image area 235a which is the transfer destination. Image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 to indicate the end of the transfer.
By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, MPU 231 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or the partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes:
The instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on varying image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on varying image area 235b is then held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the transfer setting process (FIG. 199 (
In step a), the image controller 23 transfers all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
7, a resident image transfer setting process is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 199A).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)).
A simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and a simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 thirdly.
By displaying the image on the pattern display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 80.
235, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, players and the like can recognize that some kind of initialization process is being carried out while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and therefore can easily transfer the remaining image data to the resident video RAM 235.
Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
You can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that the device may be stopped while the data is being transferred to the computer.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the character ROM 2
By using the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the memory 34, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after power is turned on, the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image is displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the power-on main image. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the time for which the power-on main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10
Since a simple change effect can be produced using the power-on change image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Fig. 189(a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 189(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in sequence in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process or a simplified command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Fig. 189(b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 189(b) is a flow chart showing the V interruption process. In this V interruption process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt process is started by detecting a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237. The V interrupt signal is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed in the image controller 237, and is output to the MPU 231.
By executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time when drawing process for one frame of an image is completed.
In this case, a drawing instruction for the next image is not received before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interruption process will be described, and then each process will be described in detail with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of a power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.
) to run the command.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, if a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Set to.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is performed, and therefore it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the start of the variable performance is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 190 to 195.

In the display setting process (S6303), the third display data is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like.
The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 81 is specifically specified. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is stored in the display data table buffer 2.
The display setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, the task process is executed (S63
In this task processing, a display setting process (S6303) or a simple display setting process (
Based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, identified by S6309, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident video RA is notified to the image controller 237.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5 to a predetermined area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the task process (S63
The CPU 231 generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 155 based on the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in step S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237.
Then, in accordance with the drawing list, image drawing processing is executed (S6306). Note that details of the drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S63
07). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A,
A stop type table corresponding to a big win B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, and complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the power-on image is displayed as the third pattern display device 81.
In order to display the command, a simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then a simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

190 to 195, the details of the command determination process (S6302) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in Fig. 190, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6303) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state.
402), and then analyzes the type of each of the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes),
), executes variable pattern command processing (S6405), and returns to processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to Fig. 191 (a). Fig. 191 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command process (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control device 110 always judges the start of the variation at least several seconds apart, so it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern having a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, when a variable performance having a shorter variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110,
While the third pattern display device 81 is displaying a variable performance according to the set variable display data table, the next display variable pattern command is received from the main control device 110, and another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in this control example, by setting a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with the shortest variable time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if a variable performance having a longer variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, the variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern with the shortest variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.
After the varying presentation in accordance with 3d has ended, the display setting process controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that a demo presentation is displayed until the next display pattern command is received from the main control device 110, so that the player can continue to watch the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the change time is set in the clock counter 233h (
S6503), and initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (S6504).Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, the display setting process goes to S650.
While updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and the third pattern display device 8
At the same time as specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in S6501, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character R.
The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the OM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503,
When it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is to end, the main control device 11
The settings of the stop display are controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from 0 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 190, if it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407).
Return to the process of 401.

The details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to Fig. 191(b), which is a flowchart showing the stop type command process.
This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big win A to G, small win A to C, reach miss, and complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and
The value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see Figure 189 (b)) is executed, is compared with the value of the stop type counter, and the stop pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
As the type information for identifying the symbol, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described.
) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S6603,
The symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed.
The address where the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, in reality,
Even if the special pattern is a miss, the third pattern display device 81 will display a stop pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot", which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 has achieved a "special pattern jackpot", lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 is actually a "special pattern jackpot", even if the third pattern display device 81 displays a stop pattern that is a complete miss, the pachinko machine 10 will achieve a "special pattern jackpot", so
It can make the players happy.

Returning to Fig. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409).
), and return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to Fig. 192(a). Fig. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

Returning to Fig. 190, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a display round number command (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411).
Then, return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to Fig. 192(b). Fig. 192(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801).
The contents are cleared by writing null data to 33e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S641
3) Return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to Fig. 193. Fig. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904).
Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a display fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and S6
Return to the process of 401.

The fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will now be described in detail with reference to Fig. 194(a), which is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command process.
This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command indicates a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in Figure 182), i.e., at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command).

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S69
31). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the variable stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, the time data representing the performance time is calculated by the time counter 233h.
(S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934).
The demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S
6935), terminates the fluctuation stop command processing, and returns to the command judgment processing.

Returning to Fig. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416),
: Yes), executes notification command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the notification command process (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 194(b). Fig. 194(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command process. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to a notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.
This is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command that has been output to the display control device 114 .

In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 23
3h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, among the various notification commands set by the voice and lamp control device 113,
The display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device), but is not limited to this. The display control device 114 also receives related commands such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role drive commands other than the display command, and sets the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.
The related command may be output to the corresponding control device with information indicating the above added.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6419),
418: Yes), executes a rear image change command process (S6419), and returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to Fig. 195 (a). Fig. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image accompanying the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001).
Of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each image, the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, the background image change flag 2 set by the process of S7001
When it is detected that the flag 33w is turned on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds,
Two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 0 milliseconds, and therefore when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area; however, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command.
In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 190, if it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Y),
es), executes error command processing (S6421), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the error command process (S6421) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 195(b). Fig. 195(b) is a flow chart showing the error command process. This error command process executes a process corresponding to an error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command discrimination process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing S7102, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the hall staff can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 190, if it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, S6401 to S6422 are repeated until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area.
The process of S6402 is repeatedly executed, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process is terminated.

In addition, the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 191(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see Figure 191 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figures 196 to 198, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in Fig. 196, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., if it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag off (S7202), the processes of S7203 to S7204 are executed,
Execute the processing corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203
If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S73
01).

In the task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 196, after the warning image setting process (S7204) or
If it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to Fig. 198. Fig. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is executed by the display data table buffer 233.
This is processing for updating a pointer 233f that designates an address for obtaining transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401).
That is, the pointer 233f is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed.
Start information is written at address "0H", and the entity of each data is address "0
If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process.
In turn, actual data can be read out from each data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S74
02). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403). If it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the time counter 23 counts up the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.
3h (S7404), and initialize the pointer 233f by setting it to 1 (S7405).
This process is terminated and the display setting process is returned to. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 8
1, a demo presentation can be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S74
03: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.
If a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in 33d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (
S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

196 for further explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprites (display objects) constituting the image is identified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: No), the process returns to the V interrupt process.
208: Yes), which means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on or not (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (
S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the determined display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the determined display flag, which indicates that the determined display performance is being performed in the ON state, is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is directly stored in the work RAM.
The process then copies the result to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided at 233 (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task process (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is specified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes),
s), and determine whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so after a certain time has passed since the end of the final display performance, a process is performed to display the demo performance on the third symbol display device 81.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag indicating that the demo performance is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

This makes it possible to set the drawing content so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes),
After the final display effect is finished, the demo effect is performed, and since this means that the demo effect has ended, the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As described above, various settings are made by the pointer update process executed during the interrupt processing so that the demo performance will start again, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

199 and 200, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 199(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (
S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Y
es), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 2
Since the image data has not been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to image controller 237 for transferring image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7501, the simple image display flag 233c is not on.
If it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the V
Return to the interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from character ROM 234 is to normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, with reference to Fig. 199(b), a description will be given of the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 199(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602).
In the process of S7602, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603.
Also, if the result of the processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process also proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (
S7603: No), and sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.
The start and end addresses of H.234, and the destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM
The image controller 23 includes the start address of the transfer destination (an area in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident image data to be transferred is to be stored).
Based on this transfer data information, CPU 237 executes image transfer processing, reads out image data designated in the transfer processing from character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to a designated address in resident video RAM 235 while resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, CPU 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231.

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603
189B), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189B) are completed.
Since the command determination process (see Figs. 190 to 195) and the display setting process (see Figs. 196 to 198) are executed instead of the normal image transfer process (see Figs. 309), the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Fig. 200) (see S7501: No in Fig. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all of the resident video R images, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variable image, which have already been transferred in the main process.
All resident target image data that should be resident in the AM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it is held without being overwritten while the power is on.
The image data transferred to the video RAM 35 is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 236.
After the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be read from the NAND flash memory 234, which has a slow read speed, during image drawing.
Since there is no need to read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as a, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images such as background images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display has been determined by the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to Fig. 200, a description will be given of the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null.
If the data is received (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes),
Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after an instruction to transfer image data has been set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the process of S7705 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No),
), and proceed to processing S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data to be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed. After the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710),
Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
Since there is no need to transfer the image data to the AM 236, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the display control device 114
This reduces the processing load on each unit and reduces the traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored).
The transfer data information includes the start address of the image data. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715).
This normal transfer setting process is then terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "OFF".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a big win stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance is transferred to the character RO without delay.
In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred to the character ROM 236 without delay.
234 to a normal video RAM 236.

In this control example, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to set the pointer 2 of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
According to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by 33f, the image controller 2
Since a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set to display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprites used in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

Next, the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 201. Fig. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates,
The drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated from the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305), including the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information.
In other words, in the process of S7801, the task process (S6304) is generated.
From the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in (a) above, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the image for one frame in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest behind the sprite that should be placed furthest in the foreground, and detailed drawing information (
A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as the detailed information (detailed information). Also, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the image storage area 2 of the normal video RAM 236
Since the sub-area of 36a is fixed, the MPU 231 determines the sub-area according to the sprite type as follows:
The type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and this information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer flag 233
The drawing target buffer information specified by j is sent to the image controller (S780
2). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is expanded.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and overwrites them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

Also, if the drawing list contains transfer data information,
The start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RA
M236), and the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and written to the buffer RAM
After temporarily storing the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to an area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the transfer destination top address when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer.
In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the process of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S
7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., if the value was "0", it is updated to "
If the drawing list is transmitted, the drawing target buffer is set to "0" if the drawing list is transmitted.
The frame buffer 236c is alternately set to the frame buffer 236d.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.
This is performed every time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by 231 is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read out are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

As explained above, in this first control example, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in overlap (parallel), and the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the drawing of the first special symbol. The drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be executed in a way that is more advantageous to the player than the drawing of the first special symbol. Furthermore, the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to differ in ease of execution depending on the set game state. Specifically, the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with greater ease in accordance with ...
In order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when the ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) to which the electric device 640a is attached, which is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit, the lottery right for the second special symbol can be obtained. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery for the second special symbol, and a high probability state for the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state for the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed.
By configuring in this manner, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

In addition, when a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set is won, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game aiming to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Furthermore, in this control example, the performance mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, as the performance mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance in the second half of the variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of reserved special symbols 2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that he or she has won the jackpot after multiple drawings of the second special symbol.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first executed second special symbol lottery among a plurality of special symbol 2 reserves acquired during a game with a normal symbol, the player can be made to think that the jackpot has been won because the plurality of special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during a game with a normal symbol, and therefore the player can be made to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during a game with a normal symbol.

In addition, if the number of reserved special patterns 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery,
As the pseudo winning variation performance described above, a variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when the first special pattern lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special pattern 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the first special pattern lottery) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the special pattern 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance imitating the special pattern 1 variation performance is executed, the third pattern is stopped (determined) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special pattern lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is executed, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if a ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is executed, and only when a ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the probability variable jackpot, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends before the probability variable state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probability variable state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of the fact for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be short.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a dedicated presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode will be stored in advance in the character RO of the display control device 114.
This requires the data to be stored in the M234, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the type of jackpot. If the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a certain jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half period of the ending period of a normal jackpot game.
To execute a notification performance without providing a dedicated performance mode to be used only when a ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a probability variable big win game and without giving a player a sense of incongruity.

In this control example, the big win ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period,
By configuring the length of the latter half period to be a common length regardless of the type of jackpot, the presentation mode of the notification presentation executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a certain jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example,
The notification effect may be executed from the final round period of the jackpot game, thereby making it possible to execute a notification effect that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or the round effect that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then the notification effect may be executed, thereby executing a notification effect for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth control example described above (see Figs. 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right side area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right side area through the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the V winning device 2
The percentage of balls that enter the 650 area is the same as that of the left area described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. As explained above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same bonus is awarded whether the player plays a right-hand hit game or a left-hand hit game. Therefore,
A player can play in any way that suits his/her mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the rate at which balls enter the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this manner, during the normal state, i.e., while a game is being played in which the ball is to enter the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball is to enter the second ball entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a special state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In each of the above control examples, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is
In the above description, the case where the reserved ball count command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value (N) of the reserved ball counter 203d is updated (i.e., when it increases or decreases), is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Also, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce both the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, so
The control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the first ball entrance 64 can be entered a maximum of four times, and the through gate 67 can be entered a maximum of four times.
Although the passage of the ball is reserved up to one time, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of reserved balls displayed based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a variable manner in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the four divided areas may be divided in a manner different by the number of reserved balls (for example,
The number of reserved balls may be indicated by a different color or lighting pattern, or a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Also, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but may be a display in which the symbols are moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as vertical or L-shaped. Also, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, but may also include, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in various ways in motion or change together with the symbols or separately from the symbols. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Also, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery results of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, a display means for displaying a main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player among the third symbols,
A display means different from the display means for displaying the sub-patterns may be provided. Also, the display means may be configured in a manner other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left side area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state.
For example, in the normal state, the target area of the game board 13
The game may be configured so that a left-hand hit game is executed, aiming at the left area of the game board 13, and a right-hand hit game is executed, aiming at the right area of the game board 13, when the time-saving state is in effect; furthermore, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the left-hand hitting game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or whether a jackpot game is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute a right-hand hitting game when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hitting game only during a normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hitting game, left-hand hitting game).

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, and when the player presses it, it is determined that the operating means has been operated. However, other configurations may also be used, such as an operating means configured in the shape of a lever that can determine when it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or front and back, a touch sensor type operating means that can determine when it has been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless type operating means that can determine when it has been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned first control example, when a favorable game state (probability change state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the big win game, a high-speed change period during which a short change time is selected can be set for a predetermined period (until the special symbol change is executed 20 times), and during the high-speed change period, the background mode transition effect is not executed (is unlikely to be executed) when the frame button 22 is operated. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect during a period during which a short change time is likely to be selected, making it difficult for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first control example, when the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, when the normal state is set, an operation that executes the background mode transition effect ("normal push") is performed, an operation effect with an effect mode different from the background mode transition effect is executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect can be executed by executing the second operation ("long press") other than the first operation ("normal press") described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the background mode transition effect to a player who is willing to execute the background mode transition effect while knowing that the stopped display mode of the third symbol will become difficult to grasp. In this first control example, it is configured so that the period required to determine that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been executed. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby suppressing the stopped display mode of the third symbol from becoming excessively difficult to grasp.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first operation process is executed by performing a first operation on the operation means, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first operation process is not executed (is made difficult to be executed) even if the first operation is performed on the operation means.
The technical concept may be used in other technologies. For example, a volume adjustment process for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment process for adjusting the brightness of a liquid crystal display when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, may be applied as the first operation process described above, and the first operation process may be made executable when a predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a special pattern variation is not being executed), and may be executed when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when
The first operation process may be configured to be difficult to execute when a special symbol variation is being executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions may be configured to be not only the presence or absence of special pattern variation, but also conditions that are met when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are met during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when a predetermined condition is met and the above-mentioned first operation is executed, it is preferable to configure the machine to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process for notifying the user that the first operation process will not be executed).
This allows the player to easily understand that the first operation process will not be executed.
However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a different operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned first operation process to be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in this control example. Also, in this first control example, the first operation and the second operation are configured to be executable by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but this is not limited to this, and multiple operation means may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the first operation means (for example, frame button 22) may be different from the first operation means (for example, frame button 22).
), and the second operation can be performed by operating the second operation means (for example, a frame button provided other than the frame button 22). In this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation to be more difficult to perform than the first operation, for example, by arranging the first operation means on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 where the player can always operate it, and arranging the second operation means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 where the player has difficulty operating it (see FIG. 121).

Furthermore, in the case where the above-mentioned first operating means and second operating means are provided, the first valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the first operating means is valid and the second valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the second operating means is valid may be set to be unified, or different periods may be set. When the valid operation determination periods are unified, the process of determining the valid periods can be simplified. Also, when different periods are set, depending on the type of operating means to be operated,
Since the periods during which the operations are judged to be valid are different, the player can be motivated to play the game by operating various operating means at various timings.

In the first control example described above, a normal state and multiple advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the player can be notified of the period (remaining period) until the next time the normal state is set, rather than the period until the set game state ends.

Here, conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a probability variable state or a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are some that notify the player of the period during which the favorable game state will continue (the number of times the special symbol changes). Specifically, there are some that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode that indicates the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining period display mode every time a special symbol lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

Furthermore, some recent gaming machines are capable of setting multiple types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player, and some of these advantageous gaming states can be set to a normal advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a most advantageous gaming state (e.g., a special state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the game state transitions from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode showing the period for which the most advantageous game state will continue, and thereafter, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode showing the period for which the normal advantageous game state will continue.

In other words, when the most advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to allow the player to understand the period (remaining period) for which the most advantageous gaming state will continue, but it is not possible for the player to understand what type of gaming state will be set after the most advantageous gaming state ends, or how long the gaming state set after the most advantageous gaming state ends will continue.

Therefore, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) will be set, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to understand what they should aim for while playing in the most advantageous gaming state.

In contrast, in this control example, as described above, when multiple types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is displayed for the period until the multiple types of advantageous game states end, that is, the period until the next normal state is set. By configuring in this way, when different types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the advantageous game states that are set in succession, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) is being notified, a presentation can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the currently set game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the game state set during the advantageous game state period, the player can play while expecting that a more advantageous game state has been set.

In this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) is notified, a suggestive effect that can suggest the currently set game state or a game state that was set in the past can be executed. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode is made different depending on the set game state. Therefore, the current game state can be predicted by the player based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the advantageous game state period, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, since the selection ratio of each presentation mode is simply made different depending on the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation presentations executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). Note that, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" and "reach suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode of the operation presentation, a "reach suggestion" presentation is executed to suggest to the player whether the special pattern variation being executed will be in a reach state, and if it is in a reach state, the reach line and the reach pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be modified, for example, by selecting the winning information storage area 2
It may be configured to determine whether there is winning information for a reach state among the winning information for the second special symbol stored in 23b, and to notify the player that the second special symbol variation that will result in a reach state will be executed based on the result of the determination before the execution of the second special symbol variation. In this way, by expanding the scope of the performance of the operation performance to not only the special symbol variation currently being executed but also the reserved special symbol variation (the special symbol variation to be executed in the future),
This can enhance the performance effect.

In the above-mentioned first control example, the frame button 22 is operated by the player to switch to the background mode or to execute a presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery. However, as a function that can be executed by the player operating the operating means, for example, a volume adjustment function that adjusts the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment function that adjusts the brightness on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display may be used. As with the above-mentioned background mode transition, the volume adjustment function and brightness adjustment function may also make it difficult to see the third symbol variation presentation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so when a predetermined condition is met, specifically, when a period in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation (high-speed variation period) is set,
It may be configured so that the execution is more difficult than when any other period is set.

In the above-mentioned first control example, the background mode transition can be executed even during the high-speed fluctuation period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background mode transition may be completely prevented from being executed. Also, in the above-mentioned first control example, a first period in which a specific performance mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation performance executed by operating the operating means,
A second period is provided which is less likely to be executed than the first period, but it may be possible to set three or more periods with different rates at which the operation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 202 to Fig. 210. The second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control contents are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

In the first control example described above, referring to Figure 122 (b), each pattern row Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above was configured to be displayed on a single image layer.
In contrast, in the second control example, the main patterns sz and the sub-patterns f constituting each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are
The difference is that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz displayed on different image layers are displayed in a synchronized manner, so that the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 can be displayed variably in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, there have been machines that variably display a third symbol as identification information for showing the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, there have been machines that execute various effects (variable effects) during the variably display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a big win.

Incidentally, there is a general gaming machine that executes a pattern change display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple third patterns (e.g., third patterns numbered 1 to 9), and executes an effect (e.g., reach effect) that increases the probability of a big win when a predetermined third pattern is stopped and displayed in the other pattern rows except for the one pattern row. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the change display is executed by changing only the change speed of the change display without changing the order of the patterns forming the pattern row. Therefore, there was a problem that the effect of the change display using the change display of the pattern row could not be improved.

Also, a proposal has been made to increase the variety of the variable display by arranging identification information (sub-patterns) other than identification information (main pattern) for indicating the result of a special pattern lottery in one pattern row. However, even if such a configuration is used, there is a problem in that the presentation effect of the variable presentation cannot be improved by simply varying the speed of the variable display of the pattern row formed by the main pattern and the sub-pattern.

Furthermore, a plurality of pattern rows having different arrangements and types of main and sub-patterns are prepared in advance,
When performing a specific variable performance, some machines enhance the effect of the variable performance by varying the pattern row itself, but this requires control to display different pattern rows in a variable manner depending on the variable performance being performed, which creates the problem of complicated display control.

In contrast, in this control example, the symbol string display is configured to be executed using a plurality of image layers. Specifically, the main and sub-symbols that make up the symbol string are configured to be displayed on separate image layers. In normal times, the main and sub-symbols are synchronized and displayed in a variable manner, so that the various symbols that make up the symbol string are arranged in a specific arrangement (FIG. 122(b)
By varying the display contents of the main symbols and the sub-symbols, the symbol rows can be displayed in a manner other than a specific symbol arrangement by varying the display contents of the main symbols and the sub-symbols.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily display the third patterns (main and sub patterns) forming a specific pattern row in a variable manner other than a specific pattern arrangement while using image data of the third patterns, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 202, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) shows the display contents of the pachinko machine 1 in this second control example.
202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed in FIG. 202(a) and the display screen, and FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display presentation executed when the display of the main pattern image layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer fr is set to on, and FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation result of the display presentation of FIG. 202(b).

As shown in Fig. 202(a), in this second control example, the main pattern image layer sr on which the main pattern sz is displayed and the sub-pattern image layer fr on which the sub-pattern fz is displayed are overlapped, and the main pattern image layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-pattern image layer fr (in front of the player's line of sight). Note that in Fig. 202(a), only the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz are labeled,
In reality, each image layer (layer) displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, the background image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . .), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . .), the character (character 1, character 2, . . .
Each image layer is formed corresponding to each sprite, such as a reserved ball count symbol 1, a reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., an error symbol. In a portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed in the image layer on the front side is given priority and can be viewed.

In the second control example configured as above, the main pattern sz displayed on the main pattern layer sr,
When the sub-pattern fz displayed on the sub-pattern layer fr and the main pattern s are displayed in a variable manner,
Since z is displayed with priority over the sub-pattern fz, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the identification information (main pattern sz) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is hidden by the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery. In addition, since there is no need to control the variable display so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap in order to make it easier for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to simplify the variable display control and to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main pattern layer sr is a sub-pattern layer fr
In this embodiment, the sub-pattern layer fr is arranged in front of the main pattern layer sr (preferentially), and the main pattern sz is displayed in priority over the sub-pattern fz. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-pattern layer fr may be arranged in front of the main pattern layer sr (preferentially) so that the sub-pattern fz is displayed in priority over the main pattern sz.
Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery until the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) variation is stopped and displayed, so that the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) variation is stopped and displayed, and the player can be expected to see the result of the special symbol lottery until the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) variation is stopped and displayed.
It is possible to execute a pattern changing effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 202(b) and FIG. 202(c), the variable performance executed by the display control for each pattern image layer will be described. As mentioned above, in this control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that constitute the pattern row are configured to be able to be displayed independently. Furthermore, the display image that is set to be displayed for each image layer is configured to be able to be set to be displayed or not. In other words, while internally executing the display control for each image layer, the display or not (on, off) for the image layer itself is configured to be able to be set.

Figure 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern layer fr is set to on, and only the sub-pattern fz of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.
Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed before the main symbol sz is displayed, and the characters "reach line notice start" are displayed, indicating that the reach line notice performance for notifying the player of the reach line that will be effective in this third symbol variation has been executed. After that, the performance result according to the stop position of the sub-symbol fz is displayed.

In the example shown in Fig. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz is displayed in a "diamond shape", and the words "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a performance result indicating that the effective lines L4 and L5 (see Fig. 122) will be in a reach state. Then, when this reach line notice performance ends, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON, and a variable performance is performed to suggest to the player what type of main symbol sz will be that will be in the reach state on the effective lines L4 and L5 (see Fig. 122), and then a double reach performance (see Fig. 131) is performed.

In this way, in the second control example, the main pattern sz is changed and the sub-pattern fz is changed.
Since it is possible to execute the third symbol variation effect differently, the sub-symbol fz is first variably displayed to inform the player of the location where the main symbol sz is stopped, and then the main symbol sz is variably displayed to inform the type of the main symbol sz that will be in the ready state. Therefore, the result of the third symbol variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player in stages, and an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

In the reach line advance notice performance described with reference to Fig. 202(b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main symbol sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub-symbol fz. In addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped sub-symbol fz may be configured to indicate the type of the main symbol sz to be stopped, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, for example, the pay line L2 (Fig. 122(a)) may be configured to be displayed as the performance result of the reach line advance notice performance.
When the sub-symbols fz are stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area forming the activated line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)), a combination of specific main symbols sz (for example, "3" from the top) is displayed on the activated line L3 (see FIG. 122(b)).
It is preferable to configure the display so that the combination ".4.1" is displayed in a stopped state.

Here, when a specific combination of main symbols sz is displayed, the third symbol variable display is restarted and a variable performance that increases the expectation of winning a big win (so-called pseudo consecutive variable performance) is executed, or a winning game (a big win game or a small win game) is executed as it is. By configuring in this way, when a reach line notice performance is executed, the player can be more interested in the performance result.

Furthermore, in the case where a reach line advance notice performance in which only the sub-pattern fz is displayed first is executed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand whether the reach line advance notice performance this time notifies only the stop display position of the main pattern sz in advance or also notifies the type of the main pattern sz to be stopped and displayed in advance, for example, after the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), it is preferable to configure the performance result of the reach line advance notice performance this time to be notified by the type of display mode (for example, a graphic display displayed by connecting each of the sub-patterns fz with a line) formed using each of the stopped and displayed sub-patterns fz. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202(c) (sub-pattern fz
When a diamond-shaped figure is displayed in the state where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), the result of this reach line preview performance indicates in advance the stopping position of the main symbol sz, and when a heart-shaped figure made up of four sub-symbols fz is displayed, it is preferable to inform the player that this indicates in advance that a specific main symbol sz will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing a performance (advance notification of performance result) using the sub-pattern fz that is stopped and displayed between the time when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and the time when the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, the result of the variable performance (variable performance using the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player in a more gradual manner, thereby maintaining interest in the variable performance being executed.

Next, the contents of various designs pre-stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 203. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, a back image for an ocean background and
Specifically, when the player presses the frame button 22, the player can set a background image of the mountain.
When a background mode transition is executed based on the operation of the button, the currently set background image (e.g., ocean background) is switched to a background image that is not currently set (e.g., mountain background).

Furthermore, the second control example is configured to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) depending on the type of the set (displayed) back image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in a display mode according to the type of the back image, so that the performance effect when the back image is switched can be improved.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image are shown in FIG.
The following description will be given with reference to Fig. 203(a) and Fig. 203(b). Fig. 203(a) shows an ocean image (
FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set. These image data are stored in advance in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when a transition to the background mode is executed, the corresponding image data is read out from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the resident video RAM 2
The image data corresponding to each symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 or the third symbol sequence area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The process of reading out the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above.
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz includes image data (D1 to D2) showing main patterns in which the numbers "1 to 9" are added to nine types of pattern patterns (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, and crab).
9) are stored. The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from D1 and store them in the third symbol area 235d.

In the second control example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol row displayed in a stopped state when the ready state is reached, are divided into nine main symbols (image data D1 to
D9) while the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a))
That is, the symbol row displayed in a variable manner during the reach state is configured to be formed of 10 main symbols.
The pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of 10 main patterns, including a main pattern sz with the number 9 (main pattern corresponding to D9) and a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with a shark pattern and the number 4. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a variable manner such that after the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, the main pattern sz with the number 4 passes, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. As a result, a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, the main pattern with the number 4) can be passed multiple times during the time it takes for the variable display of the pattern row to make one revolution, so that when a reach state is established for the specific type of main pattern sz, the possibility of winning a jackpot (the main pattern sz that is a combination for a jackpot is displayed on the effective line of the reach state) is increased.
It is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the main symbol sz will be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz will be required to achieve the reach state, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), the image data corresponding to the main pattern sz for the mountain includes 9
Image data (D1 to D9) showing main patterns in which the numbers "1 to 9" are added to the pattern of the type (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, snake)
The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is sufficient to read out the image data D1 in order and store them in the third symbol area 235d.

Then, in the same manner as when the sea background is displayed, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (FIG. 122(
a)), that is, the pattern row displayed when the ready state is reached is formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), while the pattern row Z2 (
122(a)), that is, the pattern row displayed in a variable manner during the reach state is formed of 10 main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is formed of 10 main patterns, including the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, and a change main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) that is a rhinoceros pattern with the number 4 added thereto.
The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, the main pattern sz with the number 4 passes, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, the main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row goes around once, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for the specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the main pattern sz that is a combination for a jackpot is likely to be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the ready-to-win state). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the second control example, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned main pattern sz is read out from the character memory area 234a2 and is used as the third pattern string data for displaying the pattern string.
In other words, the main pattern column image data (image data in which each main pattern sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the main patterns among the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is generated for each pattern column and stored in the third pattern column area 235g. Then, using this main pattern column image data, the main pattern image layer s
The main pattern sz is variably displayed at r. By configuring in this way, the amount of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to variably displaying image data for each pattern, so that the processing load of the display control can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, in the second control example, among the symbols forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3,
Since the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be independently variable, even if the multiple main patterns sz of each pattern row are formed with one image data (main pattern row image data) and variable displayed, various variable displays can be performed by changing the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, for the main pattern sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern among the third patterns forming each pattern row, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis using the main pattern row image data, and for the sub-pattern fz, which is identification information that does not indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis. Therefore, various variable performances can be performed by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz without changing the content of the variable display of the main pattern sz, which indicates the lottery result of the special pattern. In other words, in diversifying the variable display performance of the third pattern, the main pattern sz, whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined, can perform various variable performances by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz while performing a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the variable display performance of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern can be easily and reliably made to have a rich variety of content.

In the second control example, all the main patterns sz forming the pattern row are configured to have one image data (main pattern row image data), but the present invention is not limited to this.
It is also possible to store normal main pattern row image data for generating only the pattern rows of some of the main patterns sz (e.g., normal main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9) among z (main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9), and special probability main pattern row image data for generating only the pattern rows of the remaining main patterns sz (e.g., special probability main patterns sz numbered odd), in the third pattern row area 235g, and to variably display the main patterns sz on the main pattern image layer sr using the stored image data.

In this case, for example, when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, that is, when a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using the odd-numbered main pattern sz, it is possible to change the content of the variable display using the normal main pattern row image data while executing the variable display using the variable display using the variable display main pattern row image data that is determined in advance. Specifically, the variable display using the normal main pattern row image data may be executed at a higher speed than the variable display using the variable display main pattern row image data, so that the player can only see the odd-numbered main pattern sz. This allows the player to be informed that the third pattern change this time is a state in which only the variable main pattern sz is displayed and only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, that is, a state in which the normal pattern (main pattern with an even number) is not displayed and the normal jackpot cannot be won.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main pattern sz is generated separately into normal main pattern row image data and variable probability main pattern row image data, the normal main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the normal main pattern using the normal main pattern row image data and the variable probability main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the variable probability main pattern using the variable probability main pattern row image data may be configured to be different, and depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the main pattern sz displayed in the normal main pattern image layer or the variable probability main pattern image layer (whether or not to enable (turn on) the display of each image layer). Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned first control example, it may be configured to execute variable display control using image data for each pattern unit without generating pattern row image data that forms the pattern row.

Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described with reference to FIG. 203(c). FIG. 203(c) shows the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2.
This image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when a transition to the background mode is executed, the corresponding image data is read out from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the resident video RAM 234a2.
The image data corresponding to each symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. The process of reading out the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 203(c), the character memory area 234a2 in this second control example stores at least image data SD1 of a normal sub-symbol fz (see Fig. 122(b)) that imitates a triangular mark, image data SD2 of a sub-symbol fz for preview performance that imitates bubbles, and image data SD3 of a special sub-symbol fz that imitates the number 16, as image data of the sub-symbol fz.
Although omitted in Fig. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz for the preview performance is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-symbol fz for the preview performance imitating bubbles shown in Fig. 202(c) is the sub-symbol fz used when the ocean background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of the sub-symbol fz for the preview performance imitating leaves (not shown) as the sub-symbol fz used when the mountain background is set.

Here, in this second control example, among the third patterns variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, only the sub-pattern fz that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be displayable on the sub-pattern image layer fr, and the sub-pattern fz is configured to be variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 independently of the main pattern sz variably displayed in a predetermined variability pattern (variability time, stop display position) on the main pattern image layer sr. Therefore, various variability performances using the sub-pattern fz can be easily executed without changing the variability display content of the main pattern sz. Also, when various variability performances using the sub-pattern fz are executed, a part of them is displayed as the main pattern sz.
Even if the two are displayed overlapping each other, the main pattern image layer sr is arranged to be displayed with priority over the sub-pattern image layer fr, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to view the main pattern sz.

In the second control example, the change performance using the sub-pattern fz is shown in FIG. 202(b) and FIG.
In addition to the reach line notice performance described with reference to 2(c), various other change performances can be executed. For example, a change start notice performance in which the sub-pattern fz is switched to a display mode for a notice performance using image data SD2, and when the change display of the third pattern starts, the sub-pattern fz is displayed changing in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change direction (leftward, for example) of the main pattern sz, and a jackpot type suggestion performance in which a part of the sub-pattern fz is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3, and which suggests a jackpot type according to the number and arrangement of the sub-pattern fz (sub-pattern fz modeled after the number 16) of the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the change of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stops, can be executed.

In this way, the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is different from the identification information (
By making it possible to execute various variable presentations using the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that can be variably displayed during the period in which the identification information (main pattern sz) showing the result of the special pattern lottery is variably displayed, the player can also be made to pay attention to the variably displayed sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in this second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main pattern sz, the variable display control of the sub-pattern fz is configured to be executed on a pattern basis, so that it is possible to easily execute control to switch the display mode of only a portion (for example, only the vicinity of the main pattern sz finally stopped and displayed) of the multiple sub-patterns fz formed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3 to a display mode for variable performance. Also, normally, it is possible to display the number of sub-patterns fz displayed between the main patterns sz so that there are two or more, or it is possible to prevent only some of the sub-patterns fz from being displayed.

The timing for varying the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the start timing of the special symbol variation, or the timing when the special symbol indicating a big win is stopped and displayed.

Finally, referring to Fig. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the main variable symbol in this second control example will be explained. Fig. 203(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main variable symbol. This main variable symbol is the 10th main symbol provided in the symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the reach state, and is the main symbol that uses image data DA among the main symbol display data stored in the character memory area 234a2.

Conventionally, there are machines that display a variable representation (third symbol) for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery, and when a specific symbol is displayed in a static manner, the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In this case, a variable performance is executed to induce the player to wonder whether the statically displayed symbol is the specific symbol. Here, generally, a variable performance is executed using a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of types of symbol are formed in a specific order. Specifically, a variable performance is executed using a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of symbol information (for example, main symbol sz) with the numbers 1 to 9 are formed in a specific order.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the presentation effect of the third pattern variation, a variation presentation is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern during the variable display is changed, but the identification information (
When changing the number 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, that is, the specific information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, if the number 1 to 9 attached to the identification information is changed, for example, even though the variable display is executed using nine third patterns with the numbers 1 to 9 attached, the number 5 may change during the variable display.
If you switch from a third symbol numbered 0 to a third symbol numbered 6, you get a 6.
Since the third symbol with the number "3" disappears, there is a risk that the player may become suspicious and think that the result of the special symbol lottery may have been changed during the variable display of the third symbol.

In addition, for example, a variable display is performed using nine third symbols numbered 1 to 9,
If a new third symbol with the number 6 is added midway and the display is switched to a variable display using a total of 10 third symbols, it would be necessary to execute display control to deal with the increase in the number of third symbols being displayed midway, which could make the control content more difficult.

In contrast, in this control example, each main pattern numbered 1 to 9, a change main pattern,
The pattern row Z2 is formed by 10 main patterns.
It is possible to change the display mode of the main patterns without changing the number of main patterns forming the pattern row while leaving various patterns with the number 9. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the change main patterns is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns forming the pattern row Z2 does not change, so that the display control for the pattern row Z2 can be easily executed.

As shown in FIG. 203(d), the character memory area 234a2 of the second control example stores image data DA of the normal main pattern sz with the number 4 added as image data of the change main pattern.
1, image data DA of a normal main pattern sz with the number 7, 2, V main pattern s imitating the letter V
At least image data DA3 of the special main pattern sz imitating the number 16, and image data DA4 of the unfortunate main pattern sz imitating a cross are stored.
Although omitted in FIG. 202(d), the normal main symbol sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main symbol sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main symbol sz imitating a "dugong" shown in FIG. 202(d) are main symbols sz used when the ocean background is set. Therefore, in the character memory area 234a2, a "rhinoceros" or a "wild boar" are stored as normal main symbols sz used when the mountain background is set.
Image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) that imitates the above is also stored in advance.

Here, in the variable display performance of the third symbol during normal times, the change main symbol using the image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in the symbol row Z2, and in some cases where the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or in a very small number of cases where the special symbol lottery is won,
The modified main pattern using the image data DA2 is configured to be displayed in the pattern row Z2. That is, during normal times, the modified main pattern sz, which resembles a "shark" with the number 4 attached, is displayed in a variable manner, so that the pattern row Z2 is formed by a total of 10 main patterns, including 5 main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) indicating a normal jackpot win and 5 main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win. However, when a jackpot is won by the special pattern lottery,
Alternatively, in a very small number of cases where the special pattern lottery is lost and a winning ticket is drawn, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "Dugong" with the number 7 attached thereto is displayed in a variable manner, so that a pattern row Z2 is formed with a total of 10 main patterns, including four main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) indicating a normal jackpot win and six main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a special jackpot win.

This makes the player feel hopeful that he or she may have won a jackpot (a sure-win jackpot) favorable to the player in the currently running special symbol lottery. The condition for using the main symbol sz for changing the symbol sz resembling a "Dugong" with the number 7 added should be that it is more likely to be established when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot than when it is otherwise (a miss), and it may be configured not to be used when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is more likely to be established when the special symbol lottery result is a miss than when a normal jackpot is won.
It is better to configure it so that it is easier to use when you win a special jackpot. This allows you to associate the number of main patterns (even and odd numbers) with the probability of winning a special jackpot, making it easier to understand the game.

Moreover, the V main pattern sz shown in the image data DA3 is a display mode that is not displayed under normal circumstances, and is displayed as a change main pattern when a special condition is met during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). Regardless of the type of main pattern sz that is in a reach state, this V main pattern sz is used as a general-purpose main pattern that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot win when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state. By using the general-purpose main pattern in this way, for example, even if the main pattern that becomes a combination that will result in a jackpot win passes over the effective line of the reach state, the third pattern that will result in a jackpot win can be displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win without waiting for the pattern row Z2 to go around again.
It is possible to expect the pattern (main pattern) to stop and be displayed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third symbol variable display performance, when a double reach state is reached with the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number), if the V main symbol is displayed stationary on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure it so that the main symbol that is advantageous to the player indicates that the jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to suppress the player from feeling distrustful even if the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a double reach state is reached. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as a general-purpose main symbol, but it is not limited to this. When a combination indicating a jackpot win is displayed using the V main symbol, it may be used as a duplicate jackpot suggestion symbol indicating that in addition to the jackpot game to be executed this time, at least one more jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special symbol stored in the reserved memory), or it may be configured to indicate that multiple jackpot game execution rights have been acquired simply by displaying the V main symbol in a variable manner. By configuring it in this way, when the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player can play the game with a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 and the unfortunate main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third symbol, but are changed main symbols used in the promotion performance that can be executed after the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is configured to be possible to execute an advantageous jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an unfavorable jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous jackpot game,
For example, when a probability jackpot is won, the winning of the jackpot is indicated by a combination of normal main symbols sz (main symbols sz with even numbers) that indicate that a normal jackpot game will be played. In some (or all) of the combinations, the main symbols sz
The device is configured to be capable of executing an upgrade effect for changing the type of the winning combination to a probability-changing main pattern sz (a main pattern sz having an odd number).

During this promotion performance, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss), but is used to indicate whether the currently won jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot, so the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating a guaranteed jackpot, or the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating a normal jackpot, is set as the change main pattern. In this way, by changing the display mode of the change main pattern in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player changes using the main pattern sz, a performance that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the second control example, the type of the main symbol sz stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win is promoted from the normal main symbol sz to the variable main symbol sz, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to promote the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during a jackpot game from a main symbol showing a small number of rounds to a main symbol showing a larger number of rounds than the normal main symbol sz. In this case, a plurality of image data may be prepared as the change main symbol in a display mode suggesting the number of rounds that may be played, and the display mode of the change main symbol may be determined using the corresponding image data according to the type of jackpot that has actually been won.

In this control example, the main pattern column image data of the pattern column Z2 is generated using nine main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main pattern sz, and stored in the third pattern column area 235g, but the present invention is not limited to this. The change main pattern sz may be stored in the third pattern column area 235d without being included in the main pattern column image data, and variable display control may be performed on a pattern basis in the same manner as the sub-pattern fz. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the change main pattern sz in the pattern column Z2 that has been set once can be easily changed.

In addition, a change main pattern image layer sr1 in which the change main pattern sz is displayed may be arranged separately from the main pattern image layer sr in which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the change main pattern sz may be displayed using this change main pattern image layer sr1. In this case, the change main pattern sz is displayed when
Since there is only the pattern column Z2, the display area of the change main pattern layer sr1 is set to the display area of the pattern column Z2 only, and the change main pattern layer sr1 is set to a non-priority to the main pattern layer sr and the sub-pattern layer f
It is preferable to arrange the sub-pattern fz at a position where it is displayed in priority to the sub-pattern r. This makes it possible to prevent the sub-pattern fz from hiding the main pattern sz for change, and to display the main pattern sz for change without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

The image data described above with reference to (a) to (d) of FIG. 203 is stored in the character memory area 2.
34a2 is a part of the image data showing the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz), and actually other image data is also stored. For example, each of the image data stored as the main pattern display data has a display mode (
For example, image data corresponding to a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or happy is stored, and the result of the special pattern lottery indicates a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot).
In this case, the image data is replaced to produce a stopped and displayed third pattern (main pattern sz).
The display mode can be changed.

Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a big win is displayed (when the "Dugong" with the number 7 is displayed in the normal display mode), the display is switched to a special display mode in which the "Dugong" with the number 7 has a surprised expression. This makes it possible to inform the player that he or she has won the big win by the display mode of the third symbol. In addition, the image data corresponding to this special display mode may be used for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol variation starts, and an effect may be executed to suggest to the player that the big win has been won in the special symbol lottery immediately after the third symbol variation starts.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) in this second control example
) will be explained. Figure 204 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third symbol variable display performance and the display contents of the pattern string displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In Figure 204, as an example of the third symbol variable performance, a variable pattern with a variable time of 60 seconds indicating a big win is used.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of special pattern variation, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the variation display mode of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz based on the variation pattern (command) received this time.
The variable display setting process (S41 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process of No. 13 (see FIG. 174)
13), the presence or absence of a notice performance, the presence or absence of a reach performance, and the stop symbols are determined, and the corresponding display commands are set. After that, the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 174)
In a command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174), the set display command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182), the received display command (variable pattern command) is analyzed in the variable pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in Figure 209) executed in the command judgment process (see S6302 in Figure 190) of the display control device 114, a variable display table is determined based on the analysis result, image data of the main pattern column (main pattern column image data) using the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode is read from the third pattern column area 235g, image data corresponding to the sub-pattern fz corresponding to the currently set background mode is read from the third pattern column area 235g, a display image is generated, and it is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Then, a normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation performance is executed.
This normal variation period is a period during which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, and is set as a period during which background mode transition can be executed by the player operating the frame button 22. When background mode transition is executed during this normal variation period, control is executed such that each of the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode is switched to a display mode corresponding to the background mode after the transition.

Thereafter, when the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are displayed in a stopped state and reach is reached, a reach variation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach performance is executed to suggest (tell) that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot. During this reach variation period, the system is configured so that background mode transition is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, a decorative performance is executed in which the light emission state of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Also, as part of the reach performance, an operation performance is executed in which a valid period (SW valid period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and when the frame button 22 is pressed within the set valid period,
By operating the frame button 22, an effect that would not be executed if the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a definite notification that notifies the player that the current special symbol lottery has been won, or a suggestive notification that indicates that the player has likely won the big prize, can be executed. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to quickly grasp the results of the special symbol lottery can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. In addition, since an effect that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect is provided, a player who wants to see various effects can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

As described above, the background mode transition is not executed during the reach fluctuation period, so that the background mode is switched during the reach effect that suggests (inspires) that the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, which can prevent the reach effect from being difficult for the player to understand.
Since the operation presentation is configured to be executed during the reach fluctuation period in which the background mode transition is not executed, for example, the SW effective period set in the operation presentation is not notified to the player.
Even if the game is configured to allow for the setting of a hidden operation effect, the game can encourage the player to actively operate the frame button 22.

In this case, it is preferable to set a notification mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player that the background mode transition is not being executed (for example, a comment display such as "The background mode will not change even if you press the button during a reach"), or to set a notification mode to notify the player that a hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, a comment display such as "If you press the button at any timing during a reach, a special effect will be executed"). This allows the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, the third symbol is displayed in the combination of the normal main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an even number) among the combinations of the main symbols sz indicating a jackpot win, and then a promotion effect is executed to promote the normal main symbol sz that won the jackpot to a probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot or not, and based on the result of the determination, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the display mode of the change main symbol sz among the main symbols sz are determined. Then, the promotion effect using the symbol row for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, for example, when the display mode of the change main pattern sz for the promotion effect is a display mode using image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)) and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is a display mode using image data SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal special chance main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number), many patterns indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot that is favorable to the player can be displayed, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of being promoted to a special chance jackpot with this promotion effect.

Next, referring to Fig. 205, the content of the variation performance executed in this second control example will be explained. Fig. 205 shows a performance example of the variation performance of the third pattern executed for the same variation pattern command, Fig. 202(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the variation pattern used in the performance example, Fig. 202(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the normal performance, Fig. 202(c) is a diagram showing the flow of the reach line notice performance (see Fig. 202(b)), and Fig. 202(d) is a diagram showing the flow of the notice performance in which the variation direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from normal.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set in the main control device 110, a display variation pattern command for executing reach performance is set in the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore,
In the second control example, various advance notice effects using the sub-symbols fz are executed during the period until the reach effect is executed.
Since the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be able to be changed and displayed independently, various change effects (preview effects) can be executed by changing only the change pattern of the sub-pattern fz while displaying the main pattern sz in a specific change pattern in response to a change pattern command received from the main control unit 110.

Specifically, in the performance A shown in FIG. 205(b), the pachinko machine 1 of the first control example described above
As in the case of 0, the third pattern change display (see FIG. 202(a)) in which the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are synchronized is executed, and a normal pattern is shown in which a reach state is reached. In this way, by controlling the display so as to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz, which are independently displayed in a changing manner, it is possible to make it seem as if the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a changing manner as one pattern row.

Next, in the performance B shown in Fig. 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to non-display) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the variation of the third pattern, and during that time, a reach line notice performance is executed to stop and display the variation display of the sub-pattern fz. In other words, the same display control as that of the above-mentioned 205(a) is executed for the main pattern sz, but since the main pattern layer sr is set to non-display in the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal variation period, it is configured so that the player cannot see the variation display of the main pattern sz.

Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner during the first half of the normal variable period (15 seconds) (see FIG. 202(b)), and at the end of the first half of the normal variable period (15 seconds), the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a static manner, thereby displaying the position where the main pattern sz is displayed in a static manner in the third pattern variable display (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, during the second half of the normal variable period (
When the time reaches 15 seconds, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the main pattern sz is displayed in the latter half of the normal variable period (15 seconds).
) the reach state will occur 30 seconds after the fluctuation begins.

In other words, when the performance B shown in Fig. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice performance is executed, only the position where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed can be notified to the player before the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, so it becomes possible to know in advance (15 seconds after the start of the third symbol's change) whether the current third symbol change display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach. Therefore, in the normal pattern (see Fig. 205(b)) where it takes 30 seconds to know whether it will be a reach or not, if the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz cannot be in a reach state, the period during which the player has excessive expectations can be shortened.

Also, when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in a reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining variation time while expecting which main symbol sz will be in a reach state. Note that in this second control example, when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in a reach state, it is configured to always be in a reach state, so the player can easily determine whether or not the current third symbol variation will be in a reach state at the timing of the stop display of the sub-symbol fz.

Finally, in the performance C shown in Fig. 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main pattern sz as in the above-mentioned performance A, and a performance different from the performance A is executed for the sub-pattern fz only for a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of the change. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see Fig. 203(c)) is set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz displayed at the start of the change, and a sub-pattern reverse change display is executed to change and display the sub-pattern fz in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change display direction of the main pattern (leftward), and then a change display using the normal sub-pattern fz is executed in synchronization with the change display of the main pattern sz.

As in the presentation pattern shown in Presentation C, by making the direction of change in the main pattern sz and the direction of change in the sub-pattern fz different at the timing when the third pattern change display is started, a presentation that is unexpected for the player, in other words, for a player who recognizes that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed by the same pattern row and only change and display in the same direction, the sub-pattern fz is change-displayed in an unexpected manner, thereby providing an unexpected presentation.

As explained above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be independent and variable displayable, the variable display mode of the main pattern sz is set in response to a variable pattern command set based on the lottery result of the special pattern, and various variable performances can be executed by varying only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz without varying the variable display mode of the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the variable display result of the main pattern sz to be different from the lottery result of the special pattern.

In addition, in the case where the sub-pattern fz is displayed first, for example, the sub-pattern fz may be enlarged and displayed so that the sub-pattern fz covers the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and during that time, the display position of the main pattern sz and the pattern type may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 206 to Fig. 208. Fig. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in comparison with the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the character memory area 2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is
The content of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 has been changed.
The difference is that a third symbol row area 235g is added to the third symbol row area 235g. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the character memory area 234a2 of the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 203, the image data D1 to D9 of the main pattern display data corresponding to each background mode, the image data SD1 to SD3 of the sub-pattern display data, and the image data DA1 to DA5 of the change main pattern display data are stored.
It differs from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example described above in that DA5 and the like are stored, but the image data stored therein are the same as those stored in the second control example. Note that the details of the image data newly stored in this second control example have been described above with reference to Fig. 203, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol row area 235g is a main symbol s stored in the character memory area 234a2.
This is a memory area for reading out multiple image data of the pattern string z, generating one image data (main pattern string image data) in advance as a pattern string, and storing the generated main pattern string image data. When the main pattern sz is to be variably displayed in the main pattern image layer sr, the main pattern string image data stored in this third pattern string area 235g is read out, and the display position coordinates are variably set based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table to variably display the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when variably displaying the main pattern sz can be reduced compared to when image data generated in units of main pattern sz is used,
The processing load of display control can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of an image to be displayed at that time in correspondence with an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of an image is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. The pachinko machine 10 of the second control example differs from the display data table (see FIG. 153) in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the drawing contents related to the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are different, and the rest are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 207, the drawing contents of the display data table specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This back type is back A, which corresponds to the background mode (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode") selected by the player,
The back surface type includes information for specifying whether to display one of the back surfaces A and B, or to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B. When the back surface type specifies that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, information for specifying which back surface image is to be displayed is also included.

When the MPU 231 determines that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type, it determines the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target, and determines the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, it determines the back surface image to be displayed from the back surface type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information regarding the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or
The display may indicate either the time elapsed since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the time elapsed since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...)
The display position coordinates indicating the stop position of each sub-pattern fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance are set. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop position of the sub-pattern fz in the previous variable performance. As shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main pattern sz, the sub-pattern fz is not assigned a unique number, and all the sub-patterns fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, by simply setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-pattern fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance can be easily started from the stop position of the sub-pattern fz in the previous variable performance.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, in this second control example, a plurality of display modes can be set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz, and each sub-pattern fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode by specifying the storage destination of the image data used for display in the drawing list according to the display mode of each sub-pattern fz to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the display mode of each sub-pattern fz displayed in a stopped state in the previous variable performance,
If the display mode of the sub-pattern fz used in the current variable performance is different, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be changed based on the start timing of the variable performance, i.e., the drawing information corresponding to address "0001H" in the display data table, or the variable performance may be started using the display mode of the sub-pattern fz in the previous variable performance, and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be changed during high-speed fluctuations that make it difficult for the player to see the display mode of the sub-pattern fz.

In the former case, the sub-symbol fz is displayed in the display mode used in the current variable performance before the variable performance starts, i.e., when the sub-symbol fz is stopped, so that the player can know in advance the content of the variable performance to be executed, and the performance effect can be improved. Also, in the latter case, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, so that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be changed smoothly without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main symbol sz will be described. The main symbol column (main symbol column 1, main symbol column 2, ...) is the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed.
As the symbol row type information for specifying the symbol row type, symbol row type offset information is stored.
This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each main pattern sz.
The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of z is that the display of the main pattern sz in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance and the stop pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each main pattern sz is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance or the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be displayed by the main pattern sz.
By managing the main patterns sz using the numbers assigned to them and expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each main pattern sz, the main pattern sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the main symbols sz are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. While the main symbols sz are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, the main symbols sz are not visible to the player. During that time, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main symbols sz is interrupted, the player is prevented from noticing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data of each main pattern sz displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main pattern row image data) for each pattern row. For example, for each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 attached that are variably displayed in the pattern row Z1, the main pattern sz with the number 3 attached is the head of the image data, and then the main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4" and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, by varying the display position coordinates of the main pattern row image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main patterns sz forming the pattern row Z1 are variably displayed is configured to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr. In addition, the size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main pattern image layer sr is set to a size that does not allow all images included in the main pattern row image data to be displayed, and as shown in FIG. 202(a), a maximum of three main patterns sz
is set to a size that can be displayed.

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the pattern row type offset information, the type of the main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr is specified, the display range of the main pattern row image data is determined corresponding to the position where the specified main pattern sz should be displayed, and the display of each main pattern sz is executed in that display range. In this way, when executing a variable display without changing the arrangement relationship of the main pattern sz, as in the first control example described above, image data is provided for each main pattern sz, and the pattern type of each main pattern sz to be displayed when starting the current variable performance is specified based on the offset information of the stop pattern of the main pattern sz in the previous variable performance, and then, depending on the content of the variable performance to be executed, the display control process is more easily reduced by generating pattern row image data in which multiple main patterns sz are specified in a predetermined order and with a predetermined interval, and executing the variable performance using the pattern row image data, than by synchronously setting the display position (display position coordinate) of the image data of each main pattern sz according to the content of the variable performance to be executed.

In addition, when the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main patterns sz or to change the arrangement interval of the main patterns sz, so in that case, it is better to execute display control that variably displays each main pattern sz using image data corresponding to each main pattern sz as in the first control example described above. In addition, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example may be combined to use image data in units of patterns only for a specific main pattern sz, and use main pattern row image data for multiple main patterns other than the specific main pattern. In this case, it is easy to execute control that varies the image data used and varies the degree of change in the display position (variable display speed) for a specific main pattern, and
For a plurality of main patterns sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display contents without executing special display control, the processing load of the display control when the plurality of main patterns sz are variably displayed can be reduced.

In the second control example, which generates one image data (main pattern row image data) for each pattern row, different drawing contents are set for each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (for each pattern row). For the pattern row Z2, for each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 that are displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz with the number 4 is the head of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main pattern sz are "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2
The main symbol sequence image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-symbols fz are displayed) so that the order of the symbol sequence Z3 →3 is the same as that of the main symbol sequence Z3 →3.
For each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz with the number 1 is the head of the image data, and then the number attached to the main pattern sz is "
Main pattern sequence image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-pattern fz is displayed) so that the order is 1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→9, and is stored in the third pattern sequence area 235g.

By controlling the display so that all the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed to vary leftward using the main pattern column image data corresponding to each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 configured in this way, only the main patterns sz displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed to vary in the main pattern image layer sr. As described above, for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, the main pattern sz located at the head of the main pattern column image data is displayed.
The types of z are different. As a result, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the main patterns sz numbered "3.4.1" are displayed in order from the top at the center position of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., on the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)). In other words, by configuring the numbers attached to the main patterns sz at the leading positions of each main pattern row image data to be different, in the initial state where no variable pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display a combination of main patterns sz different from the combination that results in a jackpot by simply setting the initial display so that the leading positions of the main pattern row image data forming each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are on the effective line L2, and thus it is possible to simplify the display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 208. Fig. 208 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list is the same as the drawing list in the first control example described above (see Fig. 155).
The difference is that the type of the pride for displaying the third symbol is changed, but otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in Fig. 208, for each sprite used in one frame's image, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for that sprite is described, such as the back image, sub-pattern (sub-pattern 1, sub-pattern 2, ...), main pattern row (main pattern row 1, main pattern row 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes the information for storing predetermined image data in the character ROM 2 for the image controller 237.
Transfer data information for transferring data from the video RAM 34 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

In other words, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the sub-pattern fz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and a plurality of image data SD1 to SD3 corresponding to the sub-pattern fz stored in the third pattern area 235d (FIG. 203(c)
The address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction is written from among the addresses in the main pattern sz area 235g. Also, the drawing instruction contents for the main pattern sz image include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored, and information indicating the address of the third pattern row area 235g.
An address indicating image data to be used for the current drawing instruction is written among a plurality of image data (main pattern string image data) corresponding to the main pattern string stored in.

<Regarding the control process in the second control example>
Next, the control process contents in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 209 and Fig. 210. This second control example is different from the above-mentioned first control example in that the control process contents executed by the display control device 114 are different. In addition, the type contents of the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different.
The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variable performance mode of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different, and specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, it is configured to be possible to set a display command for executing various variable performances only for the sub-symbol fz among the third symbols. However, the setting method of the display command corresponding to the variable performance is the same as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the first control example described above, and only the specific setting content is different, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the content of various variable performances executed for the sub-symbol fz executed in this second control example has been described above with reference to FIG. 205, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S6455). This variation pattern command process 2 (S6455) is executed by the voice lamp control device 1
13, and executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from
It differs from the variation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that a process is added to determine the types of the change main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz used during the current variation performance and store them in various storage areas of the resident video RAM 235. Since the other process contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same process contents and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

In the variation pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the selected variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) is analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for indicating a big win (a variation pattern command selected when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110) (S6551). Then, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is a big win variation (S655
1: Yes), then it is determined whether the current display variation pattern command includes information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance (S6552), and if it is determined that the information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance is included (S6552: Yes), a change main pattern corresponding to the command is determined as the main pattern for variation of the promotion-only pattern row, and stored in the third pattern row area, and the process proceeds to S6554. Also, if the current variation is not a big win variation in the process of S6551, or if it is determined that the promotion performance is not to be executed in the process of S6552, then it proceeds to S6554, and based on the information analyzed in the process of S6501, it is determined whether the currently received variation pattern includes information for executing a notice performance (see FIG. 205) using the sub-pattern fz, and if it is determined that the notice performance of the sub-pattern fz is to be executed (see FIG. 205), it proceeds to S6554.
09: Yes), the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in this sub-pattern preview performance is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

Then, a fluctuation display data table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is determined, a display fluctuation pattern for 0 is set, and the same S650 as the fluctuation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 of the first control example described above is executed.
Steps S6502 to S6505 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, the contents of the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rear image change command process 2. This rear image change command process 2 (S6469) determines the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) when the rear image change flag 233w is set to on for the above-mentioned rear image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)).
, and the like. The difference is in the addition of the process of storing the value in g. Since the other processes are the same, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the back image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed back image (background mode) is determined, and the third pattern area 235d, the third
Image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the symbol row area 235g (S7002).
After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (
S7051) and terminate this process.

<Modification of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be described with reference to Fig. 211. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern layer sr,
The sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern layer fr, and the display contents of the main pattern layer sr and the display contents of the sub-pattern layer fr are synchronized and controlled to display the main pattern sz
The main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are displayed in a regular, variable manner while maintaining a specific sequence, and further, by variably setting only the display control content for the sub-symbol fz, various variable presentations can be executed without varying the variable display content for the main symbol sz for showing the result of the special symbol lottery.

In contrast, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and further, a plurality of image layers (two) are provided to display (draw) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). The difference is that a special variable performance can be executed by varying the display control content of the third pattern displayed on the two image layers (third pattern image A, third pattern image B). The rest of the content is the same as in the second control example described above, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

FIG. 211(a) shows a display image layer formed on a pachinko machine 10 according to a modified example of the second control example,
These are schematic diagrams showing the relationship with the display screen, with Figure 211 (b) being a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the triple reach performance, and Figure 202 (c) being a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance.

As shown in Fig. 211(a), in the modified example of the second control example, the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are overlapped as the image layers on which the third pattern is displayed, and the third pattern image layer A is arranged in front (closer to the player's line of sight) of the third pattern image layer B. Note that, although Fig. 211(a) only shows the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, in reality, each image layer (layer) displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is overlapped.

Furthermore, by synchronizing and executing the variable display of the third pattern for the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, it is possible to execute a variable display that appears to be identical to the variable display of the third pattern shown with reference to Figure 125 (b) of the first control example described above.

In this modified example configured in this manner, as in the second control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B can be independently controlled for variable display, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B is in a single reach for "9", it is possible to continue the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A, the number of third patterns in the reach state increases, so that "Reach!
The words "Promotion Chance" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(c), the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer A is “1
When a double reach of " and "9" is achieved, it appears as a "triple reach" where three 3rd symbols are in a reach state. In this way, by displaying the 3rd symbols overlapping one another using multiple image layers, it is possible to easily execute a variable performance that requires display control to change the order of the pattern rows of each 3rd symbol when displaying the 3rd symbols in a variable manner using one image layer.
It can enhance the performance effect.

In this way, when the variable display of the third pattern is made different for multiple third pattern layers, for example, the third pattern displayed on the image layer on the priority side (third pattern image layer A) is set as the true third pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third pattern displayed on the image layer on the non-priority side (third pattern image layer B) is set as the decorative third pattern, and based on the variable pattern set based on the lottery result of the special pattern (variable pattern set by main control device 110),
The variation pattern of the third pattern of the third pattern image layer A is determined, and the voice lamp control device 113 side:
It is preferable to configure the content of the variable presentation of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B to be determined based on the determined variable pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern image layer A (based on the presence or absence of a jackpot win or the type of reach). It is also preferable to configure the content of the variable presentation of the third pattern image layer A to be different from that of the third pattern image layer B when a jackpot win has been won in the special pattern lottery than when it has not been won.

In addition, in this modified example, the change performance in which the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B are completely different has been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the change start timing may be shifted by 0.2 seconds, and then, during the high-speed change of the third pattern, a change performance in which the change display content is synchronized may be executed. In this way, by making the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B different only for a part of the change performance,
This can give the player a slight sense of discomfort, which can encourage the player to select the variable display more easily.

As explained above, in the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, various display controls are configured to be performed on each of the third patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 which are composed of patterns including a main pattern sz having identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, but patterns other than the patterns (third patterns) of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 may be provided as long as they are dynamically displayed so that the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

For example, during execution of the third pattern variation, a special pattern not included in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping with the display area of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.
In addition, the above-mentioned special pattern may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third pattern change is being executed, and may be configured so that the dynamic display of the special pattern is started while the third pattern change is being executed, or the special pattern is statically displayed or hidden while the third pattern change is being executed.

Even in this configuration, the variable display mode (variable pattern) of the main pattern sz is
It is sufficient to determine the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to set a variation pattern for the special symbol for the performance in the same way as the sub-symbol fz described above. Also, since the above-mentioned special symbol is not a symbol that the symbol string Z1 to Z3 has, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the player does not feel uncomfortable even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing or stop timing of the third symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set more than the sub-symbol fz, and the performance effect can be further improved.

In addition, the dynamic display mode of the special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third symbol described above. For example, when the dynamic display direction of the third symbol is leftward (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display direction of the third symbol (for example, rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). In this way, even if the special symbol is dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping with the display area of the third symbol variable display during the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed.

In the above example, the dynamic display direction of the special symbol is different from the dynamic display direction of the third symbol, and is the exact opposite direction. However, it is sufficient if the dynamic display directions are different. For example,
Instead of the left-right direction, the direction may be vertical (the direction of moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), front-rear (the direction of moving from the back side to the front side, or from the front side to the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), or diagonal (the direction of moving diagonally by shifting the moving line indicating the moving direction at an angle of less than 90 degrees). Furthermore, in the above example, in order to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change, a pattern in which the dynamic display direction of the third pattern and the dynamic display direction of the special pattern are different has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the size of the dynamically displayed third pattern and the size of the special pattern may be different to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change. Furthermore, the display may be configured so that a dynamic display of a special pattern is executed before the third pattern change is executed, or so that a dynamic display of a special pattern is executed after the third pattern change is displayed stationary (including a display state in which the pattern fluctuates to an extent that is difficult for the player to distinguish).

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above example, in order to notify in an incomprehensible manner that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed during the third symbol variation, the dynamic display direction and size of each symbol (third symbol, special symbol) may be configured to be the same. By configuring in this way, unless the player pays attention to the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player cannot grasp that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed, so that the player who wants to know that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed can continue to be interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

As mentioned above, the special symbol does not have to be displayed all the time, unlike the third symbol.
Instead of showing the result of the lottery for the special symbol according to the display mode when the symbol is stopped like the third symbol, for example, the dynamic display of the special symbol may be started to notify the player that the lottery result for the special symbol is highly likely to be a big win. In this way, by varying the timing (dynamic display start timing, stop display timing) at which information for showing the lottery result for the special symbol is provided according to the type of dynamically displayed symbol, the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied according to the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when a special pattern is used that indicates a high possibility of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting the dynamic display in this manner, it is preferable to configure the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to display at least a part of the special pattern as a standby display mode that suggests that the dynamic display will be executed. For example, when a special pattern in a display mode of a school of fish is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the display screen to display only the fish that are displayed near the front of the special pattern in the direction of movement. By configuring the special pattern in this manner, it is possible to have the player play while hoping that the dynamic display of the special pattern will start. In this case,
It is preferable to configure the display mode showing the special symbol to be partially, not entirely, displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to suppress the misconception that the special symbol is already being dynamically displayed when the special symbol is displayed as a standby display mode.

In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz forming the third pattern are configured to be displayed on different image layers, and the display control content executed for each image layer is made different to make the variable display mode of the main pattern sz and the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz different. In addition to this, for example, a first sub-pattern image layer and a second sub-pattern image layer may be provided as image layers capable of displaying the sub-pattern fz, and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern image layer and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern image layer may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
It may be configured so that only one of them is displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that the display positions of the sub-patterns fz displayed on a plurality of display layers are made different, and then the reach line notice performance shown in Fig. 202(b) is executed, so that the position where the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed is further limited.

In the second control example described above, one symbol (main symbol s
Although the display image layers for displaying the main pattern sz) and the other pattern (sub-pattern fz) are different, and display control can be executed for each display image layer, various variable effects can be executed, but as long as different display controls can be executed for the types of patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that form the pattern row of the third pattern variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, they may be displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, when the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, it is necessary to specify in advance which display object is to be displayed, which complicates the display control process, but it is possible to achieve the same effect as each effect described in the second control example above.

Furthermore, even when a configuration is used in which the results of multiple display controls are displayed on the same display layer, the various display control processes described in the above-mentioned second control example may be executed for various patterns including patterns other than the multiple pattern types (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that make up pattern columns Z1 to Z3, i.e., patterns other than the third pattern that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the changing display of the special pattern (for example, decorative patterns that are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period during the special pattern change to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a specific result (a jackpot win)).

In the above-mentioned second control example, when the background mode transition performance is executed as the operation performance, the display mode of the main pattern sz is switched to the display mode corresponding to the switched background mode, but when the background mode transition performance is executed, not only the display mode of the main pattern sz but also the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as the image data of the sub-pattern fz stored in the character memory area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the switched background mode is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the result of the special pattern lottery being executed is determined, and the sub-pattern f displayed after the background mode switching is determined based on the determination result.
The type of z may be determined. Specifically, a display mode imitating the number 16 or a display mode imitating "V" may be provided as a type of sub-pattern fz that is more likely to be determined when the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a big win than when the result is not a big win. By configuring in this way, the background mode transition effect is executed and the background mode is switched, making it easier to predict the result of the special pattern lottery before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be made to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win may be changed depending on the combination of the background mode set and the type of sub-symbol fz displayed. For example, when the type of sub-symbol fz (display mode for the sea mode) normally used in the first presentation mode (sea mode) is used in the second presentation mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that the special symbol lottery being executed is highly likely to be a big win. In this way, by executing a presentation combining the background mode and the type of sub-symbol fz, the sub-symbol fz may be displayed in a manner that the possibility of the sub-symbol fz being displayed may be increased.
A variety of effects can be implemented without increasing the number of types of z.

In addition, in this control example, when a background mode transition performance is executed as an operation performance, a process is executed to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). In addition, the effective lines L1 to L5 (
The number and positions of the parts (see FIG. 122(a)) may be changed.

Furthermore, the reach line notice performance shown in FIG. 202(a) and (b) is executed, and the sub-pattern f
When the background mode transition effect is executed with z stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(b)), the stopped display position of the main pattern sz notified in the reach line preview effect may be made variable. In this case, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be made more variable if the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than if the result is anything other than a jackpot win, or conversely, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be made more variable if the result is anything other than a jackpot win than if the result is a jackpot win.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to Figs. 212 to 222. In the first control example described above, the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big win game is
A specific area (V gate 65v) is formed within the jackpot, and when a game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during a jackpot game, a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 120, the balls that enter the large winning hole 65a, which is wide (opening width 50 mm), are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and are then collected in one place using the second flow path 65e2.
However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above, a winning ball from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), i.e., a ball shot by a left-handed play, flows down the left side area and then wins in the variable winning device 65, and a winning ball from the right side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the fifth flow path 65e1) flows down the left side area and then wins in the variable winning device 65.
In the case where a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the upstream side of the flow path 65e5, that is, a ball shot by a right-hand shot game flows down the right-hand area and then enters the variable winning device 65, the timing at which the ball can reach the V-gate 65 is different from the timing at which the ball enters the variable winning device 65. Therefore, when a sure-variable jackpot game is executed, the ball is passed through the fourth flow path 65e so that the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 can reach the V-gate 65v, regardless of whether the game is played by a left-hand shot game or a right-hand shot game.
It was necessary to keep the switching valve 65y in a position where 4 could flow down for a long period of time. In addition, since the period during which the ball that won the variable winning device 65 could pass through the V gate 65v was set long, the length of the period (V effective period) during which the ball passing through the V gate 65v (specific area) was effectively determined had to be set long, which caused a problem that it became difficult to discover fraudulent acts during a big win game, that is, acts of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) by fraudulent play.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is configured so that the time period until the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area is almost the same in the case where the ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and enters the variable winning device 65, and the case where the ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and enters the variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V effective period) during which the ball passage into the specific area is effectively determined, and it is possible to easily discover fraudulent acts during a jackpot game, that is, the act of passing a ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) by fraudulent play.

As described above, the third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration within the variable winning device 65 has been changed and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided within the variable winning device 65 has been changed, but the rest of the content is the same. The same reference numerals are used for the same content and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. As shown in Fig. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (
119) in that the arrangement of the nail members planted in the lower area of the electric role 640 is different.
In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the pegs are planted so that the balls flowing down the left side area or the balls flowing down the right side area can win evenly in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, whereas the pegs are planted so that the balls flowing down the left side area can win on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the balls flowing down the right side area can win on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.
A plurality of nail members are planted in a V-shape below the base.

In other words, in this third control example, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width is provided so that both balls flowing down the left side area by left-handed play and balls flowing down the right side area by right-handed play can win, and an electric device 6 is provided above the center of the variable winning device 65 as a winning inhibition member in order to prevent balls from winning near the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction.
Further, a plurality of nail members are provided in a V-shape as guide members for guiding the winning ball near both ends of the specific winning hole 65a in the opening width direction.

By configuring in this way, whether the player hits the ball from the right or left during a big win, the ball can be promoted to enter the vicinity of both ends of the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the opening width direction. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG.
The variable winning device 65 of this third control example is configured so that its internal structure is symmetrical (symmetrical when looking at the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction), and by making the winning position of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a a symmetrical position, it is possible to reduce the possibility of errors in the period until a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each area (e.g., a specific area) within the variable winning device 65.

Next, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Fig. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning hole 65a, and Fig. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the specific winning hole 65a.
This is a schematic diagram showing the path taken by a winning ball.

The variable winning device 65 of the third control example also has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (
120), the ball received by the opening and closing door 65b, which is in the open state during the big win game state, is guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 6
5a1 or the second opening 65a2.
The balls that flow down the opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213(b)), and a payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls.
The ball that flows down a2 passes through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see Figure 213 (b)), and payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in this third control example, the balls are difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a from near the center, so that the balls received through the open door 65b can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 from increasing, which would cause ball clogging, and also to prevent the specific winning opening 65a from being blocked.
This can prevent a situation in which a winning ball is not paid out even though the winning ball has been won at a (the ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2).

As shown in FIG. 213(b), the variable winning device 65 of the third control example has a specific winning port 65, unlike the variable winning device 65 used in the first embodiment (see FIG. 120(b)).
The major difference is that the path along which a ball that has entered a (a ball that has passed through ball detection sensor 65s1 or ball detection sensor 65s2) is guided to the outlet 65 is configured symmetrically.

First, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is disposed), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. Note that the time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be approximately 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball detection sensor 65s2
The balls that have passed through the second flow path 65r2 flow down toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in Fig. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes so as to block the flow path in which it is disposed), the balls flow down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and are guided to the second outlet 65h2. The time (tb) required for the balls to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be about 2 seconds, the same as the above-mentioned time ta.

In other words, in this third control example, a ball that wins near the left end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the left and passes through the first opening 65a1, and a ball that wins near the right end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the right and passes through the second opening 65a2, are both configured to reach the switching valve 65y after passing through the same flow time at the same position.

When the switching valve 65y is closed (submerged so that the ball can pass through the flow path in which the V-gate 65V is disposed), as shown in Fig. 214, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65r1 passes through the submerged switching valve 65y (shown by a dotted line in Fig. 214), passes through the first V-gate 65v1, and flows into the third outlet 65h3. The ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65r2 also passes through the submerged switching valve 65y, passes through the second V-gate 65V2, and flows into the fourth outlet 65h4.

In the third control example, the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 (the ball detection sensors 65s1, 6
When the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y switches from a closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to an open state (see FIG. 214), so that the time required for the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open (approximately 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time (approximately 2 seconds) taken for the predetermined number of balls to pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 and reach the switching valve 65y. Therefore, the predetermined number of balls described above are directly introduced into the V-gate 6
Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is opened, the balls can be reliably caused to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for convenience of explanation, it is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214. Therefore, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is of course the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and the explanation thereof is omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this third control example will be described with reference to Figs. 215 and 216. This third control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the contents of the jackpot control executed during jackpot play are different, and the various processing contents based on these differences are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted. Specifically, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed.
2. The difference is that the contents of the RAM 223 included in the memory 221 are partially changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same.

Referring now to FIG. 215, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example
The configuration of the RAM 203 of the MP of the main control device 110 will be described.
215 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the U201. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 of the third control example has the same configuration as the RAM 203 of the first control example described above (FIG. 1
39(b) in that a V period timer 203ca is added, and otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v).
When the condition for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) is met, a predetermined time (5 seconds) is set. Then, the jackpot update process (
220), the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated, and when the V period has elapsed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state.

In the third control example, in a round game of a specific round number (first round) during a probability variable jackpot game, the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a (the ball detection sensor 65s
When it is determined that the number of balls detected by valves 65s1, 65s2 is a predetermined number (2), a V condition is established that allows the balls to pass into a specific area (V gate 65v), and the switching valve 65y is switched to an open state for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds).

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not controlled based on the time elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, but is controlled based on the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot game is being played normally during the jackpot game, the open state period of the switching valve 65y ends during the period in which the ball could not enter the variable winning device 65, and the ball falls into the specific area (V
This can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the object cannot be passed through the gate 65v.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the period (about 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is satisfied is shorter than the period (about 2 seconds) required for the ball that has satisfied the V condition to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state, i.e., the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the specified number (2 balls) to reach the switching valve 65y, so that at least the ball that has satisfied the V condition can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably pass the ball through the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the V condition is satisfied and the state in which the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state is continued for a predetermined period (5 seconds). That is, the end condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the period lapse end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a V passage end condition that is satisfied when a ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) may be set, or when the end condition of the V round game (first round round game) is satisfied, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end condition of the V round game was satisfied (for example, when a ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the V round exits any of the outlets 6
A round end condition may be set such that the round end condition is satisfied when the time required for the round end to reach 5h has elapsed (4 seconds). In this manner, various end conditions may be set, and the switching valve 65y may be configured to switch from the open state to the closed state when any one of the end conditions is satisfied first.
Since the period during which the switching valve 65y is open can be made as short as possible, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific area (V-gate 65v) unnecessarily, and therefore it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor provided in the V-gate 65v and the ball detection sensor will be physically destroyed.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example
The contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described below. Fig. 216 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in Fig. 216, the RAM 223 of the third control example is
The difference is that a V timer 223ca is added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the control example (see FIG. 144(b)), but the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) (period during which the ball can win a prize) is set, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V period command set by the main control device 110 when the period during which the ball can win a prize is reached, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. The value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when the predetermined period has elapsed), an emphasized guidance announcement that emphasizes the guidance for the V prize is executed.

That is, the period during which the V-winning is possible is set to a maximum of 5 seconds, whereas the emphasis guide notification is configured to be executed when 3 seconds have elapsed since the period during which the V-winning is possible is set. Here, as described above, normally, the ball that has satisfied the V condition is configured to be a V-winning ball as it is, and the time required for the ball that has satisfied the V condition to be a V-winning ball is configured to be about 2 seconds. That is, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is considered that the ball that has satisfied the V condition has not been a V-winning ball. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for a V-winning ball by using an additional ball, the emphasis guide notification is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to win a V-winning ball due to the game contents of the player, even though the period during which the V-winning is possible is set.

In this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed based on the elapsed time from when the V condition is satisfied. However, the emphasis guide notification may be executed based on the elapsed time from when the V condition is satisfied. For example, the emphasis guide notification may be executed based on the elapsed time from when the V condition is satisfied.
3(b) ... (3 (b (b. In addition, in this control example, when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to open state does not pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), the above-mentioned emphasis guide notification is executed, but instead of this, it may be configured to execute an abnormality notification to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, ball clogging) has occurred in the flow path in the variable winning device 65))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) (b. Also, in this

In this control example, the winning of the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) is detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2.
When s2 is detected, switching control is executed to immediately switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. In this case, the ball (the first winning ball) that entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) is guided to the switching valve 65y in the open state and enters the specific area (
In some cases, the ball may pass through the V-gate 65V. Therefore, when a predetermined number of winning balls (the second winning ball) is detected, a waiting time (about 1.5 seconds) may be set in consideration of the time (about 2 seconds) required for the second winning ball to reach the switching valve 65y, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state after the waiting time has elapsed. This makes it easier to pass only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state into the specific area (the V-gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during one jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Even if multiple balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, the privilege given to the player (provision of a high probability state of a special symbol) is not changed.
In addition, for example, when using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the bonus given to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, by setting the above-mentioned waiting time, it is possible to prevent excessive balls from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, when using a pachinko machine 10 in which the contents of the privilege given to the player are changed according to the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, for example, the number of winnings (V
It is advisable to vary the winning condition, the waiting time from when the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state enters the variable winning device 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state, or the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V end condition).

Specifically, in order to make it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, which is advantageous for the player, it is advisable to set a small number of balls as the V winning condition. This shortens the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the V winning condition is met, so that a long jackpot game can be executed while the V winning condition is met, making it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). The waiting time may also be shortened. This allows the balls that entered the variable winning device 65 before the ball that met the V winning condition (first flow path 65r1, second flow path 65r2,
It is possible to make it possible for the ball flowing down r2 to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, the V end condition may be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring in this way, when a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the player can be motivated to play in order to pass as many balls as possible through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, a large number of balls may be set as the V winning condition, a longer waiting time may be set, the V ending condition may be set to be met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V), or a time lapse that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) (for example,
It would be a good idea to set the condition to be met after 0.1 seconds have elapsed.

By configuring in this manner, the expectation that the ball will pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game can be made to differ greatly depending on the type of jackpot game being executed.
Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a normal flow path and a special flow path that can make the balls flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter time than the normal flow path as the ball flow path in the variable winning device 65. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a delaying means (e.g., a crane) in the special flow path that delays the flow of the balls, so that the balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a chain than the balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, if the timing when the switching valve 65y opens coincides with the timing when the balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to make it easier for many balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V).Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to allow the player to select whether the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path or the special flow path, and for example, it is preferable to configure it so that when a left-handed play is performed, the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are more likely to flow down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when a right-handed play is performed, the balls are more likely to flow down the special flow path than the normal flow path.Also, in this case, if a third ball is thrown during a jackpot game,
It is preferable to use the display surface of the pattern display device to execute a game guide display that informs the player that a left-handed game is a stable game in which it is easy to pass one ball into the specific area (V gate 65V) and that a right-handed game is a challenge game in which it is difficult to pass a ball into the specific area (V gate 65V) but a large number of balls can pass into the specific area (V gate 65V) if the timing is right. Also, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing whether a left-handed game or a right-handed game was executed in past jackpot games, specifically, for determining which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected more balls during the jackpot game, and for determining the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and storing the result, and for executing a history display that displays the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (the number of balls passing into the specific area (V gate 65V)) as a past history.

This allows the player to enjoy the fun of selecting a game method to be executed during a big win game. In the above control example, the bonus granted when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high probability state of a special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may be granted a right to a lottery that is likely to result in a lottery that is advantageous to the player, or a second big win game different from the big win game may be granted. In this case, it is preferable to provide a grant right storage means that can store the rights to which the above-mentioned bonus is granted up to a predetermined number. This makes it possible to reliably grant a bonus under the condition of a predetermined number, even if multiple grant rights are acquired in a short period of time. In addition, in this control example, the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during a big win game is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is other than a big win in the lottery of a special pattern, a small win that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is set, and the variable winning device 65 is opened during a small win game that is executed when a small win is won.
The above-mentioned configuration may be used for the ball that enters the winning slot. In addition, the above-mentioned configuration may be used for the variable ball entry means (e.g., the electric device 640) that allows the ball to enter the winning slot in a winning game that is executed when a winning regular symbol is selected.

In addition, in this control example, all balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V).
A distributor may be provided so that some of the balls that have passed through the gate 65y can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In this control example, a changeover valve 65y that switches the flow path through which the balls flow down among the multiple flow paths is used as a changeover means that can change between a first state in which it is easy to pass the balls to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult to pass the balls. However, the configuration of the changeover means is not limited to this, and for example, the changeover means may be configured to be changeable between a retention position in which the balls are retained for a predetermined period of time and an open position in which they are not retained, and by retaining the balls for a predetermined period of time, the specific area (V gate 65V) can be changed.
The ball is passed through a specific area (V gate 65V) within a period that effectively determines the passage of the ball into the specific area (V gate 65V).
In addition, a variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65 to facilitate the passage of the winning ball to the next winning ball.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process contents of the main control device in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 217 to Fig. 220. In this third control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the big win control process (see S1804 in Fig. 168) is replaced with the big win control process 4 (S185 in Fig. 217).
4) is replaced with the prize winning process 4 (see S1911 in FIG. 171)
1953) is executed, but otherwise it is the same. The same control processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the big win control process 4 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win control process 4 (S1854). In this big win control process 4 (S1854), the above-mentioned big win control process (FIG. 16) is executed.
8 (see S1804), the control contents executed at the start of the jackpot and the control contents executed when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game are changed, and further,
The difference is that the control contents for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca during a big win game have been added. The other contents are the same. The same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the big win control process 4 (S1854) is executed, first, the big win start flag 203
It is determined whether j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1901: Yes), then an opening command is set (S1902).
Then, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played (whether or not the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904). If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently being played (S1904: No),
o), and then this process ends.

In the processing of S1904, if it is determined that a jackpot is being played (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to be opened (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1952), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), the jackpot control process of the first control example described above (S in FIG. 168) is performed.
The same processes of S1907 to S1910 as those of S1804 are executed, and the process is terminated. Also, in the process of S1909, if it is determined that the timing for the big win has not ended (
S1909: No), execute the winning process 4 (S1953), and then execute the abnormality process (
S1912), then a jackpot update process is executed (S1954), and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) is executed in the big win control process 4.
The contents of the winning process 4 will be explained with reference to FIG.
This is a flowchart showing the contents of (S1953). This winning process 4 (S1953) is different from the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) in that the control process contents during the V round (one round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and the detailed description of the contents is omitted.

When the winning process 4 (S1953) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2204 as the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) are executed, and when the process of S2204 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S2202 that the ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a (S2202: No), the V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round of round play (V round play) is executed, a process for controlling the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y is executed.

After the V round process (S2251) is completed, the above-mentioned prize winning process (S1 in FIG. 171) is started.
The process then proceeds to S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221, which are the same as in the process in FIG.

Next, the V round process (
The contents of the V round process (S2251) will be described with reference to Fig. 219. Fig. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V round process (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current round is the first round (V round) (S2401). If it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S2402),
On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round is one (S2401: Yes), the process is terminated. Next, whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2" or not, that is, whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 during the first round of play is "
If it is determined that the number is "2" (S2402: Y),
es), sets the V solenoid 209a to ON (S2403), sets a V period command indicating the period during which a V win is possible (the period during which the ball can be guided to the specific area (V gate 65V)) (S2404), and sets a value corresponding to 5 seconds to the V period timer 203ca (S2405).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2402 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this control example, when the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a specific round of play that is executed during a big win game meets a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls becomes two), a control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to an open state so that the balls can easily pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v).
During a big win game, when no ball has entered the variable winning device 65, the switching valve 65y
It is possible to suppress the switching to the open state.

In this control example, the switching valve 65 is turned on only in a specific round (first round) during a big win game.
However, without being limited to this, a plurality of rounds may be set as V rounds that can switch the switching valve 65y to an open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of a newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the determined number of rounds is a V round.

When a V round is determined, the state of the switching valve 65y may be controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during the V round. In this case, the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) may be different for each of the multiple V rounds.

Also, when a V-round game is being played, a notification means may be provided that notifies the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game contents until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met, and for example, when a V-round game is started, a V-round notification indicating that the current round game is a V-round and a required number of wins notification indicating the number of wins required until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met may be executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game by trying to pass the ball through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954) will be described with reference to Fig. 220. Fig. 220 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954). In this jackpot update process (S1954), a process for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca set during the jackpot game is executed.

When the big win update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, that is, whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1961: No), this process is terminated.
In the processing of 1961, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the timing to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1964).
A command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example will be described with reference to Figs. 221 and 222. In the third control example, in comparison with the first control example described above,
Instead of the big win related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), the big win related process 4 (see S4218 in FIG. 221) is executed.
174) and executes performance update process 4 (see S4151 in FIG. 222) instead of performance update process (see S4111 in FIG. 174), but otherwise is the same. The same control process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the big win related process 4 (S4258) will be described with reference to Fig. 221. This big win related process 4 (S4258) is different from the big win related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that it adds a control process content that is executed when a V period command is received from the main control device 110, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

When the big win-related process 4 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as those of the big win-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751).
When it is determined that the V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), the V timer 223c
A value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to a, and this process ends.

Also, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the V period command has not been received (
S4751: No), and then the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180)
Then, the same processes of S4714 to S1715 are executed, and the process ends.

Next, the contents of the performance update process 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 4. In this effect update process 4, a process of updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during a big win game and a process of updating the value of the V timer 223ca
and a process for setting a presentation mode when the value of the parameter becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the performance update process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402).
), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

When it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5
403: Yes), then it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to on (S5404). In other words, if a V notification effect is being executed during the currently executing jackpot game, a display command is set to highlight the V winning notification (S5405), and the number of updates for various other counters and timers is executed, and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this third control example, the variable winning device 65 is arranged at a place where a winning can be achieved whether the ball is played with a right hand or a left hand, and further, regardless of which playing method is used to shoot the ball, the time from when the ball wins to when it reaches the switching valve 65y is not significantly different. Therefore, during a big win game, the time period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) is not set unnecessarily long, and the big win game can be played smoothly. In addition, by shortening the V effective period, it is easier to monitor the act of passing the ball through the specific area by fraudulent play.

In addition, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is performed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, the balls can be prevented from being jammed in the variable winning device 65y due to ball jamming or the like that occurs during a big win game.
In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured for each game round, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is kept open for a predetermined period within the game round.
However, without being limited to this, the control may be configured to execute control to switch valve 65y to the open state when the cumulative value of the number of winning prizes since the start of a jackpot game, the cumulative value of the number of winning prizes since a predetermined measurement condition is met during a jackpot game, or the cumulative value of the number of winning prizes in multiple jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result.

In addition, the maximum length of time during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state does not need to be limited to the period until the end of a round of play, but may be configured so that the switching valve 65y continues to be in the open state, for example, spanning over to the next round of play to be executed.

In the third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y is
Both the V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2 are configured to be closed, but this is not limited thereto, and two switching valves 65y are provided to close each V gate. For example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the first V gate 65V1 is opened, and when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winning balls,
It may be configured so that only the switching valve covering the second V-gate 65V2 is opened. This makes it possible to reduce the range of switching valves that are opened, thereby eliminating unnecessary V-gate 65V
It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 223 to 231. In contrast to the first control example described above, the fourth control example has a ROM2 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.
02, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 has been changed, and the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113
The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed.
The difference is that a part of the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the first embodiment is changed. Other contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after the end of a jackpot game, it was possible to set a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) as an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. If the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the end of a jackpot game reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the end of a jackpot game reaches 100.
The time-saving state was configured to continue until it was executed 00 times.

In other words, in the above-mentioned first control example, no matter which advantageous game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous game state is configured to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. And, when the advantageous game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the period until the advantageous game state ends, that is, the period until the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, is notified to the player (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the player can be made to understand the period until an unfavorable game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, not the period until the currently set advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (e.g., high probability state) ends, that is, the period until the high probability state ends and the time-saving state ends, the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player will continue can be made to be known in advance, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the period during which the more advantageous high probability state among the multiple advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) will continue is predetermined to be the period during which 50 special pattern lotteries are executed, and during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 50 special pattern lotteries, a suggestion effect can be executed that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state (see Figure 128 (b)).
This allows the pachinko machine 10, which notifies the player of the period until the next unfavorable game state is set when a favorable game state is set, to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which of a plurality of favorable game states the currently set game state is.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, after the big win game ends, the game enters a probability change state (
When the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol are set, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, and when the falling lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the high probability state to the time-saving state. In other words, in the above-mentioned first control example, when the high probability state is set, the high probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, but in this fourth control example, if the falling lottery is won before the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, the high probability state is configured to end at that point.

By configuring it in this manner, even if the player understands that a special probability state has been set by the suggestive performance executed during the period in which a favorable game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the special probability state will continue, thereby making it possible for the player to pay closer attention to the content of the suggestive performance being executed.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, the suggestion effect executed during the period in which a favorable game state is set is configured to not only suggest the currently set game state, but also to suggest the timing at which the special state has ended due to winning the fall-out lottery.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state can be executed, and is different in that a configuration for executing the falling lottery is added.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223.
223 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 of this fourth control example is different from the ROM 202 of the first control example (see FIG. 139(a)) in that the contents of the big win type selection table 202d have been partially changed and a new drop lottery table 202da has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are as follows:
The same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the contents of the big win type selection table 202d will be described, focusing mainly on the differences from the first control example. In the fourth control example, the second special symbol (special symbol 2
The content of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the jackpot is different, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224(a). The value set in the time-saving counter 203h depends on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot selected, i.e.,
The period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is configured to be different.
The length of time that the advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is set after the end of a big win game can be varied. Therefore, when an advantageous game state is set after the end of a big win game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of time that the advantageous game state will continue. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification effect that notifies the player of the period that the advantageous game state will continue (the remaining period until the disadvantageous game state is set).

Here, referring to Fig. 224(a), the contents of the special pattern 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd, which is referred to in order to select the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) in this control example, will be explained. Fig. 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special pattern 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in Fig. 224(a), the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 specifies jackpot types that have different values of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter c2 and the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the length of time that the advantageous game state (probability change state or time-saving state) that is set after the jackpot game ends is made different depending on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, as the big win type, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to
If the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the range is "50.29".
" is in a probability variable state, "100" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h,
The first obtained "big win C" that can set "50" as the value of the probability change counter 203i
When the value of the winning type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 69", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time-saving state, "100" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and when it is in the high probability state, "90" is set as the value of the high probability state counter 203i, which can be set to "50". When the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time-saving state, "100" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and when it is in the high probability state, "50" is set as the value of the high probability state counter 203i, which can be set to "100".
When the probability of a bonus state is reached, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100," and a "big win D" is defined in which the value of the probability of a bonus state counter 203i can be set to "50."

In addition, the contents of the round game executed corresponding to each jackpot type, the explanation of the value set in the probability change counter 203i stipulated in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as those in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202d2 described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the duration of the time-saving state is varied depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the game state when the jackpot is won.
For example, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, if the jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and if it is in the probability variable state, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "90". Therefore, after the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot D is selected ends, it is determined whether the game state at the time of the previous jackpot win was in the probability variable state or not, depending on the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.
This allows the player to understand whether or not the time-saving state has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and in which a notification effect is executed that can notify only that an advantageous game state is set without specifically notifying the currently set game state, if a jackpot is won during an advantageous game state, the player can later ascertain in which game state the jackpot was won. Therefore, future games can be predicted based on past game results, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied depending on the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a different value is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining time notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game may be made common (for example, displaying "70"), and when the number of times that the special pattern lottery has been executed during the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining time notification mode may be variably displayed in accordance with the actual value of the time-saving counter 203h.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to grasp the game state that was set at the time of the previous big win after a predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the big win game.
Therefore, during an advantageous gaming state, the player can be allowed to simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot and a game for grasping the gaming state previously set, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous gaming state.

In addition, in this control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is changed according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (a mode that notifies the player of the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game.
The game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be suggested at other times as long as the timing allows the player to grasp the game state after the fact, for example, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be notified to the player by a jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. In this case, a presentation may be executed that directly notifies the player of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, or a presentation may be executed that suggests the duration of the advantageous game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Returning to FIG. 223, the explanation will be continued. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which the judgment value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 described later is stored. The fall lottery counter Cd1 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of the start winning)
When the value of 1 matches any of the judgment values defined in the fall lottery table 202da, the reel is set to transition to a low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the fall lottery table 202da specifies two judgment values, "0, 1", as judgment values that are judged as a fall in the special pattern probability variable state. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Among the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are judged as a fall, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a low probability state of the special pattern) in the special pattern probability variable state is 1/500.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202da in this control example, only the judgment value for judging whether or not a fall occurs in the special symbol probability state (judgment value for the special symbol probability state) is specified, and the judgment value for the special symbol low probability state is not specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to judge whether or not to move to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state is already in place.

In this control example, the fall lottery table 202da is compared with the fall lottery counter Cd1, which is updated periodically, to determine whether or not to transition (fall) from the special symbol probability state to the special symbol low probability state. That is, the timing of transition from the probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous game states, to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), which is one of the advantageous game states but is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability state, can be made random. Therefore, the player can play while expecting the probability state to continue as long as possible.

In this control example, after the big win game ends, the maximum duration of the high probability state of the special pattern (
50 times) is determined by the value of the probability variation counter 203i, and the maximum duration (50
The high probability state of normal symbols continues for a longer period than the normal symbol state.
Based on the result of the drop lottery, no matter when the high probability state of the special symbol shifts (falls) to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the game state shifts from the probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) to the time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), so the player cannot know the timing of winning the drop lottery based on the frequency of playing the normal symbol winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, during an advantageous game state (high probability state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is a sure-win state or a time-saving state, so the player can be interested in the contents of the suggestive effects that retroactively suggest the game state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol will transition (fall) to a low probability state of a special symbol is selected (determined), but whether or not a transition to another state will occur may be selected (determined). For example, whether or not a high probability state of a normal symbol will transition to a low probability state of a normal symbol may be determined by a selection executed for each change. This allows the duration of the advantageous game state to be random, so that the player can play the game hoping that the advantageous game state will continue for each change. Also, for example, whether or not a low probability state of a special symbol will transition to a high probability state of a special symbol may be selected by a selection.

Furthermore, in this control example, the above-mentioned falling lottery is configured to be executed every time a special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the ease of execution of the falling lottery may be made different depending on the type of special symbol for which the special symbol lottery is executed, and for example, it may be configured so that the falling lottery is executed more easily when the second special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from transitioning to a low probability state due to the falling lottery executed based on the first special symbol lottery, making it difficult for the player to play advantageously.

Also, a number of times determining means for determining the number of times the falling lottery is executed at the timing of execution of the falling lottery may be provided, and the number of times the falling lottery is executed when the execution trigger of the falling lottery is established may be configured to be different. In this case, it is preferable to design the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determining means to be "0 to 5", and the average value to be 1 time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to separate the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed from the number of times the falling lottery is executed, so that it is more difficult to understand at what timing the high probability state of the special symbol transitions to the low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggesting means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the number of times determining means (the number of times the falling lottery is executed), and to suggest to the player a period in which it is easy to fall (a period in which multiple times are determined by the number of times determining means) and a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times are determined by the number of times determining means). As a result, it is possible to play while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the suggestion contents by the suggesting means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of a special pattern lottery is used as the trigger for executing the fall-down lottery, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the fall-down lottery may be configured to be executed when a normal pattern lottery is executed, or the fall-down lottery may be configured to be executed when a ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example
The contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the memory 221 will be described. As described above, the fourth control example differs from the first control example in that it has a fall lottery function. Also, the various performance contents set by the voice lamp control device 113 are different in that they are configured to be able to execute performances based on the results of the fall lottery. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the RA of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of M223.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG.
14(a), in the fourth control example, in place of the button operation time performance selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), a button operation time performance selection 2 table 2
The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the button operation time performance selection 2 table 222df will be described with reference to Fig. 226(a). Fig. 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the button operation time performance selection 2 table 222df. As shown in Fig. 226(a), the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the data table referred to when the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game is changed from the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see Fig. 149) to the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2, and the rest is the same.

Here, the contents stipulated in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(b).
This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability change state selection table 2.
22df2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a performance mode to be executed as an operation performance when a high probability state is set after the end of a big win game, similar to the above-mentioned high probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149).
2 (see FIG. 149), it differs in that the result of the fall lottery has been added to the factors for selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation, that presentation modes that can suggest information based on the result of the fall lottery can be selected, and that the selection ratio of each presentation mode has been partially changed. The rest of the content is the same, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

The probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 includes the probability change state selection table 223f2 described above.
(See FIG. 149) , the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means),
In addition to the operation method and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, the performance mode executed as the operation performance is specified in accordance with the setting state of the short fall flag 223da, which is set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later.
This is a flag to indicate that the duration of the special state was a specified period (for example, the number of special pattern draws was 20 or less) due to winning the fall-out lottery, and is set to on if the special state ends in a short period of time.

In the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2, the area that is referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF includes the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 1).
The details of the area to be referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to ON will be specifically described below.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to ON, the operation method is "normal push" during the first period (the period when the number of special chart changes is 1 to 20) in which the operation timing is a high-speed change period.
In the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value of "0 to 149", "None" indicating that the operation performance is not executed is displayed. In the range of "150 to 189", "Reach suggestion" indicating a performance that suggests whether or not the currently executed variation performance will be in a reach state during the third pattern variation is displayed.
A "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is defined in the range of "140 to 189", and a "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is defined in the range of "190 to 198". In addition, when the operation method is "long press", a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to the background mode is defined in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

In addition, if the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period) and the operation method is "normal push"
In addition, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", a "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified, and when the value is in the range of "190 to 198", a "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is specified.
Within the range of ", a "status suggestion" is defined which indicates a presentation to suggest the currently set game status.

And, if the operation timing is during a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation method,
And, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, the operation performance is not executed. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired performance counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is stipulated, and when the acquired performance counter 223f value is in the range of "190 to 198", "early fall notification" indicating a performance for notifying that the probability variable state was set after the end of the previous big win game, but the fall lottery was won early and the game has transitioned to the time-saving state is stipulated. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating a performance for suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the big win game)) is stipulated in the range of "0 to 198" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In addition, for various operation effects in the fourth control example, similarly to the first control example described above, not only the lottery result for the special symbol variation executed this time is stored in the winning information storage area 223b.
Alternatively, for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b may be used to determine the timing of winning the drop lottery in advance, and an operation presentation based on the determination result may be executed. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order in which the special symbol lottery is executed, and it is determined whether the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information indicates a value for winning the drop lottery. In this case, the R of the voice lamp control device 113 is
Information corresponding to the value of the fall lottery counter cd1 that wins the fall lottery is stored in advance in the OM222, and the stored information and the value of the fall lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information are
The determination may be made based on information indicating a value of 1.

In this control example, in which the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b has the winning order of the special symbol lottery decided, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if there is no winning information for the second special symbol lottery that will win the drop lottery, a process is executed to calculate the remaining change time of the currently executed special symbol change and the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and a period during which the drop lottery cannot be won, that is, a period during which the probability change state continues (the most advantageous period), is determined. Then, a most advantageous period suggestion presentation mode that notifies the player of the determined most advantageous period may be executed as an operation presentation.

By configuring in this way, the period in which the player cannot win the drop lottery can be suggested (informed) to the player, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, the display mode of this most advantageous period suggestion is, among the total time of each variable time resulting as the most advantageous period,
It is preferable to configure the display to display at least a part of the time. This allows the player to understand at least the time the most advantageous period will last. Also, by displaying the most advantageous period as a time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that even in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is set to have a higher possibility of winning a jackpot, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player is made to expect that a short variation time will be set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation.

As described above, when the operation performance is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation performance may be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or may be executed at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and the special pattern variation is newly started in the state where the performance mode of the operation performance is determined. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying that a waiting period until the operation performance is executed is in progress. This can prevent the player from feeling suspicious about the fact that the operation performance is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, in the performance for notifying the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed not by time as described above, but by the number of times the special pattern variation is executed. In addition, when it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating that the drop-out lottery will be won, the system may be configured to calculate the period until the drop-out lottery is won and the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state, and to execute a presentation suggesting that the drop-out lottery will be won or a presentation suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special pattern ends.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 227 to FIG. 229, the M of main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described.
Among the control process contents executed by the PU 201, the points that differ from the first control example described above will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that it has a fall lottery function as described above, and in that the duration of the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game has been changed, and the control contents related to these differences are different. Specifically, in comparison with the control contents of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see S258 in FIG. 227), and the look-ahead process (see S613 in FIG. 162) is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (see S613 in FIG. 162).
Instead of the above, the pre-reading process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 228) is replaced by the big win end process (see S
229) instead of the jackpot end process 5 (see S1960 in FIG. 229), but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol big win determination process 5 (S258) will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol big win determination process 5 (S258). When this special symbol big win determination process 5 (S258) is executed, the same process of S301 as the above-mentioned special symbol big win determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351).
Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability hit counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the process of S302 to S307 is executed, which is the same as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e.,
If it is determined that there is a high probability of a special pattern (S351: Yes), then the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

When it is determined that the drop lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), a drop command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state (S355), and the above-mentioned special symbol big win determination process (
158) and ends this process. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is performed in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S353 that the falling lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol big win determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in a normal state in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the state in which the execution condition for the special symbol lottery is satisfied (
In the special symbol big win determination process 5 (see S258 in FIG. 227),
The system is configured to execute the falling lottery before actually executing the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery can be executed immediately according to the result of the falling lottery, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

In addition, the timing of the fall lottery and the timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from that of this control example. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately thereafter. Therefore, by the time the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to execute a fall notification effect to indicate that the currently executed special symbol variation is the last variation in which the special symbol lottery was executed in the high probability state, and that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the falling lottery is won, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state before the next special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the falling lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues is subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the remaining number of times the special symbol lottery may be executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set to a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the game state (probability change state) that is most advantageous to the player will continue due to winning the falling lottery, so that the player can play with a sense of tension.

In this control example, when the player does not win the falling lottery, that is, when the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the effect for suggesting or informing the player of the fact is not executed.
The period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (the period during which it continues) is difficult for the player to understand, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to inform the player of some cases in which the player does not win the falling lottery. In this case, for example, the falling lottery table 20
In 2da, not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that is determined to be a win (fall), but also a value that is determined to be a specific miss (for example, 998, 999) may be specified, and when the value is determined to be such, a command indicating a specific miss may be set so that a presentation is executed to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific miss. Alternatively, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a presentation indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and if it is determined that a presentation should be executed based on the lottery, a miss presentation is executed.

Next, the contents of the pre-reading process 5 (S653) in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-reading process 5 (S653). This pre-reading process 5 (S653) differs from the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above in that the types of counters read out in the process of reading out the various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) are different, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the pre-reading process 5 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the falling lottery counter Cd1 newly stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area (the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are
The fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S751), and then the processing of S702 to S705 is executed, which is the same as the pre-reading processing (see S613 in Figure 162) executed in the first control example described above, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161)
In the pre-read process 5 (S653) executed when a new lottery right for a special symbol (special symbol reserved) is acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area), the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is also read out, and a winning command including the acquired value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is set and can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 side has acquired a special symbol reserved ball,
It is possible to determine whether the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that wins the fall lottery is included. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of the big win end process 5 (S1960) will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win end process 5 (S1960). This big win end process 5 (S1960) is different from the big win end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 of FIG. 170) in that the process contents for setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h are different, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the jackpot end process 5 (S1960) is executed, first, the processes of S2101 and S2102 are executed, which are the same as the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170), and then a value corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), a state command is set based on the value of the special probability counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h set this time (S2104), the jackpot in progress flag 203k and the special probability setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process is terminated.

Here, the processing contents of S2153 will be explained in detail. In this control example, the game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to temporarily store the current game status, the game status set at the time of the previous big win, and the big win type selected when the big win is won. Then, when the processing of S2153 is executed, the game status at the time of the big win stored in the game status storage area 203g and the big win type are read out, and the value specified in the big win type selection table 202d is set in the time-saving counter 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined at the time when the jackpot end process 5 is executed, that is, at the time when all rounds of the jackpot game are ended. By configuring in this way, the setting conditions that may be established during the rounds of the jackpot game, for example,
The value set in the time-saving counter 203h can be changed depending on whether or not a set condition that is established when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game) is established.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, at the start of a big win game or at the time of selecting the type of big win that has been won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the game state at the time of winning the big win is determined, and a value according to the determined content is set as the big win end processing 5.
(See S1960) In this way, it is not necessary to hold information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot game period, so that the memory capacity can be reduced.

Next, referring to Fig. 230 and Fig. 231, the control process contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with respect to the differences from the control process contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned first control example. The fourth control example is significantly different from the above-mentioned first control example in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control process contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are also different in that a process related to the fall lottery is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that command judgment process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of command judgment process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 5 (S4162) will be described with reference to Fig. 230. Fig. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination process 5 (S4162). As shown in Fig. 230, in this command determination process 5 (S4162), if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No) in the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S4112 in Fig. 175), then the main control device 11
175)。 It is different in that it is determined whether a fall command has been received from control example 10 (S4251), and if it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), it executes a fall-related process (S4252). If it is determined in the process of S4251 that a fall command has not been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, it executes the process of S4219, which is the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above, and ends this process.

Next, the contents of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in the command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fall-related process (S4252).
2) is a fall command (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227) that is set when it is determined that the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery executed by the main control device 110 (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227).
This is a process that is executed when a fall command is received (see S355 in), and is intended to execute a process for determining the timing when the fall command was received (the timing when the high probability state of the special pattern ended).

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S55
02). The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time-saving times is set to 100 after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the drop lottery has been won before the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the drop lottery has been won early despite the high probability state of special symbols being set.

In the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503).
The time-saving state is set in the secondary state setting area 223g (S5504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process is terminated.

By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the processing of S5503, in the frame button input monitoring/performance processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated during the chance mode and the performance mode is selected by referring to the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)), the performance mode is selected by referring to a data table different from that when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF. Therefore, the player can know the result of the fall lottery after the fact by the performance mode of the operation performance executed, so that the performance effect can be improved.

<Example of the second control>
Next, referring to Fig. 232, among the third pattern variation performances executed in the above-mentioned second control example, the reverse variation display performance (see Fig. 205(d)) which is a performance in which the variation direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from the variation direction of the main pattern sz will be described. Fig. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the reverse variation display performance.

As described above, in the second control example, the main pattern sz, which includes identification information for showing the lottery result of the special pattern, and the sub-pattern fz, which is different from the main pattern sz, are configured to be independently displayable and controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner before the main pattern sz is displayed in a variable manner, and then the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a stationary manner before the main pattern sz is displayed in a stationary manner, thereby enabling a reach line notice performance to be executed that notifies the player of only the stationary display position of the main pattern sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d),
) the device is configured to be capable of executing a reverse variation display effect in which the sub-pattern fz is displayed varying in a direction different from the direction in which the main pattern sz is displayed varying for a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern variation.

The contents of this reverse variable display performance will be described with reference to FIG. 232. First, a variable pattern command for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is transmitted from the main control device 110. Then, when the variable pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182)) is executed to determine the performance mode (variable pattern) for the main pattern sz. This allows the performance mode of the main pattern sz, which is the identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, to be reliably set based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the main pattern sz for indicating the lottery result different from the result of the special pattern lottery actually executed from being stopped and displayed.

Then, based on the presentation mode of the main pattern sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113,
A process for setting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed. Specifically, whether or not a presentation mode that results in a reach state is set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz is determined, and when it is determined that a presentation mode that results in a reach state is set, a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed. Note that, when a presentation mode that results in a reach state is not set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. This allows the sub-pattern fz to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the main pattern sz that is displayed in a variable manner (variation pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special pattern. Therefore, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz can be made to appear to the player as if they were displayed as a pattern row arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, when the performance state for the main pattern sz is a reach state, a process for selecting the performance state of the sub-pattern fz is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the reach states, a specific reach state (for example, a super reach state)
When the presentation mode is set to the sub-pattern fz, a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed, or even in some cases where the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is in a non-reach state, a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed. In other words, when the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set in a presentation mode that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a jackpot, a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz may be easily executed. By configuring in this way, a presentation mode different from the normal presentation mode (a presentation mode synchronized with the presentation mode of the main pattern sz) is simply set (executed) as the sub-pattern fz, and the player can have a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot.

Also, in the above example, if the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is not executed, a presentation mode (synchronous presentation mode) corresponding to the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz, and a variable presentation is executed in which the variable display of the sub-pattern fz is synchronized with the variable display of the main pattern sz. As a result, on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner so as to follow the variable display of the main pattern sz, and the same variable display is executed as the variable display of the third pattern in the first control example described above (see FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, the player is presented with a plurality of main patterns sz and a plurality of sub-patterns f
It can be made to appear as if the symbols, z, and z are being variably displayed and controlled as a sequence of symbols in a predetermined order (1 (main symbol sz) → triangular mark (sub-symbol fz) → 2 (main symbol sz) → ...) as shown in Figure 122 (b).

Therefore, when the presentation mode of the main symbol sz and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, a more unexpected presentation can be provided to the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Also, since the process for setting the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the process for setting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz are set differently, the process for varying and displaying the main symbol sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to set presentation modes (variation patterns) for all the third symbols (main symbol sz and sub-pattern fz) as in the above-mentioned first control example, for example, when setting a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz is different, the process for varying and displaying the main symbol sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed.
It is necessary to set a performance mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz is different for the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz. However, by configuring the performance mode for the main pattern sz and the performance mode for the sub-pattern fz to be independently set as in the second control example,
It is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the third symbol, and the processing for setting the presentation mode for the third symbol can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the explanation will be continued. When the process of selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed,
First, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or not, and the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected by referring to the result of the determination using a sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown). Here, the sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown) specifies the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz at a predetermined rate in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery and the performance mode set for the main symbol sz. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big win" and "double reach" is set as the performance mode of the main symbol sz, it is specified that "reach line notice performance" is selected at a rate of 60%, "reverse variable display performance" is selected at a rate of 20%, and "no sub-symbol performance" is selected at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, it is specified that the "reach line notice presentation" is selected 20% of the time, the "reverse fluctuation display presentation" is selected 20% of the time, and the "no sub-symbol presentation" is selected 60% of the time.

Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "miss" and the "double reach" is set as the performance mode of the main symbol sz, the "reverse variable display performance" is selected with a probability of 40%, and the "reverse variable display performance" is selected with a probability of 60%.
It is specified that "no secondary symbol effect" is selected 90% of the time, and when "single reach" is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice effect" is selected 5% of the time, "reverse variable display effect" is selected 5% of the time, and "no secondary symbol effect" is selected 90% of the time.

When the "reverse variable display performance" is selected using the sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown) thus defined, a display mode selection process is then executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this display mode selection process, a process is executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current third symbol variable performance (performance mode of the sub-symbol fz), and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. 203(c) in the above-mentioned second control example.

In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-pattern mode command (display command) for specifying the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-pattern mode command (display command), a process is executed to read out corresponding image data from the character memory area 234a2.

In the display mode selection process, for example, as shown in FIG. 203(c), the display mode SD1 of the "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-pattern fz, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" which indicates a high probability of winning, and the display mode SD3 of the "advantageous jackpot game (1)" which is advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won are selected.
The display mode SD1 is configured to select one of the display modes SD2 and SD3, which imitates the number 16, indicating that the game will be played in six rounds. If the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the display mode S is more likely to be selected than if the result is not a jackpot (miss).
The display mode SD2 is configured to be easily selected, and further, the display mode SD3 is configured to be easier to select when a favorable jackpot game is executed based on the result of the currently executed special pattern lottery than when a favorable jackpot game is not executed (when a jackpot is not won, or when a jackpot game other than the favorable jackpot game is executed despite the jackpot being won).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 232 shows that the "reverse variable display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz.
232, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the third pattern, and the "reverse variable display performance" is executed in which the main pattern sz is displayed to vary leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 232, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 232. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed to vary in the opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that a surprising variable performance can be provided to the player. Furthermore, as a performance mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so that the player can be easily informed that the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal performance mode.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all the sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are
Although the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode of one of the sub-patterns fz may be changed among the multiple sub-patterns fz. In this case, it may be configured so that only the display mode of the sub-pattern fz arranged near the main pattern sz that is finally stopped and displayed can be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process. This makes it easier to predict the stopped display mode of the main pattern sz based on the display mode of the sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in the display screen shown in Fig. 232, an example is shown in which all the sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are the same size, but the size (magnification ratio), rotation angle, translucency value, etc. of the sub-patterns fz may be set to be different. In this case, the value specified in the display data table (see Fig. 207) for displaying each sub-pattern fz may be changed.

Also, Figure 232 shows an example in which, at the timing when the third pattern change starts, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz switches from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to a display mode SD2 imitating a "bubble", and a reverse change display performance is executed; however, without being limited to this, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped and displayed until the current third pattern change starts, as a timing before the third pattern change starts, or the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the current third pattern change starts until it stops.

In addition, when the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed during the period from when the previous third symbol variation is stopped and displayed to when the current third symbol variation is started, for example, it may be configured to analyze whether the sub-symbol fz is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by a pre-reading process, and to change the display mode of the sub-symbol fz that is stopped and displayed when the next special symbol lottery (variation) to be executed results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big win). In this case, the display mode used for the variation performance of the sub-symbol fz to be executed next is determined before the performance mode of the main symbol sz to indicate the lottery result of the next special symbol lottery (variation) to be executed is set. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the performance mode of the third symbol variation to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery can be made different, so that the player can be interested in the third symbol variation performance to be executed.

Furthermore, when a process for switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the third pattern change starts to when it stops, the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in the display mode before the switch at the time when the third pattern change starts, or the sub-pattern fz may be configured to be displayed after the process for switching the display mode is executed.

<Switching control of the switching valve executed during a big win game>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as explained using the big win operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), when it is determined that a specific round game (V round game) has started, the switching valve 65y (FIG. 120(b),
Or, the control process for the specific round game (see FIG. 213(b)) is executed. In other words, only when the jackpot game to be executed is a jackpot game, the control process for the specific round game (
In the case of a normal jackpot game, the specific round (V round game) is executed, and in the case of a normal jackpot game, the specific round (V round game) is not executed. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from entering the V (passing through to the specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game, but since it was necessary to change the contents of the control process for the switching valve 65y depending on the type of jackpot game executed, there was a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game was increased.

Therefore, a control process other than the control process contents for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above-mentioned control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, but the condition for ending the V-round game may be made different from that of a certain jackpot game, so that a ball cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. In addition, as in the fourth control example in which the above-mentioned V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, when the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed, in a normal jackpot game, the number of winning balls for controlling the switching valve 65y to be switched may be set to a number greater than the number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) for ending the V-round game, so that the switching control of the switching valve 65y is not executed.

In addition, the control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y may be set to be the same for the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the normal jackpot game, the passing may not be processed effectively. In other words, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game (since the opening period of the jackpot game is set), switching control may be executed so that the switching valve 65y is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65b during the jackpot game may be configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot game, thereby making the probability of winning a V different for each type of jackpot game.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the sub-pattern fz are configured to be set (selected) by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the presentation mode (variation pattern) may be configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that only the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set by the display control device 114.

The above describes the second control example and a modified example of the second control example. However, when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation in which various patterns are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is sufficient that the presentation mode is set independently for each type of pattern to be dynamically displayed and the display control is executed independently, and a configuration other than that shown in the above-described control example may be used.

For example, multiple display layers for displaying the sub-pattern fz may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz may be overlapped and variably displayed, as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to Figure 211.

In addition, a plurality of display layers are provided, a display priority is set for each layer, and when the display modes displayed on the display layers overlap on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the display control is performed so that the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is visible to the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display layer without a priority may be provided, and the display modes displayed on the plurality of display layers may be displayed overlappingly on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, for example, when executing the "reverse variable display performance" referred to in FIG. 232, the display control is performed (semi-transparency value and magnification rate of each sub-pattern are set) so that an overlapping sub-pattern is displayed in which a sub-pattern fz imitating "bubbles" is displayed among the sub-pattern fz of "triangle mark", and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in a display mode that suggests in advance that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz changes from "triangle mark" to "bubbles".

As explained above, in the first control example and the fourth control example, the game state is configured to be able to set two types of advantageous game states, namely, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a probability-changing state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Furthermore, the time-saving state is configured to be set after the probability-changing state ends.

When the advantageous game state is set, the period until the normal state is set next, for example, when the probability variable state is set, the period until the time-saving state set after the probability variable state ends and the normal state is set, can be notified to the player as the duration of the advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified of the period until the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player ends, rather than the period until the currently set game state ends, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period during which a plurality of advantageous game states continue in succession is notified as the duration of one advantageous game state, the player can be made to understand the detailed game state currently set by the contents and execution frequency of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the player can play while predicting the current game state while being aware of the period until the normal state is set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, of the multiple advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set; however, any configuration is acceptable as long as multiple advantageous game states can be set consecutively, and for example, in addition to the normal state, the high probability state, and the time-saving state, a potential state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is also set as game states, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the game states (high probability state, time-saving state, potential state) in which the special pattern or the normal pattern is in a high probability state are advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player. The value of a probability-change counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues is configured to be set to be larger than the value of a time-saving counter 203h indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, for example, by configuring the value of the probability change counter 203i to be "100" and the value of the time-saving counter 203h to be "50" as the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state is set as the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the potential probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, it is preferable to notify the period during which a plurality of advantageous game states continue in succession, that is, the period until the potential probability state set after the probability change state ends, as the duration of one advantageous game state. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a transition suggestion performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the currently set game state may transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state. This allows the player to grasp only that there is a possibility of transitioning to another game state during the advantageous game state, and therefore provides the player with the enjoyment of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state. Furthermore, in the case where there is a possibility that the currently set game state will transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, an advantageous transition suggestion effect may be executed that can suggest whether the game state after the transition is a game state that is more advantageous to the player.
The player may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the timing of the transition of the game state during the advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the game during the period until the normal state is set while being aware of the period.

In the first and fourth control examples described above, when a jackpot is won during a favorable gaming state, the favorable gaming state is configured to end. However, among the multiple favorable gaming states,
The most advantageous game state (probability change state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (probability change state) is set. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged by winning a jackpot during an advantageous game state. However, for example, among multiple advantageous game states, the normal advantageous game state (
In a pachinko machine 10 configured so that a high probability state is set first, and then a most advantageous game state (potentially high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal advantageous game state (high probability state) is set, it may be more advantageous for the player if the most advantageous game state is set without winning a jackpot than if the jackpot is won during the normal advantageous game state.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the device to execute a period effect that allows the player to distinguish between a period in which winning a jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and a period in which it is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to pay close attention to the result of the special symbol lottery based on the content identified by the period effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during the normal advantageous game state and a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player even if set during the normal advantageous game state as the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the content of the period effect and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game of aiming to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, but also in the timing of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

In the first control example described above, after the big win game ends, multiple types (two types) of advantageous game states (
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so that a normal state can be set after the end of a big win game. By configuring in this way, a player can play a game while expecting that a favorable game state will be set after the end of a big win game.

In the above-mentioned first control example, a presentation mode (
The display is configured to set a special mode (super chance mode) for notifying the player that a favorable game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal state has been set after the end of the jackpot game, and a special mode (chance mode) for notifying the player that a special game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal state has been set after the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless performance from being performed in the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, in which the chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, despite the notification that the probability variable state will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

For example, the technique of the first control example configured in this manner may be configured to provide a presentation mode selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the presentation mode that will be set after the end of a jackpot game, and by making any presentation mode selectable in advance by the presentation mode selection means, the presentation mode of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the presentation mode that will be set after the jackpot game ends may be set in accordance with the content selected by the presentation mode selection means. Specifically, the presentation mode selection means may be configured to select between a "full notification mode" that notifies the player of the game state that will actually be set, and a "chance notification mode" that notifies the player that only the fact that a favorable game state has been set, as the presentation mode that will be set after the end of a jackpot game;
During a period when the special symbol lottery is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10, the player operates the operation means (
By operating the frame button 22, any one of the presentation modes can be selected.

A storage means is provided for temporarily storing the presentation mode selected by the player, and information for identifying the presentation mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., the sub-display area Ds), so that the currently set presentation mode can always be identified by the player. When a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the jackpot game presentation is a jackpot game presentation in which the ball is thrown into a specific area (V gate) 65 during the jackpot game.
A V notification effect is executed as an effect to guide the player to pass through the V (V winning), and when the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a probability variable state will be set after the big win game ends (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)).
If the game does not pass the end, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving state will be set after the big win game ends (see Fig. 127 (a) and (c)). If the probability variable state is set after the big win game ends, a "
When a "Super Chance Mode" (see FIG. 131(a)) is set and a time-saving state is set after the end of a big win game, a "Chance Mode" (see FIG. 128(a)) is set, indicating that the current game state is a time-saving state. By configuring in this manner, the player can be reliably notified of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of a V prize, which is the trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, when the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as the big win game effect, and the "chance mode" is set regardless of the game state to be set after the big win game ends. By configuring in this way, the player can play without being notified of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of a V winning, which is the trigger for determining the game state. When the effect mode selection means has not selected the effect mode, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means, as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and as in the first control example described above, whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the big win game is determined by lottery, the big win game effect based on the lottery result is executed, and the effect mode after the big win game ends is set based on the effect result of the big win game effect.

By configuring in this manner, any presentation mode desired by the player can be provided without any sense of incongruity, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects to be executed in the pachinko machine 10, various effect modes (see FIG. 1) that are selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected are provided.
A presentation frequency selection means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of the various presentation modes (see 48). Specifically, it is preferable to provide a presentation frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio of the various presentation modes selected when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set can be greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratio can be made small. Even when such a configuration is used, any presentation mode desired by the player can be provided without any sense of incongruity, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (V gate 6) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the big win game executed when the big win is won in the special symbol lottery is
5V), the ball passes through a special symbol with a high probability of appearing after the big win (high probability state).
The pachinko machine 10 has been described as being configured to set the above, but as a configuration capable of providing a player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while a bonus game advantageous to the player is being played, for example, when a small prize is won in a special pattern lottery, which is a lottery result different from a big prize, a second bonus game (small prize game) different from the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played, and a specific area can be provided through which a ball can pass that enters a variable ball entry means (which may be variable entry device 65, or another entry device may be provided separately) that is opened during the second bonus game, and when a ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, a bonus game (jackpot game) can be played after the second bonus game (small prize game) is completed.

In each of the above embodiments, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 in the main control device 110
Although a case has been described in which the reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of d (N) is updated (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. Also, when the voice lamp control unit 113 receives the variation pattern command sent from the main control unit 110,
The value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is configured to be decreased by 1. This allows the number of times that the main control device 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands to be reduced, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, the special ball entry port 64 can be entered a maximum of four times.
Although the passage of the number 7 is set to be reserved up to one time, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the winning of the special ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting member.

In addition, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern is moved along a predetermined path such as vertically or in an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern,
For example, the display includes a variety of effects in which one or more characters are displayed in motion or change together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern may be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery results of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used, for example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted to the player among the third symbols, and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display means.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left side area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state,
It may be configured so that a left-hand hit game is executed aiming at the left area of 3, and in the time-saving state, a right-hand hit game is executed aiming at the right area of the game board 13, or the left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and the right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the left-hand hitting game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed when any game state is set and when a jackpot game is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute a right-hand hitting game when a time-saving state is set and during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hitting game only during a normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hitting game, left-hand hitting game).

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means operable by the player, which is determined to have been operated by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. Also, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient to be able to vary the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, and for example, the frame button 22
may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or the operation means (frame button 22)
A control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the input terminal 111 and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if a plurality of performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode in response to the player's operation on the performance operation means can be smoothly set.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the switching button group 22z (the switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game with a winning combination is
) is provided, and a movable valve 750, a storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), and a second
It may be configured so that some or all of the operational control of the frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b) and the third frame button (release button) 22c is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 rather than the main control device 110.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings, there is one in which the combination of jackpot probabilities (the combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a special probability state) can be set to one of multiple levels (for example, six levels), but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined when a jackpot occurs
The present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of the types of jackpots that are advantageous to the player, or the ratio of the types of jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, depending on the settings.
For example, the ratio of big wins with many rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of big wins with few rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting.
The ratio of big wins that give a small number of time-saving times (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the settings. Furthermore, the ratio of big wins that transition (or are likely to transition) to a favorable game state (for example, a probability state) after the big win is determined may be varied according to the settings.
The rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (for example, normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a type of jackpot is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (and is almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings may be available from 1 to 6, with the most favorable setting being setting 6. In setting 6, when a jackpot occurs, there is a 2% probability that a jackpot with six rounds will be determined, while in other settings, there is a 0% probability.
It may be configured such that a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of .01%. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being set is extremely high when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the rate of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot opening (or a role inside the jackpot opening) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided, so that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the rate at which it is determined is higher) in a specific setting. Also, when the combination of the probability of a jackpot is varied according to the setting, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot, while in a probability state, the more disadvantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of gaming machine in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the number of prize balls paid out is more likely to be greater than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, by applying this configuration to a gaming machine in which the probability state continues until the next jackpot is won and in which the probability state has a high probability of a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability state, the number of draws until the next jackpot is likely to be large, and therefore there are more opportunities to win prize balls in the small jackpot state. Therefore, in the probability state, it is easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which multiple settings can be set, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 142) that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the main control device 110 can be changed based on the set value, or the voice lamp control device 1
It is preferable to configure the system so that the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation performance) of the third symbol in 13 is different, or the type of various selection tables referred to when selecting the detailed performance mode executed as the variation performance is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variation performance executed, so that it is possible to execute a variation performance that interests the player.

Furthermore, when the data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation as described above with reference to FIG. 148 or FIG. 226 is made different based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to define the "setting suggestion" presentation mode for suggesting the set setting value as the presentation mode of the operation presentation so that the selection ratio is the same for each data table used for each setting value, and configure the presentation content of the operation presentation executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to differ depending on each setting value, and configure the selection ratio of other presentation modes to be variable depending on the setting value. By configuring in this way, when a "setting suggestion" operation presentation that directly suggests a setting value is executed, the presentation content can be grasped in a comprehensive manner, and when other operation presentations are executed, the selection ratio of each presentation mode can be grasped in a comprehensive manner.
Since it becomes possible to predict the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player interested in the various operational effects that are executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the set game state. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in six stages from the setting "1" which is disadvantageous to the player to the setting "6" which is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (probable bonus state) which is advantageous to the player is set is different from the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when the settings "4" to "5" are set.
By making the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when "6" is set and when a second game state (time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set, it is possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 in which a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player be convinced that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, when the first game state (probability change state) is set and when the second game state (time-saving state) is set, the same presentation mode "
The above-mentioned effect can be made more pronounced when a configuration is used that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state by setting the "chance mode." Also, as in the first control example described above, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the second game state is set after the first game state ends, the effect can be made more pronounced by making it difficult to determine whether the first game state has actually been set.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of the presentation mode to be variable based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery result, set game state, selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time)), it is possible to prevent the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily determined by the player.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after a coin is inserted and a symbol pay line is determined, a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and confirm the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a string of identification information consisting of a number of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information as a confirmed display, and the variably display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever), and is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button), or
A slot machine in which, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of identifying information stops and is displayed as a fixed value, and if the combination of identifying information at the time of the stop is a specific one, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A specific example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that changes and displays a series of symbols, and then determines and displays the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a certain amount of balls are inserted based on a certain operation (button operation), the symbols start to change due to the operation of an operating lever, for example.
For example, when a stop button is operated or a certain time has passed, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and if the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is started in which a certain amount of game value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the game value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the game value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured in whole or in part in combination.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a large prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and is configured so that the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to the decorative plate 302 (for example, see JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball is confirmed to enter the ball detection hole 431 and the launch of the game ball is continued or stopped, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the part related to the launch operation of the game ball.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine A1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, so that it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Therefore, in a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and to judge whether to continue or stop the shooting operation of the gaming ball, so that it is possible to improve the part related to the shooting operation of the gaming ball.

The form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening constituting a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (for example, a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which the game balls can pass.

In the gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball flowing downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by utilizing the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, thereby making it possible to reduce material costs and design costs compared to the case where other decorative members are prepared as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2, the path configuration means is provided with a front-to-rear direction path formed with a front-to-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the second ball is placed in front of the first gaming ball.
Since a forward/backward path is configured to allow the placement of the first game ball, the second game ball can hide at least a portion of the first game ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that, when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at a launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a part of the first gaming ball.
4.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the gaming machine A4 can provide an effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a difficult-to-recognize situation even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines A3 or A4, the front side component is disposed closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear side component in the forward/rear direction path.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A3 and A4, the forward and backward direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.
This makes it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball, thus improving the blindfolding effect.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the front side component is disposed in the line of sight of a player who is watching the passing means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the first
A similar blindfolding effect can be produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball.

In other words, normally, it is thought that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are to each other, the greater the concealment effect can be improved, but if the first game ball and the second game ball are positioned in the line of sight, the influence of the distance between them can be eliminated.

Gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A2 to A6, the path configuration means comprises a front-to-rear path formed with a front-to-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-to-right path formed with a left-to-right width upstream of the front-to-rear path that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the left-to-right direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the line of sight of the player can also be blocked by the gaming ball flowing down the left-right path, so the blindfolding effect can be produced not only when the player sees the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blindfolding effect can be produced in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow passage extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, in a configuration in which one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to configure a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the path configuration means comprises a first flow-down path along which the gaming ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second flow-down path along which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the specified displaceable means and can be seen regardless of which flow-down path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball flows down.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means regardless of whether or not it passes through the passed means, thereby improving attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

Gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means is provided for dividing the flow direction of gaming balls upstream of the passing means, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming balls, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and which reach the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a predetermined section, so that it is more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball compared to a case where the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a flow pattern corresponding to the subsequent flow path. This makes it possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path configuration means is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the flowing gaming balls, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A9, the protruding portion can act to branch the gaming balls, thereby improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, a case in which branching is caused by movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine A10, the protrusion portion includes a first protrusion portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second protrusion portion extending in a direction different from the first protrusion portion, and is configured so that the protrusion amount of the first protrusion portion and the protrusion amount of the second protrusion portion are different.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the effect of the first protruding portion on the gaming ball and the effect of the second protruding portion on the gaming ball can be made different depending on the flow-down state of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to generate an action of branching the gaming ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down state of the gaming ball while utilizing the fixed first protruding portion and second protruding portion.

<Points to appeal for the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means has a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a large prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to identify by a decorative plate 302, and depending on the state of the large prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position outside the decorative plate 302 or may flow down in a manner that is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, see JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a highly visible gaming ball that falls off the decorative plate 302 and flows down is configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and a part of the gaming ball that flows down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 is guided to the ball detection hole 431, so that the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because paying attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B1, the gaming ball that flows down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side,
Since it is configured to be guided to the passing means, it is possible to associate the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the specified portion will pass through the passing means, and it is possible to improve in terms of the meaning of paying attention to the game ball after it has attracted attention.

Furthermore, by configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the designated section, thereby reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading towards the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening constituting a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (for example, a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which the game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easily visible to the player, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily retained at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) as a part that is likely to attract the player's attention as a place where the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V winning hole side that is directly connected to winning a jackpot,
It may be the ball dispensing device side as an operation target, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entrance flows down (the area where the player will follow it with his eyes in frustration), the bright side as a light emitting means for switching between light and dark, or other side. Also, it may be possible to intentionally form an inconspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

In the gaming machine B1, the path configuration means is provided with a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B1, the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the designated section can be accentuated by lowering the attention of the gaming ball at a second designated section before the gaming ball enters the path forming means and flows down the designated section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the attention of players, compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of gaming balls.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, a second flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second specified portion is configured to be faster than a first flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified portion.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path forming means to reach a predetermined portion.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the predetermined portion has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a predetermined direction differs.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines B1 to B4, it is possible to create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other parts.

It should be noted that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way.
For example, when viewed from the front, the displacement occurs on a straight line that is arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction.
It may be a difference between displacement on a straight line having a forward/backward component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or meandering manner, or some other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce a gaming ball into the path configuration means, and the specified portion is positioned outside the introduction means when viewed in a specified direction.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means and to improve the attention to the gaming ball that is likely to pass through the passing means at the same time.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines B1 to B6, it is equipped with an avoidance means that configures the gaming ball on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passed means or the specified part.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming balls are configured to flow down on the front side of the path forming means, and the flow path of the gaming balls is equipped with an avoidance means for avoiding the line of sight directed towards the passed means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls directed towards the passed means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, the game ball may flow down avoiding a position in front of the passing means, or may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, or may flow down avoiding a position in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, or may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position and the player's eye position, or may be other.

In gaming machine B7, the path configuration means is equipped with an accepting state change means configured to be able to change between an accepting state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the accepting state change means is configured to be able to guide a game ball that has reached the accepting state change means in the accepting state to the path configuration means side when the state changes from the accepting state to the non-accepting state.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent a gaming ball that reaches the receiving state changing means and then flows down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B7 or B8, it is provided with a partitioning means which is arranged above the passing means when viewed from the front and partitions the gaming area, and the partitioning means is configured so that gaming balls can flow down the left and right outer sides.

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 or B8, the partitioning means can prevent the gaming ball from flowing down in front of the passed means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passed means.

The form of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes the flow surface of the game ball, or it may be a ball entrance forming means through which the game ball can enter. In addition, the partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means is equipped with an accepting state change means configured to be able to change between an accepting state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the accepting state change means side is configured to easily guide the game ball to the accepting state change means side.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the gaming ball in the middle of being received by the receiving state changing means can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the receiving state changing means by the partitioning means. This makes it easier to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a gaming ball that has slipped sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls in front of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means may be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means may be a first winning port disposed above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the pivoting axis direction of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after sliding sideways can reach any position within the range formed by the pivoting tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, there is a possibility that the game ball after sliding sideways will pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after sliding sideways should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid a position that is seen from the front of the passing means, which will reduce the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, and it is possible to improve the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar flow pattern.

According to gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines B7 to B10, it is difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and have the potential to pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, thereby making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the gaming balls flowing down near the path forming means whether it is easy or difficult for the gaming ball to enter the path forming means.

A gaming machine B12 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, characterized in that it comprises a light emitting means for irradiating light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the front side of the ball flowing down a specified portion reflects light, making it difficult to see the ball.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
The device comprises: a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down; a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can flow down the passing means and a second state different from the first state,
The path configuration means is provided with a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means allows the game ball to flow down toward the passing means.
1.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning port 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 (for example, see JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is essential that the distribution unit 75 operates for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

As an example of a means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is increased. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the game area (near the first large prize opening 10), the length of the flow path from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 can be increased. This is thought to reduce the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this measure is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large winning opening 12 to the first large winning opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of avoiding erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the path configuration means includes a predetermined delay means,
Even when the vertical length of the path forming means in a front view is shortened to save space, a long time can be ensured for the game ball that has entered the path forming means to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing when it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous entry can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a hurry. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, the delay means may be provided with a convex portion for decelerating the ball on the flow path, or may be provided with a predetermined flow path that causes the ball to flow down the flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In the gaming machine C1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a longer period during which the player can visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down a predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way.
For example, it may be the magnitude of the inclination of a predetermined flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machine C3 can ensure a long period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of the player, which can easily improve the player's ability to pay attention to the gaming balls flowing down a predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way.
For example, it may be the magnitude of the inclination of a predetermined flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passed means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is placed in the front position, the visibility of the vicinity of the passed means can be reduced, thereby improving the attention to the area around the passed means.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging game balls at a plurality of front positions, the game balls at the front can hide at least a part of the game ball at the back. Since the passing means is arranged behind the game balls at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine C6 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, characterized in that the path configuration means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral form when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is possible to shorten the vertical width required to arrange a path forming means of the same length.

Furthermore, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path wall thinner, so the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared to a turn-around path that turns around at 180 degrees, the possibility of ball clogging, etc. occurring can be reduced.

Gaming machine C7 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C6, characterized in that the path configuration means has a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C6, the left and right width of the path forming means can be reduced, so that a pair of path forming means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced left and right width.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, the passed means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to make it easier for the passed means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines C1 to C8, the path configuration means comprises a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving manner of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and further, the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, thereby improving the player's attention to the gaming balls.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency of balls entering each receiving means may be different, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In the gaming machine C9, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on whether the gaming balls are received by only one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means.
0.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the amount of profit that the player can obtain can be set in a certain way, making it easier for the player to shoot the gaming ball in a certain launch mode.

The profit that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game ball flowing down, or the profit related to the game obtained by the game ball flowing down (
It may also be the payout of prize balls, the acquisition of a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C9 or C10, the path configuration means is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines C9 and C10, the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be reduced regardless of whether the gaming ball is mainly shot from the left or right side.

Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means is equipped with an acceptance state change means that is configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape or state change state of the acceptance state change means.

According to gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the state change state, so that the impact of the player's skill in firing the gaming ball on the profits obtained by the player can be reduced.

A gaming machine C13, in which the state change mode of the receiving state change means in the gaming machine C12 is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine C12, the gaming machine C13 can change the manner in which the gaming balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means even when the gaming balls are being released in a certain manner. This allows the profits that the player can obtain to be adjusted based on the manner in which the state of the receiving state changing means changes.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement occurring during the state change is along the direction in which the game ball flows down.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for gaming balls toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, JP 2017-18502 A).
(See the Publication No. 1.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular to each other, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flow direction of the gaming ball, so that the state switching means is displaced when the gaming ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means, thereby affecting the change in the rolling mode of the gaming ball. This improves the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right with the game ball on top of it, a load is applied to the game ball to rotate it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the game ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball,
Since a load can be applied to the game ball not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

By the effect on the flow-down behavior of these game balls, the flow-down behavior of the balls resting on the state switching means can be changed in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, so that the player viewing the game balls can concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the state switching means may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the game ball, or may be positioned so that it collides with the game ball in the flow-down direction.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner that collides with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited in any way. For example, the closing operation may be performed in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball so that the introduction of the game ball thereafter can be restricted with less resistance.

In the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine XA1, it is possible to cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XA3, in the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, characterized in that the state switching means includes a changing means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines XA1 or XA2, the load applied from the gaming ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
A gaming machine X comprising: a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which game balls can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which game balls cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide game balls in a first direction in the introduction state and to be able to guide game balls in a second direction in the non-introduction state.
B1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for gaming balls toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, JP 2017-18502 A).
(See Publication No. 1). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the gaming ball to the right when it is in a state where it protrudes forward, but when it is in a state where it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the gaming ball and the gaming ball falls freely, and does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the gaming ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the flow of the gaming ball, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the flow of the gaming ball.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether the state is introduced or not, so that a dedicated member for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball is not required, and the number of required components (members) can be reduced. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle,
The first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right for a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means is started, while only a small displacement of the game ball is recognized in a front view before being guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the state switching means to perform the guiding action is not limited in any way. For example, the guide portion may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide portion may be disposed on a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and may be configured to be switched to a state in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide portion by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide part is arranged on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) shape that is inclined with respect to the flow direction, rather than providing a wall portion with a flat shape perpendicular to the flow direction, can more easily prevent a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball becomes large in the direction that causes the game ball to flow backward. This makes it easier to prevent the game ball from flowing backward.

Gaming machine XB2, in which in gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by a displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means caused by the load applied from the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections capable of receiving gaming balls from each of the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction are each configured symmetrically on the left and right in the pair of guide sections.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines XB1 and XB2, the path along which the gaming ball flows can be made complex. Also, since the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically on the left and right in the pair of guide parts, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide parts receive from the gaming ball can be made symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means depending on the load received by the guide portion from the game balls, for example, when approximately equal numbers of game balls are allowed to enter a pair of left and right paths.

Gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with other members can be reduced by the protruding portion, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

The gaming machine XB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, it is provided with a contact means configured to be able to contact when the state switching means is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state, and is configured so that the left-right displacement of the state switching means can be corrected by contact with the contact means.

According to gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines XB3 or XB4, the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which is prone to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visible surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (for example, JP 2016-11678 A).
(See Publication No. 2.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotating base 214 is rotated and displaced, the surface that is visible to the player is the same, so there was a problem that it was difficult to maintain attention on the displacement means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine D1, the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable in accordance with the displacement, so that attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Furthermore, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, it is possible to increase the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement of the specified mode includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to or away from each other based on a collective portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are gathered and positioned, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collective portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, it is possible to easily dynamically generate the relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, as a displacement based on the collection part, the first displacement alone does not cause the first displacement at the terminal part where the distance from the collection part is the shortest or longest.
If the displacement between the displacement member and the second displacement member is easily reduced, the first displacement member and the second displacement member will appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, a rotational displacement can be generated even at the terminal end, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine D3, in gaming machine D1 or D2, is characterized in that the displacement of the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 or D2, the surface visible due to the third displacement is inverted, making it possible to significantly change the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation acts in a direction to limit the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so that the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixation.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change in the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

Also, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface that is viewed, it is possible to provide varying degrees of fixation on the side that is viewed by the player.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion between the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attracted is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the attraction between a magnet and a metal part. The first and second reversible members can be designed to use, for example, a fixing screw or bolt as the metal part that is attracted to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in both forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, it displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement manner and in the reverse direction in a second displacement manner different from the first displacement manner, and the second displacement manner is configured to displace in the first displacement manner after displacing in a predetermined manner.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means at the time of retraction, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means displaced at the performance position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern is the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the performance position (the position in front of the liquid crystal display area) and performing the performance, it is necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction several times before retreating to the retreat position (the position outside the liquid crystal display area). In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight will be easily drawn to the member retreating from the performance position, which may be considered a problem.

The manner of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine D5 is provided with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement means is
This can be achieved by varying the magnitude of the motion resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D6, it is provided with a light-emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of light from the light-emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other.

According to gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means in relation to the light from the light-emitting means can be changed in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the placement of the displacement means, the detection means being configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state or not.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, a detection means can detect a state in which displacement of the displacement means is acceptable, thereby preventing the displacement means from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

Furthermore, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement of the displacement means is executed, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement manner including zooming in and out after a certain degree of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to a case in which the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement manner including zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. Note that various types of values regarding the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, the values may be values regarding the respective positions or positions of different movable members, or values related to the change in the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, which are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface facing the player is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, while when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable.

According to gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the player's anticipation of the occurrence of a reversal action can be maintained high regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
Displacement means having a first viewable surface and a second viewable surface configured to be viewable;
The displacement means is configured to, depending on the arrangement, shift the first visible surface to a first state where it is easy to view the first visible surface, and the second state where it is easy to view the first visible surface.
This gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the visible surface is easy to see.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a reversible reversing operation unit 71 and are configured to change the appearance as seen by the player by changing the surface to be seen (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the reversing operation unit 71 is turned over in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface to be seen. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, according to gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the positioning, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to look at either the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening portion is provided that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually confirmed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E1, a player looking toward the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the displacement means in the gaming machine E2 is disposed closer to the rear side when disposed on the edge of the opening than when disposed on the center side of the opening.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged in the center of the open section, the displacement means can be clearly seen from the front side, while when the displacement means is arranged on the edge side of the open section, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means has multiple sets of the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces, and when the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces of one set are visible, the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces of the other sets are difficult to see.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines E1 to E3, by applying different letters or figures for each set to the first visible surface and the second visible surface, it is possible to allow a player viewing the displacement means to see different letters or figures, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, in the case where the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that the lottery result is a low expectation of a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that the lottery result is a high expectation of a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, since the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of a jackpot can be continuously made visible to a player who has taken his eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the display is made difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, the display may be arranged on a surface on a side different from the player's side (the rear surface, the left and right outer surfaces, etc.), or the display may be made less visible by being shielded by a shielding means.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that in gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are visible is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of the first and second visible surfaces displayed on the player side during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of the first and second visible surfaces to be viewed in the gaming machine E4, thereby making it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

In addition, the manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part may be configured to be connectable and detachable, and the part may be operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a relatively dark part may be created by setting the brightness of the light emitting means to make them difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner of the separated state is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the display may be configured to operate facing the rear side so that only one of a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible and the other part is not visible, or the display may be configured to operate in a state where the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but are seen out of alignment.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5, it has an opening portion that opens so that the displacement means can be seen, and the switching operation is executed when the displacement means is positioned at the center of the opening portion.

According to gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E5, it is possible to make the switching action more easily visible to the player, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of a part of the first visible surface and another part faces the front side and the other faces a side different from the front side.

According to gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 or E6, a portion of the first visible surface is visible during operation, while the entire surface is invisible, making it difficult for the first visible surface to be recognized during operation.

Gaming machine E8 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible together with the second displacement means.

According to gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines E1 to E7, the second displacement means makes at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see, thereby improving the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface in response to displacement.

According to gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction changes between a first visible surface and a second visible surface, so that the surface which is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, in which the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state in the gaming machine E9.

According to gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be made greater by changing the posture of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it is provided with an auxiliary means configured to be arranged in close proximity to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged in close proximity to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

According to gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E9 or E10, the auxiliary means can be positioned close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as a single unit, and the auxiliary means and the displacement means can be viewed separately, thereby enabling the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, the auxiliary means may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or may be a movable means.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is in a state where it is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means,
The gaming machine E12 is configured to be switchable between a state in which the displacement means is separated from the state in which the displacement means is visually recognized.

According to gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between visually viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visually visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs in each section>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating role 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating role 211 are
and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and the rotating part 211 is configured to be able to rotate independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example,
(See JP 2016-116782 A.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is easily wobbly at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating part 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted and displaced, there is a possibility that a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, it is assumed that the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and therefore the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine F1, the placement means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be displaced relative to one another during the displacement of the displacement means, and the support means is capable of controlling the placement of the second portion based on the first portion, so that the placement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while being stably supported. This allows for greater freedom in designing the displacement of the placement means (displaceable portion).

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, the support means may be supported in a manner in which the displacement is restricted by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means, or may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. In addition, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, and may also include mechanical control such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second portion with a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, and the support means includes a first range in which the second portion is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second portion is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and a direction in which the second portion is displaced in the first range;
A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction in which the second portion displaces is different in the second range.

According to gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arrangement means can be made different, and since the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second part, the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second part changes irregularly.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means is provided with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

According to gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F1 or F2, it is possible to limit the displacement of the second part at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first range and the second range, so that when the second part is displaced from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement, it is possible to easily stop the second part at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first range and the second range.

The load required for displacing the second portion relative to the first portion is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a load that pulls the second portion or a load that pushes the second portion.

The type of the limiting portion is not limited in any way. For example, the limiting portion may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or may be configured to switch the displacement direction of the second portion.

A gaming machine F4, characterized in that in gaming machines F2 or F3, the first section is positioned closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the second section with respect to the displacement means as a reference is configured to be smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the first section with respect to the displacement means as a reference.

According to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F2 or F3, a section can be created in which the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at an intermediate position of the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, a position can be provided at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as a whole. As a result, the number of positions at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as a whole can be increased.

A gaming machine F5, which is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, is characterized in that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion is configured to be changeable.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F4, even if the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side can be changed, so that an action presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable by simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

A gaming machine F6, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to easily stop the placement means at the end of the displacement early.

The method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited in any way.
For example, a configuration method may be used that reduces the displacement speed of the second part at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second part when the first part displaces a predetermined unit length), or a configuration method may be used that restricts the displacement of the second part by using a geometric design such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second part when the first part is stopped.

In addition, the method is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement of the second portion, but may be to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, a load is applied to the displacement end of the second portion by a magnetic force or the like,
The displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved, or the displacement resistance may be improved by using the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

Gaming machine F7, in which the support means is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

According to gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F6, the return displacement (bounce) of the second part when the first part stops can be reduced by using a support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part.

A gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported on the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount corresponding to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means based on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex presentation can be executed by the supported means which is displaced in cooperation with the placement means.

The manner of displacement of the supported means is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or may be displaced in a manner (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) different from the manner of displacement of the disposition means (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced is not limited to any particular form, and may be, for example, a change in posture or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

In the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion is
A gaming machine F9 characterized by having a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

According to gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F8, the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part can be changed back and forth (for example, increased and then decreased) while the first part is displaced, so that a displacement mode can be realized in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine F10, characterized in that in the gaming machine F8 or F9, the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the mounting means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F8 and F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made the same as that of the displacement means with the installation means in between, which gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the placement means includes a position change means that changes its position so as to switch the surface facing the player between a first surface and a second surface in accordance with the displacement of the placement means;
The position change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of the displacement, the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward the player.

According to gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F10, the first or second surface of the posture change means is directed toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second part has reached the end of the displacement, so that the end of the presentation action by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine F12 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines F1 to F11, electrical wiring is configured to be inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, the arrangement means has an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it, and the arrangement means has an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it.

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts can be prevented.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or may be configured as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off from the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

<Characteristics AA Group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of causing a display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, and a second information storage means in which the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means is stored. a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result or second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is statically displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine AA1 having a presentation mode execution means capable of executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a presentation mode selection means capable of selecting a presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and then executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the players quickly become bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the presentation mode executed during the period of dynamic display of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of stored second information, so that it is possible to execute a presentation corresponding to the number of times dynamic display of the second identification information that can be executed thereafter. Even when the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is not displayed, the player's interest in the subsequent game can be maintained, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, the specific second dynamic display mode is executed, which has the effect of making the player eager to have the second information stored, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of second information stored has ended.

According to gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is configured to be executable across the dynamic display period of the second identification information which is executed multiple times in succession, so that multiple second dynamic display modes can be made to look like a single dynamic display, thereby increasing interest.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means.
a variable member that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to get a game ball into the first state than in the first state; a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established; and a pre-determining means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, the presentation mode selection means
A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based on at least the result of the pre-discrimination means.

According to gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of specific conditions that will serve as a trigger for making it easier to obtain the second information, thereby creating the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information.

<Features AB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of causing a display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, and a second information storage means in which the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means is stored. a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result or second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is statically displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine AB1 has a presentation mode execution means capable of executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a presentation mode selection means capable of selecting a presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result, etc., as a presentation to show the result of a lottery held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the players quickly become bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the stored number of second information, so that not only the result of the first discrimination but also information regarding the possibility of the second discrimination being executed can be determined from the presentation mode, thereby having the effect of suppressing the inconvenience of players becoming bored with the game early on.

In the gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

According to gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AB1, a presentation mode is selected depending on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution, so that a variety of presentation modes can be executed.

Gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one in which a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information executed thereafter is executed.

According to gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the presentation mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started, thereby providing the effect of making the player recognize early on that the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed with priority, is about to be started.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means.
a variable member that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to get a game ball into the first state than in the first state; a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established; and a pre-determining means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, the presentation mode selection means
A gaming machine AB4 characterized in that it is configured to be capable of selecting a specific presentation mode based on at least the result of the pre-determination means.

According to gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of specific conditions that will serve as a trigger for making it easier to obtain the second information, thereby creating the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information.

<Characteristic AC group> (Uses special chart 1 change performance as a pseudo performance of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being executed; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being executed, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and then executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the players quickly become bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first presentation can be executed as a presentation for indicating the result of the second judgment, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode that includes at least a display mode indicating the result of the first judgment as the effect mode of the first effect.

According to gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AC1, a second presentation can be executed using a display mode showing the result of the first judgment, thereby having the effect of increasing interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second performance execution means executes a second performance mode for indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination within one performance indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination, and the performance mode.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that it is possible to execute more unexpected effects.

<Feature AD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first discrimination symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second discrimination symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a bonus awarding means capable of awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the first discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first discrimination result or when the second discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second discrimination result, The gaming machine AD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is stopped and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either of the first specific combination and the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is announced by a combination of multiple symbols, the type of symbol displayed determines the type of bonus awarded thereafter, thereby increasing the interest of the game (
For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not award a lower bonus than the bonus desired by the player are displayed stationary, which causes a loss of interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

According to the game machine AD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a multiple reach display mode, so that the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the combination corresponding to the second privilege will be displayed can be maintained for a long time, and there is an effect of increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first determination result is obtained during the specific period.

According to gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine AD1, even during the specific period in which the first bonus is determined by the determination means, a specific combination is displayed via a multiple reach display mode, so that there is an effect that it is easier to have expectations that the second bonus will be awarded even when the first judgment is executed during the specific period.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second discrimination result occurs during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining discrimination patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second discrimination patterns in the specific combination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD2, gaming machine AD3 has the effect of allowing a player to recognize early on that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be granted without fail if a specific second judgment result is obtained during a specific period.

<Feature AE group> (Break ED control when hitting the probability hit)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a setting means for setting a favorable game state that is more favorable to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is established; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by combining a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the favorable game state are configured in the same period.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game is determined by the result of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and different winning games are executed depending on the type of winning game.During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state in which the gaming ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter is changed to a state in which the ball can enter, and when the gaming ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game is made advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, even if a specific type of winning game is executed,
There was a problem in that cases occurred in which the game ball did not enter the variable ball entry area, which increased the control load in the notification control in such cases.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestive mode to be the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation in the period for displaying the suggestive mode, while setting a mode suggested based on the ball entry state into a specific area, thereby making it easier to control the notification of the suggestive mode at the end of the bonus game, thereby reducing the control load.

In the gaming machine AE1, when the bonus game is executed, a suggestion mode setting means sets the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in accordance with the type of the bonus game to be executed, and among the suggestion modes set when a game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game is set.
A gaming machine AE2 characterized by having a switching means capable of switching to a suggested mode.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, even if the suggestion mode is set at the start of the bonus game so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the bonus game,
Since the suggestion mode can be switched to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without varying the period for displaying the suggestion mode, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Feature AF group> (Setting different lengths of ED period depending on the type of jackpot)
The gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising: a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; a bonus game type determination means capable of determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and then executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the players quickly become bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set depending on the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF1, it comprises a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AF1, specific presentations can be executed at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF3, which is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the bonus game in the gaming machine AF1 or AF2.

According to gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AF1 and AF2, the length of the period can be varied even when a variable condition is established during the execution of a bonus game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature AG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a gaming ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player while the bonus game is being executed, based on the gaming ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game while a predetermined end condition is met while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning port, and then executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that the players quickly become bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during the execution of a bonus game or not, thereby making the game more interesting.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AG1, it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AG1, a specific presentation can be executed within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that in gaming machine AG2, the specific presentation includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing status of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

According to the gaming machine AG3, since the specific presentation includes a notification mode, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature AH Group> (Limitation control of button operation)
A gaming machine AH1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AH1 being characterized by having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a setting execution means that can execute a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a restriction means that restricts the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when a specific condition is established during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

Conventionally, when a special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a specified period of special pattern variation, and various effects (variable effects) are performed using the period (special pattern variation period) from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed.
There are many games that are designed to prevent players from getting bored of the game early by implementing the above. Among them, there are some that are configured to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance and to vary the manner of the variation presentation executed during the special pattern variation period for each presentation mode.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to the player by switching the presentation mode, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early by being provided with the same variable effects all the time. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that allow the player to arbitrarily switch presentation modes by operating an operation means that the player can operate (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A). In such a gaming machine, the player himself can select the presentation mode that he is most interested in from among multiple presentation modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early by executing a variable presentation that he is less interested in. In addition, since the player himself needs to operate the operation means to switch the presentation mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any timing by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed or when a short period of variation is set as the special pattern variation period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, which can reduce the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information, the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means can be restricted, thereby preventing malfunctions from occurring due to the operation of the operating means.

The gaming machine AH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AH1, a dynamic display period determination means is provided for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means is capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is set such that the setting of the short gaming state is at least one of the conditions for satisfaction.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH1, since the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means during the short game state can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine AH3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means which is capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means in the gaming machine AH1 or AH2.

According to gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AH1 or AH2, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

AH4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, it has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating means is configured to be able to execute the specific setting by the specific setting means without allowing the setting execution means to execute the setting based on operation of the operating means when the specific condition is set.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, even when the execution of a setting is restricted by operating the operating means during a period when a specific condition is established,
Since a specific setting is executed, the operation of the operating means is provided to the player who operates the operating means, thereby making the operation of the operating means a meaningful act.

The gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AH4, it has a suggestion effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect that can suggest information about the identification information that is displayed in a stopped state before the identification information is displayed in a stopped state based on the specific setting.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH4, when a specific condition is established, the information of the identification information to be displayed in a stopped state can be identified by a suggestive effect before the display of the stop state.
This has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored by executing a variety of effects by operating the device when specific conditions are met.

<Feature AI group> (Notification of advantageous periods spanning multiple game states)
a game state setting means for setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and which is different from the second game state, as a game state of a gaming machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means for setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and which is different from the second game state, as a game state of a gaming machine, the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended, a third gaming state can be set when a first setting condition is established while a skill state is set, and the first gaming state can be set when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is established while the third gaming state is set, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine AI1 is characterized in having an advantageous period determination means for determining an advantageous period based on the period until the second setting condition is established, and an informing means for informing of the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determination means.

Conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a time-saving state) that is favorable to a player is set, the period during which the favorable game state will continue (the number of times the special symbol will change) has been notified to the player. Specifically, the remaining period display mode showing the period during which the favorable game state will continue is "100
In some cases, the remaining time display mode is displayed as "times" and the value of the remaining time display mode is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines can set multiple status types as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player, and the advantageous gaming states include a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second advantageous gaming state (e.g., a probability-changing state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state.
There are some that can be set to.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, it is possible to inform the player of the duration (remaining duration) of the first advantageous gaming state, but there is a problem in that it is not possible to inform the player of which gaming state will be set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot grasp whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, and it is difficult for the player to know what to aim for during the first advantageous gaming state, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by stimulating their motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set,
Since the notification means notifies the player of the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again, even in a gaming machine that has a plurality of gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the player can grasp the period during which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AI1, a suggestion effect execution means is provided that can execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means when the advantageous period is notified by the notification means.
I2.

According to the gaming machine AI2, it is possible to notify the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, while also suggesting the currently set gaming state, thereby making it possible to generate interest in the content of the suggestive performance to be executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AI2, the suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a past suggestion performance for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means when the advantageous period is notified by the notification means.
3.

According to the gaming machine AI3, the suggestion effect execution means can suggest the game state that was set in the past to the player. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the contents of the past suggestion effect, and to analyze the past game contents during the advantageous period, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Gaming machine AI4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AI2 or AI3, the notification means is capable of displaying on the display means a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the suggestion performance execution means is capable of suggesting the currently set gaming state or a gaming state that was set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

According to the gaming machine AI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for showing the remaining period of the advantageous period, suggestive presentation regarding the game status is executed, so that suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is paying close attention to the remaining period of the advantageous period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AI5 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, it has a second suggestion presentation means which can suggest the timing when the first set condition may be fulfilled when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

According to gaming machine AI5, it is possible to allow the player to predict the timing at which the game state will change during an advantageous period, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored prematurely with the game during the advantageous period.

Gaming machine AI6 is any one of gaming machines AI1 to AI5, characterized in that it has an advantageous notification means capable of notifying a player of a gaming state which is advantageous to the player between the second gaming state and the third gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AI6, the player can grasp the relative merits of multiple gaming states set during the advantageous period, and therefore, the player can be interested in predicting which gaming state is currently set.

<Feature AJ Group> (displaying one symbol row variably with multiple symbol display control)
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the suggestive information is set to at least a first symbol row composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and a second symbol row composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols different from the first symbol row, and the dynamic display means is configured to dynamically display the second symbol row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first symbol row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.
1.

Conventionally, there have been cases where a third symbol is displayed in a variable manner as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
There were some machines that could execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the symbols, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, and make the player play while expecting a big win. In addition, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of third symbols (e.g., third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a variable display using a plurality of such symbol rows (e.g., three) is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, an effect (e.g., reach effect) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable display to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or not while varyingly displaying the third symbol using a plurality of symbol rows, the expectation of winning a big win for the player can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the order of the symbols that form the symbol string is not changed, and the third symbol is simply displayed in a variable manner on a symbol string basis. As a result, the only variations available are, for example, the speed at which each symbol string is displayed in a variable manner, the direction in which each symbol string is displayed in a variable manner, and the size at which each symbol string is displayed. This creates a problem in that there is a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment value of the game by improving the effect of the variable presentation using the variable display of the symbol string.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, the first and second pattern rows are dynamically displayed in different directions, making it easier to distinguish between the first and second pattern rows, and making it easier to distinguish the results of the discrimination from the suggestive information.

The gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AJ1, a dynamic display period determination means is provided for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, the first pattern row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second pattern row is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the patterns dynamically displayed in the first pattern row and the patterns constituting the second pattern row at least partially overlap with each other.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AJ1, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed at an overlapping position, so that it is possible to execute a performance that effectively utilizes the display area.

A gaming machine AJ3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AJ2, a dynamic display period determination means is provided for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first pattern row and the second pattern row are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

According to gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AJ2, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, it has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first pattern row so as to display the discrimination result by the display mode of the first pattern row.

According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ3, the display mode of the first symbol string is used to display the discrimination result, so that the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol string can be controlled based on the discrimination result, and the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol string can be freely set. Therefore, the presentation effect of the dynamic display of the suggestive information can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine AJ4 has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first pattern row, and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second pattern row, and the gaming machine is configured so that at least a portion of a first display area in the first display image layer and a second display area in the second display image layer overlap, and at the location where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first pattern row can be displayed so as to be visible to a player in priority to the second pattern row.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be visible to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for showing the discrimination result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while performing a performance that effectively utilizes the display area.

In the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the display control means is capable of displaying and controlling the first and second symbol rows so that the first and second symbol rows are configured as a combined symbol row in which the plurality of symbols constituting the first and second symbol rows are arranged in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AJ4 and AJ5, the first and second symbol strings can be dynamically displayed as a combined symbol string, so that the player can be made to think that a combined symbol string is formed. Among them, the first and second symbol strings can be dynamically displayed in the opposite direction, so that a surprising performance can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AJ6, the display control means is capable of display control so as to make it easier to dynamically display the first pattern row and the second pattern row as the combined pattern row when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ6, when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, it is more difficult to dynamically display the first and second symbol strings as the combined symbol string. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first and second symbol strings is different from the dynamic display of the second symbol string, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific discrimination result, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

<Feature AK group> (Velo control of the V-sure machine is performed based on the number of balls entered by the attacker)
a first specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, a first detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first specific area, a second specific area through which a game ball that has passed through the first specific area can pass, a second detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second specific area, and a guide path for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area;
The gaming machine AK1 has a variable means that can change the second specific area between an allowable state where game balls can pass through and a restricted state where it is difficult for game balls to pass through, and the variable means is configured to be changed from the restricted state to the allowable state until a variable condition is met based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines (so-called V-certain machines) that provide a specific area in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a gaming ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, set a high probability state after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such gaming machines, a first state in which a gaming ball is likely to pass through the specific area is set for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game, so that the rate at which the high probability state is set can be specified in advance.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the first state is set based on the period of time that has elapsed since a jackpot game is played. For example, if a problem occurs with the gaming machine during a jackpot game that prevents the gaming ball from entering the attacker, the specified period for setting the first state may pass, resulting in a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by stimulating their motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement results of the gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, so that it is possible to pass the gaming balls to a second specific area depending on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, thereby making the player interested in the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is characterized in that it is changed to the permissible state during a period during which a gaming ball that is the specified number of times in the first specific area can reach the variable means in a state changed to the permissible state.

According to gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AK1, it is possible to cause a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through a first specific area to enter a second specific area, and it is possible to control gaming balls passing through the second specific area and limit the number of balls that enter the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK3 is characterized in that it has, in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, a period discrimination means capable of discriminating the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls have passed through the first specific area until the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing abnormality processing based on the discrimination result of the period discrimination means.

According to gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AK1 or AK2, there is an effect of being able to detect malfunctions early, such as when a gaming ball remains stuck on the guideway despite having passed a predetermined number of gaming balls through the first specific area.

Gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the termination condition is set to be met when a period of time shorter than the period for the next gaming ball to reach the variable means has elapsed after the specified number of gaming balls have been detected by the second detection means.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, there is an effect that the predetermined number of gaming balls can be reliably caused to enter the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK5 is any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, characterized in that it has a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus that is advantageous to a player based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means.

According to gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines AK1 to AK4, even when bonus play is executed, it is possible to create an incentive for the player to make the game ball enter the second specific area, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of the bonus play becoming boring.

<Feature AL group> (By changing the pattern row, some of the patterns in the pattern row are switched)
a game machine having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern showing a discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the discrimination pattern, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern showing a specific discrimination result is displayed after the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be granted by the bonus granting means, the game machine further comprising: a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a first discrimination pattern is displayed as the discrimination pattern showing a first result during a first period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and a second discrimination pattern is displayed during a second period for showing a second result different from the first result,
The gaming machine AL1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of setting so that at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed.

Conventionally, there have been some machines that display a third symbol as identification information to show the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are performed during the variable display of the third symbol,
There are some machines that can make players expect a big win by suggesting the result of a special symbol lottery.
For example, there is a machine that constructs one symbol row with a third symbol numbered 1 to 9, executes a symbol variation display using a plurality of such symbol rows (e.g., three), and executes an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row. In this way, by executing a variation effect that suggests whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot while varyingly displaying the third symbol using a plurality of symbol rows, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be gradually increased for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third pattern, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, only changes during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed, so there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing the decline in motivation to play during the period of the third pattern change.

According to the gaming machine AL1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means,
Since it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AL1, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification pattern in a stopped state at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AL1, the end of the first period and the beginning of the second period can be clearly notified to the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AL3, in which the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, is a gaming machine AL2.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL2, the determination result of the determination means can be notified to the player before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed. Therefore, for a player who wants to know the determination result of the determination means as soon as possible,
The player can pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification symbols executed by the dynamic display means.
This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AL4, in which the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result, is characterized by the above.

The gaming machine AL4 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AL3.
After the second period ends, an identification pattern for indicating the bonus type can be displayed. In other words, after displaying the discrimination result of the discrimination means, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be notified to the player, which has the effect of enabling dynamic display of the second period to be executed while providing the player with at least a sense of security that a bonus game will be executed.

In the gaming machine AL4, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

According to gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AL4, the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means, so that even during the period when the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, the player can predict the determined bonus means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AL6 has a pattern row setting means capable of setting a pattern row in which a plurality of identification patterns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification patterns based on the pattern row set by the pattern row setting means, and the pattern row setting means is capable of setting a second pattern row in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of a first pattern row set during a first period is switched to the second identification pattern.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL5, a second symbol row is set in which the first identification symbol forming at least a part of the first symbol row is switched to the second identification symbol.
The number of identification symbols in the first symbol row and the number of identification symbols in the second symbol row can be made the same. Therefore, since it is not necessary to vary the dynamic display mode of the identification symbols executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of the symbol row to be set, there is an effect that the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification symbols can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AL6, the pattern row setting means is capable of forming the first pattern row by overlapping first identification patterns to indicate the same discrimination result of the discrimination means, and when setting the second pattern row, the gaming machine AL7 is characterized in that any of the overlapping first identification patterns can be switched to the second identification pattern.

According to the gaming machine AL7, since the first identification symbols overlapping in the first symbol string are switched to the second identification symbols, it is possible to check the first identification symbols displayed in the dynamic display executed during the first period even during the second period. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature AM group> (Release the restriction by another operation while the button operation is being restricted)
The gaming machine has a display means for displaying identification information showing a determination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine further comprises an operable operation means, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating at least a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation as types of operation on the operation means, a setting execution means capable of executing a setting based on a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a restriction means for restricting the setting execution means from executing a first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the first operation, and the setting execution means is configured to restrict the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the second operation during the restriction by the restriction means.
A gaming machine AM1 capable of executing the first setting when an operation is determined.
.

Conventionally, when a special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a specified period of special pattern variation, and various effects (variable effects) are performed using the period (special pattern variation period) from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed.
There are many games that are designed to prevent players from getting bored of the game early by executing the above. Among them, there are games that are configured to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance and to differ the manner of the variable presentation executed during the special pattern variation period for each presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to the player by switching the presentation mode, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early by being provided with the same variable effects all the time. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that allow the player to arbitrarily switch presentation modes by operating an operation means that the player can operate. In such a gaming machine, the player himself can select the presentation mode that he is most interested in from among multiple presentation modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early by executing a variable presentation that he is less interested in. In addition, since the player himself needs to operate the operation means to switch presentation modes, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any timing by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed or when a short period of variation is set as the special pattern variation period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, which can reduce the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AM1, even in a state in which the first setting based on the first operation is restricted,
By executing the second operation, the first setting can be executed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means in order to execute various operations.

In a gaming machine AM1, the setting execution means is capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determination means during the regulation by the regulation means.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AM1, when the first operation is performed during the regulation, the second setting is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a situation where the setting execution means does not execute anything even though the first operation is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

Gaming machine AM3, which is one of gaming machines AM1 and AM2, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means for setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied, and is characterized in that the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of a first setting by the setting execution means when the short gaming state is set and the operation determination means has determined that the operation is the first operation.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AM1 and AM2, it is possible to regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during the short game state.
By executing the setting execution means, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in understanding the determination result of the determination means, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine AM3, a gaming machine AM4 is characterized in having a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

According to gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AM3, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine AM5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines AM1 to AM4, the operation means has a first operation section for executing the first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing the second operation.

According to the gaming machine AM5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4,
Since different operation sections are used to execute the first operation and the second operation, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly executing the first operation and the second operation, which has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine AM6 is characterized in that in gaming machine AM5, the second operating section is provided in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operating section.

According to the gaming machine AM6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM5, by differentiating the ease of operation of each operation part, it is possible to set the first operation using the first operation part as a normal operation and the second operation using the second operation part as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from worrying about which operation to execute.

<Feature AN group> (Execute different operations while limiting button operations)
A gaming machine AN1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AN1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first setting execution means that can execute a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, a restriction means that restricts the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means, and a second setting execution means that executes a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated while the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restriction means.

Conventionally, there have been some machines that display a third symbol as identification information to show the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are performed during the variable display of the third symbol,
There are some machines that can make players expect a big win by suggesting the result of a special symbol lottery.
For example, there is a machine that constructs one symbol row with a third symbol numbered 1 to 9, executes a symbol variation display using a plurality of such symbol rows (e.g., three), and executes an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row. In this way, by executing a variation effect that suggests whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot while varyingly displaying the third symbol using a plurality of symbol rows, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be gradually increased for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third pattern, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, only changes during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed, so there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing the decline in motivation to play during the period of the third pattern change.

According to the gaming machine AL1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means,
Since it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AN1, when the operation means is operated in a state in which the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which nothing is executed despite the operation of the operation means, and thus it is possible to have the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operation means.

In the gaming machine AN1, the regulating means is capable of regulating the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is established during a dynamic display period of the identification information.
N2.

According to gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AN1, the execution of the first setting is regulated by the regulating means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, thereby preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the dynamic display of the identification information due to the execution of the first setting.

A gaming machine AN3 comprising: a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied, wherein the regulating means is capable of regulating the execution of a first setting by the setting execution means when the short gaming state is set and the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the first operation.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AN1 and AN2, the execution of settings based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state can be restricted.
By executing the setting execution means, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in understanding the determination result of the determination means, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine AN3, based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means,
The gaming machine AN4 is characterized by having a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode.

According to gaming machine AN4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AN3, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine AM5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines AN1 to AN4, the operation means has a first operation section for performing a first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for performing a second operation different from the first operation.

According to the gaming machine AN5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed, different operation units are operated, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine AN6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AN5, the second operation unit is provided in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operation unit.

According to the gaming machine AN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN5, by differentiating the ease of operation of each operation unit, it is possible to set the first operation using the first operation unit as a normal operation and the second operation using the second operation unit as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from worrying about which operation to execute.

<Characteristic AO group> (If you change stages when it is difficult to do so, it is your chance)
A gaming machine AO1 having a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player, a presentation mode setting means for setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode as presentation modes based on the operation of the operation means, and a period setting means for setting a first period during which setting of the presentation mode by the presentation mode setting means can be executed, and a second period during which setting of the presentation mode is more difficult to execute than the first period, wherein the gaming machine is capable of providing the player with information that is more advantageous to the player when the presentation mode is set during the second period rather than during the first period.

Conventionally, there have been some machines that display a third symbol as identification information to show the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are performed during the variable display of the third symbol,
There are some machines that can make players expect a big win by suggesting the result of a special symbol lottery.
For example, there is a machine that constructs one symbol row with a third symbol numbered 1 to 9, executes a symbol variation display using a plurality of such symbol rows (e.g., three), and executes an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row. In this way, by executing a variation effect that suggests whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot while varyingly displaying the third symbol using a plurality of symbol rows, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be gradually increased for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third pattern, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, only changes during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed, so there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing the decline in motivation to play during the period of the third pattern change.

According to the gaming machine AL1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means,
Since it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when the presentation mode is set in the second period in which it is difficult to set the presentation mode, advantageous information can be provided to the player, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the presentation mode will be set in the second period. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means, and there is an effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AO1, the presentation mode setting means, when executing setting of the presentation mode during the second period, sets the first presentation mode and a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode.
A gaming machine AO2 characterized in that a presentation mode can be set.

According to gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AO1, by setting the third presentation mode, it is possible to notify the player that the presentation mode has been set during the second period, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

Gaming machine AO4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AO1 to AO3, it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied, and the period setting means is capable of setting the second period when the short gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, since it is possible to make it difficult for the presentation mode to be set during the short game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the determination result of the determination means due to the presentation mode being set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AO5 is any one of gaming machines AO1 to AO4, characterized in that it has an informing means capable of informing a player that the second period will be set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

According to the gaming machine AO5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, the player can be made to know in advance that the second period will be set, and therefore the second period can be set in a state where a desired presentation mode is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the second period being set in a presentation mode that the player does not desire.

<Feature AP group> (Advance stage change easiness by predicting ahead)
an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the information storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information showing a result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information showing that the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before a determination is made by the determination means based on the information, and a switching means for switching the presentation mode from a first presentation mode to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode when a switching condition is established, wherein the switching condition is more likely to be established when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a first pre-determination result.

Conventionally, there have been some machines that display a third symbol as identification information to show the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are performed during the variable display of the third symbol,
There are some machines that can make players expect a big win by suggesting the result of a special symbol lottery.
For example, there is a machine that constructs one symbol row with a third symbol numbered 1 to 9, executes a symbol variation display using a plurality of such symbol rows (e.g., three), and executes an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row. In this way, by executing a variation effect that suggests whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot while varyingly displaying the third symbol using a plurality of symbol rows, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be gradually increased for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third pattern, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, only changes during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed, so there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play during the period from when the third pattern starts to change to when it stops being displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing the decline in motivation to play during the period of the third pattern change.

According to the gaming machine AL1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means,
Since it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the ease with which the switching condition will be met can be varied depending on the result of pre-determination by the pre-determination means, so that the player can predict the result of the pre-determination means when the presentation mode is switched, thereby having the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AP2 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine AP1, it has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation discrimination means that can discriminate the operation on the operation means, and the switching condition can be established when the operation is discriminated by the operation discrimination means.

According to gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AP1, the switching condition can be established when the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the gaming machine AP2, the switching means is capable of switching from the first presentation mode to a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode when the judgment result of the pre-judgment means is the second pre-judgment result.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2, the third presentation mode is set, so that it is possible to inform the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result, thereby providing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

A gaming machine AP4, which is any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means for setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is established, and is characterized in that the switching condition is more difficult to establish when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the presentation mode during a short game state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the discrimination result of the discrimination means due to the presentation mode being set. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AP5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AP1 to AP4, it has an alarm means capable of notifying a player that the short game state will be set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set.

According to the gaming machine AP5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, the player can be made to know in advance that the short game state will be set, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means to establish the switching condition before the short game state is set. This makes it easier to set the short game state with the desired presentation mode set, so that it is possible to suppress the short game state being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

In any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and is changed due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed,
and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, a ball is shot into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operating handle, and identification information dynamically displayed on a display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area.
In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (
Examples of prize machines include those in which a specific prize opening is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to enter, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of prizes won.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as gaming media, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S209 Dynamic display period determination means S306 Discrimination means S307 Dynamic display means S402 Benefit type determination means S1804 Benefit granting means S6455 Setting means

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as gaming media, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a variable presentation in which multiple identification information is displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a lottery that is performed based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result has been a win, depending on the content of the variable presentation that is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, there is a demand for further improvement.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the discrimination pattern, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern showing a specific discrimination result is displayed after the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be granted by the bonus granting means, and has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period that includes at least a period during which the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a setting means for setting so that during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a first discrimination pattern is displayed as the discrimination pattern showing a first result, and during a second period, at least a second discrimination pattern different from the first discrimination pattern is displayed for showing a second result different from the first result.
A gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification pattern in a static manner at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in which the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in which the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result.
A gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in which the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern showing a discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the discrimination pattern, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern showing a specific discrimination result is displayed after the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a benefit type determination means for determining a benefit type to be granted by the benefit granting means, and has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed, and a setting means for setting so that during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a first discrimination pattern is displayed as the discrimination pattern showing a first result, and during a second period, at least a second discrimination pattern different from the first discrimination pattern is displayed to show a second result different from the first result.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1. That is, the dynamic display means can statically display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is at least a period after the first period has elapsed.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2. That is, the dynamic display means can display, as the first result, the first identification pattern for indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 3. That is, the dynamic display means can display, as the second result, the second identification symbol for indicating the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 4. That is, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification symbol is displayed in a display mode including at least information indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
<Code>
10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S209 Dynamic display period determination means
S306 Discrimination means
S307 Dynamic display means
S402: Benefit type determination means
S1804: Benefit giving means
S6455 Setting means

Claims (5)

A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination;
a display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means;
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed;
a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be awarded by the bonus awarding means,
A dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed;
In the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern for indicating a first result in a first period, and a second identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern for indicating a second result different from the first result in a second period.
A gaming machine comprising: a setting means for setting the game machine so that at least an identification symbol is displayed. The dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification symbol in a static manner at the end of the first period,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second period is at least a period after the first period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to claim 2, characterized in that the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. 4. The method according to claim 3, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification symbol for indicating the award type determined by the award type determination means as the second result.
The gaming machine described. the benefit type determination means determines one of a plurality of benefit types including at least a first benefit type and a second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type;
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the second identification symbol is displayed in a display manner including at least information indicating the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means.

Images